BOUGHT WITH THE INCOME 
 PROM THE 
 
 SAGE ENDOWMENT FUND 
 
 THE GIFT OF 
 
 itenrg M. Sage 
 
 1891 
 
 ApS-O-S'... 
 
 tK9 
 
 blh 
 
Cornell University Library 
 PA 857.B97 1893 
 
 3 1924 021 607 431 
 
The original of tiiis book is in 
 tine Cornell University Library. 
 
 There are no known copyright restrictions in 
 the United States on the use of the text. 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924021607431 
 
SYNTAX 
 
 MOODS AND TENSES 
 
 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 
 
 BY 
 
 EENEST DE WITT BTJETON 
 
 FnorBssoii in the Unitbrsitt or Chioaqo 
 
 SECOND EDITION, REVISED AND ENLARGED 
 
 CHICAGO, U.S.A. 
 
 UNIVEESITY PEESS OE CHICAGO 
 
 1893 
 
 1:P 
 
A. yt'jo^ 
 
 C0PTBI8HT, 1892, 
 By EENBST D. BUKTON. 
 
 Typography by J. S. Gushing & Co., Boston. 
 
TO 
 
 MY FATHER AND MOTHER 
 
 in grateful recognition 
 
 of the instruction of early years 
 
 and the helpful interest and encouragentient 
 
 in the work of later years 
 
 THIS BOOK 
 IS AFFECTIONATELY DEDICATED 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 The first edition of this work appeared as a pamphlet in 
 1888. In issuing this revised and enlarged edition, it seems 
 desirable to state somewhat more fully than was done in the 
 former preface the purpose which it is hoped the book will 
 serve. Classified according to its intent, it belongs among the 
 aids to the interpretation of the New Testament. It is de- 
 signed to assist English-speaking students in the task of 
 translating the Greek New Testament into English forms of 
 thought and expression. The work has not been undertaken 
 under the impression that grammar is an end in itself, or that 
 a knowledge of it is the sole qualification for successful in- 
 terpretation, but in the conviction that grammar is one of 
 the indispensable auxiliaries of interpretation. The book is 
 written, therefore, in the interest not of historical but of 
 exegetical grammar, not of philology as such, but of philology 
 as an auxiliary of interpretation. If it has any value for 
 historical grammar, this is incidental. Its main purpose is 
 to contribute to the interpretation of the New Testament by 
 the exposition of the functions of the verb in New Testament 
 Greek, so far as those functions are expressed by the dis- 
 tinctions of mood and tense. 
 
 The student of the New Testament who would interpret it 
 with accuracy and clearness must possess — along with other 
 qualifications for his work — a knowledge of the distinctions 
 of thought which are marked by the different moods and 
 tenses of the Greek verb. If he would acquire facility in the 
 work of interpretation, he must have an easy familiarity with 
 the leading uses of each mood and tense. It is not enough 
 
VI PEEPACB. 
 
 that lie have at hand for reference an encyclopedic treatise on 
 the subject. He must acquire, as a personal mental posses- 
 sion, a knowledge of the leading functions of the several 
 forms of the Greek verb, and of the forms which express 
 those functions in English. For this purpose he needs a book 
 which, availing itself of the assured results of comparative 
 and historical grammar, and applying to the interpretation of 
 the Greek verb the principles of grammar and logic, the laws 
 both of Greek and of English speech, shall enumerate the 
 various functions of each mood and tense, exhibit in some 
 degree their relative importance, and define each clearly. 
 The definitions should be scientifically accurate, but they 
 should at the same time be constructed with reference to the 
 point of view of the interpreter. Eor the English-speaking 
 student English usage must be constantly considered and 
 must frequently be defined and compared with Greek usage. 
 If such a book does not solve all the problems of New 
 Testament grammar, it should, by its treatment of those which 
 it discusses, illustrate to the student the right method of 
 investigation and so suggest the course which he must pursue 
 in solving for himself those problems which the book leaves 
 unsolved. My aim has been to provide a book fulfilling these 
 conditions. 
 
 The aim of the book has determined the method of its con- 
 struction. The usages which are of most frequent occurrence, 
 or otherwise of especial importance, have been emphasized by 
 being set in the largest type, with a title in bold-faced type. 
 The table of contents also has been so constructed as to make 
 prominent a conspectus of the leading uses. It may be well to 
 require of students who use the book as a text-book that they 
 be able to name and define these leading usages of each mood 
 and tense ; if they also commit to memory one of the Greek 
 examples under each of these prominent usages, they will do 
 .still better. 
 
 The matter printed in smaller type consists partly of fuller 
 exposition of the usages defined in the more prominently 
 
PfiEFACE. Vii 
 
 printed sections, partly of enumeration and definition of the 
 less frequent usages. The portions in smallest type are 
 chiefly discussions of the rarer or more diflS.cult usages. They 
 are an addition to the text-book proper, and are intended to 
 give the work, to a limited extent, the character of a book of 
 reference. The occasional discussions of English usage would 
 of course have no place in a work on Greek grammar pure 
 and simple, but to the end which this book is intended to 
 serve they are as really germane as. any discussions of the 
 force of a Greek tense. One often fails to apprehend accu- 
 rately a thought expressed in .Greek quite as much through 
 inexact knowledge of one's own language as through ignorance 
 of Greek usage. 
 
 As concerns the extent to which I have used the work of 
 others, little need be added to the testimony which the pages 
 of the book themselves bear. While gathering information 
 or suggestion from all accessible sources, I have aimed to 
 make no statement concerning New Testament usage which I 
 have not myself proved by personal examination of the pas- 
 sages. Eespecting classical usage and pre-classical origins, I 
 have relied upon those authorities which are recognized as 
 most trustworthy. 
 
 On a subsequent page is added a list of books and authors 
 referred to by abbreviations in the body of the book. To all 
 of the works there enumerated, as well as to those mentioned 
 by full title in the body of the book, I am under obligation for 
 assistance or suggestion. It is a pleasure also to acknowledge 
 the valuable assistance privately given by various friends. 
 Prominent among these, though not completing the list, are 
 Professor W. G. Hale of the University qi Chicago, Profes- 
 sors M. L. D'Ooge and W. W. Beman of the University of 
 Michigan, my brother. Professor Henry P. Burton of the 
 University of Eochester, and Professor George W. Gilmore 
 of Brooklyn, N.Y. But I am chiefly indebted to Professor 
 William Arnold Stevens of the Eochester Theologiqal Semi- 
 nary, under whose instructions I first became interested in the 
 
viii PREFACE. 
 
 subject of this book, and to whom my obligations in many- 
 directions are larger than can be acknowledged here. 
 
 In quoting examples from the New Testament I have fol- 
 lowed the Greek text of Westcott and Hort as that which 
 perhaps most nearly represents the original text, but have 
 intended to note any important variations of Tischendorf's 
 eighth edition or of Tregelles in a matter affecting the point 
 under discussion. The word text designates the preferred 
 reading of the editor referred to, as distinguished from the 
 marginal reading. In the English translation of the examples 
 I have preferred to follow the Revised Version of 1881 rather 
 than to construct entirely independent translations. Yet in 
 not a few passages it has seemed necessary to depart from 
 this standard either because the revisers followed a Greek text 
 different from that of Westcott and Hort, or because their 
 translation obscured the value of the passage as an illustration 
 of the grammatical principle under discussion, or occasionally 
 because I was unwilling even to seem to approve what I 
 regarded as unquestionably an error of translation. 
 
 While I have given all diligence to make the book correct 
 in statement and in type, I dare not hope that it has altogether 
 escaped either typographical errors or those of a more serious 
 character. I shall welcome most cordially criticisms, sugges- 
 tions, or corrections from any teacher or student into whose 
 hands the book may fall. 
 
 ERNEST D. BURTON. ' 
 
 Chicago, September, 1893. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 INTRODUCTORY. 
 
 SECTION PAGE 
 
 1. Form and Fvmction 1 
 
 2. The Interpreter's Relation to Grammar 2-5 
 
 3, 4. The four Moods and the seven Tenses 5 
 
 THE TENSES. 
 
 5. Two-fold Function of the Tenses 6 
 
 TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 6, 7. General Definition of the Tenses of the Indicative ... 6, 7 
 
 The Present Indicative. 
 
 8-10. Progressive Present 7, 8 
 
 11. Conative Present . 8 
 
 12. General or Gnomic Present 8 
 
 13. AoRiSTio Present 9 
 
 14. Historical Present 9 
 
 15. Present for the Futuee 9, 10 
 
 16. Present of tjkih, -irdpeiiu, etc 10 
 
 17. Present of past Action still in Progress .... 10 
 
 18. Similar use of the Aorist 11 
 
 19. Present in Indirect Discourse 11 
 
 20. Periphrastic Form of the Present 11 
 
 The Imperfect Indicative. 
 
 21, 22. Progressive Imperfect .... 12 
 
 28. Conative Imperfect 12 
 
 24. Imperfect of Repeated Action 12 
 
 25-27. Minor uses of Secondary Tenses 13 
 
 28,29. Imperfect translated by English Perfect and Pluperfect 13,14 
 
 30-32. Imperfect of Verbs denoting obligution, etc. . . . 14, 15 
 
 33. Imperfect of Verbs of wishing 15, 16 
 
 34. Periphrastic Form of the Imperfect 16 
 
 ix 
 
X CONTENTS. 
 
 The Aorist Indicative. 
 
 SECTION PAGE 
 
 35. Fundamental Idea of the Aorist 16, 17 
 
 36. Additional uses of the Aorist Indicative 17, 18 
 
 37. Functions of the Aorist distinguished 18, 19 
 
 38-40. Historical Aorist 19, 20 
 
 41. Inceptive Aoeist 20, 21 
 
 42. Resultative Aoeist 21 
 
 43. Gnomic Aokist . 21 
 
 44. Epistolaky Aokist 21 
 
 45. Dramatic Aoeist 22 
 
 46. Aorist for the (English) Perfect 22 
 
 47. Use of the Aorists iiriBavov, i^iarriv^ iyvav .... 22 
 
 48. Aorist for the (English) Pluperfect 22, 23 
 
 49. Aorist Indicative in Indirect Discourse .... 23 
 
 50. Aorist used proleptically 23 
 
 51. Minor uses of the Aorist 23 
 
 52-55. English Equivalents of the Greek Aorist Indioa^ 
 
 tive 23-30 
 
 56, 57. Distinction between the Aorist and the Imperfect . 30, 31 
 
 The Future Indicative. 
 
 58-66. Phedictive Future 31-35 
 
 59. Aoristio Future 31 
 
 60. Progressive Future 32 
 
 61, 62. Relation of Aoristic and Progressive Future ... 32, 33 
 
 63,64. Types of Aoristio Future . 33,34 
 
 65. Predictive Future as assertive or promissory . . 34, 35 
 
 66. Predictive Future with oi ij.i 35 
 
 67, 68. Imperative Future 35 
 
 69. Gnomic Future 35 
 
 70. Deliberative Futuke . . 35 
 
 71. Periphrastic Form of the Future 36 
 
 72, 73. MAXu with the Infinitive 36, 37 
 
 The Perfect Indicative. 
 
 74. Perfect op Completed Action 37 
 
 75,76. Perfect of Existing State 37,38 
 
 77. Intensive Perfect 38 
 
 78. Historical Perfect 38, 39 
 
 79. Gnomic Perfect 39 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 XI 
 
 SECTION PAOE 
 
 80. Aoristic Perfect 39 
 
 81. • Perfect Indicative in Indirect Discourse ... 39 
 
 82. Perfect Indicative translated by English Past . 39, 40 
 
 83. Perfect used proleptically 40 
 
 84. Periphrastic Form of the Perfect 40 
 
 85. Definition of the term " complete " 40,41 
 
 86-88. Aorist and Perfect compared 41-44 
 
 The Pluperfect. 
 
 89. Pluperfect of Completed Action 44 
 
 90. Pluperfect of Existing State 44,45 
 
 91. Periphrastic Form of the Pluperfect .... 45 
 
 92. Pluperfect and Aorist similarly translated . . 45 
 
 The Future Perfect. 
 
 93. Simple Future Perfect 45 
 
 94. Periphrastic Future Perfect 45 
 
 TENSES OF THE DEPENDENT MOODS. 
 
 95. General Principles 46 
 
 96, 97. Present of the Dependent Moods 46 
 
 98. Aorist op the Dependent Moods 46, 47 
 
 99, 100. Future of the Dependent Moods 47, 48 
 
 101-103. Perfect of the Dependent Moods 48,49 
 
 104-109. Tenses of the Infinitive after Prepositions . . . 49-51 
 110-114. Tenses of the Dependent Moods in Indirect 
 
 Discourse 51-53 
 
 TENSES OF THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 115-118. General Principles 53, 54 
 
 The Present Participle. 
 
 119. Present Participle or Simultaneous Action 
 
 120-122. Present Participle of Identical Action . . 
 
 123-126. General Present Participle 
 
 127. Present Participle for the Imperfect . . 
 
 128-131. Minor uses of the Present Participle . . . 
 
 54,55 
 55,56 
 56-58 
 58 
 58,59 
 
Xll CONTENTS. 
 
 The Aorist Participle. 
 
 SECTION '^ PAOB 
 
 132, 133. General Force of the Aorist Participle . . . 59-63 
 
 134-138. Aorist Participle of Antecedent Action . . 63, 64 
 
 139-141. Aorist Participle of Identical Action . . . . 64, 65 
 
 142-145. Aorist Participle of Subsequent Action .... 65-67 
 
 146. AoKisT Participle with the object of a Verb of 
 
 Perception 67 
 
 147. Aorist Participle with \ave6.vui 67 
 
 148, 149. Exceptional uses of the Aorist Participle . . . . 67, 68 
 
 150,151. Equivalence of the Aorist Participle . . . 68-70 
 
 The Future Participle. 
 
 152. General Force op the Future Participle . . . 70, 71 
 
 153. M^XXwi' with the Infinitive, denoting inten- 
 
 tion, etc 71 
 
 The Perfect Participle. 
 
 154, 155. General Force of the Perfect Participle . . 71 72 
 
 156. Perfect Participle used as a Pluperfect 72 
 
 THE MOODS. 
 
 MOODS IN PRINCIPAL CLAUSES. 
 
 The Indicative Mood. 
 
 157. General Force of the Indicative ... . . 73 
 
 158, 159. Indicative in Qualified Assertions ... . 73, 74 
 
 The Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 160, 161. Hortatory Subjunctive . 74 75 
 
 162-167. Prohibitory Subjunctive 75 76 
 
 168-171. Deliberative Subjunctive 76-78 
 
 172, 173. Subjunctive in Negative Assertions 78 
 
 The Optative Mood. 
 
 174. Infrequenoy of the Optative in later Greek . . 79 
 
 175-177. Optative of Wishing 79 
 
 178, 179. Potential Optative 79 80 
 
CONTENTS. xiii 
 
 SECTION The Imperative Mood. 
 
 180. ' Impekative in Commands and Exhortations ... 80 
 
 181. Imperative in Entreaties and Petitions .... 80 
 182, 183. Imperative to express Consent or an Hypothesis 80, 81 
 
 184. Tenses of the Imperative in Commands and Pro- 
 hibitions .... 81 
 
 FINITE MOODS IN SUBORDINATE CLAUSES. 
 
 185-187. Subordinate Clauses Classified 81-83 
 
 Moods in Clauses Introduced by Final Particles. 
 
 188,189. Classification and General Usage . . -83,84 
 
 190-196. New Testament Use of Final Particles . 84,85 
 
 197-199. Pure Final Clauses 85,86 
 
 200-204. Object Clauses after Verbs op Exhorting, etc. . 87, 88 
 205-210. Object Clauses after Verbs of Striving, etc. . . 88-90 
 211-214. Subject, Predicate, and Appositive Clauses intro- 
 duced BY IVa 90, 91 
 
 215-217. Complementary and Epexegetic Clauses intro- 
 duced BY tva 91, 92 
 
 218-223. Clauses op Conceived Result introduced by Xva . 92-95 
 
 224-227. Object Clauses after Verbs of Fear and Danger 95, 96 
 
 Moods in Clauses of Cause. 
 
 228. Definition ... 97 
 
 229, 230. Moods and Tenses in Causal Clauses . ... 97 
 
 231,232. Independent Causal Sentences . 98 
 
 233. Other Methods of expressing Cause ... . 98 
 
 Moods in Clauses of Result. 
 
 234. Definition 99 
 
 235. Distinction between Indicative and Infinitive in Con- 
 
 secutive Clauses 99 
 
 236. Indicative with (iVre 99, 100 
 
 237. Independent Consecutive Sentences 100 
 
 Moods in Conditional Sentences. 
 
 238-241. Definition and Classification 100, 101 
 
 242-247. Simple Present or Past Particular Supposition 102, 103 
 
XIV CONTENTS. 
 
 section pagb 
 
 248, 249. Supposition contrary to Fact 103, 104 
 
 250. Future Supposition with more Probability . ' 104 
 
 251-256. Variant Forms 104, 105 
 
 257. Particular and General Suppositions referring 
 
 to the Future 106 
 
 258. Present and Future Suppositions in Indirect 
 
 Discourse 106 
 
 259. Future Supposition with less Probability . . 106, 107 
 
 260, 261. Present General Supposition 107, 108 
 
 262,263. Third and Fifth Classes compared .... 108 
 
 264. First and Fifth Classes compared .... 109 
 
 265. [Past General Supposition] 109 
 
 266-277. Peculiarities of Conditional Sentences . . 109-112 
 
 Moods in Concessive Sentences. 
 
 278. Definition 112,113 
 
 279-282. El KaL and Kal el in Concessive Clauses . . 113, 114 
 
 283. General Usage of Moods and Tenses in Con- 
 
 cessive Clauses 114 
 
 284. Concessive Clauses op the First Class . . . 114 
 
 285. Concessive Clauses referring to the Future . 114, 115 
 
 286. Concessive Clauses of the Fourth Class . . . 115 
 
 287. Concessive Clauses of the Fifth Class . . . 115 
 
 288. Concessive Particles in English .... 115, 116 
 
 Moods in Relative Clauses. 
 
 289-291. Definition and Classification 116, 117 
 
 I. Definite Relative Clauses. 
 
 292. Definition 117^ 118 
 
 293. Moods in Definite Relative Clauses 118 
 
 294. Definite Relative Clauses implying cause, result, 
 
 or concession 118 
 
 295. Restrictive and Explanatory Relative Clauses . . 119 
 
 II. Conditional Relative Sentences. 
 
 296-300. Definition and Classification 119-121 
 
 301. Simple Present or Past Particular Supposition 121 
 
 302. [Supposition contrary to Fact] .... 121 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 XV 
 
 SECTION PAOB 
 
 303-305. FuinEE Supposition with more Probabilitt . . 121, 122 
 
 306-309. Variant Forms 122, 123 
 
 310. Particular and General Suppositions referring 
 
 to the future 123 
 
 311. [Future Supposition with less Probability] . 123 
 312-314. Present General Supposition ... ... 123, 124 
 
 315. Past General Supposition 124,125 
 
 316. Clauses conditional in form, but definite in sense 125 
 
 III. Relative Clauses Expressing Purpose. 
 
 317. Relative Clauses of Pure Purpose 125 
 
 318-320. Complementary Relative Clauses . ... 125, 126 
 
 IV. Relative Clauses introduced by words meaning 
 Until, While, and Before. 
 
 321. Definition of ?ws 126, 127 
 
 322, 323. Clauses introduced bt Sus and referring to the 
 
 FUTURE 127 
 
 324-326. Clauses introduced by ?ws and referring to 
 
 WHAT WAS IN past TIME A FUTURE CONTINGENCY 127, 128 
 
 327. Clauses introduced by las (until), and refer- 
 ring TO a past fact 128 
 
 328,329. Clauses introduced by Im (while), and refer- 
 ring to a contemporaneous event 128 
 
 330. "Ems followed by oiJ or «tou 128, 129 
 
 331,332. Clauses introduced by &xPh *XP« o"> 6tc. . . . 129 
 
 333. Clauses introduced by rplv 129 
 
 Moods in Indirect Discourse. 
 
 334-340. Definition and Classification 130-132 
 
 341, 342. Classical Usage in Indirect Discourse 132 
 
 343-346. New Testament Usage in Indirect Discourse. . . 132-134 
 
 347. Single dependent Clauses in Indirect Discourse 134 
 
 348. Imperfect for Present, and Pluperfect for Per- 
 
 fect in Indirect Discourse 134, 135 
 
 349,350. Relative Pronouns in Indirect Discourse . . 135 
 
 351-356. Indirect Discourse in English and in Greek 135-142 
 
 Construction after Kal iyevero. 
 
 357-360. Three Forms of the Idiom .... 
 
 142, 143 
 
XVI CONTENTS. 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 SECTION PAGE 
 
 361-363. Origin, and Classification of Uses 143-145 
 
 The Infinitive -without the Article. 
 
 364, 365. Impekative Infinitive . . 146 
 
 366, 367. Infinitive op Pukpose 146 
 
 368. Infinitive as an Indirect Object 147 
 
 369-371. Infinitive op Result 147-150 
 
 372-374. Exceptional usages 150 
 
 375. Infinitive bepining Content op a previous Verb 
 
 or Noun 150, 151 
 
 376, 377. Infinitive limiting Adjectives and Adverbs . . 151 
 
 378, 379. Inpinitive limiting Nouns 151, 152 
 
 380-382. Infinitive after irpiv or wplv ij . 152 
 
 388. Infinitive used absolutely 153 
 
 384, 385. Infinitive as Subject 153 
 
 386. Infinitive as Appositive 158 
 
 387-389. Infinitive as Object 153, 154 
 
 390. Infinitive in Indirect Discourse 154, 155 
 
 891. Infinitive after verbs of hoping, promising, swear- 
 ing, commanding, etc 155 
 
 The Infinitive with the Article. 
 
 392. General Use of Infinitive with the Article . 155, 156 
 
 393. Infinitive with to as Subject 156 
 
 394. Infinitive with to as Object .... . . 156 
 
 395. Infinitive with the Article, in Apposition . . 156, 157 
 
 396. Infinitive with tQ .... 157 
 
 397. Infinitive op Purpose with toO 157 
 
 398. Infinitive of Result with toO 157, 158 
 
 399. Infinitive with tou after Adjectives .... 158 
 
 400. Infinitive with toJ after Nouns 158 
 
 401. Infinitive with toC after Verbs that take the 
 
 Genitive 158, 159 
 
 402,408. Various constructions after Verbs of hindering 159 
 404, 405. Infinitive with toO as Subject or Object . . . 159, 160 
 406-417. Infinitive with the Article governed by Prepo- 
 sitions 160-163 
 
CONTENTS. XVll 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 SECTION PAGE 
 
 418. General Nature of the Participle 163 
 
 419. Classification respecting logical force 163, 164 
 
 The Adjective Participle. 
 
 420, 421. Definition and Classification 164 
 
 422. Restrictive ATTRiBniivE Paeticiple 164, 165 
 
 423. Restrictive Attributive Participle with Subject 
 
 omitted 165 
 
 424. Noun without the article limited by a Participle 
 
 with the article 165 
 
 426. Neuter Participle with the article equivalent to an 
 
 abstract Noun 166 
 
 426. Explanatory Attkibctive Participle .... 166 
 
 427. Order of words with Attributive Participle 
 
 limiting a Noun with the article 166, 167 
 
 428. Attributive Participle conveying a subsidiary idea 
 
 of cause, purpose, etc 167 
 
 429, 430. Predicative Adjective Participle 167 
 
 431. Predicative Participle used to form periphrastic 
 
 tenses 168 
 
 432,483. Participles in Predicate in various construc- 
 tions 168, 169 
 
 The Adverbial Participle. 
 
 434. Definition 169 
 
 435. Adverbial Participle op Time 169 
 
 436. Adverbial Participle of Condition . ... 169 
 437, 438. Adverbial Participle of Concession .... 170 
 
 439. Adverbial Participle or Cause 170 
 
 440,441. Participle of Cause with w's 170,171 
 
 442. Adverbial Participle of Purpose 171 
 
 443. Adverbial Participle of Means 171 
 
 444. Adverbial Participle op Manner 171 
 
 445,446. 'fis with the Participle denoting Manner . ... 172 
 
 447. Participle of Manner or Means denoting same 
 
 action as that of the principal Verb .... 172,173 
 
 448. Intensive Participle — Hebraistic ...... 173 
 
XVlll 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 section page 
 449,450. Adverbial Paeticiple op Attendant Cikcum- 
 
 STANCE 173, 174 
 
 451. More than one adverbial relation implied by 
 
 the same Participle 174 
 
 452-454. Genitive Absolute 174, 175 
 
 455. Position of Adverbial Participle 175 
 
 The Substantive Participle. 
 
 456. Definition 175 
 
 457. Substantive Paeticiple as Subject 175 
 
 458, 459. Substantive Participle as Object 176 
 
 460. Substantive Participle in Indirect Discourse . . 176 
 
 461. Substantive Participle as a limiting Genitive 176 
 
 462. Position of Substantive Participle 177 
 
 463. Substantive Participle distinguished from Ad- 
 
 jective Participle used substantively . . . 177 
 
 THE USE OP NEGATIVES WITH VERBS. 
 
 464. General Usage 178 
 
 NEGATIVES WITH THE INDICATIVE. 
 
 465. Negatives in Independent declaratory Sentences . . 178 
 
 466. Negatives with a Prohibitory Future 179 
 
 467. Negatives in Questions 179 
 
 468. Mil oi in Rhetorical Questions 179 
 
 469,470. Negatives in Conditional and Conditional Relative 
 
 Clauses 179,180 
 
 471. Ei /ii} in the sense of except .... .... 180 
 
 472. Oi) after /xi} as a conjunction 181 
 
 473. Negatives in Indirect Discourse 181 
 
 474. Negatives in Causal Clauses and in simple Relative 
 
 Clauses 181 
 
 NEGATIVES WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE, OPTATIVE, 
 AND IMPERATIVE. 
 
 475. Negatives with the Subjunctive 181, 182 
 
 476, 477. Negatives with the Optative 182 
 
 478, 479. Negatives with the Imperative ........ 182, 183 
 
CONTENTS, XIX 
 
 NEGATIVES WITH THE INFINITIVE AND PAETICIPLE. 
 
 SECTION PAGE 
 
 480. General Usage of Negatives with tlie Infinitive . . 183 
 
 481. Negatives witli a limitation of an Infinitive or of its 
 
 subject 183,184 
 
 482. Compound of oi with an Infinitive dependent on a 
 
 principal verb limited by oi> 184 
 
 483. Redundant ynii with Infinitive after verbs of hinder- 
 
 ing, denying, etc 184 
 
 484. Negative with Infinitive dependent on a verb itself 
 
 negatived by oi> 184 
 
 485. General Usage of Negatives with the Participle . . 184, 185 
 
 SUCCESSIVE AND DOUBLE NEGATIVES. 
 
 486. Two simple .Negatives, or a compound Negative fol- 
 lowed by a simple Negative 185 
 
 487, 488. Double Negative ofi /xi} 185, 186 
 
 489. Negative followed by similar compound Negative or 
 
 double Negative 186 
 
LIST OP WORKS AND AUTHORS 
 
 EEFEEKED TO BY ABBEEVIATION. 
 
 A.J.P. .... American Journal of Philology. 
 
 Alf. Henry Alford, The Greek New Testament. 4 vols. Lon- 
 don. 
 
 A.V Authorized Version of the New Testament. 
 
 B Alexander Buttmann, A Grammar of the New Testament 
 
 Greek. Translated by J. H. Thayer. Andover, 1873. 
 
 Bib. Sac. . . . Bibliotheca Sacra. 
 
 Br Karl Brugmann, Griechische Grammatik, in Iwan Miil- 
 
 ler's Handhuch der klassischen Altertumswissenschaft, 
 vol. II. Second Edition. Miinchen, 1890. 
 
 CI. Bev Classical Review. 
 
 Del B. Delbruak, Syntaktische Forsohungen. Halle, 1871- 
 
 1888. 
 
 Ev. Pet Apocryphal Gospel of Peter. (Verses according to the 
 
 edition of Harnack, Leipzig, 1893.) 
 
 ff W. W. Goodiein, A Greek Grammar. Revised Edition. 
 
 Boston, 1892. ' 
 
 Gild Basil L. Gildersleeve, various papers in A.J.P. and 
 
 T.A.P.A. 
 
 GMT W. W. Goodwin, Syntax of the Moods and Tenses of the 
 
 Greek Verb. Revised and enlarged. Boston, 1889. 
 
 Gr Thomas Sheldon Green, A Treatise on the Grammar of 
 
 the New Testament. New Edition. London, 1862. 
 
 JIA James Hadley, A Greek Grammar for Schools and Col- 
 leges. Revised by E. D. Allen. New York, 1884. 
 
 Hr W. B. Harper, Elements of Hebrew Syntax. New York, 
 
 1888. 
 
 J. W. E. Jelf, A Grammar of the Greek Language. Third 
 
 Edition. 2 vols. Oxford and London, 1861. 
 
 J.B.L Journal of the Society of Biblical Literature and Exegesis. 
 
 Ji. Raphael Kiihner, Grammatik der Griechischen Sprache. 
 
 Hanover, 1869-1872. 
 
 Xa S. Kautzsch, Grammatik des Biblisoh-Aramaisehen. 
 
 Leipzig, 1884. 
 
xxii LIST OP "WORKS AND AXTTHORS. 
 
 L. and S. . . . Liddell and Scott, Greek-English Lexicon, etc. Seventh 
 Edition. New York, 1882. 
 
 Ltft J. B. Lightfoot, Commentaries on Galatians, on Philip- 
 
 pians, and on Colossians and Philemon. 
 
 Mart. Polyc. . Martyrium Polycarpi. (See any edition of the Apostolic 
 Fathers.) 
 
 Meist K. Meisterhans, Grammatik der Attischen Inschriften. 
 
 Berlin, 1885. 
 
 Mey H. A. W. Meyer, Kommentar iiber das Neue Testament. 
 
 Gottlngen, 1867-1876. English Translation, Edinburgh, 
 1873-1880. 
 
 Ps. Sol The Psalms of Solomon. (Eecent edition by Ryle and 
 
 James, Cambridge, 1891.) 
 
 R.V The New Testament in the Revised Version of 1881. 
 
 ,S'. W. S. Simcox, The Language of the New Testainent. 
 
 London and New York, 1889. 
 
 Th J. M. Thayer, A Greek-English Lexicon of the New 
 
 Testament: Being Grimm's Wilke's Clavis Novi Testa- 
 menti, translated, revised, and enlarged. New York, 
 1886.' 
 
 Tisch Constantinus Tischendorf, Novum Testamentum Graece. 
 
 Eighth Edition. 2 vols. Leipzig, 1869-72. 
 
 Treg S. F. Tregelles, The Greek New Testament. London, 
 
 1857-79. 
 
 T.A.P.A. . . . Transactions of the American Philological Association. 
 
 W. G. B. Winer. See WM. and WT. 
 
 WS. Westcott and Sort, The New Testament in the Original 
 
 Greek, the text revised by B. F. Westcott and F. J. A. 
 Hort. 2 vols. Cambridge and New York, 1881. 
 WM. G. B. Winer, A Treatise on the Grammar of New Testa- 
 ment Greek. Translated by W. F. Moulton. Third 
 Edition. Edinburgh, 1882. 
 WT. . . . . . G. B. Winer, A Grammar of the Idiom of the New Tes- 
 tament. Seventh Edition, enlarged and improved by 
 Gottlieb Liinemann. Revised and authorized Trans- 
 lation by J. H. Thayer. Andover, 1869. 
 
 For classical and Scripture writers the ordinary abbreviations are used. 
 ■References to the Old Testament are to the Septuagint Version, unless 
 otherwise indicated. Citations from the Septuagint, including the Apocry- 
 pha, are based on the edition of Tischendorf, 2 vols., Leipzig, 1887. The 
 edition of Swete, Cambridge, 1887-, is at the time of going to press in- 
 complete, but may be used for the passages contained in vols. 1 and 2. 
 
STN"TAX 
 
 Moods and Tenses in New Testament Gkeek. 
 
 INTRODUCTORY. 
 
 1. FoKM AND Function. The following pages deal with 
 the various functions of the various verb-forms of the Greek 
 of the New Testament, so far as respects their mood and 
 tense. It is important that the nature of the relation between 
 form and function be clearly held in mind. It is by no means 
 the case that each form has but one function, and that each 
 function can be discharged by but one form. Forms of various 
 origin may be associated together under one ng,me and perform 
 the same function, or group of functions. Compare, e.g., the 
 Aorist Active Infinitives, kva-ai and d.iruv : these forms are of 
 quite diverse origin; in function they have become entirely 
 assimilated. The same is true of the Aorist Active Indicatives, 
 cSeila and ecrTjji'. Forms also which still have different names, 
 and usually perform different functions, may have certain 
 functions in common. Compare the Aorist Subjunctive and 
 the Future Indicative in clauses of purpose (197, 198). On 
 the other hand, and to an even greater extent, we find that a 
 given form, or a given group of forms bearing a common name, 
 performs various distinct functions. Observe, e.g., the various 
 functions of the Aorist Indicative (38-48). 
 
 1 
 
2 ■ INTKODTJCTOBY. 
 
 The name of a given form, or group of forms, is usually 
 derived from some prominent function of the form or group. 
 Thus the term Aorist reflects the fact that the forms thus 
 designated most frequently represent an action indefinitely 
 ■without reference to its progress. The name Present siiggests 
 that the forms thus designated denote present time, which is 
 true, however, of the smaller part only of those that bear the 
 name, and of none of them invariably. The name Optative 
 again reminds us that one function of the forms so named is 
 to express a wish. While, therefore, the names of the forms 
 were originally intended to designate their respective func- 
 tions, they cannot now be regarded as descriptive of the actual 
 functions, but must be taken as conventional, and to a con- 
 siderable extent arbitrary, names of the forms. The functions 
 must be learned, not from the names, but from observation of 
 the actual usage. 
 
 2. The Intbepeetee's Eelation to Geammae. Both the 
 grammarian as such and the interpreter deal with grammar, but 
 from very different points of view. The distinction between 
 these points of view should be clearly recognized by the in- 
 terpreter. It may be conveniently represented by the terms 
 historical grammar and exegetical grammar. Historical gram- 
 mar deals with the development of both form and function 
 through the various periods of the history of the language, 
 and does this in purely objective fashion. Exegetical grammar, 
 on the other hand, takes the forms as it finds them, and defines 
 the functions which at a given period each form discharged, 
 and does this from the point of view of the interpreter, for 
 the purpose of enabling him to reproduce the thought con- 
 veyed by the form. To investigate the process by which the 
 several forms were built up, to determine the earliest function 
 of each such form, to show how out of this earliest function 
 
INTEODXJCTOEY. 3 
 
 others were developed, and how forms of different origin, and 
 presumably at first of different function, became associated, 
 discharging the same function and eventually coming to bear 
 the same name — all this belongs to historical grammar. To 
 reproduce in the mind of the interpreter, and to express as 
 nearly as may be in his own tongiie, the exact thought 
 which a given form was in the period in question capable of 
 expressing — this is the task of exegetical grammar. Histori- 
 cal grammar views its problem wholly from the point of view 
 of the language under investigation, without reference to the 
 language of the grammarian. Exegetical grammar is neces- 
 sarily concerned both with the language under investigation 
 and with that in which the interpreter thinks and speaks, 
 since its problem is to aid in reproducing in the latter tongue 
 thought expressed in the former. 
 
 The results of historical grammar are of the greatest interest 
 and value to exegetical grammar. Our interpretation of the 
 phenomena of language in its later periods can hardly fail to 
 be affected by a knowledge of the earlier history. Strictly 
 speaking, however, it is with the results only of the processes 
 of historical grammar that the interpreter is concerned. If 
 the paradigm has been rightly constructed, so that forms of 
 diverse origin perhaps, but completely assimilated in function, 
 bear a common name, exegetical grammar is concerned only to 
 know what are the functions which each group of forms bear- 
 ing a common name is capable of discharging. Thus, the 
 diversity of origin of the two Aorists, IXvcra and tXnrov, does 
 not immediately concern the interpreter, if it is an assured 
 result of historical grammar that these two forms are com- 
 pletely assimilated in function. Nor does it concern him that 
 the at at the end of the Infinitives, SeZ^ai and Uvai, is the mark 
 of the Dative case, and that the earliest use of such infinitives 
 was as a verbal noun in the Dative case, except as this fact 
 
4 INTEODUCTOEY. 
 
 of historical grammar aids him in the interpretation of the 
 phenomena of that period of the language with which he is 
 dealing. The one question of exegetical grammar to which 
 all other questions are subsidiary is, What function did this 
 form, or group of forms, discharge at the period with which 
 we are dealing ? What, e.g., in the New Testament, are the 
 functions of the Present Indicative ? What are the uses of 
 the Aorist Subjunctive ? 
 
 For practical convenience forms are grouped together, and 
 the significance of each of the distinctions made by inflection 
 discussed by itself. The present work confines itself to the 
 discussion of mood and tense, and discusses these as far as 
 possible separately. Its question therefore is. What in the 
 New Testament are the functions of each tense and of each 
 mood ? These various functions must be defined first of all 
 from the point of view of the Greek language itself. Since, 
 however, the interpreter whom in the present instance it is 
 sought to serve thinks in English, and seeks to express in 
 English the thought of the Greek, reference must be had 
 also to the functions of the English forms as related to 
 those of the Greek forms. Since, moreover, distinctions of 
 function in the two languages do not always correspond, 
 that is, since what in Greek is one function of a given form 
 may be in English subdivided into several functions per- 
 formed by several forms, it becomes necessary not only to 
 enumerate and define the functions of a given form purely 
 from the point of view of Greek, but to subdivide the one 
 Greek function into those several functions which in English 
 are recognized and marked by the employment of different 
 forms. An enumeration of the uses of a given Greek tense 
 made for the use of an English interpreter may therefore 
 properly include certain titles which would not occur in a 
 list made for one to whom Greek was the language of 
 
INTRODUCTORY. 5 
 
 ordinary speech and thought. The Aorist for the English 
 Perfect, and the Aorist for the English Pluperfect (46, 48) 
 furnish a pertinent illustration. The interests of the English 
 interpreter require that they be clearly recognized. Fidelity 
 to Greek usage requires that they be recognized as, strictly 
 speaking, true Historical Aorists. 
 
 3. The Greek verb has four moods, — the Indicative, the 
 Subjunctive, the Optative, and the Imperative. With these 
 are associated in the study of Syntax the Infinitive, which is, 
 strictly speaking, a verbal noun, and the Participle, which is 
 a verbal adjective. 
 
 The Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative, and Infinitive are 
 often called dependent moods. 
 
 Rem. The term dependent is not strictly applicable to these moods, 
 and least of all to the Imperative, which almost always stands as a prin- 
 cipal verb. It has, however, becomes an established term, and is retained 
 as a matter of convenience. 
 
 4. There are seven tenses in the Greek, — the Present, 
 Imperfect, Aorist, Future, Perfect, Pluperfect, and Euture 
 Perfect. 
 
 Those tenses which denote present or future time are called 
 Primary tenses. Those tenses which denote past time are 
 called Secondary tenses. Since the time denoted by a tense 
 varies with the particular use of the tense, no fixed line of 
 division can be drawn between the two classes of tenses. In 
 the Indicative the Present and Perfect are usually, and the 
 Euture and Euture Perfect are always, Primary tenses ; the 
 Imperfect, Aorist, and Pluperfect are usually Secondary 
 tenses. 
 
THE TENSES. 
 
 5. The action denoted by a verb may be defined by the tense 
 of the verb 
 
 (a) As respects its progress. Thus it may be represented 
 as in progress, or as completed, or indefinitely, i.e. as a simple 
 event without reference to progress or completion. 
 
 (6) As respects its time, as past, present, ov future. 
 
 The tenses of the Indicative mood in general define the 
 action of the verb in both these respects. 
 
 The tenses of the other moods in general define the action 
 of the verb only as respects its progress. HA. 821 ; O. 1249. 
 
 Re3i. The chief function of a Greek tense is thus not to denote time, 
 hut progress. This latter function belongs to the tense-forms of all the 
 moods, the former to those of the Indicative only. 
 
 TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 6. The significance of the tenses of the Indicative mood 
 may be stated in general as follows : — 
 
 As respects progress : The Present and Imperfect denote 
 action in progress ; the Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect 
 denote completed action; the Aorist represents the action 
 indefinitely as an event or single fact ; the Future is used 
 either of action in progress like the Present, or indefinitely 
 like the Aorist. 
 
 As respects time : The Present and Perfect denote present 
 time : the Imperfect, Aorist, and Pluperfect denote past time ; 
 the Future and Future Perfect denote future time. 
 
 6 
 
THE PEBSENT INDICATIVE. 7 
 
 7. The tenses of the Indicative in general denote time rela- 
 tive to that of speaking. Most exceptions to this rule are 
 apparent or rhetorical rather than real and grammatical. In 
 indirect discourse the point of view, as respects time, of the 
 original speaking or thinking is retained. Cf. 351. Of two 
 verbs of past time, one may refer to an action antecedent to 
 the other, but this fact of antecedence is implied in the con- 
 text, not expressed in the tense. Cf . 29 and 48. By prolepsis 
 also a verb of past time may refer to or include events to take 
 place after the time of speaking, but before a point of future 
 time spoken of in the context. Cf. 50. In conditional sen- 
 tences of the second form, the tenses are properly timeless. 
 Cf. 248. See Br. 154 (p. 180). 
 
 THE PEESENT INDICATIVE. 
 
 8. The Progressive Present. The Present Indicative 
 is used of action in progress in present time. JIA. 824; 
 a. 1250, 1. 
 
 Matt. 25:8; at Xa/iTraSes ■^fJ.uiv a-piwuvrai, our lamps are going out. 
 Gal. 1:6; Oav/jA^m on ovtws ra^ccos /lETaTt^ecr^e aTro tov Ka\e<Tav- 
 
 Tos v/tiSs, I marvel that ye are so quickly removing from him that called 
 
 you. 
 
 9. The most constant characteristic of the Present IndicBr 
 tive is that it denotes action in progress. It probably had 
 originally no reference to present time (see Br. 156). But 
 since, in the historical periods of the language, action in 
 progress in past time is expressed by the Imperfect, and the 
 Future is used both as a progressive and as an aoristic tense 
 for future time, it results that the Present Indicative is chiefly 
 used to express action in progress in present time. Hence 
 in deciding upon the significance of any given instance of the 
 Present Indicative in the New Testament as well as in classi- 
 
8 THE TENSES. 
 
 cal Greek, the interpreter may consider that there is, at least 
 in the majority of words, a certain presumption in favor of 
 the Progressive Present rather than any of the other uses 
 mentioned below. 
 
 10. The Progressive Present in Greek is not always best 
 translated by what is commonly called in English the " Pro- 
 gressive Form." Some English verbs themselves suggest 
 action in progress, and do not, except when there is strong 
 emphasis on the progressive idea, use the progressive form. 
 Thus the verb 6av/id^o), in Gal. 1 : 6, is a Progressive Present, 
 but is best translated I marvel, the verb itself sufficiently sug- 
 gesting the idea of action in progress. 
 
 11. The Conative Present. The Present Indicative is 
 occasionally used of action attempted, but not accomplished. 
 HA. 825; O. 1265. This use is, however, not to be re- 
 garded as a distinct function of the tense. The Conative 
 Present is merely a species of the Progressive Present. A 
 verb which of itself suggests effort, when used in a tense 
 which implies action in progress, and hence incomplete, natu- 
 rally suggests the idea of attempt. All the verb-forms of the 
 Present system are equally, with the Present, capable of 
 expressing attempted action, since they all denote action in 
 progress. John 10 : 32, Xi^a^eTc, and Gal. 5 : 4, biKaiovcrdt, illus- 
 trate this usage in the Present. Similar is the use of the 
 Present in Kom. 2 : 4, diyct, leadeth, i.e. such is its tendency. 
 
 For examples of the Imperfect see 23. Eespecting the 
 resultative force of such verbs in the Aorist see 42. 
 
 12. The Grcneral or Gnomic Present. The Present 
 Indicative is used to express customary actions and general 
 truths. 5"A824, a; 6?. 1253, 1291. 
 
 Matt. 7 : 17 ; ttSv StvSpov ayadbv Kapvovi xaAoiis Trout, every good tree 
 bringeth forth good fruit. 
 
THE PRESENT INDICATIVE. 9 
 
 2 Cor. 9:7; fXapov yap Sotijv dyoTr^ o ^eds, for God loveth a cheerful 
 giver. 
 
 13. The Aoristic Present. The Present Indicative is 
 sometimes used of an action or event coincident in time 
 with the act of speaking, and conceived of as a simple 
 event. Most frequently the action denoted by the verb 
 is identical with the act of speaking itself, or takes place 
 in that act. 
 
 Acts 16 : 18 ; irapayyekKto (Toi Iv ovofixvri 'IijtroJ) Xpttrrot), / command 
 thee in the name of Jesus Christ. See also Mark 2 : 5, d<^tevTat; Acts 
 9 : 34, laToi ; 26:1, enTpeTrcrax ; Gal. 1:11, yvmpi^w, and the numer- 
 ous instances of Ae'yo) in the gospels. 
 
 Rem. This usage is a distinct departure from the prevailing use of 
 the Present tense to denote action in progress (cf. 9). There being in the 
 Indicative no tense which represents an event as a simple fact vfithout at 
 the same time assigning it either to the past or the future, the Present is 
 used for those instances (rare as compared with the cases of the Pro- 
 gressive Present), in which an action of present time is conceived of 
 without reference to its progress. 
 
 14. The Historical Present. The Present Indicative 
 is used to describe vividly a past event in the presence of 
 which the speaker conceives himself to be. SA. 828; 
 a. 1252. 
 
 Mark 11 : 27 ; Kdt epxovraL ttoXiv eis lepoa-oXv/w., and they come again 
 to Jerusalem. See also Luke 8 : 49, epx^rai; John 18 : 28, dyovcrtv. 
 This use is very frequent in the gospels. 
 
 15. The Present for the Future. In a similar way 
 the Present Indicative may be used to describe vividly a 
 future event. 
 
 Mark 9 : 31 ; o uios rov av9pu)Trov irapaSiSoTat ei's x'lpas avOpiawmv, the 
 Son of man is delivered into the hands of men. See also Matt. 26 : 18, 
 ■jToiS ; 27 : 63, kycipopai ; Luke 3 : 9, iKKmriToi. 
 
10 THE TENSES. 
 
 Rem. The term " Present for Future" is sometimes objected to, but 
 ■without good reason. The arguments of Buttmann, pp. 203 f ., and Winer, 
 WT. pp. 265 ff. ; WM. pp. 331 ff., are valid only against the theory of an 
 arbitrary interchange of tenses. It is indeed not to be supposed that 
 Greek writers confused the Present and the Future tenses, or used them 
 indiscriminately. But that the. form which customarily denoted an act 
 in progress at the time of speaking was sometimes, for the sake of vivid- 
 ness, used with reference to a fact still in the future, is recognized by all 
 grammarians. See, e.g., J. 397 ; K. 382, 5 ; G.MT. 32. The whole force 
 of the idiom is derived from the unusualness of the tense employed. 
 
 16. The Present form -^kw means I have come (John 2:4; 
 4:47; etc.). Similarly Trapei/tu (7am jsresenJ) sometimes means 
 I have arrived (Acts 17:6; etc.). This, however, is not a 
 Present for the Perfect of the same verb, but a Present 
 equivalent to the Perfect of another verb. The use of aKovu) 
 meaning / am informed (cf. similar use of English heai; see, 
 learn) is more nearly a proper Present for Perfect (1 Cor. 
 11:18; 2 Thess. 3:11). Such use of the Present belongs to 
 a very few verbs. HA. 827 ; G. 1256. 
 
 17. The Present of past Action still in Progress. 
 
 The Present Indicative, accompanied by an adverbial 
 expression denoting duration and referring to past time, 
 is sometimes used in Greek, as in German, to describe 
 an action which, beginning in past time, is still in prog- 
 ress at the time of speaking. English idiom requires 
 the use of the Perfect in such cases. HA. 826 ; Gr. 1258. 
 
 Acts 15 : 21 ; Mojucr^s yap Ik •yevefiv apx'^i-'^v Kara. iroXiv tous Kijpva- 
 o-ovTas avTov exa, for Moses from generations of old has had in every 
 city them thai preached him. See also Luke 13 : 7, ipxpfxai ; 15 : 29, 
 SouXeuw; John 5:6, ex"! 2 Tim. 3:15, oiSas. This Present is 
 almost always incorrectly rendered in R. V. 
 
 Rem. Cf. Br. 156, "Das Prasens in Verbindung mit Tripos, TrdXai 
 ■a-ori wurde seit Homer gebraucht, um eine Handlung auszudriioken die 
 sich durch die Vergangenheit bis zur Zeit des Sprechens hinzieht." In 
 the New Testament examples definite expressions of past time occur in 
 place of the adverbs wipo^, etc. 
 
THE PRESENT INDICATIVE. 11 
 
 18. The Aorist Indicative, limited by an expression mean- 
 ing up to this time, may also be used of acts beginning in past 
 time and continuing to the time of speaking. Matt. 27 : 8 ; 
 28 : 15. Cf. 46, and 52. 
 
 19. Verbs in indirect discourse retain the point of view, as 
 respects time, of the original statement ; a Progressive Present 
 in indirect discourse accordingly denotes action going on at 
 the time, not of the quotation of the words, but of the original 
 utterance of them. English usage in indirect discourse is 
 different, and from this difference it results that a Greek 
 Present Indicative standing in indirect discourse after a verb 
 of past time must often be rendered by a verb of past time. 
 These cases, however, involve no special use of the Greek 
 tense, and should not be confused with those of the Historical 
 Present. Cf. 351-356. 
 
 20. Peeipheastio Form of the Peesent. One of the 
 clearly marked peculiarities of the Greek of the New Testa- 
 ment is the frequency with which periphrastic forms composed 
 of a Present or Perfect Participle (Luke 23 : 19 is quite excep- 
 tional in its use of the Aorist Participle ; cf. Ev. Pet. 23), 
 and the Present, Imperfect, or Future Indicative, or the 
 Present Subjunctive, Imperative, Infinitive, and even parti- 
 ciple, of the verb £iju,t (rarely also mrdpx<^), are used instead 
 of the usual simple forms. Cf. 431, and see the full dis- 
 cussion with examples in B. pp. 308-313, and the list (not 
 quite complete) in S. pp. 131 ff. 
 
 Instances of the periphrastic Present Indicative are, how- 
 ever, few. The clear instances belong under the head of the 
 General Present. 
 
 Matt. 27 : 33; _£ts tottov A.eyo/u.evoi' VoXyoOa, o iariv Kpaviov Tottos 
 Xeyojitcvos, unto a place called Golgotha, which iS' called Place of a 
 Skull. See also Matt. 1 : 23 ; Mark 5 : 41 ; 2 Cor. 2 : 17 ; 9:12. 
 
12 THE TENSES. 
 
 THE IMPEEIEOT INDICATIVE. 
 
 21. The Progressive Imperfect. The Imperfect is 
 used of action in progress in past time. HA. 829 ; 
 a. 1250, 2. 
 
 Mark 12 i 41 ; xal iroXAoi TrXoucrioi tfiaXXov TroXXd, and many that were 
 
 rich were casting in much. 
 Luke 1 : 66 ; icai yap x^'P KvpCov tjv /Aer' avroru, for the hand of the Lord 
 
 was with him. 
 John 11 : 36 ; iSe, Tuis €<j>L\a avrov, behold how he loved him. 
 
 22. The statement respecting the translation of the Pro- 
 gressive Present (cf. 10), applies to the Imperfect also. 
 Notice the third example above, and. see also Luke 2 : 51, 
 his mother kept [8teT»7pei] all these things in her heart; in Luke 
 24 : 32, A. v., did not our heart burn within us, is better than 
 E..V., was not our heart burning within us. Though the verb 
 is a periphrastic Imperfect, Kaiofiivr) rjv, the English form 
 did burn sufficiently suggests action in progress to render it 
 adequately. 
 
 23. The Conative Impekfect. The Progressive Imperfect 
 is sometimes used of action attempted, but not accomplished. 
 Cf . 11. HA. 832 ; G. 1255. 
 
 Matt. 3:14; o Sc SiCKolXvei/ avrov, hut he would have hindered him. 
 See also Luke 1 : 59, IkoXovv ; 15 : 16, eSt'Sou ; Acts 7 : 26, crwijX- 
 XaCTCTEv; 26 : 11, TivayKoZftv. i 
 
 24. The Imperfect of Repeated Action. The Imper- 
 fect is used of customary or repeated action in past time. 
 EA. 830 ; (?. 1253, 2. 
 
 Acts 3:2; ov iriOovv Ka6' ^/j.epav wpos t^v Ovpav Tov Upov, whom they 
 used to lay daily at the gate of the temple. 
 
THE IMPERFECT INDICATIVE. 13 
 
 25. For the use of the Imperfect, Aorist, or Pluperfect in 
 a condition contrary to fact, or its apodosis, see 248, 249. 
 
 26. The Imperfect and Aorist with av are used in classical 
 Greek to denote a customary past action taking place under 
 certain circumstances. In the New Testament this usage 
 never occurs in principal clauses. The use of the Imperfect 
 and Aorist with ov in conditional relative clauses is possibly 
 a remnant of the usage. Cf. 315. 
 
 27. The Imperfect and Aorist are used in a clause express- 
 ing an unattained wish having reference to the present or past. 
 The Imperfect denotes action in progress. The Aorist repre- 
 sents the action indefinitely as a simple event. Either tense 
 may refer to either present or past time. All the New Testa- 
 ment instances seem to refer to present time. 
 
 Rev. 3 : 15; 6<l>£\ov \jn})(p6i ^s ^ ^eoros, / would that thou wert cold 
 or hot. See also 1 Cor. 4 : 8 (Aor.) ; 2 Cor. 11 : 1 (Imperf.). 
 
 Rem. 1. In classical Greek vmattainable wishes are expressed by eWe 
 or el yip with the Indicative {HA. 871 ; G. 1511) or u^eXov with the 
 Infinitive. In Callimachus, 260 e.g., <S<pe\ov is found with the Indicative 
 (i. & S; 6(t>el\u II. 3. fin.^. In the New Testament el ydp (in this 
 sense) and el8e do not occur, but S^eXov, shortened form of a<pe\ov, is 
 used (as an uninflected particle) with the Imperfect and Aorist Indica- 
 tive. WM. p. 377 ; WT. p. 301, n. 2. 
 
 Rem. 2. In Gal. 5 : 12 i!0eXoi' is followed by the Future, but the wish 
 is probably not conceived of as unattainable. 
 
 28. When an Imperfect refers to an action not separated 
 from the time of speaking by a recognized interval, it is 
 best translated into English by the Perfect, using preferably 
 the progressive form, unless the verb itself suggests action 
 in progress. 
 
14 THE TENSES. 
 
 1 John 2:7; ijv etxere air apxV'i «''"cA ye have had from the beginning. 
 See also Luke 2 : 49 ; Rom. 15 : 22 ; Rev. 3 ; 2 (cited by Weymouth 
 in Theological Monthly, iv. 42, who also quotes examples from clas- 
 sical authors). Cf. 52. 
 
 29. When an action denoted by an Imperfect evidently pre- 
 ceded an event already mentioned, such Imperfect is sometimes 
 best translated into English by the Pluperfect. Prom the 
 point of view of Greek, however, this, like the preceding 
 usage, is an ordinary Progressive Imperfect or Imperfect of 
 Eepeated Action. Cf. 52. 
 
 Matt. 14:4; IXeycv yap 6 'Itoavijs avnS, Ovk i^eartv crot tx"'' '"^^•'i 
 for John had been saying to him, It is not lawful for you to have her. 
 See also Luke 8 : 27 ; Acts 9 : 39. 
 
 30. The Imperfect of verbs denoting obligation or possi- 
 bility, when used to afB.rm that a certain thing should or 
 could have been done, i.e. was required or possible under the 
 circumstances related, is a true affirmative Imperfect. It is 
 incorrect in this case to speak of an omitted av, since though 
 it is frequently the case that the necessary or possible deed 
 did not take place, the past necessity or possibility was actual, 
 not hypothetical or "contrary to fact." Here belong Matt. 
 18:33; 23:23; 25:27; Acts 24:19; 26:32; 27:21; 2 Cor. 
 2 : 3, etc. 
 
 The Imperfect is also used of a past necessity or obligation 
 when the necessary deed did take place. Here also, of course, 
 the Imperfect has its usual force. Luke 13 : 16 ; 24 : 26 ; 
 John 4:4; Acts 1 : 16 ; 17 : 3. 
 
 31. Buttmann, pp. 216 f ., 225 f ., describes correctly the class of cases 
 in which the past obligation or possibility was actual, but in which the 
 required or possible deed did not take place, but wrongly includes in 
 his list several passages in which not only the fact but the obligation 
 or ability is hypothetical. Such are John 9 : 33 ; 1 Cor. 5 : 10 ; Heb. 9 : 26, 
 which are to be explained in accordance with 249. The distinction 
 
THE IMPERFECT INDICATIVE. 15 
 
 between these two classes of cases is not always easily marked in English 
 translation, since the English forms could, should, etc., are used both 
 for actual and for hypothetical obligation or ability. Cf. He could have 
 gone, if he had been well, and He could have gone, but did not wish 
 to go. 
 
 32. Through a dimming of the distinction between the 
 ideas of present and past obligation (which has occurred also 
 in English in the case of the word ought) , the Imperfect with- • 
 out av is sometimes used to express a present obligation. The 
 Infinitive after such an Imperfect is always in the Present 
 tense. In accordance with this usage we are probably to ex- 
 plain Acts 22:22; Eph. 5:4; Col. 3:18; cf. Ltft. on Col. 
 loc. cit. and GMT. 416. 
 
 On these several uses of the Imperfect of verbs of obliga- 
 tion, etc., see G.M.T. 413-423. 
 
 33. The Imperfect of verbs of wishing, without av, is best 
 explained as a true Progressive Imperfect, describing a desire 
 which the speaker for a time felt, without affirming that he 
 actually cherishes it at the time of. his present utterance. 
 This is especially clear in Philem. 13, 14, where the apostle 
 states in one clause what his desire — his personal prefer- 
 ence — was (i^ovXoiJiriv), and in the next his actual decision 
 (■^6eXT]a-a), as over against his preference. The reason for 
 describing the desire as past is not always, however, that 
 it has been put aside. Failure to realize the desire, or the 
 perception that it cannot be realized, or reluctance to express 
 a positive and deliberate choice may lead the speaker to use 
 the Imperfect rather than the Present. Similarly we some- 
 times say in colloquial English, I was wishing that such a 
 thing might happen, or even more commonly, I have sometimes 
 wished. Nearly the same meaning may be conveyed in Eng- 
 lish by the more usual potential form, I should like, I would 
 
16 THE TENSES. 
 
 that, or I could wish. In Acts 25 : 22 the use of the Imperfect 
 il3ov\6fj.riv rather than a Present softens the request for polite- 
 ness' sake, and may well be rendered I should like. In Gal. 
 4 : 20 it is probably the impossibility of realizing the wish 
 that leads to the use of the Imperfect, and rjd^Xov wapwai 
 may be rendered, I would that I were present. In Eom. 9 : 3 
 7]vxofiT]v may have been chosen because the apostle shrank 
 from expressing a deliberate choice in regard to so solemn 
 a matter, or because he thought of it as beyond the control 
 or influence of his wish. T could pray expresses the meaning 
 with approximate accuracy. In all these cases, however, what 
 is strictly stated in the Greek is merely the past existence of a 
 state of desire; the context alone implies what the present 
 state of mind is. Cf. G.M-T. 425. 
 
 34. Peeiphkastic Porm of the Impeeebct. Periphras- 
 tic Imperfects, formed by adding a Present Participle to the 
 Imperfect of the verb dixl, are frequent in the New Testament, 
 especially in the historical books. The large majority of 
 these forms denote continued action. 
 
 Mark 10 : 32 ; koI rjv irpoa.yuxv avrov's 6 'lijcrdvi, and Jesus was going 
 before them. So also Luke 1 : 10, 22 ; John 13 : 23 ; and probably 
 Mark 2 : 18. In a few instances repeated action is referred to, as 
 Luke 5:18; 19 : 47 ; Gal. 1 : 23. Cf . 431. 
 
 THE AOEIST INDIOATIVE. 
 
 35. The constant characteristic of the Aorist tense in all 
 of its moods, including the participle, is that it represents the 
 action denoted by it indefinitely; i.e. simply as an event, 
 neither cin the one hand picturing it in progress, nor on the 
 other affirming the existence of its result. The name indefi- 
 nite as thus understood is therefore applicable to the tense in 
 all of its uses. 
 
THE AOEIST INDICATIVE. 17 
 
 As respects the point of view from which the action is 
 looked at, however, we may distinguish three functions of the 
 tense common to all of its moods. 
 
 Pirst, it may be used to describe an action or event in its 
 entirety. This use of the tense, since it is by far the most 
 frequent, may be called by pre-eminence the Indefinite Aorist. 
 In the Indicative it may be called the Historical Aorist. The 
 Aorist of any verb may be used in this sense ; thus el-ireiv, 
 to say; SiaKovrjcrai, to serve. 
 
 Secondly, it may be used to denote the inception of a 
 state. The Aorist thus used may be called the Inceptive 
 Aorist. It belongs to verbs which in the Present and Imper- 
 fect denote the continuance of a state ; thus myav, to be silent; 
 (nyrjuai, to become silent. 
 
 Thirdly, it may be used to denote the success of an effort. 
 The Aorist thus used may be called the Eesultative Aorist. 
 It belongs to verbs which in the Present and Imperfect denote 
 effort or attempt ; thus KwXvav, to hinder, obstruct; KtoXvarai, to 
 prevent. 
 
 The genetic relation of these three functions of the Aorist 
 tense has not been satisfactorily defined. In the Greek, both of 
 the classical and the New Testament periods, however, they ap- 
 pear side by side as co-ordinate uses. Br. 159; Del. iv., pp. 100 f. 
 
 Rem. Respecting the force of the Indefinite Aorist, compare Brug- 
 mann's statement concerning the Aorist forms : "Am haufigsten wurden 
 diese Formen so gebrauoht, dass man sich die Handlung in einen unge- 
 teilten Denkakt ganz und vollstandig, in sich abgesohlossen, absolut vor- 
 stellen sollte. Das Factum wurde einfach constatiert ohne Rucksicht 
 auf Zeitdauer." Br. 169. 
 
 36. In addition to these uses which belong to the Aorist in 
 all its moods, the Aorist Indicative has three uses, instances 
 of which are comparatively infrequent. These are the Gnomic 
 Aorist, the Epistolary Aorist, and the Dramatic Aorist. 
 
18 THE TENSES. 
 
 The Aorist for the Perfect and the Aorist for the Pluper- 
 fect are, as explained below (62), not distinct functions of the 
 Aorist, but merely special cases of the Historical, Inceptive, 
 or Kesultative Aorist. 
 
 37. The distinction between the Indefinite, the Inceptive, 
 and the Resultative functions of the Aorist is often ignored, 
 or its legitimacy denied. It is true that there are cases in 
 which it is not possible to decide certainly whether a given 
 verb refers to the inception of an action only, or to its entire 
 extent, and others in which there is a similar difficulty in 
 deciding whether the reference is to the action as a whole or 
 to its result only. It is true also that the genetic relation of 
 these three uses of the tense is not a matter of entire cer- 
 tainty, and that it is possible that, historically speaking, they 
 are but varying types of one usage. Especially must it be 
 regarded as doubtful whether the Resultative Aorist is any- 
 thing else than the Indefinite Aorist of verbs denoting effort. 
 The matter of importance to the interpreter, however, is 
 that, whatever the genesis of the fact, of the Aorists of the 
 New Testament some denote a past act in its undivided 
 entirety, others denote merely or chiefly the inception of an 
 action, and others still affirm as a past fact the accomplish- 
 ment of an act attempted. These distinctions, which from the 
 exegetical point of view it is often important to mark, are 
 conveniently indicated by the terms indefinite, inceptive, and 
 resultative. With reference to the validity of this distinction, 
 see Br. 169. 
 
 The Inceptive Aorist is illustrated in Acts 15 : 13, and after 
 they had become silent [/actoi to <nyrj<TaC\ James answered. It 
 is evident that the Infinitive must refer to the becoming 
 silent, not to the whole period of silence, since in the latter 
 case James must have been silent while the others were silent. 
 
THE AOEIST INDICATIVE. 19 
 
 and have begun to speak when their silence had ended. In 
 2 Cor. 8 : 9, we must read not being rich he was poor, but beiTig 
 rich he became poor; iTrrdxevcrev is manifestly inceptive. So 
 also in Luke 2 : 44, supposing him to be in the company, they 
 went a day's journey, it was not the holding of the opinion that 
 he was in the company that preceded the day's journey, but 
 the forming of it, and the participle vo/xicravT£s is inceptive. 
 Contrast Acts 16 : 27. See other examples under 41. 
 
 Illustrations of the resultative sense are less numerous and 
 less clear. In Acts 7 : 36, however, this man led them forth, 
 having wrought wonders and signs in Egypt and in the Red Sea, 
 and in the wilderness forty years, the verb e|7;yayev seems to 
 refer only to the result, since the signs wrought in the Eed 
 Sea and the wilderness would otherwise have been represented 
 as. accompanying the bringing out, and instead of Troii^cras we 
 should have had irotcSv. See also 42.' 
 
 38. The Historical Aorist. The Aorist Indicative is 
 most frequently used to express a past event viewed in its 
 entirety, simply as an event or a single fact. It has no 
 reference to the progress of the event, or to any existing 
 result of it. RA. 836 ; (?. 1250, 5. 
 
 John 1 : 11 ; cts to, lSw, ^X6ev, koI oi iSioi avrov ov TrapiXa/3ov, lie came 
 unto his own and they that were his own received him not. 
 
 39. Since any past event without reference to its duration 
 or complexity may be conceived of as a single fact, the His- 
 torical Aorist may be used to describe 
 
 (a) A momentary action. 
 
 Acts 5:5; i^ajruiev, he gave up the ghost. 
 
 Matt. 8:3; koI eKTet'vas Tr]V X^^pa r]\j/aTO airov, and having stretched 
 forth his hand he touched him. 
 
 ^ Cf. Mart. Polyo. 8 : 2, 3, where both eireiBov, were persuading, and 
 droTuxiSi'Tf s ToO irewrai, failing to persuade, refer to the same event. 
 
20 THE TENSES. 
 
 (&) An extended act or state, however prolonged in time, if 
 viewed as constituting a single fact without reference to its 
 progress. 
 
 Acts 28 : 30 ; ivi/jxivev Se 8i£Ttav oXr;v iv iSi'o) fiurOiafuiTi, and he abode 
 
 two whole years in his own hired dwelling. 
 Eph. 2:4; 8ia r^v ttoXX.tjv a.ya.irqv avroC ij v r)ya.irri<Jiv -^imli, because 
 
 of his great love wherewith he loved us. 
 
 (c) A series or aggregate of acts viewed as constituting a 
 
 single fact. 
 
 Matt. 22 : 28 ; jravres yap ea-xov avrriv, for they all had her. 
 2 Cor. 11 : 25 ; rph ivavyrja^a, thrice I suffered shipwreck. 
 
 40. These three uses of the Historical Aorist may for con- 
 venience be designated as the Momentary Aorist, the Compre- 
 hensive Aorist, and the Collective Aorist. But it should be 
 clearly observed that these terms do not mark distinctions in 
 the functions of the tense. An Historical Aorist, whatever the 
 nature of the fact affirmed, affirms it simply as a past fact. 
 The writer may or may not have in mind that the act was 
 single and momentary, or extended, or a series of acts, but the 
 tense does not express or suggest the distinction. The pur- 
 pose of the subdivision into momentary, comprehensive, and 
 collective is not to define the force of the tense-form, but to 
 discriminate more precisely the nature of the facts to which 
 it is applied as shown by the context or the circumstances. 
 Cf. G.WI. 66. 
 
 Rem. The term Historical Aorist is applied to the use of the Aorist 
 here described only by pre-eminence. In strictness the Inceptive and 
 Kesultative Aorists are also Historical. Compare what is said concerning 
 the term Indefinite under 35. 
 
 41. The Inceptive Aorist. The Aorist of a verb whose 
 Present denotes a state or condition, commonly denotes 
 the beginning of that state. HA. 841 ; G. 1260. 
 
THE AORIST INDICATIVE. 21 
 
 2 Cor. 8:9; Sl v/xois iirTiLxtvircv TrXovcrtos w, though he was rich, for 
 your sakes he became poor. See also Luke 15 : 32 ; John 4 : 52 ; 
 Acts 7: 60; Kom. 14:9. 
 
 Kem. The Aorist of suoh verbs is not, however, necessarily inceptive. 
 The same form may he in one sentence inceptive and in another historical 
 Cf. Luke 9 : 36 with Acts 15 : 12, the verb ia-lyrjra being in the former 
 historical, in the latter probably inceptive. 
 
 42. The Resultative Aorist. The Aorist of a verb 
 whose Present implies effort or intention, commonly de- 
 notes the success of the effort. Cf. 11, 23. £r. 159. 
 
 Acts 27 : 43 ; 6 Se iKaTOVTapxo^ ■ • • eKutXva-ev avTcnii tov jSowXiy/iaTos, 
 but the centurion . . . prevented them from their purpose. See also 
 Matt. 27:20; Acts 7 : 36. 
 
 43. The Gnomic Aorist. The Aorist is used in prov- 
 erbs and comparisons where the English commonly uses a 
 General Present. ^A 840; Q. 1292; (?.MT. 154-161; 
 B. pp. 201 ff. ; WM. pp. 346 f. ; WT. p. 277 ; Br. 160. 
 
 1 Pet. 1 : 24 ; i^pdvOr] 6 x6pT(K, (cat to avdiK iiiirecrev, the grass wither- 
 eth and the flower falleth. See also Luke 7 : 35 ; John 15 : 6 ; Jas. 
 1 : 11, 24. 
 
 Rem. "Winer's contention (^WT. p. 277; WM. p. 346) that the 
 Gnomic Aorist does not occur in the New Testament does not seem 
 defensible. The passages cited above are entirely similar to the classical 
 examples of this ancient and well-established idiom. 
 
 44. The Epistolary Aorist. The writer of a letter 
 sometimes puts himself in the place of his reader and de- 
 scribes as past that which is to himself present, but which 
 will be past to his reader. HA. 838. 
 
 Eph. 6 : 22 ; ov eirefixj/a tt/oos v/uSs ets auro toCto, whom I send to you for 
 this very purpose. See also Acts 23 : 30 ; 1 Cor. 5 : 11 ; Phil. 2 : 28 ; 
 Col. 4:8; Philem. IL 
 
22 THE TENSES. 
 
 45. The Dramatic Aorist. The Aorist Indicative is 
 sometimes used of a state of mind just reached, or of an 
 act expressive of it. The effect is to give to the statement 
 greater vividness than is given by the more usual Present. 
 RA. 842; G^.MT. 60; K. 386, 9; Br. 160. 
 
 Luke 16:4; tyvo)!/ tl noi-^cra, I know [lit. I knew, or / perceived] what 
 I shall do. 
 
 Rem. This usage is in classical Greek mainly poetical and is found 
 chieiiy in dialogue. It is sometimes called " Aoristus tragicus." Brug- 
 mann thus describes it: " Nioht selten wurde der Aorist von dem 
 gebraucht, was soeben eingetreten ist, besonders von einer Stimmung, 
 die soeben iiber einen gekommen ist, oder von einem Urteil, das man 
 sich soeben gebildet hat." See numerous examples in K. 386, 9. 
 
 46. The Aoeist foe the (English) Pbkfect. The Aorist 
 is frequently used in Greek where the English idiom requires 
 a Perfect. G'.MT. 68 ; HA. 837 ; B. pp. 197, 198. 
 
 Luke 19 : 9 ; <jyfJi.€pov criaTrjpia tco oiko) totjto) iyivero, to-day is salvation 
 
 come to this house. 
 Matt. 5 : 21 ; yiKova-are on ippeOrj rots dpx"""^, ye have heard that it was 
 
 said to them of old time. 
 Phil. 4:11; iyo) yap ipaOov iv ols dpi avrapKiqi elvax, for I have learned 
 
 in whatsoever state 1 am therein to be content. See also under 52. 
 
 47. The Aorist Indicative of a few verbs is used in the New 
 Testament to denote a present state, the result of a past act, 
 hence with the proper force of a Greek Perfect. Cf. 75, 86. 
 So the Aorists airiOoivov (cf . Mark 6 : 35 with Luke 8 : 49, and 
 see John 8 : 52 ei al.), iiia-Trjv (Mark 3 : 21 ; 2 Cor. 5 : 13), and 
 possibly lyvMv (John 7:26; cf. 1 Mace. 6:13). All these 
 Aorists may also be used as simple historical Aorists. 
 
 48. The Aoeist foe the (English) Plupeefect. The 
 Aorist Indicative is frequently used in narrative passages of 
 a past event which precedes another past event mentioned 
 
THE AOKIST INDICATIVE. 23 
 
 or implied in the context. In English it is common in such 
 a case to indicate the real order of the events by the use 
 of a Pluperfect for the earlier event. Cf. 52, 53. HA. 837 ; 
 GMT. 68 ; B. pp. 199 f. 
 
 John 19 : 30 ; ore ovv IXaySei/ to o^os 6 'IijtroBs eiTrev, TeTcXtcTTat, wJien 
 therefore Jesus had received the vinegar, he said, It is finished. 
 
 Matt. 14 : 3 ; 6 yap 'H.pioSri'S Kparrja-a'; tov 'Iwdvrjv eSr/crev, for Herod 
 having laid hold on John had bound him. See also Matt. 27 : 31 ; 
 Mark 8 : 14 ; Luke 8 : 27 ; John 12 : 17 ; 13 : 12. 
 
 Rem. It has been much disputed whether Avia-TeiKev in John 18:24 
 is to be assigned to this liead. The valid objection to this is not in any 
 inappropriateness of the Aorist tense to express an event antecedent to 
 one already mentioned, — the Aorist is the only form that can be used if 
 the event is thought of simply as an event (cf. Mey. ad loo., contra), — 
 but in the presence of oSp, which is, in John "especially, so constantly 
 continuative, and in the absence of any intimation in the context that 
 the events are related out of their chronological order. 
 
 49. From the general principles of indirect discourse in 
 English and in Greek it results that an Aorist Indicative in 
 indirect discourse after a verb of past time must usually be 
 rendered into English by a Pluperfect. Cf. 363. These cases 
 form a class entirelj'' distinct from those that are included 
 above under the term Aorist for the English Pluperfect. 
 
 50. Both the Aorist and the Perfect are sometimes used 
 proleptieally, but this is rather a rhetorical figure than a gram- 
 matical idiom. WM. pp. 341, 345, 347 ; WT. pp. 273, 277, 278. 
 
 1 Cor. 7 : 28 ; iav Sc Koi ya/jL'^crrj';, ovx iJ'/wipTes, but even if thou shall 
 marry, thou hast not sinned. See also John 15:8; Jas. 2 : 10. 
 
 51. For the Aorist in a condition contrary to fact, see 248. 
 For the Aorist expressing an unattained wish, see 27. 
 
 52. English Equivalents or the G-eeek Aorist Indic- 
 ative. It should be observed that tlje Aorist for the Perfect 
 and the Aorist for the Pluperfect are not variations from the 
 
24 
 
 THE TENSES. 
 
 normal use of the Greek Aorist. Viewed strictly from the 
 point of view of Greek Grammar, these Aorists are simply 
 Historical, Inceptive, or Resultative Aorists. The necessity for 
 mentioning them arises merely from the difference between 
 the English and the Greek idiom. 
 
 The Greek Aorist corresponds to the English simple Past 
 (or Imperfect or Preterite, loved, heard, etc.) more nearly than 
 to any other English tense. But it is not the precise equiva- 
 lent of the English Past ; nor is the Greek Perfect the precise 
 equivalent of the English Perfect ; nor the Greek Pluperfect 
 of the English Pluperfect. This will appear distinctly if we 
 place side by side the definitions of the tenses which in gen- 
 eral correspond in the two languages. 
 
 The English Perfect is used 
 of any past action between 
 which and the time of speak- 
 ing the speaker does not in- 
 tend distinctly to interpose an 
 interval.^ 
 
 The English Pluperfect is 
 used to mark the fact that the 
 event expressed by it preceded 
 another past event indicated by 
 the context, and this whether 
 the earlier event is thought of 
 as completed at the time of 
 the later event, or only indefi- 
 nitely as a simple occurrence 
 preceding the later event.-' 
 
 1 The English Perfect and Pluperfect by their auxiliaries have and had 
 distinctly suggest completed action in the proper sense, viz. the posses- 
 sion of a thing in the condition indicated by the participle, and substan- 
 
 The Greek Perfect is used 
 to represent an action as 
 standing complete, i.e. as hav- 
 ing an existing result, at the 
 time of speaking. 
 
 The Greek Pluperfect is 
 used to represent an action as 
 standing complete, i.e. as hav- 
 ing an existing result, at a 
 point of past time indicated 
 by the context. 
 
THE AOKIST INDICATIVE. 25 
 
 The English Past is used of The Greek Aorist is used of 
 
 any past action between -which any past event which is con- 
 and the moment of speaking ceived of simply as an event 
 an interval is thought of as (or as entered upon, or as ac~ 
 existing. It affirms nothing complished), regardless alike 
 respecting existing result. of the existence or non-exist> 
 
 ence of an interval between 
 itself and the moment of 
 speaking, and of the question 
 whether it precedes or not 
 some other past action. It 
 affirms nothing respecting ex- 
 isting result. 
 
 It is evident from this comparison that the English Perfect 
 has a larger range of use than the Greek Perfect. 
 
 tiaUy this is the meaning often conveyed by these tenses. Thus, I have 
 learned my lesson, differs hut little in meaning from I have my lesson 
 learned. But this is by no means the only use which may be made of 
 these tenses in modern English. They have, in fact, ceased to be Perfect 
 tenses in any proper sense of that word. Compare, e.g., the Pasts and 
 Perfects in the following examples : The army arrived. The army has 
 arrived. Many men fought for their country. Many men have fought 
 for their country. He often visited Borne. He has often visited Borne. 
 Only in the first example is existing result suggested by the Perfect tense. 
 In each pair the distinguishing mark between the two sentences is that 
 while the Perfect tense places the event in the past time without defining 
 whether or not an interval has elapsed since the event, the Past tense 
 places it in the past time and suggests an interval. 
 
 Similarly, the English Pluperfect affirms only the antecedence of its 
 event to the other past event, leaving it to the context or the nature of 
 the fact to show whether at the past time referred to there were existing 
 results or not. Thus in the sentence, / showed him the work which I had 
 done, it is im§lied that the results of the doing remained at the time of 
 the showing. But in the sentence, He did not recognize the persons whom 
 he had previously seen, it is not implied tliat any result of the seeing 
 remained at the time of the non-recognition. 
 
26 THE TENSES. 
 
 Thus a past event between which and the time of speaking 
 no interval is distinctly thought of may be expressed by the 
 English Perfect, whether the result of the event is thought of 
 as existing or not ; but it can be expressed by the Greek Per- 
 fect only in case such result is thought of. So also the Eng- 
 lish Pluperfect has a wider range than the Greek Pluperfect. 
 For while the Greek can use its Pluperfect for an event 
 which preceded another past event only in case the result 
 of the earlier event is thought of as existing at the time 
 of the later event, the English freely uses its Pluperfect 
 for all such doubly past events, without reference to the 
 existence of the result of the earlier event at the time of 
 the later one. 
 
 On the other hand, the Greek Aorist has a wider range 
 than the English Past, since it performs precisely those func- 
 tions which the Greek Perfect and Pluperfect refuse, but 
 which in modern English are performed not by the Past but 
 by the Perfect and Pluperfect. The Greek Aorist, therefore, 
 in its ordinary use not only covers the ground of the English 
 Past, but overlaps in part upon that of the English Perfect 
 and Pluperfect. Hence arise the so-called Aorist for Perfect 
 and Aorist for Pluperfect. 
 
 If the attempt be made to define more exactly the extent 
 of this overlapping, it will appear that a simple past event 
 which is conceived of without reference to an existing result, 
 and between which and the time of speaking the speaker does 
 not wish distinctly to suggest an interval, — the interval may 
 be ever so long, in fact, — will be expressed in Greek by 
 the Aorist, because the result is not thought of, and in Eng- 
 lish by the Perfect, because the interval is not thought of. 
 Cases of this kind arise, e.g., when the event is*said to con- 
 tinue up to the time of speaking, so that there is actually no 
 interval [Matt. 27 : 8 ; Sib eKX^Orj 6 dypos eKeivoi 'A-ypos At/aaros 
 
THE AOBIST INDICATIVE. ,27 
 
 l(i)s T^s cr-q/iepov, therefore that field has been called Field of Blood 
 until this day. See also Matt. 28 : 16 ; Johu 16 : 24] ; or when the 
 event is so recent as to make the thought of an interval seem 
 unnatural [Luke 5 : 26 ; aSa/j-cv irapdSoia o-i^/xepov, we have seen 
 strange things to-day. See also Mark 14 : 41 ; Acts 7 : 52, vvv 
 . . . eyci/ecr^c] ; or when the time of the event is entirely 
 indefinite [Matt. 19 : 4 ; ovk aviyvuyn, have ye not read ? See 
 also Eev. 17 : 12 ; exx. are frequent in the New Testament] ; 
 or when the verb -refers to a series of events which extends 
 approximately or quite to the time of speaking [Matt. 6 : 21 ; 
 rjKova-aTE on ippiOt] tois apxa^i, ye have heard that it was said 
 to the ancients; the reference is doubtless to the frequent 
 occasions on which they had heard such teachings in the 
 synagogue. See also 1 Esdr. 4 : 26, 27]. 
 
 Instances of the Greek Aorist for the English Pluperfect 
 arise when a past event which is conceived of simply as an 
 event without reference to existing result is mentioned out 
 of its chronological order, or is expressed in a subordinate 
 clause. The Greek employs the Aorist, leaving the context 
 - to suggest the order ; the English usually suggests the order 
 by the use of a Pluperfect. See exx. under 48. Cf . Beet, The 
 Greek Aorist as used in the New Testament, in Expositor, xi. 
 191-201, 296-308, 372-385; Weymouth, The Eendering into 
 English of the Greek Aorist and Perfect, in Theological 
 Monthly, iv. 33-47, 162-180. 
 
 53. In many cases in which the Greek Aorist is used of 
 an event antecedent to another past event already referred to, 
 English idiom permits a simple Past. A Pluperfect is strictly 
 required only when the precedence in time is somewhat promi- 
 nent. The Eevisers of 1881 have used the Pluperfect spar- 
 ingly in such cases. It might better have been used also in 
 Matt. 9 : 25 ; Mark 8 : 14 ; John 12 : 18 {had heard). 
 
28 THE TENSES. 
 
 54. An Aorist which is equivalent to an English Perfect 
 or Pluperfect may be either an historical, or an inceptive, or 
 a Besultative Aorist. If historical, it may be either momentary, 
 comprehensive, or collective. 
 
 In Luke 15 : 32, cfTjircc, and in 1 Cor. 4 : 8, iTrXovn^ffare, are inceptive 
 Aorists which may be properly rendered by the English Perfect ; probably 
 also ^/Sao-iXemras, in Rev. 11 : 17, should be rendered, thou hast become 
 king. 
 
 In Eom. 3 : 23, ruiaprov is evidently intended to sum up the aggregate 
 of the evil deeds of men, of which the apostle has been speaking in the 
 preceding paragraphs (1:18 — 3 : 20). It is therefore a collective historical 
 Aorist. But since that series of evil deeds extends even to the moment 
 of speaking, as is indeed directly affirmed in the irdpTes, it is impos-- 
 sible to think of an interval between the fact stated and this statement 
 of it. It must therefore be expressed in English by the Perfect tense, and 
 be classed with Matt. 5 : 21 as a collective Aorist for (English) Perfect. 
 Of similar force is the same form in Rom. 2 : 12. From the point of view 
 from which the apostle is speaking, the sin of each offender is simply a 
 past fact, and the sin of all a series or aggregate of facts together consti- 
 tuting a past fact. But inasmuch as this series is not separated from the 
 time of speaking, we must, as in 3 : 23, employ an English Perfect in 
 translation. This is upon the supposition that the verb Tuxaprov takes its 
 point of view from the time of speaking, and the apostle accordingly 
 speaks here only of sin then past, leaving it to be inferred that the same 
 principle would apply to subsequent sin. It is possible, however, that 
 by a sort of prolepsis rumprov is uttered from the point of view of the 
 future judgment [/cpiS^o-ocTai], and refers to all sin that will then be past. 
 In this case the Future Perfect, shall have sinned, may be used in trans- 
 lation, or again the Perfect, common in subordinate clauses in English as 
 an abbreviation of the Future Perfect. "Whether the same form in Rom. 
 5 : 12 shall be rendered in the same way or by the English Past depends 
 upon whether it is, like the other cases, a collective Aorist, representing 
 a series of acts between which and the time of speaking no interval is 
 interposed, or refers to a deed or deeds in the remote past in which the 
 "aU" in some way participated. So far as the tense-form is concerned 
 there is no presumption in favor of one or the other of these inter- 
 pretations, both uses of the tense being equally legitimate. The nature 
 of the argument or the author's thought, as learned from sources 
 outside the sentence itself, must furnish the main evidence by which 
 to decide. 
 
THE AOKIST INDICATIVE. 29 
 
 55. The Aorist eiSdxTiaa in Matt. 3 : 17 ; 17:5; Mark 1:11; Luke 
 3 : 22 ; 2 Pet. 1 : 17, may be explained — (a) as a Historical Aorist having 
 reference to a specific event as its basis. I was loell pleased with thee, 
 e.g. for receiving baptism. If all the instances were in connection with the 
 baptism, this would be the most natural explanation. But for those that 
 occur in connection with the account of the transfiguration this explana- 
 tion fails, and is probably therefore not the true explanation of any of the 
 instances. (6) as a comprehensive Historical Aorist covering the period 
 of Christ's prelncarnate existence. Cf. John 17 : 5, 24 ; see W. N. Clarke, 
 Com. on Mark 1 : 11. If the passages were in the fourth gospel, and 
 especially if they contained some such phrase as wpb KarafioX^s kImtiuov, 
 this explanation would have much in its favor. The absence of such 
 limiting phrase, and the fact that the passages are in the synoptic gospels 
 are opposed to this explanation, (c) as a comprehensive Historical Aorist, 
 having the force of an English Perfect, and referring to the period of 
 Christ's earthly existence up to the time of speaking. But against this 
 is the absence of any adverbial phrase meaning up to this time, which 
 usually accompanies an Aorist verb used iii this sense. Cf. 18 and 52. 
 ((?) as an Aorist which has by usage come to have the meaning which is 
 strictly appropriate to the Perfect, I became well pleased with thee, and 
 I am [accordingly'] loell pleased with thee. Cf. 47. There are a few pas- 
 sages of the Septuagint that seem at first sight to favor this explanation. 
 See Ps. 101 : 15 ; Jer. 2 : 19 ; Mai. 2 : 17. Cf . also Matt. 12 : 18 ; Luke 12 : 32. 
 The force of this evidence is, however, .greatly diminished by the fact 
 that all these instances are capable of being explained without resort to so 
 unusual a use of the Aorist, that both in the Septuagint and in the New 
 Testament there is in use a regular Present form of this verb, and that 
 the Aorist in the majority of cases clearly denotes past time, (e) as an 
 Inceptive Aorist referring to some indefinite, imagined point of past time 
 at which God is represented as becoming well pleased with Jesus. But 
 since this point is not thought of as definitely fixed, English idiom requires 
 a Perfect tense. Cf. 52 (p. 27), 54. It may be described, therefore, as an 
 Inceptive Aorist equivalent to an English Perfect, and may be rendered, 
 / have become well pleased. This, however, can only be a vivid way of 
 saying, I am well pleased. If then this view is correct, the rendering 
 of the English versions is a free but substantially correct paraphrase. 
 A true Perfect would affirm the present state of pleasure and imply the 
 past becoming pleased. The Aorist affirms the becoming pleased and 
 leaves the present pleasure to be suggested. This explanation, therefore, 
 differs from the preceding (d) in that it does not suppose the Aorist 
 of this verb to have acquired the power of expressing an existing result, 
 but judges the existing result to be only suggested by the affirmation 
 
30 THE TENSES. 
 
 of the past fact. This is rhetorical figure, on the way to become gram- 
 matical idiom, but not yet become such. Manifestly similar is the use 
 of Tpo(j-eS4^aTo in Isa. 42 : 1, and of eiddK-Qo-ev in Matt. 12 : 18. Indeed, if 
 Matt. 12 : 18 represents a current translation of Isa. 42 : 1, our present 
 passages were probably affected in form by this current rendering of the 
 Isaiah passage. Similar also are ^Kdeurav in Matt. 23 : 2, and %ii.a.0ov in 
 Phil. 4 : 11. In neither case is there any clearly established usage of the 
 Aorist for Greek Perfect; in neither is there apparent any reference 
 to a definite point of past time ; in both the real fact intended to be 
 suggested is the present state. 
 
 56. The Distinction between the Aoeist and the 
 Impbefect. The difference between an Historical Aorist 
 and an Imperfect of action in progress or repeated being one 
 not of the nature of the fact but of the speaker's conception 
 of the fact, it is evident that the same fact may be expressed 
 by either tense or by both. This is illustrated in Mark 12 : 41 
 and 44, where, with strict appropriateness in both cases, Mark 
 writes in v. 41, ttoXXoi irXownoi i/3aXXov iroXXa, and in v. 44 
 records Jesus as stating the same fact in the words Travres . . . 
 ifiaXov. The former describes the scene in progress, the latter 
 merely states the fact. 
 
 57. From the nature of the distinction between the Imper- 
 fect and Aorist, it also results that the difference in thought 
 represented by the choice of one form rather than the other 
 is sometimes almost imperceptible. Cf., e.g., Mark 3 : 7 and 
 6 : 24 ; Luke 2 : 18 and 4 : 22. Some verbs use one of the two 
 tenses almost or quite to the exclusion of the other. The 
 form tXcyov is used in classical Greek without emphasis on 
 the thought of the saying as in progress or repeated, and in the 
 'New Testament the Aorist of this verb does not occur. A dis- 
 tinction between the Imperfect IXtyov and the Aorist it-n-ov is 
 scarcely to be drawn in the New Testament. Cf. G.M.T. 56, 
 67, especially the following: "In all these cases the funda- 
 mental distinction of the tenses, which was inherent in the 
 
THE FUTURE INDICATIVE. 31 
 
 form, remained ; only it happened that either of the two dis- 
 tinct forms expressed the meaning which was here needed 
 equally well. It must not be thought, from these occasional 
 examples, that the Greeks of any period were not fully alive 
 to the distinction of the two tenses and could not use it with 
 skill and nicety." 
 
 This approximation of the Aorist and Imperfect, it should 
 be noted, occurs only in the case of the Historical Aorist (38). 
 The Inceptive and Eesultative Aorists are clearly distinguished 
 in force from the Imperfect. 
 
 THE rUTUEE IITDIOATIVE. 
 58. The Predictive Future. The Future Indicative is 
 most frequently used to affirm that an action is to take 
 place in future time. Since it does not mark the distinc- 
 tion between action in progress and action conceived of 
 indefinitely vt^ithout reference to its progress, it may be 
 either aoristic or progressive. RA. 843 ; 6r. 1250, 6 ; 
 G^.MT. 63, 65 ; Br. 168. 
 
 69. The Aokisxic Futuee conceives of an action simply 
 as an event, and aflrms that it will take place in future time. 
 It may be indefinite, inceptive, or resultative. As indefinite 
 it may be momentary, comprehensive, or collective. Of. 35, 39. 
 
 1 Cor. 15 : 51, 52 ; Tai/res oi KO\.ji.rfirja6fXsBa, iravTcs 8c oAAayTjo-djue^a, 
 iv arofiai, iv piTtrj 6<t>6a\iwv, we shall not all sleep [indefinite com- 
 prehensive] ; or, we shall not all fall asleep [inceptive], but we shall 
 all be changed, in a moment, in the twinkling of an eye [indefinite 
 momentary]. 
 
 John 14 : 26 ; exeivos i/xSs StSo^ei Travra koI viro/JLvijiTa i/iSs iravTa a 
 eTirov iifuv iyu>, he will teach you all things and bring to your remem- 
 brance all things that I said unto you [indefinite collective]. 
 
 Luke 1 : 33 ; /cm ySacriXevo-a cttI tov oikov laxciyS «s Toiis ataivas, and he 
 shall reign over the house of Jacob forever [indefinite comprehensive]. 
 
 Luke 16 : 31 ; oiS' idv tk «k v€KpS>v avacrrrj Tracr&ijcrovTai, neither will 
 they be persuaded if one rise from the dead [resultative]. 
 
32 THE TENSES. 
 
 60. The Progressive Future affirms that an action will 
 be in progress in future time. HA. 843 ; G. 1250, 6. 
 
 Phil. 1:18; kol iv rovrio xaipw aXSJa. koI -xap-ficToixtu, and (herein I 
 rejoice, yea, and will [continue <o] rejoice. See also Rom. 6:2; 
 Phil. 1:6; Rev. 9 : 6. 
 
 61. It may be doubted whether any of the distinctions indi- 
 cated by the subdivisions of the Predictive Future are justi- 
 fied from the point of view of pure grammar. It is probable, 
 rather, that the tense in all these cases makes precisely the 
 same afB^rmation respecting the event, viz. that it will take 
 place; and that it is the context only that conveys the dis- 
 tinctions referred to. These distinctions, however, are real 
 distinctions either of fact or of thought, and such, moreover, 
 that the writer must in most cases have had them in mind 
 when speaking of the facts. From the exegetical point of 
 view, therefore, the distinctions are both justified and neces- 
 sary, since they represent differences of thought in the mind 
 of the writer to be interpreted. The terms employed above 
 are convenient'terms to represent these distinctions of thought, 
 and it is to the interpreter a matter of secondary importance 
 whether the distinction in question is by his writer immedi- 
 ately connected with the tense of the verb. 
 
 62. Since the Aoristic Future is less definite respecting 
 progress than the Progressive Future, the latter predicting 
 the act as continuing, the former making no assertion, it is 
 evident that any instance of the Predictive Future not clearly 
 progressive must be accounted as aoristic. If the writer did 
 not conceive the act or event as continuing, he left it in his 
 own mind and for the reader undefined as respects progress, 
 hence aoristic. Whether he left it thus undefined in his mind 
 must of course be determined, if at all, from the context, there 
 being no difference of form between a Progressive and an 
 
THE FUTURE INDICATIVE. 33 
 
 Aoristic Future. It should be noticed that it is not enough 
 to show that an act will be in fact continued, in order to count 
 the verb which predicts it a Progressive Fjiture ; it must ap- 
 pear that the writer thought of it as continuing. Every 
 Future form is therefore by presumption aoristic. It can 
 be accounted progressive only on evidence that the writer 
 thought of the act as continued. 
 
 Rem. There is one exception to this principle. In verbs of effort a 
 Progressive Future is naturally like other Progressive forms, a conative 
 tense. An Aoristic Future of such a verb is like the Aorist, a resultative 
 tense. Since the latter is the larger meaning, the context must give the 
 evidence of this larger meaning, and such evidence failing, it cannot be 
 considered established that the verb is resultative. The verb in John 12 : 
 32 furnishes an interesting and important illustration. Since the verb 
 denotes effort, the Future will naturally be accounted conative if it is 
 judged to be progressive, and resultative if it is taken as aoristic. In the 
 latter case the meaning will be, I will by my attraction bring all men to 
 me. In the former case the words will mean, I leill exeH on all men an 
 attractive influence. 
 
 63. To decide whether a given Aoristic Future merely pre- 
 dicts the fact, or refers to the inception of the action, or has 
 reference to it as a thing accomplished, must again be deter- 
 mined by the context or the meaning of the word. The dis- 
 tinction between the indefinite and the resultative senses will 
 often be very difficult to make, and indeed the difference 
 of thought will be but slight. Here also it results from the 
 nature of the distinction between the indefinite use and the 
 other two, inceptive and resultative, that any. instance of 
 the Aoristic Future not clearly inceptive or resultative must 
 be accounted indefinite. In other words, if the writer did not 
 define the action to his own mind as inceptive or resultative, 
 he left it indefinite, a mere fact. 
 
 64. The distinction between momentary, comprehensive, 
 and collective is in respect to the Future tense, as in respect 
 
34 THE TENSES. 
 
 to the Aorist, a distinction which primarily has reference to 
 the facts referred to and only secondarily to the writer's con- 
 ception of the facts. There may easily occur instances which 
 will defy classification at this point. A writer may predict 
 an event not only without at the moment thinking whether 
 it is to be a single deed or a series of deeds, a momentary or 
 an extended action, but even without knowing. Thus the 
 sentence. He will destroy Ms enemies, may be uttered by one 
 who has confidence that the person referred to will in some 
 way destroy his enemies, without at all knowing whether he 
 will destroy them one by one, or all at once, and whether by 
 some long-continued process, or by one exterminating blow. 
 In such cases the verb can only be accounted as an Aoristic 
 Future, incapable of further classification. 
 
 65. Erom a different point of view from that of the above 
 classification, the instances of the Predictive Future might be 
 classified as (a) assertive, and (6) promissory. The distinc- 
 tion between the assertion that an event will take place and 
 the promise that it shall take place is difficult to make, 
 requiring delicate discrimination, but is often important for 
 purposes of interpretation. It is in general not indicated in 
 Greek, and its representation in English is complicated by the 
 varied uses of the auxiliary verbs shall and will. In general 
 it may be said that in principal clauses shall is in the first 
 person simply assertive, will is promissory ; in the second and 
 third person will is assertive, shall is promissory, imperative, 
 or solemnly predictive. 
 
 E.V. employs shall almost constantly in the second and 
 third person, in most cases probably intending it as solemnly 
 predictive. 
 
 Matt. 10 : 42 ; d/i^v Xeyo) vfuv, ov fi.7) aTroXicrr) tov i^urOov avrmi, verily 
 I say unto you, he shall by no means lose his reward. 
 
THE FUTUBE INDICATIVE. 35 
 
 Mark 11 : 31 ; eav ci5r(ii/M,£v 'Ef ovpavov, ipei, if we say, From heaven, he 
 
 will say. 
 Luke 22 : 61 ; TLpXv aXeKTOpa ^(ov^a-aL arip,e.pov airapYqari ji,e. Tph, before 
 
 the cock crow this day, thou shall deny me thrice. See also Matt. 11 : 
 
 28, 29 ; 12 : 31 ; John 16 : 7, 13. 
 
 66. A Predictive Future is sometimes made emphatically 
 negative by the use of the negative oi ix-q, Matt. 16 : 22 ; 26 : 
 35; Mark 14: 31 {Tisch. Subjunctive); cf. 172. 
 
 67. The Imperative Future. The second person of the 
 Future Indicative is often used as an Imperative. HA. 844 ; 
 
 a. 1215. 
 
 James 2:8; dyair^creis tov ttXtjitLov (7ou <js ueavrov, thou shall love thy 
 neighbor as thyself. 
 
 Eem. 1. This idiom as it occurs in the New Testament shows clearly 
 the influence of the Septuagint. It occurs most frequently in prohihi- 
 tions, its negative being, not /t^ as commonly in classical Greek, but oi. 
 G.M.T. 69, 70 ; B. p. 257 ; WM. pp. 3961 ; WT. pp. 315 f. 
 
 Kem. 2. In Matt. 15 : 6 the verb Ti/n^irei has the negative oi /ii}. Some 
 interpreters take this as a Predictive Future, but the thought requires the 
 Imperative sense, and in view of the frequent use of oi fi,-^ with the Future 
 in an imperative sense in the Septuagint, and its occasional use in classi- 
 cal Greek, the possibility of it can hardly be denied. WM. p. 636 f., n. 4 ; 
 6.MT. 297. 
 
 68. One or two probable instances of the Imperative Future 
 in the third person occur, though perhaps no entirely certain 
 case. Matt. 4 : 4, ovk iir aprio /xw<u ([■^o-tTat a.v6po)Tr(K, is prob- 
 ably to be so regarded, though the Hebrew of the passage 
 quoted (Deut. 8:3) is apparently Gnomic rather than Imper- 
 ative. On Matt. 15 : 6, see 67, Eem. 2. See also Matt. 20 : 
 26, 27. 
 
36 THE TENSES. 
 
 69. The G-nomic Future. The Future Indicative may- 
 be used to state what will customarily happen when occa- 
 sion offers. 
 
 Rom. 5:7; jjloXls yap virip SiKaiov ni airoOavexTai, for scarcely for a 
 righteous man will one die. See also Gen. 44 : 15 ; Rom. 7 : 3, XPVf^' 
 na-a. Observe the Gnomic Presents both before and after. 
 
 70. The Deliberative Future. The Future Indicative 
 is sometimes used in questions of deliberation, asking not 
 what will happen, but what can or ought to be done. 
 Such questions may be real questions asking information, 
 or rhetorical questions taking the place of a direct asser- 
 tion. Cf. 169. 
 
 Luke 22 : 49 ; ei iraTaiofx.tv ev frnxoupr/, shall we smite with the sword ? 
 John 6 : 68 ; Kvpie, Trpos Tiva a.Tre\cv<76fji,t6a, Lord, to whom shall we go ? 
 
 71. Pekiphrastic Foem of the Future. A Future tense 
 composed of a Present Participle and the Future of the verb 
 tlp,L is found occasionally in the New Testament. The force 
 is that of a Progressive Future, with the thought of continu- 
 ance or customariness somewhat emphasized. 
 
 Luke 5 : 10 ; avOpim-ovs ia-Q ^o>ypS)v, thou shall catch men, i.e. shall be a 
 
 catcher of men. 
 Luke 21 : 24 ; 'lepoucraX-^/n ta-TM iraxovixivr], Jerusalem shall [continue 
 
 to"] be trodden under foot. 
 
 72. MeXXo) with the Infinitive is also used with a force 
 akin to that of the Future Indicative. It is usually employed 
 of an action which one intends to do, or of that which is 
 certain, destined to take place. 
 
 Matt. 2 : 13 ; p.iX\u yap 'HpcoSj^s ^rjTelv to TratStov tov aTroXctrai avTo, 
 for Herod will seek the young child lo destroy it. 
 
 Luke 9 : 44 ; o yap vtos rov avOptoirov fieXXei TrapaStSoo-^ai eZs ^eipas 
 Tu)v av6pu>ir<av, for the Son of man is to be delivered up into the hands of 
 men. See also Matt. 16 : 27 ; 20 : 22 ; Acts 5 : 85 ; 20 : 38 ; Rom. 8 : 13. 
 
THE PERFECT INDICATIVE. 37 
 
 73. By the use of the Imperfect of /xe'Wo) with the Infinitive 
 it is affirmed that at a past point of time an action was about 
 to take place or was intended or destined to occur. 
 
 John 7 : 39 ; tcwto Se elirev irepi tov iri/eujtiaTos ov ifXiWov Xafj-fidveLv ol 
 ■n-io-TCvo-avTes cts airov, but this spake he of the Spirit which they 
 that believed on him were to receive. See also Luke 7:2; John 6 : 71. 
 
 THE PEEFEOT IHDIOATIVE. 
 
 74. The Perfect of Completed Action. In its most 
 frequent use the Perfect Indicative represents an action as 
 standing at the time of speaking complete. The reference 
 of the tense is thus double ; it implies a past action and 
 affirms an existing result. MA. 847 ; G^. 1250, 3. 
 
 Acts 5 : 28 ; TmrkriputKaTS rriv 'lepovcrakrjix, rrj'S StSa^^s vfiZv, ye have 
 
 filled Jerusalem with your teaching. 
 Sonians 5:5; on ij aydirq tov deov iKKe)(yTai iv rais KapStais ■^fi.uiv, 
 
 because the love of God has been poured forth in our hearts. 
 2 Tim. 4:7; tov koAov dycui/a ■^ywyiar/xai, tov Spofxov TereXeKa, Tr]v 
 
 iruTTiv TeTT^prjKa, I have fought the good fight, I have finished the 
 
 course, I have kept the faith. 
 
 Rem. On the use of the term complete as a grammatical term, see 
 85. On the distinction between the Perfect and the Aorist, see 86. 
 
 75. The Perfect of Existing- State. The Perfect is 
 sometimes used when the attention is directed wholly to 
 the present resulting state, the past action of which it is 
 the result being left out of thought. This usage occurs 
 most frequently in a few verbs which use the Perfect in 
 this sense only. HA. 849 ; Q. 1263. 
 
 Matt. 27 : 43 ; TreiroiOev IttI tov Oeov, he trusteth on God. 
 
 1 Cor. 11 : 2 ; eTratvS Se u/xas, on voLVTa fjiov fii/xviitTOe, now I praise you 
 
 that ye remember me in all things. 
 Luke 24 : 46 ; outcos yeypaTrrat, thus it is written, i.e. stands written. 
 
 See also Rev. 19 : 13. / 
 
38 THE TENSES. 
 
 76. There is no sharp line of distinction between the Perfect 
 of Completed Action and the Perfect of Existing State. To 
 the latter head are to be assigned those instances in which the 
 past act is practically dropped from thought, and the attention 
 turned wholly to the existing result ; while under the former 
 head are to be placed those instances in which it is evident 
 that the writer had in mind both the past act and the present 
 result. 
 
 77. The Intensive Pbkfect. The Perfect is sometimes 
 used in classical Greek as an emphatic or intensive Present. 
 It is possible that under this head should be placed certain 
 Perfects of the New Testament more commonly assigned to 
 one of the preceding uses. Thus triiroiOa practically expresses 
 the thought of vdOofuu intensified. IleTrto-Teu/ca is also clearly 
 a stronger way of saying mo-revo). John 6 : 69 ; iTem.(TTfuKafji,ev 
 KOA. iyvtltKa/xtv otl <tv et 6 aytos rov Oeov, we have believed and know 
 that thou art the Holy One of Ood. See also 2 Cor. 1 : 10. 
 Whether this usage is in the New Testament a survival of the 
 ancient intensive use of the Perfect, regarded by some gram- 
 marians as an original function of the tense {Del. iv. 94 ff., 
 Br. 162), or a later development from the Perfect of com- 
 pleted action, affirming the present existence of the result of 
 a past act, need not, for the purpose of the interpreter, be 
 decided. 
 
 78. Of the Historical Perfect in the sense of a Perfect 
 which expresses a past completed action, the result of which 
 the speaker conceives himself to be witnessing (as in the case 
 of the Historical Present he conceives himself to be witness- 
 ing the action itself), there is no certain New Testament 
 instance. Possible instances are Matt. 13 : 46 ; Luke 9 : 36 ; 
 2 Cor. 12 : 17 ; Jas. 1 ; 24. Cf. Br. 162. This idiom is perhaps 
 rather rhetorical than strictly grammatical. 
 
THE PERFECT INDICATIVE. 39 
 
 Klcpayev in John 1 : 15 is a Perfect expressing a past fact 
 vividly conceived of as if present to the speaker. But since 
 the Perfect of the verb had already in classical Greek come to 
 be recognized as functionally a Present, it is from the point 
 of view of the current usage a Historical Present rather than 
 a Historical Perfect. Cf. L. and S. s.v. 
 
 79. The Perfect in 1 Cor. 7 : 39, BiSerai., and in 1 John 2 : 5, rereXe/u- 
 rai, is probably Gnomic, referring to a state that is wont to exist. If 
 &Te\-^\v6ev in Jas. 1 : 24 is Gnomic, it is with nearly the force of a Gnomic 
 Present or Aorist. GMT. 154, 155. 
 
 80. The Aobistic Peefect. The Perfect Indicative is 
 sometimes used in the New Testament of a simple past fact 
 where it is scarcely possible to suppose that the thought of 
 existing result was in the writer's mind. See more fully 
 under 88. 
 
 2 Cor. 2:13; cwk ecTxr/Ka avediv Tcp TrveviMxri /jlov tiS /xy] aipfiiv fie Tltov, 
 I had no relief for my spirit because I found not Titus. 
 
 Kev. 8:5; /cat ii\r)^ev 6 ayyeA.os tov At/SaveDTW, Koi iye/jiLcrev avrov, and 
 the angel took the censer, and filled it. See also Matt. 25 : 6 ; 2 Cor. 
 1:9; 7:5; 11:25; Heb. 11:28; Eev.74l4; 19:3. 
 
 81. The Perfect Indicative in indirect discourse after a 
 verb of past time is regularly rendered into English by a 
 Pluperfect. This involves, however, no special use of the 
 tense, but results from the regular, difference between English 
 and Greek in the matter of indirect discourse. Cf. 353. 
 
 82. When the Perfect Indicative is used of a past event 
 which is by reason of the context necessarily thought of as 
 separated from the moment of speaking by an interval, it is 
 impossible to render it into English adequately. English 
 idiom forbids the use of the Perfect because of the interval 
 (present in, thought as well as existing in fact) between the 
 act and the time of speaking, while the English Past tense 
 
40 THE TENSES. 
 
 fails to express the idea of existing result which the Greek 
 Perfect conveys. In most of these cases R.V. has attempted 
 to preserve the sense of the Greek at the expense of the Eng- 
 lish idiom. 
 
 Acts 7 : 35 I TovTov 6 Oeoi koI apxovra xai A,VTpcoT^v direcrTaA.K£v uvv 
 X^tpl dyycXou tov o<^6fl'Tos axmS iv Trj fiaTio, him did God send 
 [R.V. hath God seni] to be both a ruler and a deliverer with the hand 
 of the angel which appeared to him in the bush. See also instances 
 cited by Weymouth in Theological Monthly, IV. 168 f. ; Rom. 16 : 7, 
 -who also were [yeyovav, R.V. have been'] in Christ before me ; John 
 6 : 25, R.V. correctly, when earnest [-yeyoi/as] thou here ? Heb. 7 : 
 6, 9 ; 8 : 5. 
 
 These cases should not be confused with those treated under 
 80. Here the Greek tense has its normal force, though it can- 
 not be well rendered by its usual English equivalent. There 
 the use of the Greek tense is somewhat abnormal. 
 
 83. Eor the Perfect used proleptically, see 50. 
 
 84. Pbeiphbastic Form of the Perfect. Periphrastic 
 Perfects, formed by adding a Perfect Participle to the 
 Present of the verb ei/xt, are frequent in the New Testament, 
 about forty instances occurring. In function these forms 
 more frequently denote existing state, though clear instances 
 of the Perfect denoting completed action occur. The former 
 use is illustrated in Luke 20 : 6 ; John 2 : 17 ; Acts 2 : 13 ; 
 26 : 10 ; 2 Cor. 4 : 3, etc. ; the latter in Luke 23 : 15 ; Acts 
 26 : 26 ; Heb. 4 : 2, etc. Cf. 431. 
 
 85. It is important to observe that the term "complete" 
 or " completed " as a grammatical term does not mean ended, 
 but accomplished, i.e. brought to its appropriate result, which 
 result remains at the time denoted by the verb. " The Perfect, 
 although it implies the performance of the action in past time, 
 yet states only that it stands completed at the present time." 
 
THE PERFECT INDICATIVE. . 41 
 
 G.M.T. 44. "Das Perf. hatte zwei altuberkommene Funktio- 
 nen. Einerseits hatte es intensiven, beziehentlich iterativen 
 Sinn. . . . Anderseits bezeichnete es die Handlung im Zustand 
 des VoUendet- und Fertigseins." Br. 162. 
 
 An action wliich. has ceased may be expressed in G-reek by 
 the Aorist or the Imperfect quite as well as by the Perfect, 
 provided only the action is thought of apart from any existing 
 result of it. These tenses are indeed more frequently used 
 of actions which are complete in the sense of having come to 
 an end than is the Perfect. See, e.g., Gal.-4 : 8 ; tote /x€v . . . 
 eSouAeuo-aTE tois <f>va-e.i firj oJtrt Seots, at that time . . . ye were in 
 bondage to them which by nature are no gods; and 2 Cor. 7, 8 ; 
 ov ixeTa/jLeXo/iai ' et Kal ixcTcixeXo/XTjv, I do not regret it, although 
 I did regret [was regretting'] it. The Perfect, on the other 
 hand, aflB.rms the existence of the normal result of the action, 
 and this even though the action itself is still in progress. 
 See, e.g., the Perfect Tcrrip-qKa, in 2 Tim. 4 : 7, quoted under 74. 
 
 86. Since the Aorist and the Perfect both involve reference 
 to a past event, the Perfect affirming the existence of the 
 result of the event, and the Aorist affirming the event itself, 
 without either affirming or denying the existence of the result, 
 it is evident that whenever the result of the past action does 
 still exist, either tense may be used, according as the writer 
 wishes either to affirm the result or merely the event. In 
 many cases the reason of the choice of one tense rather than 
 the other is very evident and the distinction clearly marked, 
 even when in accordance with the principle of 82 both tenses 
 must be translated by an English Past. See, e.g., 1 Cor. 15 : 4 ; 
 OTI Itoi^t;, (Cat otl iyrjytprax rrj ■^/J-epa Trj TpiTy, that he was buried, 
 and that he was raised on the third day. The burial is simply 
 a past event. Of the resurrection there is an existing result, 
 prominently before the mind. 
 
42 ■ THE TENSES. 
 
 But there are naturally other cases in which, though each 
 tense retains its own proper force, the two approximate very 
 closely, and are used side by side of what seem to be quite 
 coordinate facts. Instances of this approximation of the two 
 tenses are especially frequent in the writings of John. See 
 John 5:36, 38; 1 John 1:1; 4:9, 10; cf. also Acts 6:11 
 and 15 : 24. 
 
 87. It might be supposed that the Eesultative Aorist would 
 be especially near in force to the Perfect. The distinction is, 
 however, clearly marked. The Eesultative Aorist afiS.rms that 
 an action attempted in past time was accomplished, saying 
 nothing about the present result. The Perfect, on the other 
 hand, belongs to all classes of verbs, not merely to those that 
 imply attempt, and af&rms the existence of the result of the 
 past action, the occurrence of which it implies. 
 
 88. It should be observed that the aoristic use of the Per- 
 fect (80) is a distinct departure from the strict and proper 
 sense of the tense in Greek. The beginnings of this departure 
 are to be seen in classical G-reek {G.M.T. 46), and in Greek 
 writers of a time later than the New Testament the tendency 
 was stUl further developed, until the sense of difference between 
 the tenses was lost. 
 
 Meantime there grew up a new form of the Perfect, made 
 as is the English Perfect, of an auxiliary denoting possession 
 (in Greek ex"), as in English have) and a participle. This 
 periphrastic Perfect, traces of which appear even in classical 
 times (G.M.T. 47), at length entirely displaced the simple 
 Perfect for the expression of completed action, and the process 
 by which the Perfect had become an Aorist in meaning and 
 been succeeded in ofBce as a Perfect tense by another form 
 was complete. See Jebb in Vincent and Dickson, Modern Greek, 
 pp. 326-330. In the New Testament we see the earlier stages 
 
THE PERFECT INDICATIVE. 43 
 
 of this process. The Perfect is still, with very few exceptions, 
 a true Perfect, but it has begun to be an Aorist. In Latin this 
 process was already complete so far as the assimilation of the 
 Perfect and the Aorist was concerned; the new Perfect had 
 not yet appeared. In modern English we see the process at a 
 point midway between that represented by the Greek of the 
 New Testament and that which appears in the Latin of about 
 the same time. Modern German represents about the same 
 stage as modern English, but a little further advanced. 
 
 It should be borne in mind that in determining whether a 
 given Perfect form is a true Perfect in sense or not, the 
 proper English translation is no certain criterion, since the 
 functions of the Perfect tense in the two languages differ so 
 widely. Cf. 52. The Perfect Tre-roiTjKa in 2 Cor. 11 : 26 seems 
 evidently aoristic ; that it " goes quite naturally into Eng- 
 lish" (S. p. 104) does not at all show that it has the usual 
 force of a Greek Perfect. Many Aorists even go quite natu- 
 rally and correctly into English Perfects. Cf. 46. The Per- 
 fects in Luke 9 : 36 ;' 2 Cor. 12 : 17 ; Heb. 7 : 13 (irpoo-eVxT^Kei/) ; 
 9 : 18 ; 11 : 28 ; Eev. 3:3; 5 : 7 are probably also Aoristic 
 Perfects, though it is possible that in all these cases the- 
 thought of an existing result is more or less clearly in mind 
 and gives occasion to the use of the Perfect tense. The 
 Perfect treirpaKev in Matt. 13 : 46 must be either aoristic or 
 historical, probably the former (see Sophocles, Glossary, etc., 
 82, 4). The evidence seems to show clearly that Matthew 
 iegularly used ye'yova in the sense of an Aorist ; some of the 
 instances cannot, without violence, be otherwise explained, and 
 all are naturally so explained. Mark's use of the word is pos- 
 sibly the same, but the evidence is not decisive. All other 
 writers of the New Testament use the form as a true Perfect. 
 
 Still other cases should perhaps be explained as Aoristic 
 Perfects, but for the reasons mentioned in 86 it is impossible 
 
44 THE TENSES. 
 
 to decide with certainty. While there is clear evidence that 
 the Perfect tense was in the New Testament sometimes an 
 Aorist in force, yet it is to be observed that the New Testa- 
 ment writers had perfect command of the distinction between 
 the Aorist and the Perfect. The instances of the Perfect in 
 the sense of the Aorist are confined almost entirely to a few 
 
 forms, icrxrjKa, eiXijt^a, kiapaKa, apy)Ka, and yeyora, and the USe of 
 
 each of these forms in the sense of an Aorist mainly to one 
 or more writers whose use of it is apparently almost a per- 
 sonal idiosyncrasy. Thus the aoristic use of yiyova belongs 
 to Matt. ; of £t\r;<^a to John in Eev. ; of ecrxriKa to Paul ; but 
 see also Heb. 7 : 13. The idiom is therefore confined within 
 narrow limits in the New Testament. Of. Ev. Pet. 23, 31. 
 
 2 Cor. 12 : 9 and 1 John 1 : 10 are probably true Perfects of 
 Completed Action, the latter case being explained by v. 8. 
 John 1 : 18 ; 6 : 37 ; 8 : 33 ; and Heb. 10 : 9 also probably con- 
 vey the thought of existing result, though the use of an adverb 
 of past time serves to give more prominence to the past action 
 than is usually given by a Perfect tense. 
 
 THE PLTJPEEFEOT. 
 
 89. The Pluperfect of Completed Action. The Plu- 
 perfect is used of an action which was complete at a point 
 of past time implied in the context. MA. 847 ; G. 1250, 4. 
 
 Acts 9:21; kol tSSs eis tovto iX.ri\v6a, and he had come hither for this 
 
 intent. 
 John 9 : 22 ; ^Si; yap avveriOtivTo ot 'louSaiot, for the Jews had agreed 
 
 already. See also Luke 8:2; Acts 7 : 44 ; 19 : 32. 
 
 90. "The Pluperfect of Existing State. Verbs which 
 in the Perfect denote a present state, in the Pluperfect 
 denote a past state. HA. 849, c ; Q-. 1263. 
 
THE PLUPERFECT. 45 
 
 Luke 4 : 41 ; gScitrav t6v Xpiarov avrbv elvcu, they knew that he was the 
 Christ. See also John 18 : 16, 18 ; Acts 1 : 10. 
 
 91. Periphrastic Form of the Pluperfect. A peri- 
 phrastic Pluperfect formed by adding the Perfect Participle 
 to the Imperfect of the verb el/iC is somewhat frequent in the 
 New Testament. In classical Greek this was already the only 
 form in the third person plural of liquid and mute verbs, and 
 an occasional form elsewhere. In the New Testament these 
 periphrastic forms are frequently, but not at all uniformly, 
 Pluperfects of existing state; about one-third of the whole 
 number of instances belong to the class of Pluperfects denot- 
 ing completed action, referring to the past act as well as the 
 existing result.. Cf. GMT. 45. 
 
 Matt. 26 : 43 ; ■^crav yap avrtov ot 6<j>6a\iJiol /3ey8ap7;/*ei/ot, for their eyes 
 
 were heavy, lit. weighed down. 
 Luke 2 : 26 ; koI qv avriS K€)(pTijiuxTUTixivov inro tov Trvfu/juiTOi tov aytou, 
 
 and it had been revealed to him hy the Holy Spirit. 
 
 92. The ambiguity of the English sometimes renders it 
 impossible to distinguish in translation between a Pluperfect- 
 of Existing State and an Historical Aorist. Thus in Acts 4 : 27 
 and 31 we must in both cases read were gathered, though the 
 verb in the former case is an Aorist and refers td an act, and 
 in the latter a Perfect and refers to a state. Cf. also the two 
 verbs in Luke 15 : 24. 
 
 93. The simple Future Perfect does not occur in the New 
 Testament. Eespecting Luke 19 : 40, see B. p. 61 ; and the 
 lexicons s.v. 
 
 94. A periphrastic Future Perfect, expressing a future 
 state, occurs in Matt. 16 : 19 ; 18 : 18 ; Luke 12 : 52 ; Heb. 
 2 : 13. 
 
46 THE TENSES. 
 
 TENSES OF THE DEPENDENT MOODS. 
 
 95. The tenses of the dependent moods have in general no 
 reference to time, but characterize the action of the verb in 
 respect to its progress only, representing it as in progress, 
 or completed, or indefinitely, simply as an event. HA. 861 ; 
 G. 1272, 1273 ; G.MT. 85. 
 
 96. The Present of the Dependent Moods is used to 
 represent an action as in progress or as repeated. It may 
 be altogether timeless, the action being thought of without 
 reference to the time of its occurrence ; or its time, as 
 past, present, or future, may be involved in the function 
 of the mood, or may be indicated by the context. 
 
 Phil. 3:1; ra. aira ypa.<i>av vfiiv ifn-ol fj-ev ovk oKvqpov, to he writing the 
 
 same things to you, to me indeed is not irksome. 
 Matt. 5 : 23 ; iav ovv Trpocri^cpijs to SSjow crov i'lrl to BvcruuTTiQpiov, if 
 
 therefore thou shalt he offering thy gift at the altar. 
 Mark 12 : 33 ; /cat to ayairav avrov e^ oA.)ys KapSta's . . . ircpio'a'OTepov 
 
 icmv TrdvTwv Teuv oA.OKavTO)|iiaT(ov kol 6variS)v, and to love him with 
 
 all the heart ... is much more than all whole hurnt offerings and 
 
 sacrifices. 
 
 97. Pbkipheastic Fobm of the Peesbnt. A periphras- 
 tic Present Infinitive, formed by adding a Present Participle 
 to the Present Infinitive of ei/j,^ and a periphrastic Present 
 Imperative, formed by adding a Present Participle to the 
 Present Imperative of a'/nt, occur rarely in the New Testament. 
 Luke 9 : 18 ; 11 : 1 ; Matt. 6 : 25 ; Luke 19 : 17. Cf . 20, and 
 431. 
 
 98. The Aorist of the Dependent Moods represents 
 the action expressed by the verb as a simple event or fact, 
 
OF THE DEPENDENT MOODS. 47 
 
 without reference either to its progress or to the existence 
 of its result. It may be used with reference to an action 
 or event in its entirety (indefinite), or with reference to 
 the inception of a state (inceptive), or with reference to 
 the accomplishment of an attempt (resultative). When 
 indefinite, it may be used of momentary or extended ac- 
 tions or of a series of events. Cf. 35, and 39. 
 
 As in the case of the Present tense, the time of the 
 action, if indicated at all, is shown, not by the tense, but 
 by some fact outside of the tense. 
 
 Luke 9 : 54; ciiroj/xtv irvp Kara^^vai, shall we bid fire to come down? 
 
 John 15 : 9 ; fictvare iv rrj ayoLTrr) ry ifirj, abide ye in my love. 
 
 Luke 17 : 4 ; koI iav eTrraKts t^s rjixipa^ a/iapr'^fTri ets ere . . . a.<fyr](TtK 
 
 avTiS, and if he sin against thee seven times in the day . . . thou shall 
 
 forgive him. 
 Acts 15 : 13 ; /utTa Se to (nyrja-ai avrovs, aTrCKpWrj 'laxojjSos, and after 
 
 they had become silent, James answered. 
 Acts 11 : 17 ; eyai rt's rjfjoriv SwaTos KiaXvcrai tov 6e.6v, who was I that I 
 
 could withstand God ? 
 
 Rem. Compare the Presents and Aorists in the following examples : 
 
 Matt. 6 : 11 ; tov aprov rifmv tov ijriova-cov 86s wiv a^p^pov, give us 
 
 this day our daily bread. 
 Luke 11:3; tov apTov rjpxav tov iTnovmov SiSov rip.lv to Kaff iipipav, 
 
 give us day by day our daily bread. 
 Acts 18 : 9 ; prj <l>o^av, aWa AoXei koI pij mayinjarrii, be not in fear, but 
 
 [continue to'] speak and hold not thy peace. 
 Matt. 5 : 17 ; ovk ^Xdm> KaToXwat aXXa irX-qpSurai, I came not to destroy, 
 
 but to fulfil. 
 John 9:4; ij/xas Set tpya^eo-^at to. epya tov mptj^avTos pe etos ■^pipa. 
 
 i(TTiv, we must work [be doing] the works of him that sent me while 
 
 it is day. 
 
 99. The Future Optative does not occur in the New Tes- 
 tament. 
 
48 THE TENSES. 
 
 The Future Infinitive denotes time Matively to the time of 
 the principal verb. It is thus an exception to the general prin- 
 ciple of the timelessness of the dependent moods. 
 
 Acts 23 : 30 ; //.rjvijfleMnjs Se jiioi eirt/3ovX^s as rov avSpa ea-etrOai, and 
 
 when it was shown to me that there would be a plot against the man. 
 
 100. The Infinitive jneWav -with the Infinitive of another 
 verb dependent on it has the force of a Future Infinitive of the 
 latter verb. The dependent Infinitive is usually a Present, 
 sometimes a Future. It is regularly a Future in the New- 
 Testament in the case of the verb d/u. 
 
 Acts 28 : 6 ; ol 8e irpoacSoKtov avTov uteWeiv TriixvpadOai. rj KarairLirTiiv 
 a<t>v(j} veKpov, but they expected that he would swell or fall down sud- 
 denly. See also Acts 19 : 27 ; 27 : 10, etc. 
 
 101. The Perfect of the Dependent Moods is used of 
 completed action. As in the Indicative, the thought may 
 be directed both to the action and its result, or only to the 
 result. The time of the action is indicated, as in the 
 Present and Aorist, not by the tense but by the context or 
 by the function of the mood. 
 
 Acts 25 : 25 ; iyd) 8e KareXafSofu/jv fiiyStv at^utv avrov Oavarov ireirpaxivai, 
 but I found that he had committed nothing worthy of death. 
 
 Acts 26 : 32 ; airoXiKvaOai eSwaro o avOponro'S ovtos, tJiis man might have 
 been set at liberty. 
 
 Mark 4 : 39 ; StwTra, Trct^iifiMCTO, peace, be still. 
 
 102. An Intensive Pekfbct may occur in the dependent 
 moods as in the Indicative. 
 
 1 Tim. 6 : 17 ; rots irXoucrtois ev to? vvv alSivt TrapdyyeXXc fXTj v\jir]\oi^povuv 
 jur/Se fiXiriKevai iiri ttXovtov dSj/Xori^n, charge them that are rich in this 
 present world, that they be not high minded, nor have their hope set on 
 the uncertainty of riches. 
 
OF THE DEPENDENT MOODS. 49 
 
 103. Periphrastic Form of the Perfect. In the New 
 Testament as in classical Greek, the Perfect Subjunctive Pas- 
 sive is formed by adding a Perfect Participle to the Present 
 Subjunctive of the verb clfii. These forms are in the New- 
 Testament most commonly Perfects of Existing State. John 
 16:24; 17:19; 2 Cor. 1:9; etc. See also Luke 12:35, 
 which furnishes an instance of a periphrastic Perfect Imperar 
 tive, enjoining the maintenance of the state denoted by the 
 Perfect Participle. Cf. 20 and 431. 
 
 104. Tenses of the Infinitive after Prepositions. 
 The general principle that the tenses of the dependent moods 
 characterize the action of the verb only as respects progress 
 and are properly timeless holds also respecting the Infinitive 
 after prepositions. The Infinitive itself is properly timeless, 
 though the time-relation is usually suggested by the meaning 
 of the preposition or by this combined with that which the 
 tense implies respecting the progress of the action. 
 
 105. By /ierd with the Infinitive antecedence of the action denoted by 
 the Infinitive to that denoted by the principal verb is expressed, but this 
 meaning manifestly lies in the preposition, not in the tense of the verb. 
 That the Aorist Infinitive is almost constantly used (the Perfect occurs 
 once, Heb. 10 : 15) is natural, since in dating one event by another the 
 latter is u.sually conceived of simply as an event without reference to its 
 progress. See Matt. 26 : 32 ; Luke 12 : 5 ; Acts 1:3; 1 Cor. 11 : 25, etc. 
 
 106. By irp6 with the Infinitive antecedence of the action of the prin- 
 cipal verb to that of the Infinitive is expressed, and the action of the 
 Infinitive is accordingly i-elatively future. But here also the time relation 
 is expressed wholly by the preposition. The reason for the almost uniform 
 use of the Aorist (the Present clvai occurs John 17 : 5) is the same as in 
 the case of fierd. See Luke 2 : 21 ; 22 : 15 ; John 1 : 48. 
 
 107. After eU and irpSs the Infinitive usually refers to an action which 
 is future with respect to the principal verb. This also results from the 
 meaning of the prepositions, which, expressing purpose or tendency, 
 necessarily point to an action subsequent to that of the verb which the 
 
50 THE TENSES. 
 
 prepositional phrase limits. "When irpds means with reference to, the time- 
 relation is indicated only by the necessary relation of the things spoken 
 of. See Luke 18 : 1. All three tenses of the Infinitive occur after eis 
 and both Present and Aorist after irp<is, the difference marked by the tense 
 being not of time but of progress. See Rom. 12 : 2 ; Phil. 1 : 23 ; Heb. 
 11 : 3 ; Matt. 6:1; Mark 13 : 22. Cf. 409-414. 
 
 108. After Sti the three Infinitives distinguish the action as respects 
 the writer's conception of its progress, as continued, completed, or indefi- 
 nite. Time relations are secondary and suggested. The Aorist Infinitive 
 occurs only in Matt. 24 : 12, v?here ri ir'K-riBvvdrjvai. tiJk dm/itav apparently 
 refers to the multiplication of iniquity as a fact of that time without 
 exclusive reference to its preceding the action of the principal verb. The 
 Present Infinitive refers to action in progress usually shown by the conr 
 text to be contemporaneous with the action of the principal verb. See 
 Matt, 13 : 5, 6 ; Acts 12 : 20 ; Heb. 10 : 25 ; Jas. 4 : 2. The Perfect Infini- 
 tive has its usual force, denoting an action standing complete. The time 
 of the state of completeness appears from the context ; it is usually that 
 of the principal verb. See Acts 8:11; 18 : 2 ; 27 : 9 ; but cf. Mark 5 : 4, 
 where SeSitrdai. denotes an action whose result was existing, not at the 
 time of speaking, but at an earlier time. Cf. 408. 
 
 109. After iv we naturally expect to find only the Present Infinitive, 
 the preposition by its meaning suggesting an action thought of as in 
 progress ; and this is indeed the more common usage. Luke, however, 
 who uses iv with the Infinitive far more frequently than all the other New 
 Testament writers, has iv with the Aorist Infinitive nine times, and the 
 same construction occurs in Hebrews twice, and in 1 Corinthians once. 
 Since the Aorist Infinitive conceives of an action simply as an event with- 
 out thought of its continuance, it is natural to take iv with it in the same 
 sense which the preposition hears with nouns which denote an event rather 
 than a continued action or state (cf. 98), viz. as marking the time at which 
 the action expressed by the principal verb takes place. The preposition 
 is this sense does not seem necessarily to denote exact coincidence, but 
 in no case expresses antecedence. In 1 Cor. 11 : 21 and Heb. 3 : 12 the 
 action of the Infinitive cannot be antecedent to that of the principal verb ; 
 see also Gen. 19 : 16. In Luke 9 : 34 such a relation is very difiScult, 
 and in Luke 14 : 1 improbable in view of the Imperfect tense following. 
 In Luke 2 : 27 ; 11 : 37 ; 19 : 15 ; 24 : 30 ; Acts 11 : 15, the action denoted 
 by the Infinitive, strictly speaking, precedes the action of the principal 
 verb, yet may be thought of by the writer as marking more or less exactly 
 the time at which the action of the verb takes place. As respects the 
 
OP THE DEPENDENT MOODS. 51 
 
 relation of the action to that of the principal verh, the Aorist Infinitive 
 after iv may be compared to the Aorist Indicative after Sre, which simply "" 
 marks in general the time of the event denoted by the principal verb, 
 leaving it to the context to indicate the precise nature of the chronological 
 relation. See Matt. 12 : 3 ; 21 : 34 ; 27 : 31 ; John 19 : 6, 30. Similarly 
 indefinite is the use of the English preposition on with verbal nouns, as, 
 e.g., Oh the completion of his twenty-first year he becomes of legal age; 
 On the arrival of the train the procession will be formed. Luke 3 : 21 
 cannot in view of the Aorist tense be rendered, while all the people were 
 being baptized, nor in view of the preposition 4v, after all the people had 
 been baptized, but must be understood as affirming that the baptism of 
 Jesus occurred at the time (in general) of the baptism of all the people. 
 liUke 9 : 36 can only mean, when the voice came, a meaning entirely 
 appropriate to the context. Cf. 415. 
 
 110. The Tenses of the Dependent Moods in Indi- 
 rect Discourse. The Optative and Infinitive in indirect 
 discourse preserve the conception of the action as respects 
 progress v^hich belonged to the direct discourse. The Present 
 Optative and Infinitive represent tense forms which in the 
 direct discourse denoted action in progress. Similarly the 
 Aorist of these moods represents forms which expressed action 
 indefinitely, and the Perfect stands for forms denoting com- 
 pleted action. The Future represents a Future Indicative of 
 the direct discourse. In the majority of cases each tense of 
 the Optative or Infinitive in indirect discourse stands for the 
 same tense of the Indicative or Subjunctive of the direct form. 
 Yet it is doubtful whether, strictly speaking, the dependent 
 moods in indirect discourse express time-relations. The cor- 
 respondence of tenses probably rather results from the neces- 
 sity of preserving the original conception of the action as 
 respects its progress, and the time-relation is conveyed by the 
 context rather than by the tense of the verb. 
 
 Rem. Cf. Br. 161. " Der opt. und inf. aor. von vergangenen Hand- 
 lungen als Vertreter des ind. aor. in der or. obi. entbehrten ebenso wie opt. 
 und inf. praes. (§ 158) des Ausdruoks der Zeitbeziehung, die nur aus der 
 
52 THE TENSES. 
 
 Natur der in der Eede in Verbindung gebrachten Verbalbegriffe oder aus 
 der ganzen in Eede stehenden Situation erkannt wurde." Cf. &MT. 
 85, contra. 
 
 111. The Present Optative in indirect discourse in the New- 
 Testament usually represents the Present Indicative of the 
 direct form. Luke 1 : 29 ; 3 : 15 ; Acts 17 : 11 ; etc. In Acts 
 25 : 16, it stands for a Present Subjunctive of the direct form. 
 The Optative with av is taken unchanged from the direct dis- 
 course. Luke 1 : 62 ; 6 : 11 ; etc. The Aorist Optative occurs 
 in indirect discourse only in Acts 25 : 16, where it represents 
 a Subjunctive of the direct form referring to the future. 
 Neither the Perfect Optative nor the Future Optative occurs in 
 the New Testament. 
 
 112. The Present Infinitive in indirect discourse in the 
 New Testament stands for the Present Indicative of the direct 
 form. Matt. 22 : 23 ; Luke 11 : 18 ; 20 : 41 ; Acts 4 : 32 ; 1 Cor. 
 7 : 36 ; 1 John 2 : 9. Similarly the Perfect Infinitive rep- 
 resents the Perfect Indicative of the direct discourse. Luke 
 22 : 34 ; John 12 : 29 ; Acts 14 : 19 ; 2 Tim. 2 : 18. The Pres- 
 ent Infinitive as the representative of the Imperfect, and the 
 Perfect Infinitive as the representative of the Pluperfect 
 (G.MT. 119, 123) apparently do not occur in the New Testa- 
 ment. The Future Infinitive is, as stated above (99), an 
 exception to the general rule of the timelessness of the de- 
 pendent moods. It represents a Future Indicative of the 
 direct form. John 21 : 26; Acts 23 : 30 ; Heb. 3 : 18. 
 
 113. The Aorist Infinitive occurs in the New Testament, 
 as in classical Greek, as a regular construction after verbs 
 signifying to hope, to promise, to swear, to command, etc. In 
 this case the action denoted by the Aorist Infinitive is, by the 
 nature of the case, future with reference to that of the princi- 
 
OF THE PARTICIPLE. 53 
 
 pal verb, but this time-relation is not expressed by the tense. 
 The Aorist Infinitive is here as elsewhere timeless. These 
 instances, though closely akin in force to those of indirect 
 discourse, are not usually included under that head. Of. 
 GMT. 684. 
 
 114. The Aorist Infinitive referring to what is future with 
 reference to the principal verb also occurs in a few instances 
 after verbs of assertion. These must be accounted cases in 
 which the Aorist Infinitive in indirect discourse is timeless. 
 
 Luke 24 : 46 ; on outojs yeypaTrrai iraOtiv tov xP'-'^'^ov koI avcuTTrjvai Ik 
 vCKpiav Trj TpLTy yift-ipa, thus it is written, that the Christ should suffer, 
 and rise again from the dead the third day. See also Luke 2:26; 
 Acts 3 : 18. Cf. Hom. Od. 2. 171, c^ij/ii reXevTij^rat airavra, the 
 accomplishment being still future (Carter in CI. Rev. Feb. 1891, 
 p. 5). Plat. Euthyd. 278, C. et^ariji' iTriBcL^acrOai ttjv TrpoTpcTTTiKYjv 
 <TO(j)uiv, they said that they would give a sample of the hortatory wisdom. 
 Protag. .316,0. rmiTO Sk merai ol /xaXuTTa yeviaOax, el crol fuyyevotro, 
 and he supposes that he would be most likely to attain this if he should 
 associate with you; and other examples in Riddell, Digest of Platonic 
 Idioms, § 81 ; also in G.MT. 127. 
 
 There is apparently no instance in the New Testament of 
 the Aorist Infinitive in indirect discourse representing the 
 Aorist Indicative of the direct form. Cf . 390. 
 
 TENSES OP THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 115. The participle is a verbal adjective, sharing in part 
 the characteristics of both the verb and the adjective ; it de- 
 scribes its subject as a doer of the action denoted by the verb. 
 For the proper understanding of a participle three things must 
 be observed : 
 
 (a) The grammatical agreement. 
 
 (&) The use of the tense. 
 
 (c) The modal significance, or logical force. 
 
54 THE TENSES. 
 
 116. In grammatical agreement, a participle follows the 
 rule for adjectives, agreeing with its noun Or pronoun in gen- 
 der, number, and case. 
 
 117. The logical force of the participle, usually the most 
 important consideration from the point of view of interpreta- 
 tion, will be treated at a later point. See 419 ff. The matter 
 now under consideration is the significance of the tense of a 
 participle. 
 
 118. The tenses of the participle, like those of the other 
 dependent moods, do not, in general, in themselves denote time. 
 To this general rule the Future Participle is the leading ex- 
 ception, its functions being such as necessarily to express time- 
 relations. The fundamental distinguishing mark of each of 
 the other tenses is the same for the participle as for the 
 dependent moods in general. The Present denotes action in 
 progress ; the Aorist, action conceived of indefinitely ; the 
 Perfect, completed action. These distinctions, however, im- 
 pose certain limitations upon the classes of events which may 
 be expressed by the participle of each tense, and thus indirectly 
 and to a limited extent, the tense of the participle is an indica- 
 tion of the time-relation of the event denoted by it. Since for 
 purposes of interpretation it is often needful to define the 
 time-relation of an event expressed by the participle, it becomes 
 expedient to treat the tenses of the participle apart from 
 those of the dependent moods in general. 
 
 THE PEESENT PARTIOIPLE. 
 
 119. The Present Participle of Simultaneous Action. 
 
 The Present Participle most frequently denotes an action 
 in progress, simultaneous vs^ith the action of the principal 
 verb. HA. 856 ; (?. 1288. 
 
THE PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 55 
 
 Mark 16 1 20 ; ckcivoi 8e efeA6dvT£s iKrjpv^av wavraxov, tov Kvpiov 
 (TwepymivTO's, and they went forth and preached everywhere, the Lord 
 working with them. 
 
 Acts 10 : 44 ; Irt XaXovvTos tov Ilerpov to. p-qpara ravra eTreTretre to 
 irvevpa to ayiov eirt Trai/Tas Toirs aKovovrai tov Xoyov, while Peter 
 was yet speaking these words, the Holy Ghost fell on all them which 
 heard the word. 
 
 Kem. The action of the verb and that of the participle may be of the 
 same extent (Mark 16 : 20), but are not necessarily so. Oftener the 
 action of the verb falls within the period covered by the participle (Acts 
 10:44). 
 
 Even a subsequent action Is occasionally expressed by a Present 
 Participle, which in this case stands after the verb. Cf. 145. 
 
 Acts 19 : 9 ; at^iLpicrev Toiis paQrfo.^, KaO' -^p-cpav SiaAeyo/ievos fv Trj 
 CT^o^J? Tt)pawov, he separated the disciples, reasoning daily in the 
 school of Tyrannus. See also Acts 17 : 13 ; 18 : 23. 
 
 120. The Present Participle of Identical Action. 
 
 The Present Participle agreeing with the subject of a verb 
 not infrequently denotes the same action which is ex- 
 pressed by the verb. 
 
 John 6:6; toijto 8e IXiyev irapd^iov ovrov, and this he said trying him. 
 See also Matt. 27 : 41 ; John 21 : 19 ; Acts 9 : 22 ; Gal. 3 : 23. 
 
 121. The verb and the participle of identical action, though 
 denoting the same action, usually describe it from a different 
 point of view. The relation between the different points of 
 view varies greatly. It may b^ the relation of fact to method, 
 as in Acts 9 : 22 ; 15 : 24, 29 ; of outward form to inner sig- 
 nificance or quality, as in Luke 22 : 65 ; or of act to purpose 
 or result, as in Matt. 16 : 1 ; John 6 : 6. 
 
 122. A Present Participle of Identical Action, since it de- 
 notes action in progress, most naturally accompanies a verb 
 denoting action in progress. Sometimes, however, a Pres- 
 ent Participle accompanies an Aorist verb denoting the same 
 
56 THE TENSES. 
 
 action ; regularly so in the phrase aircKpivaro {airiKpiOrf) Xeyav ; 
 see Mark 15 : 9 ; Luke 3 : 16 ; John 1 : 26 ; etc. 
 
 Acts 15 : 24 ; Irapa^av v/uSs A.0701S ava<7Ke.vdZfiVTC.% ras i/'v^as vimv, 
 they have troubled you with words, subverting your souls. See also 
 Acts 1:3; 22:4; Gen. 43 : 6. 
 
 Similarly a Present Participle representing the action as in 
 progress, may accompany an Aoristic Future, which conceives 
 of it simply as an event. Acts 15 : 29 ; 1 Mace. 12 : 22. 
 
 123. The General Present Participle. The Present 
 Participle is also used without reference to time or prog- 
 ress, simply defining its subject as belonging to a certain 
 class, i.e. the class of those who do the action denoted 
 by the verb. The participle in this case becomes a simple 
 adjective or noun and is, like any other adjective or noun, 
 timeless and indefinite. B. pp. 296 f . ; WM. p. 444 ; WT. 
 p. 353. 
 
 Acts 10 : 22 ; Kopv^Aios kKo.Tovrapyrj'i, avi}p hiKOJXK Kai ^o^ovpjOKK 
 
 Tov 6e6v, Cornelius a centurion, a righteous and God-fearing man. 
 Mark 5 : 16 ; ttuis iyeviro tc3 Sai/u>v(^o/xei/a>, what had happened to the 
 
 demoniac. 
 Gal. 6:6; KotvwvetVo) Si 6 KarrjXovp.O'Oi tov Xoyov t<o KaTrjxc^vri iv 
 
 irSxTLv dya^ois, but let him that is taught in the word commvnicate to 
 
 him that teacheth in all good things. 
 
 124. A class may consist of those who habitually or con- 
 stantly do a given act, or of those who once do the act the 
 single doing of which is the mark of the class. The former 
 case is illustrated in Matt. 6:6; the latter in Rev. 14 : 13. 
 
 Matt. 5:6; paKapioi 01 irai/wTes koX Suj/S)vtk ttjv 8iKai.o(Tvvr}v, blessed 
 
 are they that hunger and thirst after righteousness. 
 Rev. 14 : 13 ; paKapioi. 01 vcKpoi 01 Jv Kvpuo atroOvria-Kovm, blessed are 
 
 the dead which die in the Lord. See also Matt. 7 : 13. 
 
THE PKBSENT PARTICIPLE. 57 
 
 In the first class of cases the Present Participle only can be 
 used ; in the second class either an Aorist (as in Matt. 23 : 20 ; 
 26 : 52; John 16 : 2, et al.) or a Present may occur, and that, 
 either in the plural designating the class as such, or in the 
 singular designating an individual of the class. 
 
 Thus iravrl &v8pilnr<f TrepiTenvojiivif (Gal. 5:3; cf . 6 : 13) does not mean, 
 to every man that is wont to be circumcised, but, to every man that is 
 circumcised, i.e. that receives circumcision (R.V., correctly though not 
 literally). So also In Heb. 5 : 1 \a/i.^avd items does not mean, one that is 
 wont to be taken, but, that is taken. Being once taken is the mark of the 
 class here referred to, as being once circumcised is the mark of the class 
 referred to in Gal. 5 : 3. The customariness applies not to the action of 
 the individual member of the class, but to that of the class as a whole ; as 
 in Heb. 5 : 1, the Present Indicative KaeiarnTai may be rendered, is wont 
 to be appointed, not in the sense, each one is wont to be lrepeatedly'\ 
 appointed, but, it is wont to happen to each that he is appointed. Cf. 125. 
 In Luke 16 : 18 irSs 6 dwo'Kioiv means not, every one that is wont to 
 divorce, still less, every one that has divorced, but, every one that divorces. 
 
 125. Through the ambiguity of the English Passive form, 
 such Present Participles as those just referred to (124) are 
 easily taken by the English interpreter as equivalent to Per- 
 fect Participles, but always to the greater or less distortion of 
 the meaning of the passage.^ 
 
 Thus in Gal. 5 : 3 (see 124) TrepiTenvon^tfis not equivalent to a Perfect, 
 every circumcised man. The apostle is not speaking of circumcision as 
 an accomplished fact, but of becoming circumcised. Similarly Heb. 5 : 1 
 refers not to one that has been taken (German: ist genommen leorden), 
 but that is taken (German: wird genommen). In Heb. 5:4 KtCKoinevos 
 is one that is (not, has been ) called. In Luke 13 : 23, a dXlyoi. oi 
 
 1 This ambiguity of the English may be illustrated by the form is 
 written. In the sentence, /{ is written in your law, etc., is written is a 
 Perfect of Existing State, and is expressed by the Greek Perfect yiypa-nrai. 
 The German would be ist geschrieben. In the sentence, The name of each 
 scholar is written in the register as he enters the school, the same form 
 is a Present of customary action, and would be expressed in Greek by 
 ypd^erai, and in German by wird geschrieben. 
 
58 THE TENSES. 
 
 (ruf6/iewi, the participle is undoubtedly a General Present, the inquiry 
 being neither on the one hand as to the number of those that are already 
 saved (Perfect of Existing State) or that have been saved (Perfect of Com- 
 pleted Action) nor, on the other, with reference to those that are being 
 saved (Progressive Present of Simultaneous Action), but with reference 
 to those that are [i.e. become'} saved. Cf. Luther's version, meinst du, 
 dass wenige selig werden? and Weizsacker's, sind es Mjerai^re, die gerettet 
 werden? 
 
 The same participle in Acts 2 : 47 ; 1 Cor. 1 : 18 ; 2 Cor. 2 : 15, may 
 be understood in the same way, and be rendered, we that are (in the sense 
 we that become') saved, or may be taken as in R.V. as a Progressive 
 Present of Simultaneous Action. It cannot mean the saved in the sense 
 of those that have been saved. The statement of Dr. T. W. Chambers in 
 J.B.L. June 1886, p. 40, that "the passive participle of the present tense 
 in Greek is often, if not generally, used to express a completed action," 
 is wholly incorrect, and derives all its verisimilitude from the ambiguity 
 of the English Passive forms. 
 
 126. A General Present Participle sometimes occurs in the singular 
 when the person to whom it refers constitutes the class designated. This 
 limitation of the phrase to an individual is accomplished, however, not by 
 the participle, but by its limitations. John 13 : 11, rbv trapadidSiiTa a{iT6v, 
 probably means simply his betrayer. The participle vrapaSiSoiis alone 
 designates any one belonging to the class of betrayers. It is the addition 
 of the article and an object that restricts the participle to one person. 
 
 127. The Present Participle for the Imperfect. The 
 
 Present Participle is also sometimes used as an Imperfect 
 to denote a continued action antecedent to that of the 
 principal verb. HA. 856, a ; a. 1289 ; a.WY. 140. 
 
 Matt. 2 : 20 ; Tt6vriKa<nv yap oi ^r/Tovvrei rr/v i/'uxV'' ''"'''' ircuSiov, for 
 they are dead that were seeking the young child's life. See also 
 John 12 : 17 ; Acts 4 : 34 (of. v. 37) ; 10 : 7 ; Gal. 1 : 23. 
 
 128. The following uses of the Present Participle are 
 closely analogous to the uses of the Present Indicative already 
 described under similar names. They are of somewhat infre- 
 quent occurrence in the New Testament. 
 
THE AOEIST PARTICIPLE. 69 
 
 129. (a) The Conative Present. 
 
 Matt. 23 : 13 ( WH. et al., 14) ; oiSi rovis d<Tepxon€vovi d^iCTE eixTtXedv, 
 neither suffer ye them that, are entering in to enter. See also Acts 
 28 : 23. 
 
 130. (6) The Present for the Future, the action de- 
 noted being thought of as future with reference to the time of 
 the principal verb. 
 
 Acts 21 : 3 ; exeto-c yap to irXoiov ^v a.iro^opTii,6jt,Evov tov yofiov, for 
 there the ship was to unlade her burden. 
 
 131. (c) The Present of Past Action still in Progress, 
 the action denoted beginning before the action of the principal 
 verb and continuing in progress at the time denoted by the 
 latter. 
 
 Acts 9 : 33 ; ejpev Se ckcI avOpanrov tlvo. ovopan Alveav i^ erwv 6kt(o 
 KaTaKei/jLevov iirl Kpa^drrov, and there he found a certain man named 
 JSneas, who had been lying on a bed eight years. See also Matt. 
 9 : 20 ; Mark 5:25; Luke 8 : 43 ; John 5:5; Acts 24 : 10. 
 
 TEE AOEIST PAETIOIPLE. 
 
 132. The general statement made under 118, that the 
 tenses of the participle do not in general in themselves denote 
 time, applies also to the Aorist Participle. It is very impor- 
 tant for the right interpretation of the Aorist Participle that 
 it be borne in mind that the proper and leading function of the 
 tense is not to express time, but to mark the fact that the 
 action of the verb is conceived of indefinitely, as a simple 
 event. The assumption that the Aorist Participle properly 
 denotes past time, from the point of view either of the speaker 
 or of the principal verb, leads to constant misinterpretation of 
 the form. The action denoted by the Aorist Participle may 
 be past, present, or future with reference to the speaker, and 
 
60 THE TENSES. 
 
 antecedent to, coincident with, or subsequent to, the action of 
 the principal verb. The Aorist Participle, like the participles 
 of the other tenses, may be most simply thought of as a noun 
 or adjective, the designation of one who performs the action 
 denoted by the verb, and like any other noun or adjective 
 timeless. The distinction of the Aorist Participle is not that 
 it expresses a different time-relation from that expressed by 
 the Present or Perfect, but that it conceives of the action de- 
 noted by it, not as in progress (Present), nor as an existing 
 result (Perfect), but as a simple fact. Such an adjective or 
 noun will not ordinarily be used if contemporaneousness 
 with the action of the principal verb is distinctly in mind, 
 since contemporaneousness suggests action in progress, and 
 action in progress is expressed, not by the Aorist, but by 
 the Present tense, ll^or will it be used when the mind 
 distinctly contemplates the existence of the result of the 
 action, it being the function, not of the Aorist, but of 
 the Perfect, to express existing result. Nor, again, will 
 the Aorist noun be used if the writer desires distinctly 
 to indicate that the doer of the action will perform it in 
 time subsequent to that of the principal verb, the Aorist be- 
 ing incapable in itself of suggesting subsequence or futurity. 
 But, when these cases have been excluded, there remains a 
 considerable variety of relations to which the Aorist is appli- 
 cable, the common mark of them all being that the action 
 denoted by the participle is thought of simply as an event. 
 Among these various relations the case of action antecedent 
 to that of the principal verb furnishes the largest number 
 of instances. It is thus, numerically considered, the leading 
 use of the Aorist Participle, and this fact has even to some 
 extent reacted on the meaning of the tense, so that there is 
 associated with the tense as a secondary, acquired, and wholly 
 subordinate characteristic a certain suggestion of antecedence. 
 
THE AOKIST PARTICIPLE. 61 
 
 Yet this use is no more than the other uses a primary function 
 of the tense, nor did it ever displace the- others,iOr force them 
 into a position of subordination or abnormality. The instances 
 in which the action denoted by the participle is not antecedent 
 to the action of the principal verb are as normal as that in 
 which it is so, and were evidently so recognized alike in clas- 
 sical and in New Testament Greek. The Aorist Participle of 
 Antecedent Action does not denote antecedence ; it is used of 
 antecedent action, where antecedence is implied, not by the 
 Aorist tense as a tense of past time, but in some other way. 
 The same principle holds respecting all the uses of this tense. 
 The' following section (133) is accordingly a definition of the 
 constant function of the Aorist Participle, while 134, 139, and 
 142 enumerate the classes of events with reference to which it 
 may be used. 
 
 Kem. Compare the following statements of modern grammarians : 
 
 "Since the participle, like the other non-augmented forms of the 
 aorist, has nothing whatever to do with the denotation of past time, and 
 since time previous to a point in past time is not the less a kind of past 
 time, we do not here understand at once how the participle became used 
 in this sense. But the enigma is solved when we examine the nature of 
 the aorist and participle. The latter, an adjective in origin, fixes on© 
 action in relation to another. The action which is denoted by the finite 
 verb is the principal one. When the secondary action continues side by 
 side with the principal action, it must stand [waparaTi.Kws'] in the participle 
 of the present ; if, again, referred to the future, the proper sign of the 
 future is needed ; and similarly, the perfect participle serves to express 
 an action regarded as complete in reference to the principal action. If, 
 however, it is intended to denote the secondary action without any 
 reference to continuousness and completion and futurity, but merely 
 as a point or moment, the aorist participle alone remains for this. 
 purpose. We indeed, by a sort of necessity, regard a point which 
 is fixed in reference to another action as prior to it, but, strictly 
 speaking, this notion of priority in past time is not signified by the 
 aorist participle." — Curtius, Elucidations of the Student's Greek Gram- 
 mar, pp. 216 f. 
 
62 THE TENSES. 
 
 " An und fur sich bezeichnet das aoristisohe Partioip ebenso wenig als 
 irgend eine andere aoristische Form ausser dem Indicativ, der in seinem 
 Augment ein deutliohes Merkmal der Vergangenheit hat, etwas Vergan- 
 genes. Das Particip des kiirzesten und von uns genauer betrachteten 
 Aorists, dessen Stamm eben nur die Verbalgrundform selbst ist, ist also 
 nur Particip an und fUr sicli, das beisst es bezeiclinet eine Handlung, mit 
 der noch kein Satz als abgeschlossen gedacht werden soil ; iin Uebrigen 
 liegt sein Characteristisches fiir uns nur darin, dass es als aoristisohes 
 Partioip nioht wie das prasentisohe Particip aucb die Bedeutung der 
 Dauer in sich enthalt, sondern etwas bezeichnet, bei dem die Zeitdauer, 
 die es in Anspruch genommen, nicht weiter in Frage kommen, oder das 
 tiberhaupt nur als ganz kurze Zeit dauernd bezeichnet werden soil." 
 — Leo Meyer, Griechisohe Aoriste, pp. 124, 125. 
 
 " In satzen wie iireib^ elTrep, dirT/ei; elir^v ravra diryet ; idv tl (ptiyojaiv, 
 AvadTTtaovraL (Xen. An. IV. 5, 8) ersohien die syntaktisch untergeordnete 
 aoristische Handlung gegenuber dem anderen Vorgang darum als vergan- 
 gen, well die beiden Handlungen sachlich versohieden waren. Das Bedeu- 
 tungsmoment der ungeteilten VoUstandigkeit und Abgesohlossenheit der 
 Handlung liess die Vorstellung, dass die Haupthandlung in den Verlauf 
 der Nebenhandlung hineinfalle und neben ihr hergehe (Gleichzeitigkeit), 
 nicht zu. Die Vorstellung der Vergangenheit in Bezug auf das Haupt- 
 verbum war also nicht durch die Aoristform an sich, sondern durch die 
 besondere Natur der beiden Verbalbegriffe, die zu einander in Beziehung 
 gesetzt wurden, gegeben. Man erkennt diesen Sachverhalt am besten 
 durch Vergleichung mit Satzen wie E 98, koX pdX sTaUi^ovTa rvxiiv Kurk 
 Seiibv iSfwv, Herod. 5, 24, e5 iiroiriras dTrutA/iexos, Xen. An. I. 3, 17, /3ou- 
 Xoliiifv S' 4v dKovTOi dirMv Kipov \a8eiv airbv direXSdiii, Thuk. 6, 4, ereiri Si 
 iyyirara Sktu Kal ixarbv iierd t^v (T(t>eTipav otKi.<nv FeXiJoi 'AKpiyaiira 
 tfiKiffaVf TT]V fiiv irbXiv dirb tov 'AKpdyovTOS Trora^oO dvofjidffaiTeSf oLKLffrds di 
 irof^aavTes * Apurrbvovv Kal TLvo-tIXov, vhp.Lp.a Sk tcl VeXtpujv 56vTes, WO die 
 Vorstellung einer Zeitverschiedenbeit darum nicht entstehen konnte, 
 ■weil es sich um ein und denselben Vorgang handelte und das Partizip 
 Oder die Partizipien nur eine, beziehungsweise mehrere besondere Seiten 
 der Handlung des regierenden Verbums zum Ausdruck brachten." — 
 Br. 161. 
 
 133. The Aorist Participle is used of an action con- 
 ceived of as a simple event. 
 
 It may be used with reference to an action or event in 
 its entirety (indefinite), or with reference to the inception 
 
THE AOKIST PARTICIPLE. 63 
 
 of a State (inceptive), or with reference to the accomplish- 
 ment of an attempt (resultative). When indefinite it may 
 be used of momentary or extended actions or of a series of 
 events. Cf. 35, and 39, and see examples below. 
 
 134. The Aorist Participle of Antecedent Action. 
 
 The Aorist Participle is most frequently used of an action 
 antecedent in time to the action of the principal verb. 
 
 Matt. 4:2; koI vricrTevcra^ ■^/xepas T€a-<jepd.KovTa koI vvxras Teo-o-Epa- 
 Kovra va-repov iirdvacrei/, and having fasted forty days and forty 
 nights, he afterward hungered. 
 
 Mark 1 : 31 ; ijyApe.v avTrjv KpaTi^(rai t^s X"P°s, and taking her by the 
 hand he raised her up. 
 
 John 5 : 13 ; o Si laOeU ovk gSei rts etrnv, but he that had been healed 
 wist not who it was. 
 
 Acts 14 : 19 ; koI Treio-avTES Toiis oxXous Kal XiOdcravTe's tov HavXov, 
 icTvpov 2^0) T^s iroXetos, and having persuaded the multitudes they 
 stoned Paul, and dragged him out of the city. 
 
 Acts 27 : 13 ; So^avres t^s irpodicreoK KeKparrjKivaL apavra acro-ov 
 vapeXeyovTo ttjv Kpiyrijv, supposing that they had obtained their pur- 
 pose, they weighed anchor, and sailed along Crete. 
 
 Kom. 5:1; SucawofleVres ovv £k TrwrTctus eipi^vi]v exui/Jicv Trpos tov 6e.6v, 
 having therefore been justified by faith, let us have peace with God. 
 
 1 Cor. 1:4; evy(a.pi(TT!a to! Otm . . . im rrj ^ap'Tt roiv Oem rrj hoQuarf 
 
 v/XLV, I thank God . . . for the grace of God which was given you. 
 Col. 1 : 3, 4 ; evxapunovixsv t<S 0£iS . . . djcoutravTcs T-qv tticttiv v)jmv, 
 we give thanks to God . . . having heard of your faith. 
 
 2 Tim. 4 : 11 ; MapKov dvaXa(i<ov aye /MeTa a'eavTov, take Mark and 
 bring him with thee. 
 
 135. The Aorist Participle of Antecedent Action is fre- 
 quently used attributively as the equivalent of a relative 
 clause ; in this case it usually has the article, and its position 
 is determined by the same considerations which govern the 
 position of any other noun or adjective in similar construction. 
 See John 5 : 13 ; 1 Cor. 1 : 4, above. 
 
64 THE TENSES. 
 
 136. It is still more frequently used adverbially and is 
 equivalent to an adverbial clause or coordinate verb with and ; 
 in this case the article does not occur, and the participle 
 usually precedes the verb, but sometimes follows it. See 
 Eom. 5:1; and Col. 1 : 3, 4 (134). 
 
 137. The inceptive use of the Aorist is of special impor- 
 tance in the case of the participle. Chief attention being 
 directed to the inception of the action, it is frequently this 
 beginning only that precedes the action of the principal verb. 
 See Acts 27 : 13, Sd^ai/res (134); also Mark 6 : 33 ; Acts 13 : 27 ; 
 23 : 1 ; 2 Tim. 4 : 10. 
 
 138. The Aorist Participle of Antecedent Action is by no 
 means always best translated into English by the so-called 
 Perfect Participle. The English Present Participle is very 
 frequently placed before a verb to express an antecedent ac- 
 tion, and that, too, without implying that the action is thought 
 of as in progress. It is accordingly in many cases the best 
 translation of an Aorist Participle. See Mark 1 : 31 (134); 
 also Mark 5 : 36 ; Acts 13 : 16, E.V. Frequently also the 
 Aorist Participle of the Greek is best reproduced in English 
 by a finite verb with and. See Acts 14 : 19 ; 27 : 13 ; 2 Tim. 
 4 : 11 (134) ; also Luke 21 : 1 ; Acts 21 : 1 ; Acts 10 : 23, E.V. 
 
 139. The Aorist Participle of Identical Action. The 
 
 Aorist Participle agreeing with the subject of a verb not 
 infrequently denotes the same action that is expressed 
 by the verb. HA. 856, b; G. 1290; G^.MT. 150. 
 
 Matt. 27 : 4 ; rnjaprov irapaSovi ai/xa SiKaiov, I sinned in that I betrayed 
 
 innocent blood. 
 Acts 10 ; 33 ; cn5 te Ka\<os eTroiTjcra^ irapaycvd/iiti/os, and thou hast well 
 
 done that thou hast come. See also Matt. 19 : 27 (and the numerous 
 
 instances of the phrase diroxpt^ets et-Trev) ; Acts 27 : 3 ; 1 Cor. 15 : 18 ; 
 
 Eph. 1:9; Heb. 7 : 27 ; Gen. 43 : 5. 
 
THE AOKIST PAKTICIPLE. 65 
 
 140. The verb and the participle of identical action, though 
 denoting the same action, usually describe it from a different 
 point of view. Respecting this difference in point of view, 
 see 121. 
 
 141. An Aorist Participle of Identical Action mobt fre- 
 quently accompanies an Aorist verb, both verb and participle 
 thus describing the action indefinitely as a simple event. It 
 occurs also with the Future, with which as an aoristic tense 
 it is entirely appropriate (Luke 9 : 25 ; 3 John 6), with the 
 Present and Imperfect (Mark 8 : 29 ; Acts 7 : 26), and with the 
 Perfect (Acts 13 : 33 ; 1 Sam. 12 : 19). 
 
 142. The Aorist Participle of Subsequent Action. 
 
 The Aorist Participle is sometimes used of an action ante- 
 cedent to the time of speaking but subsequent to that of 
 the principal verb. 
 
 John 11 : 2 ; ■^v Sk Mapta/i ■^ dA.eii/'acra tov Kvpiov fivpto koI iKfxA^aaa 
 Tovs TToSas avTOv rats Opi^lv avT^i, ijs 6 a8EX<^os Aa^apos ■qo'deva, 
 and it was that Mary which anointed the Lord with ointment, and 
 wiped his feet with her hair, whose brother Lazarus was sick, Cf. 
 John 12 : 3. 
 
 Acts 25 : 13 ; 'Aypitnra's 6 /JatrtXeiis koI Bepvt'xr; KaTrjvrrjdav eis Katcra- 
 puxv do-7rao-aju,£i/ot tov ^(ttov, Agrippa the king and Bernice arrived 
 at Ccesarea and saluted Festus. See also examples cited under 
 144, 145. 
 
 143. It is a question of interpretation to be determined in 
 each case whether the fact of antecedence to the time of speak- 
 ing, or of subsequence to the time of the principal verb, is most 
 prominent in the mind of the writer. That which requires 
 most clearly to be observed is that neither relation is expressed 
 by the participle ; this only designates the action as a sim- 
 ple event ; other considerations must come in to determine the 
 time-relation. 
 
66 THE TENSES. 
 
 144. The Aorist Participle referring to a subsequent action 
 is sometimes used attributively as the equivalent of a relative 
 clause ; in this case it usually has the article, and its position 
 is determined by the same considerations that govern the 
 position of any other noun or adjective in similar construc- 
 tions. Instances of this use occur not infrequently in classical 
 Greek. See G'.MT. 152 ; Carter and Humphreys in CI. Rev. 
 Feb. 1891. For New Testament instances, see John 11 : 2 
 (142) ; also Matt. 10 : 4; 11 : 21 ; Acts 1 : 16 ; Col. 1 : 8. 
 
 145. No certain instance of an Aorist Participle used 
 adverbially as the equivalent of an adverbial or coordinate 
 clause, and referring to a subsequent action, has been observed 
 in classical Greek, though one or two possible ones occur. 
 See Dem. XIX. (F.L.) 266 (423), cited by Garter, and Thuc. 
 II. 49. 2, cited by Humphreys, in CI. Rev. Feb. 1891. 
 
 For New Testament instances, see Acts 25 : 13 (142) ; also 
 Acts 16 : 23 ; 22 : 24 ; 23 : 36 ; 24 : 23. In all these cases it is 
 scarcely possible to doubt that the participle (which is with- 
 out the article and follows the verb) is equivalent to xat with 
 a coordinate verb and refers to an action subsequent in fact 
 and in thought to that of the verb which it follows. These in- 
 stances are perhaps due to Aramaic influence. See Ka. § 76, d ; 
 and cf. Dan. 2 : 26, 27 ; 3 : 13, 24, 26, 27, etc. 
 
 In Rom. 4 : 19, koI p.^ ijBev^ffas tJ vliTTei Karevdriaev rb iaVToO aQ/ia 
 [rjdTi] veveKpaiiivov, the participle dcrScciJo-as, though preceding the verb, is 
 most naturally interpreted as referring to a (conceived) result of the 
 action denoted by KaTevb-qirev. It is in that case an inceptive Aorist 
 Participle of Subsequent Action. Its position is doubtless due to the 
 emphasis laid upon it. In Heb. 9 : 12 the symmetry of the figure is best 
 preserved if ctipifj.evos is thought of as referring to an action subsequent to 
 that of eiffrj\ffev. But it is possible that eio-^\8ev is used to describe the 
 whole highpriestly act, including both the entrance into the holy place and 
 the subsequent offering of the blood, and that eipi/ievos is thus a participle 
 of identical action. In either case it should be translated not having 
 
THE AOEIST PARTICIPLE. 67 
 
 obtained as in Il.V., but obtaining or and obtained. In Phil. 2 : 7 yeviinevot 
 is related to Xapdv as a participle of identical action ; the relation of Xapdv 
 to ixivwaev is less certain. It may denote the same action as ixiyuaev 
 viewed from the opposite point of view (identical action), or may be 
 thought of as an additional fact (subsequent action) to iKivwcev. In Rom. 
 4 : 21 the participles Soit and Tr\iipo<popri8cl! may be understood as together 
 defining iveSma/juidr] ry irlarei, though Sois is strictly subsequent to iveSvva- 
 puiBv- Somewhat similar is 1 Pet. 3 : 18, where ^woiroiriSels is clearly subse- 
 quent to iiriBavcv [or iiradev], but is probably to be taken together with 
 davaTwBeis as defining the whole of the preceding clause 'S.purrbs d-n-a^ irepl 
 d/iapriwy iiriffavev, Slxaios irip aSlKUv, iva u/nas irpoiraydyTi rip SeQ. 
 
 146. The Aorist Participle used as an integral part of the 
 object of a verb of perception represents the action which it 
 denotes as a simple event without defining its time. The ac- 
 tion may be one which is directly perceived and hence coinci- 
 dent in time with that of the principal verb, or it may be one 
 which is ascertained or learned, and hence antecedent to the 
 action of the principal verb. In the latter case it takes the 
 place of a clause of indirect discourse having its verb in 
 the Aorist Indicative. 
 
 Acts 9 : 12 ; kol tlScv avSpa . . . Avaviav ovo/xaTi, da-eXOovra Koi €iri- 
 Oivra avTm )(cipas, and he has seen a man named Ananias come in 
 and lay hands upon him. See also Luke 10 : 18 ; Acts 10 : 3 ; 11 : 3 ; 
 26 : 13 ; 2 Pet. 1 : 18. 
 
 Luke 4:23; otra r/KOvcraficv yevofieva, whatever things we have heard 
 to have been done. 
 
 147. The Aorist Participle with \av$dvo) denotes the same 
 time as the principal verb. It occurs but once in the New 
 Testament (Heb. 13 : 2), the similar construction with <l>6dvo) 
 and Tvyxdvo, not at all. HA. 856, b ; G. 1290. 
 
 148. The categories named above, Aorist Participle of An- 
 tecedent Action, of Identical Action, etc., which, it must be 
 remembered, represent, not diverse functions of the tense, but 
 only classes of cases for which the Aorist Participle may be 
 
68 , . THE TENSES. 
 
 used, do not include absolutely all the instances. There are, 
 for example, cases in which the time-relation of the action of 
 the participle to that of the verb is left undefined. John 
 16 : 2, 6 airoKTUvas [v/j,as] 86irj Xarpetav irpocri^e.pav tiS OciS, means, 
 every slayer of you will think, etc. Whether he will have such 
 thought before he shall slay, when he slays, or after he shall 
 have slain, is not at all defined. Cf. Gen. 4 : 15. 
 
 149. Very rarely also the Aorist Participle used adverbially 
 refers to an action evidently in a general way coincident in 
 time with the action of the verb, yet not identical with it. 
 
 Heb. 2:10; eirpCTrev yap avrm, Si' ov to, TrdvTa koI Sc' ov to. Travra, 
 TToXXcnis vims ets &6^av ayayovra tov apxT/ov t^s (Tiarqpuxs ainSyv 
 huL TraOrjfmTuiv TeXtiCxrai, for it became him, for whom are all things, 
 and through whom are all things, in bringing many sons unto glory, to 
 make the author of their salvation perfect through sufferings. The 
 participle ayayovra. is neither antecedent nor subsequent to teXeiG- 
 uai, nor yet strictly identical with it. Nearly the same thought 
 might be expressed in English by when he brought or in bringing, 
 and in Greek by ore TJyayiu or iv tw dyayeti' (cf . 109). 
 
 The choice of the Aorist Participle rather than the Present 
 in such cases is due to the fact that the action is thought of, 
 not as in progress, but as a simple event or fact. Concerning 
 a similar use of the Aorist Participle in Homer, see Leo Meyer, 
 Griechische Aoriste, p. 125 ; T. D. Seymour in T.A.P.A., 1881, 
 pp. 89, 94. The rarity of these instances is due not to any 
 abnormality in such a use of the tense, but to the fact that 
 an action, temporally coincident with another and subordinate 
 to it (and not simply the same action viewed from a different 
 point of view), is naturally thought of as in progress, and 
 hence is expressed by a Present Participle. Cf. exx. under 119. 
 
 150. As an aid to interpretation it may be observed that the Aorist 
 Participle with the article may sometimes be used instead of a relative 
 
THE AOKIST PAKTICIPLE. 69 
 
 clause with the Aorist Indicative, sometimes instead of such a clause with 
 the verb in the Aorist Subjunctive, i But it should not be supposed that 
 from the point of view of the Greek language these were two distinct 
 functions of the Aorist Participle. The phrase os eXa^e referred in Greek 
 to past time, os M^xi ^'' ^o present or future time. It is not probable that 
 in the mind of a Greek 6 Xo/Sii* was the precise equivalent of both of 
 these, standing alternately for the one or the other, so that when he wrote 
 6 Xo/3i6» he sometimes thought os eXo/Se, sometimes os Xd^r/. The fact is 
 doubtless rather that the Aorist Participle was always, strictly speaking, 
 timeless, and that 6 Xa^dv meant simply the receiver, the act of receiving 
 being thought of as a simple fact without reference to progress. Thus 
 for Xo/3<ii' in Matt. 25 : 16 os ?\a(3e might have stood, and it may be 
 translated, he that received; while for 6 6fi.6(ra! in Matt. 23:20 os 6ij,6<rii 
 &y might have stood, and it may be translated, xohoever sweareth ; and for 
 6 iiiro/ielvas in Matt. 24 : 13 os iiro/te/vT) &v might have stood, and it may 
 be translated, xohoever shall endure. Cf . Luke 12 : 8-10. But these 
 dfferences are due not to a difference in the force of the tense in the 
 three cases. In each case a translation by a timeless verbal noun — 
 receiver, swearer, endurer — would correctly (though from the point 
 of view of English rather awkwardly) represent the thought of the 
 Greek. As respects the time-relation of the action of the participle 
 to that of the principal verb 6 Xa^iiv and 6 iTro/ielvas are participles 
 of antecedent action, 6 o/iSa-as is a participle of identical action. But 
 these distinctions, again, as stated above, are made to aid us in a 
 fuller interpretation of the facts of the case, not to mark different 
 functions of the Greek tense. 
 
 151. Some scholars have endeavored to explain all participles with 
 the article as equivalent to the relative pronoun with the corresponding 
 tense of the Indicative. It is true that such participial phrases may often 
 be resolved in this way and the sense essentially preserved. But that 
 this is not a general principle will be evident from a comparison of the 
 function of the tense in the Indicative and in the participle. 
 
 (a) All the tenses of the Indicative express time- relations from the 
 point of view, not of the principal verb, but of the speaker. This principle 
 holds in a relative clause as well as in a principal sentence. An Aorist 
 verb standing in a relative clause may indeed refer to an action antece- 
 dent to the time of the principal verb, but this antecedence is not expressed 
 by the tense of the verb. All that the Aorist tense does in respect to 
 
 ' W. G. Ballantine, Attributive Aorist Participles in Protasis, in Bib. 
 Sac. Apr. 1889. 
 
70 THE TENSES. 
 
 time is to place the action in past time ; its relation in that past time to 
 the action of the principal verb must be learned from some other source. 
 The corresponding thing is true of the Present tense, which in a relative 
 clause denotes time not contemporaneous with the action of the principal 
 verb, but present from the point of view of the speaker. See, e.g., Matt. 
 11:4; 13:17. 
 
 (6) The participle, on the other hand, is in itself timeless, and "gains 
 whatever suggestion of time-relation it conveys from its relation to the 
 rest of the sentence. It is not affirmed that the Aorist Participle denotes 
 time relative to that of the principal verb, but that its time-relations are 
 not independent, like those of the Indicative, but dependent. 
 
 It is thus apparent that the whole attitude, so to speak, of the parti- 
 ciple toward time-relations is different from that of the Indicative, and no 
 formula of equivalence between them can be constructed. A timeless 
 noun or adjective cannot by any fixed rule be translated into a time- 
 expressing verb. 
 
 Somewhat less of error is introduced if the rule is made to read that 
 the participle may be translated into English by a relative clause using 
 that tense of the English Indicative which corresponds to the tense 
 of the Greek participle. Relative clauses in English frequently use the 
 tenses apparently to denote time relative to that of the principal verb. 
 Thus in the sentence, When I am in London I will come to see you, the 
 present tense, am, really denotes time future with reference to the speaker, 
 time present relative to that of the principal verb. Similarly in the 
 sentence. They that have done good shall come forth to the resurrection of 
 life — have done is past, not with reference to the time of speaking, but 
 to that of the principal verb. But such uses of tenses in English are 
 merely permissible, not uniform. Shall have done would be more exact 
 in the last sentence. Moreover, the rule as thus stated is false in principle, 
 and not uniformly applicable in fact. It would require, e.g., that a 
 Present Participle, standing in connection with an Aorist verb, should be 
 rendered by an English Present, instead of by an English Past as it 
 should usually be. See John 2:16; Acts 10 : 35. 
 
 THE rUTUEE PAETIOIPLE. 
 
 152. The Future Pai'tlciple represents an action as 
 future from the point of view of the principal verb. HA. 
 856; (?. 1288. 
 
THE PERFECT PARTICIPLE. 71 
 
 Acts. 24 : 11 ; ov irXciovi uaiv fJ-oi rjjxipaj. SoSScKa d<^' ^s avipr/v wpocTKV- 
 v^aav ch 'le/oouCToXiJ/A, it is not more than twelve days since I went 
 up to worship at Jerusalem. 
 
 1 Cor. 15 : 37 ; ov to (joi/wi to ytvijcrofievov (nrupe.i.%, thou sowest not the 
 body that shall be. 
 
 Rem. The Future Participle is of later origin than the participles of 
 the other tenses, and is a clearly marked exception to the general time- 
 lessness of the participle. While its function was probably not primarily 
 temporal, the relations which it expressed necessarily suggested subse- 
 quence to the action of the principal verb, and hence gave to the tense a 
 temporal force. Del. tr, pp. 97 ff. ; Br. 163. 
 
 153. Tlie Present Participle of the verb fiiXXui with a Pres- 
 ent or Aorist Infinitive of another verb occurs as a periphrasis 
 for the Future Participle of the latter verb. Its range of use, 
 however, differs somewhat from that of the Future Participle. 
 While both denote what is future with reference to the action 
 of the principal verb, fiiWoyv is not used, as the Future Parti- 
 ciple is, to express purpose, and is used, as the Future Partici- 
 ple is not, to express intention, even unfulfilled intention. See 
 John 12 : 4 (cf. John 6 : 64) ; Acts 18 : 14 ; 20 : 3, 7. 
 
 THE PEEFEOT PAETIOIPLE. 
 
 154. The Perfect Participle is used of completed ac- 
 tion. Like the Perfect' Indicative it maj^ have reference 
 to the past action and the resulting state or only to the 
 resulting state. The time of the resulting state is usually 
 that of the principal verb. SA. 856 ; 6r. 1288. 
 
 Acts 10 : 17 ; ol avSpts ol aTrea-TaXfiivoi . . . iTrea-TrjO-av im, tov TrvXfiva, 
 the men who had been sent . . . stood before the gate. 
 
 Rom. 15 : 14 ; ■jrcTrXr/pw/ieVot ffao-r/s r^s yi/dicretos, filed with all knowledge. 
 
 Luke 8:46; tyvoiv Swajutv eieXrjXvOviav oltt i/xov, I perceived that power 
 had gone forth from me. 
 
72 THE TENSES. 
 
 155. The Perfect Participle stands in two passages of the New Testa- 
 ment as the predicate of the participle uv. The effect is of a Perfect 
 Participle clearly marked as one of existing state. See Eph. 4 : 18 ; 
 Col. 1 : 21. 
 
 156. The Perfect Participle is occasionally used, as a Plu- 
 perfect to denote a state existing antecedent to the time of the 
 principal verb. The action of which it is the result is, of 
 course, still earlier. 
 
 John 11 :44; i^Xdcv 6 reOvrjKiois StSc/itVos tovis TroSas koX to.'s xdpa's 
 Kuplxu.'s, he that was [or had been] dead came forth bound hand and 
 foot with grave-clothes. See also Mark 5 : 15, icTxrjKOTa, noting the 
 Present Participle in the same verse and the Aorist Participle 
 in V. 18 ; also 1 Cor. 2 : 7, aTroK^Kpvfifievriv, comparing v. 10. 
 
THE MOODS. 
 
 MOODS IN PEINCIPAL CLAUSES. 
 
 THE INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 157. The Indicative is primarily the mood of the un- 
 qualified assertion or simple question of fact. HA. 865 ; 
 
 a. 1317. 
 
 John 1:1; iv a.p\rj r/v o Aoyos, in the beginning was the Woi'd. 
 
 Mark 4:7; kol xapirov orvK eStoKiv, and it yielded no fruit. 
 
 Matt. 2:2; irov ia-rlv 6 T€)(Oa.is fia(7iX.£vi tZv 'lovSaCtov, where is he 
 
 that is born King of the Jews ? 
 John 1 : 38 ; n ^rjTeiTE, what are ye seeking ? 
 
 158. The Indicative has substantially the same assertive 
 force in many principal clauses containing qualified assertions. 
 The action is conceived of as a fact, though the assertion of 
 the fact is qualified. 
 
 John 13 : 8 ; iav firj vi'i/'O) ae, ovk ex"s M^pos l^^''"' i/jiov, if I wash thee not, 
 thou hast no part with me. 
 
 159. (a) When qualified by particles such as av, aOe, etc., 
 the Indicative expresses various shades of desirability, improb- 
 ability, etc. Respecting these secondary uses of the Indicative 
 in principal clauses, see 26, 27, 248. 
 
 (6) Respecting the uses of the Future Indicative in other 
 than a purely assertive sense, see 67, 69, 70. 
 
 7,3 
 
74 THE MOODS. 
 
 (c) Respecting the uses of the Indicative in subordinate 
 clauses, see 185-360, passim. 
 
 Kem. The uses of the Indicative described in 157 and 158 are substan- 
 tially the same in English and in Greek and occasion no special difficulty 
 to the English interpreter of Greek. The uses referred to in 159 exhibit 
 more difference between Greek and English, and each particular usage 
 requires separate consideration. 
 
 THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 The uses of the Subjunctive in principal clauses are as 
 follows : 
 
 160. The Hortatory Subjunctive. The Subjunctive 
 is used in the first person plural in exhortations, the 
 speaker thus exhorting others to join him in the doing of 
 an action. HA. 866, 1 ; a. 1344 ; B. p. 209 ; WM. p. 355 ; 
 a.MT. 255, 256. 
 
 Heb. 12 : 1 ; 8i viro/jLovrji Tpe)(uifJLev rov irpoKUfitvov rnuv dyZva, let us 
 
 run with patience the race that is set before us. 
 1 John 4:7; ayaTrtfoi, ayairui/j-ev a\A.7;Xovs, beloved, let us love one 
 another. 
 
 161. Occasionally the first person singular is used with 
 a</)es or Sevpo prefixed, the exhortation in that case becoming a 
 request of the speaker to the person addressed to permit him 
 to do something. 
 
 Matt. 7:4; a^es tKfidKo) to Kapcfjoi ck tov 64>6a\fj.ov crov, let me cast 
 out the mote out of thine eye. See also Luke 6 : 42 ; Acts 7 : 34. 
 
 The sense of lL()>es in Matt. 27 : 49 and of (S(/>eTe in Mark 15 ; 36 is doubt- 
 ful (see R.V. ad loc. and Th., i<l>lTitu, 2, E.). 
 
 In Matt. 21 : 38 (Mark 12 : 7) deOrc is prefixed to a hortatory first per- 
 son plural without affecting the meaning of the Subjunctive. 
 
THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 75 
 
 In none of these oases is a conjunction to be supplied before the Sub- 
 junctive. Cf. the use of five, ifipe, etc., in classical Greek. GMT. 257 ; 
 JS. p. 210 ; WJU. p. 356. 
 
 162. The Prohibitory Subjunctive. The Aorist Sub- 
 junctive is used in the second person with /^ij to express a 
 prohibition or a negative entreaty. HA. 866, 2 ; Cr. 1346 ; 
 a.MT. 259. 
 
 Matt. 6 : 34 ; fir) ovv fj-ipiiivrjarfn cl% r-qv avpiov, be not therefore anxious 
 
 for the morrow. 
 Heb. 8:8; fji.rj cTKXrjpvvrjTi Tas xapSias vimv, harden not your hearts. 
 Matt. 6 : 13 ; koi fiy] eto-evc'yKjjs ^//.Ss eis Treipac/iov, and bring us not into 
 
 temptation. 
 
 163. Prohibitions are expressed either by the Aorist Sub- 
 junctive or by the Present Imperative, the only exceptions 
 being a few instances of the third person Aorist Imperative 
 "with /ihJ, The difference between an Aorist Subjunctive with 
 jur; and a Present Imperative with /xjj is in the conception of 
 the action as respects its progress. HA. 874. Thus 
 
 164. (a) The Aorist Subjunctive forbids the action as a 
 simple event with reference to the action as a whole or to its 
 inception, and is most frequently used when the action has 
 not been begun. 
 
 Acts 18 : 9 ; AoXci icai fir] o-iuTnjtrjjs, speak and hold not thy peace. 
 Rev. 7:3; /j-rj dSiiciytn^e ttjv y^v, hurt not the earth. 
 
 165. (6) The Present Imperative (180-184) forbids the 
 continuance of the action, most frequently when it is already 
 in progress; in this case, it is a demand to desist from the 
 action. 
 
 Mark 6 : 50 ; iyu) cl/xi, ni) <f>ol3ei(T6e, it is I, be not afraid. 
 John 5 : 14 ; /xijKeVt diMpravi, sin no more. 
 
76 THE MOODS. 
 
 When the action is not yet begun, it enjoins continued 
 abstinence from it. 
 
 Mark 13 : 21 ; koL tote idv tis v/ilv eiinj *l8e cuSe o xpurro': 'iSe 
 e/cei, firi irtcrTEveTc, and then if any man shall say unto you, Lo, here 
 is the Christ ; or, Lo, there ; believe it not. Cf . Matt. 24 : 23. 
 
 166. The Prohibitory Subjunctive occurs rarely in the third 
 person. 1 Cor. 16 : 11 ; 2 Thess. 2 : 3. 
 
 167. The strong negative, oi firj, occurs rarely in prohibi- 
 tions with the Aorist Subjunctive. 
 
 Matt. 13 : 14 and Acts 28 ; 26, from Septuagint, Isa. 6 : 9, are proljalily 
 to be understood as prohibitory (as in tbe Hebrew of the passage in Isa.), 
 rather than emphatically predicate, as in R.V. Cf. Gen. 3 : 1, oi5 i^i) <l>dy7)Te, 
 which is clearly prohibitory. GMT. 297. Cf. 162. 
 
 In Matt. 21 : 19j on the other hand, the emphatic predictive sense, there 
 shall be no fruit from thee henceforward forever, is more probable, being 
 more consistent with general usage and entirely appropriate to the con- 
 text. The imperative rendering of the E.V. makes the passage doubly 
 exceptional, the Imperative Subjunctive being rare in the third person, 
 and oi /iii} being unusual in prohibitions. 
 
 168. The Deliberative Subjunctive. The Subjunctive 
 is used in deliberative questions and in rhetorical questions 
 having reference to the future. JIA. 866, 3 ; 6r. 1358. 
 
 Luke 3 : 10 ; rt ovv Troi^crujuev, what then shall we do ? 
 Luke 11:5; tk cf v/j-Zv Ifet <t>iX.ov . . . koI eiirg aircp, which of you 
 shall have a friend . . . and shall say lo him f 
 
 169. Questions may be classified as questions of fact and 
 questions of deliberation. In the question of fact the speaker ' 
 asks what is (or was o»" will be). In the question of delibera- 
 tion, the speaker asks what he is to do, or what is to be done ; 
 it concerns not fact but possibility, desirability, or necessity. 
 But questions may be classified also as interrogative or real 
 questions, and rhetorical questions. The former makes a real 
 
THE S U B JUNCTIVE. 7 7 
 
 inquiry (for information or advice) ; the latter is a rhetorical 
 substitute for an assertion, often equiva,lent to a negative 
 answer to itself, or, if the question is negative, to a positive 
 answer. 
 
 Since both questions of fact and questions of deliberation 
 may be either interrogative or rhetorical, it results that there 
 are four classes of questions that require to be distinguished 
 for purposes of interpretation. 
 
 (a) The interrogative question of fact. 
 
 Matt. 16 : 13 ; riva Xeyovcnv oi ayBpunroi dvoj. tov vXov tov avOpunrou, 
 who do men say that the Son of man is f See also Mark 16:3; 
 John 7 ; 45 ; Acts 17 : 18. 
 
 (6) The rhetorical question of fact. 
 
 1 Cor. 9:1; miK eifd aTroo-ToXos, am I not an apostle f 
 
 Luke 23 : 81 ; on ei iv vyp<S ^vX<o ralra irotolcriv, iv tiS trjpia Tt yhrqTai, 
 
 for if they do these things in a green tree, what will he done in the dry ? 
 
 See also Luke 11 : 5 ; 16 : 11. 
 
 (c) The interrogative deliberative question. 
 
 Mark 12 : 14 ; SS>iJ.ev, ^ n SG/iej/, shall we give, or shall we not give? See 
 also Matt. 6 : 31 ; 18 : 21 ; Luke 22 : 49. 
 
 {d) The rhetorical deliberative question. 
 
 Kom. 10:14; ■ttS? ovv eirtKa\ecro)VTat eis ov ovk iwca-TCvcrav ; ttSs 8e 
 TruTTeva-mnv ov ovk ■^Kovoav ; ■ ■ • tSs Sc Kr)pv^w<nv lav fiiq airoara- 
 XSiinv, how then shall they call on him in whom they have not believed ? 
 how shall they believe in him whom they have not heard? . . . how 
 shall they preach except they be sent f See also Matt. 26 : 54 ; Luke 
 14 : 34 ; John 6 : 68. 
 
 Interrogative questions of fact, and "rhetorical questions of 
 fact having reference to the present or past, employ the tenses 
 and moods as they are used in simple declarative sentences. 
 Rhetorical questions of fact having reference to the future, 
 and all deliberative questions, use either the Subjunctive or 
 the Future Indicative. 
 
78 THE MOODS. 
 
 170. The verb of a deliberative question is most frequently 
 in the first person; but occasionally in the second or third. 
 Matt. 23 : 33 ; Eom. 10 : 14. The verb of a rhetorical question 
 may be of any person. 
 
 171. The Deliberative Subjunctive is sometimes preceded 
 by 6e\as, 6e\£Te, or /Sovkea-Oe. No conjunction is to be supplied 
 in these cases. The verb OiXav is sometimes followed by a 
 clause introduced by tva, but tm never occurs when the verb 
 6iX.av is in the second person, and the following verb in the 
 first person, i.e. when the relations of the verbs are such as to 
 make a Deliberative Subjunctive probable. 
 
 Luke 22 : 9 ; ttov OeXti? iToifida-iOfiev, where wilt thou that we make ready ? 
 See also Matt. 26 : 17 ; 27 : 17, 21 ; Mark 10 : 36, 51 ; 14 : 12 ; 15:9; 
 Luke 9 : 54 ; 18 : 41 ; 1 Cor. 4 : 21 (N.B.), and cf . (t'm) Matt. 7 : 12 ; 
 Mark 6 : 25 ; Luke 6 : 31 ; 1 Cor. 14 : 5. 
 
 172. The Subjunctive in Negative Assertions. The 
 
 Aorist Subjunctive is used with ov fitj in the sense of an 
 emphatic Future Indicative. SA. 1032 ; G. 1360. 
 
 Heb. 13 : 5 ; cni /x-q <t£ dvco ovB' ov ft,ri ere iyKaTaXiTria, I will in no wise 
 fail thee, neither will I in any wise forsake thee. See also Matt. 5 : 18 ; 
 Mark 13 : 30 ; Luke 9 : 27, etfreq. Cf. Gild, in A.J.P. iii. 202 f. 
 
 Rem. In Luke 18 : 7 and Eev. 15 : 4 the Subjunctive with o* /xi5 is. used 
 in a rhetorical question. The Subjunctive may be explained as occasioned 
 by the emphatic negative or by the rhetorical nature of the question. 
 
 173. This emphatically predictive Subjunctive is of frequent occurrence 
 in Hellenistic Greek. The Present Subjunctive is sometimes used with 
 i)i /iij in classical Greek, but no instance occurs in the New Testament. 
 Concerning the rare use of the Future with oi ixi see 66 ; cf. Gild. u.s. 
 
THE OPTATIVE. 79 
 
 THE OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 
 174. The Optative Mood is mucli less frecLuent in the New 
 Testament, and in Hellenistic "writers generally, than in clas- 
 sical Greek. Of. Harmon, The Optative Mood in Hellenistic 
 Greek, in J.B.L. Dec. 1886. 
 
 It is mainly confined to four uses, two of which are in prin- 
 cipal clauses. 
 
 175. The Optative of Wishing. The Optative is used 
 without av to express a wish. EA. 870 ; Cr. 1507. 
 
 1 Pet. 1:2; j^a/MS vjilv koX ctpijvjj '7r\r]6vv$£Cri, grace to you and peace 
 
 be multiplied. 
 
 2 Thess. 3 : 16 ; avrbi Sk 6 KvpUK rrji eipijwjs Swjj ifxiv Trjv elprivrfv, 
 
 now the Lord of peace himself give you peace. 
 
 176. The Optative of Wishing occurs thirty-five times in the New 
 Testament : Mark 11 : 14 ; Luke 1 : 38 ; 20 : 16 ; Acts 8 : 20 ; Eom. 3:4; 
 3:6; 3:31; 6:2, 15; 7 : 7, 13 ; 9 : 14; 11 : 1, 11 ; 15 : 5, 13 ; 1 Cor. 6:15; 
 Gal. 2:17; 3 : 21 ; 6 : 14 ; 1 Thess. 3 : 11, 12 ; 5 : 23 ; 2 Thess. 2:17; 3:5, 
 16 ; 2 Tim. 1 : 16, 18 ; Philem. 20 ; Heb. 13 : 21 ; 1 Pet. 1 : 2 ; 2 Pet. 1:2; 
 always, except Philem. 20, in the third person singular. It most frequently 
 expresses a prayer. Mark 11 : 14 and Acts 8 : 20 are peculiar in being im- 
 precations of evil. 
 
 177. The phrase jnf; yivotro is an Optative of Wishing which strongly 
 deprecates something suggested by a previous question or assertion. 
 Fourteen of the>fifteen New Testament instances are in Paul's writings, 
 and in twelve of these it expresses the apostle's abhorrence of an inference 
 which he fears may be (falsely) drawn from his argument.- Cf. Mey. 
 on Rom. 3 : 4, and Ltft. on Gal. 2 : 17. On Gal. 6 : 14 cf. 1 Mace. 9 : 10. 
 
 178. The Potential Optative. The Optative- with av 
 is used to express what would happen on the fulfilment of 
 some supposed condition. It is thus an apodosis correla- 
 
80 THE MOODS. 
 
 tive to a protasis expressed or implied. It is usually to be 
 translated by the English Potential. EA. 872 ; &. 1327 ff. 
 
 Acts 8 : 31 ; iruls yap av 8uvat)u.ijv eav firi tis oSr/yTjcrci /xe, iiow should I he 
 
 able unless some one shall guide me ? 
 Acts 17 ; 18 ; tl av OiXoi. 6 (rwep/xoXoyoi ovtos A.e'y«v, what would this 
 babbler wish to say ? 
 
 179. The Optative with &v occurs in the New Testament only in Luke's 
 writings : Luke *1 : 62 ; *6 : 11 ; *9 : 46 ; [*15 : 26 ; 18 : 36J ; Acts *5 ; 24 ; 
 t8 ; 31 ; *10 : 17 ; tl7 : 18 ; [26 : 29]. Of these instances the six marked 
 with * are in indirect questions ; the two marked with t are in direct 
 questions ; those in brackets are of doubtful text ; others still more 
 doubtful might be added. In only one instance (Acts 8 : 31) is the con- 
 dition expressed. 
 
 THE IMPEEATIVE MOOD. 
 
 180. The Imperative Mood is used in commands and 
 exhortations. ^A873; ff . 1342. 
 
 Matt. 5 : 42 ; t<3 oItovvti (re. Sos, give to him that asketh thee. 
 1 Thess. 5 : 19 ; to irvf.vix.a fir] (r^ewvTC, quench not the spirit. 
 
 Eem. Respecting other methods of expressing a command, see 67, 
 160-167, 364. 
 
 181. The Imperative Mood is also used in entreaties and 
 petitions. 
 
 Mark 9 : 22 ; dAA' el n Svvr], jiorjBrjtrov ■^fuv (TirXayxi'iiiBeii f<t> ij/ias, 
 but if thou canst do anything, have compassion on us and help us. 
 
 Luke 17 : 5 ; Kol elirav ol aTrocTToXoi tco Kvpito Ilpotrfles ij/tTv ttlcttiv, 
 and the apostles said to the Lord, Increase our faith. 
 
 John 17 : 11 ; iroiTep ayu, T-qprqaov auTovs ev Tc3 ovofuiTL trov, holy 
 Father, keep them in thy name. 
 
 182. The Impeeative Mood is also used to express con- 
 sent, or merely to propose an hypothesis. 
 
FINITE MOODS IN SUBORDINATE CLAUSES. 81 
 
 Matt. 8:31, 32; oi 8e Sat/iovcs vapeKaXow avrw X-tyovTH Et iKJSaX- 
 Xeis '7/xas, atrocTTSiXov ijjuas £ts rrjv ayiXtpi t&v xoipuiv- koI eiTrev 
 auTois 'YTToycTe, anrf iAe demons besought him saying, If thou cast 
 us out, send us away into the herd of swine. And he said unto 
 them. Go. 
 
 John 2:19; aTreKpCOrj Itjo-oCs koI elirev avrois Avcrare tov vaov tovtov 
 Kol [iv] TpuTiv ■^fj.epai's iyiplo avTov, Jesus answered and said unto 
 them. Destroy this temple, and in three days I will raise it up. 
 
 1 Cor. 7 : 36 ; Kal («) ovtuk 6<j>€i\a ylviadax, 6 OiXa iroieiTia • ov\ 
 apapTaLvei • yafiiLTuxrav, and if need so require, let him do what he 
 will; he sinneth not; let them marry. 
 
 183.. An ImperatiTe suggesting a hypothesis may or may 
 not retain its imperative or hortatory force. 
 
 Luke 6 : 37 ; \n\ KpivcTc, kol ov /jlt/ KpiOfjre, judge not, and ye shall not 
 be judged. Cf. John 2 : 19, above. 
 
 184. Any tense of the Imperative may be used in positive 
 commands, the distinction of force being that of the tenses of 
 the dependent moods in general. Cf. 95 ff. In prohibitions, 
 on the other hand, the use of the Imperative is confined almost 
 entirely to the Present tense. A few instances only of the 
 Aorist occur. Cf. 163. 
 
 FINITE MOODS IN SUBORDINATE CLAUSES. 
 
 185. Many subordinate clauses employ the moods and 
 tenses with the same force that they have in principal 
 clauses. Others, however, give to the mood or tense a force 
 different from that which they usually have in principal 
 clauses. Hence arises the necessity for special treatment of 
 the moods and tenses in subordinate clauses. Principal clauses 
 also require discussion in so far as their mood or tense affects 
 or is affected by the subordinate clauses which limit them. 
 
82 THE MOODS. 
 
 186. Clauses considered as elements of the sentence may be classified 
 as follows : 
 
 I. Substantive. 
 
 (1) As subject or predicate nominative (211-214, 357-360). 
 
 (2) As object in indirect discourse (334-356). 
 
 (3) As object after verbs of exhorting, etc. (200-204). 
 
 (4) As object after verbs of striving, etc. (205-210). 
 
 (5) As object after verbs of fear and danger (224-227). 
 
 II. Adjective. 
 
 (1) Appositive (211, 213). 
 
 (2) Eelative (289-333, in part). 
 
 (3) Definitive (215, 216, in part). 
 
 III. Adveebial, denoting 
 
 (1) Time (289-316, in part ; 321-333). 
 
 (2) Place (289-316, in part). 
 
 (3) Condition (238-277, 296-315). 
 
 (4) Concession ^278-288). 
 
 (5) Cause (228-233, 294). 
 
 (6) Purpose ([188-196]* 197-199, 317). 
 
 (7) Indirect object, etc. (215, 217, in part ; 318, 319). 
 
 (8) Kesult (218, 219, 234-237). 
 
 (9) IManner (217, 289-316, in part). 
 
 (10) Comparison, expressing equality or inequality (289-816, 
 in part). 
 
 Rem. Conditional relative clauses introduced by relative pronouns, 
 and relative clauses denoting cause and purpose introduced in the same 
 way, partake at the same time of the nature of adjective and of adverbial 
 clauses. 
 
 187. The arrangement of the matter in the following sections (188- 
 347) is not based upon a logical classification of clauses, such as is indi- 
 cated in the preceding section, but in part on genetic relationships, and 
 in part on considerations of practical convenience. The following is the 
 general order of treatment : 
 
 Moods in clauses introduced by final particles . . 188-227. 
 
 Moods in clauses of cause 228-233. 
 
 Moods in clauses of result 234-237. 
 
CLAUSES INTRODUCED BY FINAL PARTICLES. 83 
 
 Moods in conditional sentences 238-277. 
 
 Moods in concessive sentences 278-288. 
 
 Moods in relative clauses 289-333. 
 
 Definite relative clauses 292-295. 
 
 Conditional relative clauses 296-316. 
 
 Relative clauses expressing purpose . . . . 317-320. 
 
 Relative clauses introduced by las, etc. . . 321-333. 
 
 Indirect Discourse 334-356. 
 
 Construction after rai iyivero, etc 357-360. 
 
 MOODS nr GLAUSES INTEODUOED BY PINAL PAETIOLES. 
 
 188. Classification. Under the general head of clauses 
 introduced bj' final particles are included in New Testament 
 Greek : 
 
 (1) Pure final clauses. 
 
 (2) Object clauses after verbs of exhorting, etc. 
 
 (3) Object clauses after verbs of striving, etc. 
 
 (4) Object clauses after verbs oi fearing. 
 
 (5) Subject, predicate, and appositive clauses. 
 
 (6) Complementary and epexegetic clauses. 
 
 (7) Clauses of conceived result. 
 
 189. General Usage. The relations expressed by the 
 clauses enumerated in 188 are in classical Greek expressed 
 in various ways, but, in the New Testament, these differ- 
 ences have, by a process of assimilation, to a considerable 
 extent disappeared. Clauses modeled after final clauses 
 take the place of Infinitives in various relations 5 the Opta- 
 tive disappears from this class of clauses ; the distinction be- 
 tween the Subjunctive and the Future Indicative is par- 
 tially ignored. It results that the six classes of clauses 
 named above conform in general to one rule, viz. : 
 
84 THE MOODS. 
 
 Clauses introduced by a final particle usually employ the 
 Subjunctive after both primary and secondary tenses ; 
 the Future Indicative is sometimes used, and very rarely 
 the Present Indicative. 
 
 190. Final Particles. The New Testament employs as 
 final particles 'iva, oVco?, and firj. 
 
 Rem. The usage of the final particles In classical Greek is elaborately 
 discussed by Weber in Schanz, Beitrage zur historischen Syntax der 
 griechisohen Sprache, Hefte IV., V., and by Gild, (on the basis of Weber's 
 work) in A. J. P. IV. 416 ff., VI. 53 ff. 
 
 191. New Testament Use of iva. 'Im occurs very fre- 
 quently in the New Testament, and with a greater variety of 
 usage than in classical Greek. Not only does it assume in 
 part the functions which in classical Greek belonged to the 
 other final particles, but clauses introduced by it encroach 
 largely upon the function of the Infinitive. This extension 
 of the use of iva is one of the notable characteristics of the 
 Greek of the New Testament and of all later Greek. "Iva oc- 
 curs in the New Testament in 
 
 (1) Pure final clauses. 
 
 (2) Object clauses after verbs of exhorting, etc. 
 
 (3) Object clauses after verbs of striving, etc. 
 
 (4) Subject, predicate, and appositive clauses. 
 (6) Complementary and epexegetic clauses. 
 (6) Clauses of conceived result. 
 
 Of these clauses, the first class is the only one that regularly 
 employs ha in classical Greek. Cf. G'.MT. 311. 
 
 192. New Testament Use op ottcos. "Ottus occurs in the 
 New Testament, as in classical Greek, in 
 
.CLAUSES INTRODTJOED BY FINAL PARTICLES. 85 
 
 (1) Pure final clauses. 
 
 (2) Object clauses after verbs of exhorting, etc. 
 
 (3) Object clauses after verbs of striving, etc. Of. (?.MT. 
 313. 
 
 193. New Testament Use of /ajj. Mi; is used in the New 
 Testament, as in classical Greek, in 
 
 (1) Pure final clauses. 
 
 (2) Object clauses after verbs of striving, etc. 
 
 (3) Object clauses after verbs of fearing. Of. GMT. 
 307-310, 339, 352. 
 
 194. 'Os, which occurs as a final particle in classical prose, 
 appears in a final clause in the New Testament in only one 
 passage and that of doubtful text, Acts 20 : 24. 'O^pa, which 
 was used as a final particle in epic and lyric poetry, does not 
 occur in the New Testament. Cf. GMT. 312, 314. 
 
 195. Use of Sv. In classical Greek, pure final clauses and 
 object clauses after verbs of striving, etc., introduced by oirojs 
 and <os frequently take av without change of meaning. Indeed, 
 oTTcos is regularly accompanied by av in Attic inscriptions. 
 Gild, in A.J.P. vi. p. 54; Meist. p. 212; G?.MT. 328. In the 
 New Testament there are four instances of ottojs av, all in pure 
 final clauses, three of them in quotations from the Septuagint. 
 Luke 2 : 36; Acts 3 : 19; 15 : 17; Eom. 3 : 4. 
 
 196. "Oirus after verbs of fearing, which is found occasionally in 
 classical Greek, does not occur in the New Testament. 
 
 197. Pure Final Clauses. A pure final clause is one 
 whose office is to express the purpose of the action stated 
 in the predicate which it limits. 
 
 In classical Greek, final clauses take the Subjunctive 
 
86 THE MOODS. 
 
 after primary tenses ; after secondary tenses either the 
 Optative or the Subjunctive. HA. 881 ; G-. 1365. 
 
 In the New Testament, the Optative does, not occur. 
 The Subjunctive is regularly used after primary and sec- 
 ondary tenses alike. 
 
 Matt. 7:1; jxr] Kpiverc, iva fxrj KpiBrJTt, judge not, that ye he not judged. 
 
 Kom. 1:11; iTrmoQio yap i&eiv i/xSs, tva. n p-CTaSC) ^^apicr/jui i/xlv irvev- 
 
 /juxTLKov, for I long to see you, that I may impart unto you some spiritual 
 
 gift- 
 
 Kom. 9 : 17 ; ets avro tovto i^yapd ac ottcos ivSuiw/iai iv trot rrjv 
 Swa/itV fiov, for this very purpose did I raise thee up that I might 
 show in thee my power. .i 
 
 Acts 28 : 27 ; koL tov'S 6(j}6a\p.ovi avrlav e/cKa/u./XDO'ai''*^ fiiQ irore iSuxriv 
 Tot'; 6(t>0aXixots, and their eyes they have closed ; lest haply they should 
 perceive with their eyes. 
 
 198. Pure final clauses occasionally take the Future Indica- 
 tive in the New Testament as in classical Greek. A very few 
 instances of the Present Indicative occur in the New Testa- 
 ment. HA. 881, c ; G. 1366 ; B. pp. 234 f. ; WM. pp. 360 ff. ; 
 WT. pp. 289 ff. ; and cf . WH. on passages cited by B. and W. 
 
 Luke 20 : 10 ; dTreWeiAtv irpos toiis yeiapyov's SoCA.ov, tva . . . 8u)(Tovcrtv, 
 he sent to the husbandmen a servant, that they might give. See also 199. 
 
 Gal. 4:17; eKKkcidai, ip.S.'i OiKovrnv, tva avrovs ^rjXovTC, they desire to_ 
 shut you out, that ye may seek them. See also 1 Cor. 4 : 6 ; 1 John 5 : 20. 
 
 199. The Future Indicative occurs in pure final clauses in classical 
 Greek chiefly a&er &irm, rarely after jui), ws, and di^po, never after Ua. 
 GMT. 324; Weber, U.S. ; Oild. U.S. The New Testament instances are 
 chiefly after iva • a few instances occur after /i^ (;u^iroTf) and one after 
 Sttus. The manuscripts show not a few variations between Subjunctive 
 and Future Indicative, and both forms are sometimes found together, 
 after the same conjunction. The following passages contain the Future, 
 or both Future and Subjunctive : Matt. 7:6; 13 : 15 ; Mark 14 : 2 ; Luke 
 14 : 10 ; 20 : 10 ; John 7:8; 17:2; Acts 21 : 24 ; 28 : 27 ; Rom. 3:4; 
 Gal. 2 : 4 ; 1 Pet. 3 : 1. 
 
CLAUSES INTEODTJCED BY PINAL PARTICLES. 87 
 
 200. Object Glauses after Verbs of Exbortiug, etc. 
 
 In classical Greek, verbs of exhorting, commanding, entreat' 
 ing, and persuading are sometimes followed by an object 
 clause instead of the more usual Infinitive. Such a clause 
 usually employs oVo)? and the Future Indicative, sometimes 
 the Subjunctive, a. 1373 ; ff.MT. 355. 
 
 In the New Testament, object clauses after such verbs 
 are frequent ; they use both ha and oTraj? ; and employ 
 the Subjunctive to the exclusion of the Future Indicative. 
 
 Mark 5:18; iraptKoXa airov 6 SaL/xovuTdcK tva ii,e.T airtini -g, he who 
 had been possessed with a demon besought him that he might be with him. 
 
 Luke 10 : 2 ; Sei^Oijre ovv Tofii Kvpiov tov dipuTfUov oTrtos ipydras iK^dXr/ 
 CIS TOV OepuTfJiov avTov, pray ye therefore the Lord of the harvest that 
 he send forth laborers into his harvest. See also Matt. 4:3; 14 : 36 ; 
 16 : 20; Acts 23 : 15; 1 Cor. 1 : 10; 2 Cor. 8:6; Mark 13 : 18 
 (cf. Matt. 24:20) ; Luke 22 :46 (cf. v. 40). 
 
 Eem. Some editors read an Optative in such a clause after a primary 
 tense in Eph. 1 : 17. See B. p. 46 ; WS. vol. II., Appendix, p. 168. 
 
 201. The use of Ua in an object clause after a verb of exhorting is 
 almost unknown in classical Greek. GMT. 357. In the New Testament 
 iva occurs much more frequently than Sttus in such clauses. 
 
 202. The regular construction in classical Greek after verbs 
 of exhorting, etc., is the Infinitive. This is also in the New 
 Testament the most frequent construction, occurring nearly 
 twice as often as the "va and otto)? clauses. KeXeva and the com- 
 pounds of Tao-o-o) take only the Infinitive. 'Ei/reAXo/tat never 
 takes an Infinitive, but uses 'va with the Subjunctive instead. 
 
 203. Under the head of verbs of exhorting, etc., is to be in- 
 cluded the verb 6e\a> when used with reference to a command 
 or request addressed to another. It is frequently followed by 
 an object clause introduced by "va. Here also belongs the verb 
 
88 THE MOODS. 
 
 elirov, used in the sense of command; also such phrases as 
 Kajt-TTTto TO. yovara (Eph. 3 : 14), and ixvdav iroioS/nai iirl tu>v 
 irpoa-tvxw (Eph. 1:16; Philem. 4; cf. Col. 4:12), which are 
 paraphrases for Trpoa-tvxofjLai. 
 
 204. In many cases a clause or Infinitive after a verb of commanding 
 or entreating may be regarded as a command indirectly quoted. It is 
 then a species of indirect discourse, though not usually included under 
 that head. Cf. 337, and ftMT. 684. Matt. 16 ; 20 ; Mark 9:9; 13 : 34. 
 
 205. Object Clauses after Verbs of Striving, etc. In 
 
 classical Greek, verbs signifying to strive for, to take care, 
 to plan, to effect, are followed by ottco? with the Future 
 Indicative, less frequently the Subjunctive, after both pri- 
 mary and secondary tenses. HA. 885 ; Q. 1372. 
 
 In the New Testament, the Subjunctive occurs more 
 frequently than the Future Indicative, and 'iva more fre- 
 quently than OTTO)?. 
 
 John 12 : 10 ; l^ovKexKravTO Se oX dpx'epets Iva Koi tov Ad^apov ajTro- 
 KT€LV(Dcnv, hut the chief priests took counsel to put Lazarus also to death. 
 
 Kev. 3:9; iSovi iroiricrat avroiis iva. rj^omtnv Koi irpoo'KvvqfTovtnv Ivdmiov 
 tSv iroSSv (TOV, Koj, yvS»nv' on eyci yiydirrjad. ere, behold, I will make 
 them to come and worship before thy feet, and to know that 1 have loved 
 thee. See also 1 Cor. 16 : 10 ; Col. 4 : 16, 17 ; Rev. 13 : 12, 16. 
 
 206. When the object clause after a verb meaning to care 
 for, to take heed, is negative, classical Greek sometimes uses 
 ju^ (instead of ottws it-yj) with the Subjunctive, or less fre- 
 quently with the Future Indicative. Q. 1375; Q.WY. 364. 
 This is the common New Testament usage. See Matt. 24 : 4 ; 
 Acts 13 : 40 ; 1 Cor. 8 : 9 ; 10 : 12 ; Gal. 6 i 1 ; Col. 2 : 8 ; 1 Thess. 
 5 : 15 ; Heb. 3 : 12. 
 
 "Ottois /ii? with the Future in classical Greek, and Iva ix.ri with 
 the Subjunctive in New Testament Greek, also occur. John 
 11 : 37 ; 2 John 8. 
 
CLAUSES INTRODUCED BY FINAL PARTICLES. 89 
 
 207. "Oirws occurs in the New Testament in such clauses (205) only 
 in Matt. 12 : 14 ; 22 : 15 ; Mark 3 : 6, and in all these oases after a phrase 
 meaning to plan. The clause thus closely approximates an indirect de- 
 liberative question. Of. Mark 11 : 18. See Th. Sras, II. 2. 
 
 208. The Optative sometimes occurs in classical Greek after a 
 secondary tense of verbs of striving, etc., but is not found in the Nev? 
 Testament. 
 
 209. It is sometimes difficult to say -with, certainty whether |Ui} with 
 the Subjunctive after 8pa or ipare is an objective clause or an independent 
 Prohibitory Subjunctive. In classical Greek the dependent construction 
 was already fully developed (of. (?.MT. 354, 307) ; and though in the 
 New Testament Spa is sometimes prefixed to the Imperative (Matt. 9 : 30; 
 24 : 6), showing that the paratactic construction is still possible, /tij with 
 the Subjunctive in such passages as Matt. 18 : 10 ; 1 Thess. 5 : 15 is best 
 regarded as constituting an object clause. 
 
 Ml} with the Subjunctive after pxiira is also probably to be regarded as 
 dependent. It is true that ^XAro does not take an objective clause in 
 classical Greek, that in the New Testament only the Imperative of this 
 verb is followed by a clause defining the action to be done or avoided, and 
 that in a few instances the second verb is an Aorist Subjunctive in the 
 second person with /n^, and might therefore be regarded as a Prohib- 
 itory Subjunctive (Luke 21:8; Gal. 5:15; Heb. 12:25). Yet in a 
 larger number of cases the verb is in the third person (Matt. 24 : 4 ; Mark 
 13 : 5 ; Acts 13 : 40 ; 1 Cor. 8 : 9, etc.), and in at least one instance is in- 
 troduced by tva (1 Cor. 16 : 10) . This indicates that we have not a coor- 
 dinate imperative expression, but a dependent clause. In Col. 4 : 17 
 p\4ire, and in 2 John 8 p\4ireTc, is followed by im with the Subjunctive ; 
 the clause in such case being probably objective, but possibly pure final. 
 In Heb. 3 : 12 the future Indicative with ^m} is evidently an objective 
 clause. 
 
 Eem. Concerning Luke 11 : 35, see B. p. 243 ; WM. p. 374, foot-note, 
 and p. 631 ; WT. p. 503 ; Th. p.i. III. 2 ; R. V. ad loc. 
 
 210. Verbs of striving, etc., may also take the Infinitive as 
 object. With Matt. 26 : 4, and John 11 : 53, cf. Acts 9 : 23 ; 
 with Eev. 13 : 12 cf. 13 : 13. 
 
 The verbs ^rjTeo) and a.<l>ir)ixL, which are usually followed by 
 
90 THE MOODS. 
 
 an Infinitive, are, eacli followed in one instance by tva with the 
 Subjunctive. See Mark 11 : 16 ; 1 Cor. 14 : 12 ; cf. also 1 Cor. 
 4:2. 
 
 211. Subject, Predicate, and Appositive Clauses intro- 
 duced by Iva. Clauses introduced by Xva are frequently 
 used in the New Testament as subject, predicate, or appos- 
 itive, with a force closely akin to that of an Infinitive. 
 The verb is usually in the Subjunctive, less frequently in 
 the Future Indicative. 
 
 These clauses may be further classified as follows : 
 
 212. (a) Subject of , the passive of verbs of exhorting, 
 striving, etc., which in the active take such a clause as object, 
 and of other verbs of somewhat similar force. Cf. 200, 206. 
 
 1 Cor. 4:2; lyfrurai iv rots oiKOvojuots iva iritrros ns fvpiOy, it is 
 
 required in stewards that a man be found faithful. 
 Kev. 9:4; koI ippeOrj avrais tva fj,-)] dStKijcrovcriv tov x^P^""' '''V'' T'J^) 
 
 and it was said unto them that they should not hurt the grass of the 
 
 earth. See also Mark 9 : 12 (yiypaTTToi implies command or will) ; 
 
 Rev. 9:5. 
 
 213. (&) Subject, Pkbdicate, oe Appositive with nouns 
 of various significance, especially such as are cognate with the 
 verbs which take such a clause as object, and with pronouns, 
 the clause constituting a definition of the content of the noun 
 or pronoun. 
 
 John 4 : 34 ; ifiov PputpA e<TTiv tva 7roi,ij<Tu> to 6e\rjfia tov ire/xi/'avTOs 
 
 jue Kal T£\eiut(T(o to ipyov avTov, my meat is to do the will of him 
 
 that sent me and to accomplish his work. 
 John 15:12; avrr) icTTiv ij ivToXr] ■q ijxri, tva dyairaTe oXXt^Aovs, this 
 
 is my commandment, that ye love one another. See also Luke 1 : 43 ; 
 
 John 6 : 29, 39, 40 ; 15 : 8, 13 ; 18 : 39 ; 1 Cor. 9 : 18 ; 1 John 3:1; 
 
 2 John 6 ; 3 John 4. 
 
CLAUSES INTKODUCED BY FINAL PAETICLES. 91 
 
 Eem. The Present Indicative occurs in MSS. of John 17 : 3 and is 
 adopted by Tisch. and Treg. (text). 
 
 214. (c) Subject of phrases signifying it is profitable, it is 
 sufficient, etc. 
 
 Matt. 10 : 25 ; apKerov tiS /juaO-qry iva yivT]Tai m 6 SiSacrKoAos avTov, 
 it is enough for the disciple that he be as his master. See also Matt. 
 5 : 29, 30 ; 18 : 6 ; Luke 17 : 2 ; John 11 : 60 ; 16 : 7 ; 1 Cor. 4 : 3. 
 
 215. Complementary and Epexegetic Clauses intro- 
 duced by iva. Clauses introduced by tm are used in the 
 New Testament to express a complementary or epexegetic 
 limitation, with a force closely akin to that of an Infinitive. 
 The verb of the clause is usually in the Subjunctive, some- 
 times in the Future Indicative. 
 
 These clauses may be classified as follows : 
 
 216. (a) Complementary limitation of nouns and adjec- 
 tives signifying authority, power, fitness, need, set time, etc. 
 
 Mark 11 : 28 ; ^ rk troi IScokev tyjv efotxrtav Tavrrjv iva TaCra irotjjs, 
 
 or who gave thee this authority to do these things ? 
 John 12 : 28 ; iX-^Xvdcv ij <upa Iva ho^atrdrj a vios tov avOputwov, the 
 
 hour is come that the Son of man should be glorified. See also Matt. 
 
 8:8; Luke 7 : 6 ; John 1:27; 2:25; 16:2,82; 1 John 2:27; 
 
 Rev. 21 : 28. 
 
 217. (b) Complementary or epexegetic limitation of verbs 
 of various significance ; the clause defines the content, ground, 
 or method of the action denoted by the verb, or constitutes an 
 indirect object of the verb. 
 
 John 8 : 56 ; 'Aj8paa/x o irariip vimv ^yaWtacraro Iva tSjj t^v ■^/ji.ipav 
 T7]v ifi'^v, your father Abraham rejoiced to see my day. 
 
92 THE MOODS. 
 
 Phil. 2:2; TrXr/piiXTaTe fiov ttjv x°-P^v "''' '''o °-^° <l>pov^T£, fulfil ye 
 my Joy, that ye he of the same mind. (See an Infinitive similarly 
 used in Acts 15 : 10.) See also John 9 : 22 ; Gal. 2:9; in both 
 these latter passages the Iva clause defines the content of the agree- 
 ment mentioned in the preceding portion of the sentence. See also 
 John 5 : 7. Cf . Martyr. Polyc. 10. 1. 
 
 218. Clauses of Conceived Result Introduced by "va. 
 Clauses introduced by ha are used in the New Testament 
 to express tlie conceived result of an action. 
 
 John 9:2; rts ■^fw.pTtv, ovtos ^ oi yovets avTov, iva, TV(j>Xb'S yevvrj6rj, 
 who did sin, this man or his parents, that he should he horn hlind f 
 
 1 Thess. 5:4; vmets Se, dSeX^oi, ovk tcrre tv (Tkotu, Iva 19 ■^fji.epa 
 v/j-Ss <us xXcWas KaTaXaPy, but ye, brethren, are not in darkness, that 
 that day should overtake you as thieves. See also 1 John 1 : 9 (cf . 
 Heb. 6 : 10 — Infinitive in similar construction) ; 2 Cor. 1 : 17 ; Rev. 
 9 : 20 (cf. Matt. 21 : 32) ; 14 : 13; 22 : 14. 
 
 219. The relation of thought between the fact expressed in 
 the principal clause and that expressed in the clause of con- 
 ceived result introduced by tva is that of cause and effect, but 
 it is recognized by the speaker that this relation is one of 
 theory or inference rather than of observed fact. In some 
 cases the effect is actual and observed, the cause is inferred. 
 So, e.g., John 9:2. In other cases the cause is observed, the 
 effect is inferred. So, e.g., 1 Thess. 5:4. In all the cases the 
 action of the principal clause is regarded as the necessary con- 
 dition of that of the subordinate clause, the action of the sub- 
 ordinate clause as the result which is to be expected to follow 
 from that of the principal clause. 
 
 It is worthy of notice that in English the form of expres- 
 sion which ordinarily expresses pure purpose most distinctly 
 may also be used to express this relation of conceived result. 
 We say, He must have suffered very severe losses in order to he 
 so reduced in circumstances. Such forms of expression are 
 
CLAUSES INTBODUCED BY FINAL PARTICLES. 93 
 
 probably the product of false analogy, arising from imitation 
 of a construction which really expresses purpose. Thus in the 
 sentence, He labored diligently in order to accumulate property, 
 the subordinate clause expresses pure purpose. In the sen- 
 tence. He must have labored diligently in order to accumulate 
 such a property, the sentence may be so conceived that the sub- 
 ordinate clause would express purpose, but it would usually 
 mean rather that if he accumulated such a property he must 
 have labored diligently ; that is, the property is conceived of 
 as a result the existence of which proves diligent labor. This 
 becomes still more evident if we say. He must have labored 
 diligently to have accumulated such a property. But when we 
 say, He must have suffered severe losses to have become so re- 
 duced in circumstances, it is evident that the idea of purpose 
 has entirely disappeared, and only that of inferred result 
 remains. Actual result observed to be the effect of observed 
 causes is not, however, thus expressed except by a rhetorical 
 figure. With these illustrations from the English, compare 
 the following from the Greek. Jas. 1:4; 17 8e wo/ioi/^ epyov 
 TeA.£iov ex^''"' ""* V'''^ TcXciot Kal oXoKkrjpoi, and let patience have- 
 its perfect work, that ye may be perfect and entire. Heb. 10 : 36 ; 
 inrofwv^s yap tx^'"^ ypclav iva, ro diXiqim, tov Otov ■jrovrjO'avm KOixi<77j(rOe. 
 T^v iirayyeXiav, for ye have need of patience, that, having done the 
 will of God, ye may receive the promise. In the first sentence 
 the Iva clause expresses the purpose of excVa). In the second, 
 though the purpose of vTro/mvn] is contained in the clause tva 
 . . . iirayyeXCav, yet the function of this clause in the sentence 
 is not telic. Its office is not to express the purpose of the 
 principal clause, but to set forth a result (conceived, not act- 
 ual) of which the possession of wo/mon; is the necessary condi- 
 tion. In John 9 : 2 the idiom is developed a step further, for 
 in this case the iva clause in no sense expresses the purpose of 
 the action of the principal clause, but a fact conceived to be 
 
94 THE MOODS. 
 
 the result of a cause concerning which the principal clause 
 makes inquiry. 
 
 This use of im with the Subjunctive is closely akin in force 
 to the normal force of (oo-te with the Infinitive. Cf. 370, c, and 
 especially GMT. 582-584. 
 
 220. Some of the instances under 215-217 might be considered as ex- 
 pressing conceived result, but the idiom has developed beyond the point 
 of conceived result, the clause becoming a mere complementary limita- 
 tion. The possible course of development may perhaps be suggested by 
 examining the following illustrations : John 17 : 2 ; Mark 11 : 28 ; Luke 
 7 : 6 ; 1 John 2 : 27. In the first case the clause probably expresses pure 
 purpose. In the last the idea of purpose has altogether disappeared. 
 
 221. In all these constructions, 211-218, which are distinct 
 departures from classical usage, being later invasions of the 
 iva clause upon the domain occupied in classical Greek by 
 the Infinitive, the Infinitive remains also in use in the New 
 Testament, being indeed in most of these constructions more 
 frequent than the "va clause. 
 
 222. There is no certain, scarcely a probable, instance in 
 the New Testament of a clause introduced by iva denoting 
 actual result conceived of as such. 
 
 Luke 9 : 45 probably expresses pure purpose (cf. Matt. 11 : 25 ; WM. 
 p. 574; TTT. p. 459). Gal. 5 : 17 is also best explained as expressing the 
 purpose of the hostility of the flesli and the Spirit, viewed, so far as the 
 iva clause is concerned, as a hostility of the iiesh to the Spirit. So, ap- 
 parently, R.V. Kev. 13 : 13 is the most probable instance of tva denoting 
 actual result ; iva . . . Troi.% is probably equivalent to uVre iroieic, and is 
 •epexegetic of /j.eyd\a. It would be best translated, so as even to make. 
 
 Eespecting im wXripae^, Matt. 1 : 22 and frequently in the first gospel, 
 "there is no room for doubt. The writer of the first gospel never uses 
 tva to express result, either actual or conceived ; and that he by this 
 phrase at least intends to express purpose is made especially clear by his 
 employment of Hirus (which is never eobatic) interchangeably with iva. 
 With 1:22; 2:15; 4:14; 12:17; 21:4; 26 : 56, cf. 8 : 17 ; 13:35. 
 
CLAUSES INTEODUCED BY FINAL PARTICLES. 95 
 
 223. Concerning the post-classical usage of iva in general see Jebb in 
 Vincent and Dickson, Modern Greek, pp. 319-321. Concerning whether 
 Ira in the New Testament is always in the strict sense telle, and whether 
 it is ever ecbatic (two distinct questions not always clearly distinguished), 
 see Meyer on Matt. 1 : 22 : ""li/a ist niemals iK^anKbp, so dass, sondern 
 immer tcXik6i/, damit," — the first half of which is true, the second half 
 far from true. Fritzsche on Matt. pp. 836 ff. ; WT. pp. 457-462 ; WM. 
 pp. 573-578; B. pp. 235-240: "And although it [I'to] never stands in 
 the strict ecbatic sense (for uxne with the finite verb), it has nevertheless 
 here reached the very boundary line where the difference between the 
 two relations (the telic and the ecbatic) disappears, and it is nearer to the 
 ecbatic sense than to its original final sense. Necessary as the demand is, 
 that in a systematic inquiry into the use of the particle, even within a 
 comparatively restricted field, we should always make its original telio 
 force, which is the only force it has in earlier Greek vyriters, our point 
 of departure, and trace out thence the transitions to its diverse shades of 
 meaning ; the interests of exegesis would gain very little, if in every in- 
 dividual passage of the N.T. even (the language of which has already 
 departed so far from original classic Greek usage) we should still take 
 pains, at the cost of the simple and natural sense, and by a recourse to 
 artificial means, always to introduce the telic force," p. 239. Hunzinger, 
 "Die in der klassischen Gracitat nicht gebrauchliche finale Bedeutung 
 derPartikel Ua im neutestamentlichen Sprachgebrauch," in Zeitschrift 
 fur Kirchliehe Wissenschaft, 1883, pp. 632-643 — a valuable article which 
 elaborately disproves its own conclusion — "dass tva im N.T. in alien 
 Fallen final verstanden werden kann," unless a very broad and loose 
 sense be given to the term final. 
 
 224. Object Clauses after Verbs of Fear and Danger. 
 
 In classical Greek, clauses after verbs of fear and danger 
 employ yuij with the Subjunctive after primary tenses ; the 
 Optative, more rarely the Subjunctive, after secondary 
 tenses. HA. 887 ; Q. 1378. 
 
 In the New Testament the Subjunctive only is used. 
 
 2 Cor. 12 : 20 ; (^o/3oS/uu yap //.i; irtos eX^mv ov)( olovs BiXto evpm i/iSs, for 
 I fear, lest hy any means, when I come, I shall find you not such as I 
 would. See also Acts 23 : 10 ; 27 : 29 ; 2 Cor. 11:3; Heb. 4:1. 
 
 Eeu. 1. Acts 5 : 26 may be understood as in E.V., rbv \a6v denoting 
 the persons feared, and /i^ 'Kidaaddaiv the thing feared (of. the familiar 
 
96 THE MOODS. 
 
 idiom with oT5a illustrated in Mark 1 : 24 ; see also Gal. 4 ; 11), so that the 
 meaning would be expressed in English by translating, for they were 
 afraid that they should be stoned by the people ; or ^0o^oCpto . . . \abv may 
 be taken as parenthetical, and ijA] Xieao-ffQa-iti made to limit ^yev airois, 
 oi /ktA, plas ; so Tisch. and WH. 
 
 Eem. 2. Some MSS. and editors read a Future Indicative in 2 Cor. 
 12:21. 
 
 225. The verb of fearing is sometimes unexpressed, the idea 
 of fear being suggested by the context ; so, it may be, in Acts 
 5 : 39, and Matt. 25 : 9. 2 Tim. 2 : 25, /aiJ ttote Stirj [or 8(03] 
 avToli 6 6toi fieravoiav, is perhaps best explained in the same 
 way. In the preceding context the apostle enjoins gentleness 
 and meekness in dealing with those that oppose themselves. 
 The opposite course of harshness, he seems to feel, could pro- 
 ceed only from the thought that these opposers were past 
 repentance. He accordingly adds as an argument for the 
 course enjoined, \_fearing'] lest God may perchance grant them 
 repentance, i.e. lest you he found to he dealing in harshness with 
 those to whom God will grant repentance. 
 
 226. It is evident that object clauses after verbs of fear are closely 
 akin to negative object clauses after verbs signifying to care for. G.MT. 
 354. Some of the instances cited under 206 might not inappropriately be 
 placed under 224. On the probable common origin of both, and their 
 development from the original parataxis, see (r.MT. 307, 352. 
 
 227. When the object of apprehension is conceived of as 
 already present or past, i.e. as a thing already decided, al- 
 though the issue is at the time of speaking unknown, the In- 
 dicative is used both in classical and New Testament Greek. 
 HA. 888 ; G. 1380. 
 
 Gal. 4 : 11 ; <^oj8oi)/iat vfia<; jt-rj ttms Akti KeKomaKo, ets i/xai, I am afraid 
 I have perhaps bestowed labor upon you in vain. See also Gal. 2:2; 
 IThess. 3:5; Gen. 43 : 11. 
 
MOODS IN CLAUSES OF CAUSE. 97 
 
 MOODS IK GLAUSES OP CAUSE. 
 
 228. A causal clause is one which gives either the cause or 
 the reason of the fact stated in the principal clause. Causal 
 clauses are introduced by oTt, Slotl, «7r£i, e;r£iS^, £7rei8j?irejO, e<^' <S, 
 etc. HA. 926; G. 1605. 
 
 229. Moods and Tenses in Causal Clauses. The 
 
 moods and tenses are used in causal clauses with the same 
 force as in principal clauses. 
 
 John 14 : 19 ; on ey<o ^S) koI i/xeis ^T^crere, because I live, ye shall live also. 
 
 1 Cor. 14 : 12 ; cttci ^ijAcorat itrre Trvev fmrwy, irpos rijv oikoSo/x^v t^s 
 eKK\jj(rtas ^r)T£iT£ tva irepiucremjTe, since ye are zealous of spiritual 
 gifts, seek that ye may abound unto the edifying of the church. See 
 also Luke 1:1; Acts 15 : 24 ; Kom. 5 : 12. 
 
 230. From the significance of a causal clause it naturally 
 results that its verb is usually an Indicative affirming a fact. 
 Any form, however, which expresses or implies either qualified 
 or unqualified assertion may stand after a causal conjunction. 
 Thus we find, e.g., a rhetorical question, or an apodosis of a 
 conditional sentence. In the latter case the protasis may be 
 omitted. In the following instances all three of these phe- 
 nomena coincide ; the causal clause is an apodosis, its protasis 
 is omitted, it is expressed in the form of a rhetorical 
 question. 
 
 1 Cor. 15 : 29 ; iiru tl iroi-^(TOV(nv ot /Sairrifo/iei/oi vnep tu>v veKputv, else 
 what shall they do which are baptized for the dead? i.e., since [if the 
 dead are not railed^ they that are baptized for the dead are baptized 
 to no purpose. 
 
 Heb. 10 : 2 ; eiret ovk av iiravcravTO irpoa<^£po/i£vat, else would they not 
 have ceased to be offered ? i.e., since [if what was said above were not 
 true'] they would have ceased to be offered. Cf . also Acts 5 : 38. 
 
98 THE MOODS. 
 
 231. Erom the nature of the causal clause as making an 
 assertion, it results that it is easily disjoined from the clause 
 which states the fact of which it gives the cause or reason, 
 and becomes an independent sentence. 
 
 Matt. 6:5; Kal oTai/ Trpo(T£v)(r](T6£, ovk ecrecrfle (as ol viroKpirai' oti 
 <j>i\ov(nv iv Tats CTWva-ywyats koX ev Tats ytoi/tats to>v 7r\aT£iS>v 
 eoTuJTes irpocTevx^adai, and when ye pray, ye shall not he as the 
 hypocrites : because they love to stand and pray in the synagogues and 
 in the corners of the streets (cf. 6 : 16, where in a closely similar 
 sentence, ydp is used instead of oti). See also Luke 11:32; 
 1 Cor. 1 : 22, and cf. v. 21, where the same conjunction cttciSi; intro- 
 duces a subordinate clause. 
 
 232. The distinction between a subordinate causal clause and an 
 independent sentence aflSrming a cause or reason is usually one of the 
 degree of emphasis on the causal relation between the two facts. When 
 the chief thing asserted is the existence of the causal relation, as happens, 
 e.g., when one fact or the other is already present as a fact before the 
 mind, the causal clause is manifestly subordinate. "When the emphasis 
 is upon the separate assertions as assertions, rather than on the relation 
 of the facts asserted, the causal clause easily becomes an independent 
 sentence. Thus in Eev. 3 : 16, because thou art lukewarm, and neither 
 hot nor cold, I will spew thee out of my mouth, the causal clause is subor- 
 dinate. So also in John 16 : 3, and these things they mil do, because they 
 have not known the Father nor me, where the words these things refer 
 to an assertion already made, and the intent of the sentence is to state 
 why they wiU do these things. See also John 20 : 29. On the other hand, 
 in Matt. 6:5; Luke 11 : 32 ; 1 Cor. 1 : 22 (see 231) ; and in 1 Cor. 15 : 29 ; 
 Heb. 10:2 (see 230), the casual clause is evidently independent, and the 
 particles Sri, iird, ^TreiS^ have substantially the force of ydp. 
 
 233. Causal relations may also be expressed by a relative 
 clause (294), by an Infinitive with the article governed by 8ta 
 (408), and by a participle (439). 
 
MOODS IN CLATJSKS OF BBSULT. 99 
 
 MOODS IN GLAUSES OF RESULT. 
 
 234. A consecutive clause is one which expresses the result, 
 actual or potential, of , the action stated in the principal clause 
 or a preceding sentence. 
 
 In the New Testament consecutive clauses are introduced 
 by (So-re. HA. 927 ; G. 1449. 
 
 235. A consecutive clause commonly takes either the Indic- 
 ative or the Infinitive. The Indicative properly expresses the 
 actual result produced by the action previously mentioned, the 
 Infinitive the result which the action of the principal verb 
 tends or is calculated to produce. Since, however, an actual 
 result may always be conceived of as that which the cause in 
 question is calculated or adapted to produce, the Infinitive 
 tends to displace the Indicative in expressions of result. Thus 
 if senselessness tends to credulity, one may say outws ovot/toi 
 iiTTC mrrc to aSvvaTov Ttumxiere. or outojs avorjTOi icrre okttc to aSv- 
 varov TTUTTevav, with little difference of meaning, though strictly 
 the latter represents believing the impossible simply as the 
 measure of the folly, while the former represents it as the act- 
 ual result of such folly. The tendency of the Infinitive to dis- 
 place the Indicative is apparent even in classical Greek, but is 
 more clearly marked in later Greek. HA. 927 ; G. 1450, 1451. 
 
 Concerning the different conceptions of result, and the use 
 of the Infinitive to express result, see 369-371. 
 
 236. The Indicative with Sare always expresses actual 
 result. 
 
 John 3 : 16 ; outos yap ■^ydirrjcra' b $ebi tov Kocr/jLOv ti)<TT€ tov vlbv rbv 
 fwvoyevrj eSioKtv, for God so loved the world that he gave his only 
 begotten Son. 
 
 Gal. 2 : 13; koI a-uwireKpiOrjcrav avriS [xat] oi Xonrol 'lovSaioi, oxjre ko.1 
 Bapvafias fjvvairqxOt} avTu>v rrj VTroKpiaeL, and the rest of the Jews 
 dissembled likeimse with him ; insomuch that even Barnabas was carried 
 away with their dissimulation. 
 
100 THE MOODS. 
 
 Rem. The above are the only two clear instances in the New Testa- 
 ment of aa-re with the Indicative so closely joined to what precedes as to 
 constitute a subordinate clause. 
 
 237. The clause introduced by <So-t£ is sometimes so dis- 
 joined from the antecedent sentence expressing the causal fact 
 that it becomes an independent sentence. In such cases wj-re. 
 has the meaning therefore, or accordingly, and the verb intro- 
 duced by it may be in any form capable of standing in a prin- 
 cipal clause. SA. 927, a ; G. 1454. 
 
 Mark 2 : 28 ; mcrre Kvpioi icrriv 6 vlo^ toC avOpioirav koI tov craP^drov, so 
 
 that the Son of man is lord even of the sabbath. 
 1 Cor. 5:8; ula-rc kopTaZ,tiiixtv, wherefore let us keep the feast. 
 1 Thess. 4:18; wcttc TrapaKoXuTt dAAi/Aovs iv tois Aoyots touVois, 
 
 wherefore comfort one another with these words. 
 
 MOODS IN OONDITIOITAL SENTENCES, 
 
 238. A conditional sentence consists of a subordinate clause 
 which states a supposition, and a principal clause which states 
 a conclusion conditioned on the fulfilment of the supposition 
 stated in the subordinate clause. The conditional clause is 
 called the protasis. The principal clause is called the apodosis. 
 
 239. Suppositions are either particular or general. When 
 the protasis supposes a certain definite event and the apodosis 
 conditions its assertion on the occurrence of this event, the 
 supposition is particular. When the protasis supposes any 
 occurrence of an act of a certain class, and the apodosis states 
 what is or was wont to take place in any instance of an act of 
 the class supposed in the protasis, the supposition is general. 
 
 Thus in the sentence, If he believes this act to he wrong, he will not 
 do it, the supposition is particular. But in the sentence, If [in any in- 
 stance^ he believes an act to be wrong, he does not [is not wont to'] do it, 
 
MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 101 
 
 the supposition is general. In tlie sentence, If he has read this book, he 
 will be able to tell what it contains, tlie supposition is particular. But 
 in the sentence, If he read a book, he could always tell what it contained, 
 the supposition is general. 
 
 240, It should be noted that the occurrence of an indefinite pronoun 
 in the protasis does not necessarily make the supposition general. If the 
 writer, though using an indefinite term, refers to a particular instance, 
 and in the apodosis states what happened, is happening, or will happen 
 in this case, the supposition is particular. If, on the other hand, the 
 supposition refers to any instance of the class of cases described, and 
 the apodosis states what is or was wont to happen in any such instance, 
 the supposition is general. Thus, in the sentence, If any one has eaten 
 any of the food, he is by this time dead, the supposition is particular. 
 In the sentence. If any one [in any instance} ate any of the food, [it was 
 wont to happen that] he died, the supposition is general. In 2 Cor. 2 : 5, 
 but if any one hath caused sorrow, he hath caused sorrow not to me, but 
 . . . to you all, the supposition refers to a specific case, and is particular. 
 Even the mental selection of one of many possible instances suffices to 
 make a supposition particular. So in 1 Cor. .3 : 12, it is probable that we 
 ought to read, if any man is building, and in 3: 17, if any man is destroy- 
 ing, and take the clauses as referring to what was then, hypothetically, 
 going on rather than to what might at any time occur. On the other 
 hand, in John 11 : 9, if a man walk in the day, he stumbleth not, the sup- 
 position refers to any instance of walking in the day, and is general. 
 
 Concerning a protasis which refers to the truth of a general principle as 
 such, see 24.3. 
 
 241. Of the six classes of conditional sentences •which, are 
 found in classical Greek, five occur in the 'Sew Testament, not 
 however without occasional variations of form. 
 
 Eem. 1. The classification of conditional sentences here followed is 
 substantially that of Professor Goodwin. The numbering of the Present 
 General Suppositions and Past General Suppositions as fifth and sixth 
 classes respectively, instead of including them as subdivisions under the 
 first class, is adopted to facilitate reference. 
 
 Kem. 2. It should be observed that the titles of the several classes of 
 conditional sentences describe the suppositions not from the point of view 
 of fact, but from that of the representation of the case to the speaker's 
 own mind or to that of his hearer. Cf., e.g., Luke 7 : 39 ; John 18 : 30. 
 
102 THE MOODS. 
 
 242. A. Simple Present or Past Particular Supposi- 
 tion. The protasis simply states a supposition which refers 
 to a particular case in the present or past, implying 
 nothing as to its fulfilment. 
 
 The protasis is expressed by el with a present or past 
 tense of the Indicative ; any form of the finite verb may 
 stand in the apodosis. HA. 893 ; G-. 1390. 
 
 John 15 : 20 ; ti i/A iSita^av, koL ifxai Siio^ovcriv, if they have persecuted 
 me, they will also persecute you. 
 
 Gal. 5:18; el Sk ttvcv/jmti ayta-Oe., ovk iarri ijro vofjiov, but if ye are led 
 by the Spirit, ye are not under the law. See also Matt. 4:3; Luke 
 16:11; Acts 5:39; Eom. 4 : 2 ; 8:10; Gal. 2:17; Rev. 20:15. 
 
 Rem. Concerning the use of the negatives /htJ and oij in the protasis of 
 conditional sentences of this class, see 469, 470. 
 
 243. When a supposition refers to the truth of a general 
 principle as such, and the apodosis conditions its assertion 
 on the truth of this principle, not on the occurrence of any 
 instance of a supposed class of events, the supposition is 
 particular. It is expressed in Greek by d v^ith the Indica- 
 tive, and the sentence belongs to the first class. \ 
 
 Matt. 19 : 10 ; ei ovtok Icrriv ij alria rmi avOpmrov /jiiTa. t^s ■ywaocosjjov 
 aT}/j,<f>ipci ya/jc^a-ai, if the case of the man is so with his wife, it is not 
 expedient to marry. See also Matt. 6 : 30 ; Gal. 2 : 21 ; cf. Plat. Prot. 
 840, C. In Rom. 4 : 14; 8 : 17; 11 : 6, the verb is omitted. The 
 use of n and the nature of the sentence, however, easily suggest 
 what form of the verb would be required if it were expressed. 
 
 244. Conditional clauses of the first class are frequently 
 used when the condition is fulfilled, and the use of the hypo- 
 thetical form suggests no doubt of the fact. This fact of ful- 
 filment lies, however, not in the conditional sentence, but in the 
 context. John 3 : 12 ; 7 : 23 ; Eom. 5 : 10. 
 
MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 103 
 
 245. On the other hand, conditional clauses of the first class 
 may be used of what is regarded by the speaker as an unful- 
 filled condition. But this also is not expressed or implied by 
 the form of the sentence, which is in itself wholly colorless, 
 suggesting nothing as to the fulfilment of the condition. 
 Luke 23 : 35, 37 ; John 18 : 23 ; Eom. 4:2; Gal. 5 : 11. 
 
 246. Even a Future Indicative may stand in the protasis of 
 ft conditional sentence of the first class when reference is had 
 to a present necessity or intention, or when the writer desires 
 to state not what will take place on the fulfilment of a future 
 possibility, but merely to affirm a necessary logical consequence 
 of a future event. 1 Cor. 9 : 11. Cf. GMT. 407. 
 
 247. In a few instances Hv is used with the Present Indicative in the 
 protasis of a conditional sentence, apparently to express a simple present 
 supposition. 1 Thess. 3 : 8; 1 John 5 : 15. 
 
 248. B. Supposition contrary to Fact. The protasis 
 states a supposition which refers to the present or past, 
 implying that it is not or was not fulfilled. 
 
 The protasis is expressed by el with a past tense of the 
 Indicative ; the apodosis by a past tense of the Indicative 
 with &v. HA. 895 ; a. 1397. 
 
 The Imperfect denotes continued action; the Aorist 
 a simple fact; the Pluperfect completed action. The 
 time is implied in the context, not expressed by the 
 verb. 
 
 John 11 : 21 ; Kvptc, ci ^s <uSe ovk av diriOavcv 6 a8e\(f>6i /iou, Lord, if 
 thou hadst been here, my brother would not have died. 
 
 Gal. 1 : 10 ; a ?« avOpiinroii rjp£<rKOV, Xpurrov SoBXos ovk av ^fJ-riv, if I 
 were still pleasing men, I should not be a servant of Christ. See also 
 John 14 : 28 ; Acts 18 : 14 ; Ileb. 4:8; 11 : 15. 
 
104 THE MOODS. 
 
 249. *Av is sometimes omitted from the apodosis. Cf. 30. 
 B. pp. 216 f ., 225 f . ; WM. pp. 382 f. ; WT. pp. 305 f . ; cf. GMT. 
 pp. 416 fe., esp. 422, 423. 
 
 John 9 : 33 ; ci /xr] -rjv outos irapa. O^m, ovk ijhvvaTo iroietv ofiSev, if this 
 man were not from God, he could do nothing. See also Matt. 26 ; 24 ; 
 John 15 : 22 ; 19 : 11 ; 1 Cor. 5:10; Gal. 4:15; Heb. 9 : 26. 
 
 250. C. Future Supposition with more Probability. 
 
 The protasis states a supposition which refers to the 
 future, suggesting some probability of its fulfilment. 
 
 The protasis is usually expressed by idv (or av) with 
 the Subjunctive; the apodosis by the Future Indicative or 
 by some other form referring to future time. HA. 898 ; 
 a. 1403. 
 
 Matt. 9:21; lav fi.6vov ai/'to/^at tov lixaTiov avrov c7u>Brj(T0jxaL, if I shall 
 
 hut touch his garments, I shall he made whole. 
 John 12 : 26 ; idv Tts e//.ot Suxkovt/j Tt/Aiytret airbv 6 TraTiqp, if any man 
 
 serve me, him will the Father honor. 
 John 14 : 15 ; iav dyaTraTe jixe, Tas cvToXas ras e/x,as T-qprjaere., if ye love 
 
 me, ye will keep my commandments. See also Matt. 5 : 20 ; 1 Cor. 
 
 4:19; Gal. 5:2; Jas. 2 : 15, 16. 
 
 251. In addition to Idv with the Subjunctive, which is the 
 usual form both in classical and New Testament Greek, the 
 following forms of protasis also occur occasionally in the New 
 Testament to express a future supposition with more proba- 
 bility : 
 
 252. (a) Et with the Subjunctive. 
 
 Luke 9:13; ovk tia-iv ■^fuv TrXeiov fj aproi TreVre Kal l\Ove's 8vo, ei p.^qri 
 Troptv6ivT€% ■^fj.iis dyopd(TO)fi,cv eis irdvTa tov Xaov tovtov /Spuj/uara, 
 we have no more than five loaves and two fishes ; unless we are to go 
 and huy food for all this people. See also 1 Cor. 14 : 5 ; 1 Thess. 
 5:10; Judg. 11:9. 
 
MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 105 
 
 253. This usage also occurs in Homer and the tragic poets, but is very- 
 rare in Attic prose. It is found in the Septuagint and becomes very com- 
 mon in later Hellenistic and Byzantine writers. G.MT.453, 454 ; Clapp in 
 T.A.P.A. 1887, p. 49 ; 1891, pp. 88 f .; WT. pp. 294 f. ; WM. pp. 368, 374, f.n. 
 
 For the few New Testament instances there is possibly in each case a 
 special reason. Thus in Luke 9 : 13 there is probably a mixture of a con- 
 ditional clause and a deliberative question : unless indeed — are we to go? 
 i.e., unless indeed we are to go. In 1 Cor. 14 : 6 and 1 Thess. 6:10 a 
 preference for the more common el /n^ and elre . . . etre over the somewhat 
 unusual icLv ^ii} and idvre . . . HvTe may have led to the use of the former 
 in spite of the fact that the meaning called for a Subjunctive. 1 Thess. 
 5 : 10 can hardly be explained as attraction (S. and W.), since the nature 
 of the thought itself calls for a Subjunctive. On Phil. 3 : 11, 12, cf. 276. 
 It is doubtful, however, whether the discovery of any difference in force 
 between el with the Subjunctive and Hv with the Subjunctive in these 
 latter passages is not an over-refinement. 
 
 254. (&) Et or idv with the Future Indicative. 
 
 2 Tim. 2 : 12; et apvyiaofuSa, kcIkeivos apv^o-erat ^/uSs, if we shall deny 
 
 Mm, he also will deny us. 
 Acts 8 : 31 ; eav /u.17 ns o^yq^a jnc, unless some one shall guide me. 
 
 See also Luke 19 : 40. 
 
 255. El with the Future Indicative occurs as a protasis of a condition 
 of the third form not infrequently in classical writers, especially in 
 tragedy. G.WT. 447. Of the New Testament instances of el followed 
 by a Future (about twenty in number), one, 2 Tim. 2 : 12, illustrates the 
 mireaion/ or moiM'ioJ-i/ force attributed to such clauses by Gild., T.A.P.A. 
 1876, pp. 9 ff. ; A.J.P. XIII. pp. 123 fi. Concerning the other instances, 
 see 246, 254, 272, 276, 340. 
 
 256. (c) El with the Present Indicative. The protasis is 
 then apparently of the first class (242). The instances which 
 belong here are distinguished by evident reference of the prot- 
 asis to the future. 
 
 Matt. 8 : 31 ; d EK/SoXXets 17/xas, dirocrTeiXov ^/tas £is rijv ayeXrjv tS>v 
 XOtpuv, if thou cast us out, send us away into the herd of swine. See 
 also 1 Cor. 10 : 27 (cf. v. 28) ; 2 John 10; Gen. 4 : 14; 20 : 7; 
 44 : 26 ; and as possible instances Matt. 5 : 29, 30 ; 18 : 8, 9 ; 
 Luke 14: 26; 2 Tim. 2 : 12. 
 
106 THE MOODS. 
 
 257. There is no distinction in form either in Greek or in English 
 between a particular and a general supposition referring to the future. 
 The distinction in thought is of course the same as in the case of present 
 or past suppositions (239). Thus in Matt. 9 : 21, if I shall but touch his 
 garment, I shall he made whole, the supposition evidently refers to a spe- 
 cific case, and is particular. But in John 16 : 23, if ye shall ask anything 
 of the Father, he will give it you in my name, the supposition is evidently- 
 general. A large number of the future suppositions in the New Testa- 
 ment are apparently general. It is almost always possible, however, to 
 suppose that a particular imagined instance is mentally selected as the 
 illustration of the class. Cf. 240, 261. 
 
 258. When a conditional clause which as originally uttered 
 or thought was of the first or third class and expressed by 
 £1 with the Indicative or idv with the Subjunctive is so 
 incorporated into a sentence as to be made dependent on a 
 verb of past time, it may be changed to el with the Optative. 
 This principle applies even when the apodosis on which the 
 protasis depends is not itself strictly in indirect discourse. 
 Cf. 334-347, esp. 342, 347. See G^.MT. 457, 694 ff. 
 
 Acts. 20 : 16 ; ecrirevSev yap ei Swarov etij avrcu rrjv ■^fxepav rrji ttevti;- 
 Koa-T^s yeviaOaL eU 'IcpotrdAv/ia, for he was hastening, if it were pos- 
 sible for him, to be at Jerusalem the day of Pentecost. In this 
 sentence d Svvarov dr] represents the protasis of the sentence iav 
 SvvaTov y yevrja-ofXiOa which expressed the original thought of Paul, 
 to which the writer here refers. The same explanation applies to 
 Acts 24 ; 19, and to 27 : 39 (unless ei Svvaivro is an indirect ques- 
 tion) ; also to Acts 17 : 27 and 27 : 12, but on these cases see 
 also 276. 
 
 259. D. Future Supposition with Less Probability. 
 
 The protasis states a supposition which refers to the future, 
 suggesting less probability of its fulfilment than is sug- 
 gested by edv with the Subjunctive. 
 
 The protasis is expressed by el with the Optative ; the 
 apodosis by the Optative with dv. HA. 900 ; G-. 1408. 
 
MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 107 
 
 There is no perfect example of this form in the New Testa- 
 ment. Protases occur in 1 Cor. and 1 Pet., but never with a 
 regular and fully expressed apodosis. Apodoses occur in Luke 
 and Acts, but never with a regular protasis. 
 
 1 Pet. 3 : 17 ; KpciTTOv yap ayo.6oTroiovvTai, et OeXoi to 6i\yjiJ.a. Toiv Oeov, 
 
 ■7ra.(T)(€iv rj KaKOwotcnivTa's, for it is better, if the will of God should so 
 will, that ye suffer for well doing than for evil doing. See also 1 Cor. 
 14 : 10 ; 15 : 37 ; 1 Pet. 3 : 14. 
 
 260. E. Present General Supposition. The supposi- 
 tion refers to any occurrence of an act of a certain class in 
 the (gfeneral) present, and the apodosis states what is wont 
 to take place in any instance of an act of the class referred 
 to in the protasis. 
 
 The protasis is expressed by edv with the Subjunctive, 
 the apodosis by the Present Indicative. ITA. 894, 1 ; Cr. 
 1393, 1. 
 
 John 11:9; idv Tts irepLiraTrj iv rrj ■^/iepa, ov TrptXTKcmTa, if a man 
 walk in the day, he stumhleth not. 
 
 2 Tim. 2:5; eav Se /cat &d\y Tts, ov (7TC<f>avovTai iav /xr] vo/*t/io)s 
 
 d^AiyoTj, and if also a man contend in the games, he is not crowned, 
 unless he contend lawfully. See also Mark 3 : 24; John 7 : 51 ; 
 12:24; 1 Cor. 7 : 39, 40. 
 
 261. El with the Present Indicative not infrequently 
 occurs in clauses which apparently express a present general 
 supposition. G.M.T. 467. Yet in most New Testament pas- 
 sages of this kind, it is possible that a particular imagined 
 instance in the present or future is before the mind as an illus- 
 tration of the general class of cases. Cf. 242, 256. It is 
 scarcely possible to decide in each case whether the supposi- 
 tion was conceived of as general or particular. 
 
108 THE MOODS. 
 
 Luke 14 : 26 ; et rts epx^Tai Trpos fie koI ov fiurei . . . rrjv i/'^xV 
 iavTov, ov Swarat eivat /xcru /jmOyitt^s, if any man cometh unto me, and 
 hateth not . . . his own life, he cannot be my disciple. Cf . John 8 : 51 ; 
 12 : 26 ; where in protases of apparently similar force idv with the 
 Subjunctive occurs, and the apodosis refers to the future. 
 
 Rom. 8 : 25 ; £i 8e 6 ov /SAeTro/Acv ikTrt^ofj-ev, SC {nro/wv^i d7r£KSe;;(o/u.£6a, 
 but if we hope for that which we see not, 'then do tee with patience wait 
 for it. See also Jas. 1 : 26. 
 
 262. The third and fifth classes of conditional sentences are very- 
 similar not only in form, but also in meaning. When the subject or other 
 leading term of the protasis is an indefinite or generic word, the third 
 class differs from the fifth only in that a sentence of the third class tells 
 what will happen in a particular instance or in any instance of the fulfil- 
 ment of the supposition, while a sentence of the fifth class tells what 
 is wont to happen in any such case. Cf., e.g., Mark 3 : 24 with 25 ; also 
 the two sentences of Eom. 7 : 3. 
 
 263. It should be observed that a Present Indicative in the principal 
 clause after a protasis consisting of idv with the Subjunctive does not 
 always indicate that the sentence is of the fifth class. If the fact stated 
 in the apodosis is already true at the time of speaking, or if the issue 
 involved has already been determined, though not necessarily known, the 
 Present Indicative is frequently used after a protasis referring to future 
 time. The thought would be expressed more fully but less forcibly by 
 supplying some such phrase as it will appear that or it will still be true 
 that. In other instances the true apodosis is omitted, that which stands 
 in its place being a reason for the unexpressed apodosis. In still other 
 cases the Present is merely the familiar Present for Future (15). 
 
 John 8 : 81 ; iav i/ieis jxcivrfi iv tm Xoyto t<3 e/u.<3, aXrjOSi'S fixiOrfal fiov 
 ia-re, if ye shall abide in my word, [ye will show thatj ye are truly 
 my disciples. Observe the Future in the next clause. 
 
 1 John 1:9; lav o/xoXoyS/A£v ras d/juxpTiai rjiuav, TricrTOs ecrnv xat 
 StKaios iva a.<jyrj yfiiv rets d/juxpTia'S, if we shall confess our sins, [he 
 will forgive us, fori he is faithful and righteous to forgive us our sins. 
 See also Mark 1 : 40 ; John 19 : 12 ; Acts 26 : 5. 
 
 264. The difference in force between the fifth class of suppositions and 
 the class described under 243 should be clearly marked. There the issue 
 raised by the protasis is as to the truth or falsity of the principle as a gen- 
 
MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 109 
 
 eral principle, wliile the apodosis affirms some other general or particular 
 statement to be true if the general principle is true. Here the protasis 
 raises no question of the truth or falsity of the general principle, but 
 suggests as an hypothesis, that a general statement is in any single case 
 realized, and the apodosis states what is wont to take place when the 
 supposition of the protasis is thus realized. Thus in Matt. 19 : 10 (243) 
 the disciples say that if the principle stated by Jesus is true, it follows as 
 a general principle that it is not expedient to marry. On the other hand, 
 id.v ovTus fxv <rvii4>ipei. oi5 ya/irjffai. would mean, If in any instance the case 
 supposed is realized, then it is wont to happen that it is not expedient to 
 marry. Cf . examples under 260. 
 
 265. F. Past General Supposition. The supposition 
 refers to any past occurrence of an act of a certain class, 
 and the apodosis states what was wont to take place in any 
 instance of an act of the class referred to in the protasis. 
 
 The protasis is expressed by el with the Optative, the 
 apodosis by the Imperfect Indicative. SA. 894, 2; G. 
 1393, 2. 
 
 There is apparently no instance of this form in the New 
 Testament. 
 
 266. Peculiarities of Conditional Sentences. Nearly 
 all the peculiar variations of conditional sentences men- 
 tioned in the classical grammars are illustrated in the New 
 Testament. See RA. 901-907 ; G. 1413-1424. 
 
 267. (a) A protasis of one form is sometimes joined with 
 an apodosis of another form. 
 
 Acts 8 : 31 ; irols yap av Swai/i-^v tav fJi,rj Tts oBr/yrjau jue, how can I, 
 unless some one shall guide me f 
 
 268. (6) An apodosis may be accompanied by ' more than 
 one protasis ; these protases may be of different form, each 
 retaining its own proper force. 
 
110 THE MOODS. 
 
 John 13 : 17 ; et ravra oiBare, fiaKapm ecrre iav ttoi'^te avra, if ye know 
 these things. Messed are ye if ye do them. See also 1 Cor. 9 : 11. 
 
 269. (c) The place of the protasis with ti or idv is some- 
 times supplied by a participle, an Imperative, or other form of 
 expression suggesting a supposition. 
 
 Matt. 26 : 15 ; Tt OiXire /not SoSvai Kayw v/uv ■jrapahuxroi avTov, what are 
 ye willing to give me, and I mil deliver him unto you. 
 
 Mark 11 : 24 ; Travra ocra Trptxrevxtcrde. koj. alTetcrOe, irtcrTeueTe oti eXa- 
 yScTE, Koi cCTTai vfuv, all things whatsoever ye pray and ask for, believe 
 that ye have received them, and ye shall have them. See also Matt. 
 7 : 10 ; Mark 1 : 17 ; and exx. under 436. 
 
 Hem. In Jas. 1 : 5, alrelTw is the apodosis of el di tis inQii Mwerai 
 <ro(t>lai, and at the same time fills the place of protasis to SoBiiaeTai. 
 See also Matt. 19 : 21. 
 
 270. (d) The protasis is sometimes omitted. Luke 1 : 62 ; 
 Acts 17 : 18. 
 
 271. (e) The apodosis is sometimes omitted. 
 
 Luke 13 : 9 ; Kav fikv TroirjfTri Kapwov Ets to /AeXXov — et Be p-riye, eKKoiptu 
 auTiJv, and if it bear fruit thenceforth, — but if not, thou shalt cut it 
 doiun. See also Luke 19 : 42 ; Acts 23 : 9. 
 
 272. Et with the Future Indicative is used by Hebraism 
 without an apodosis, with the force of an emphatic negative 
 assertion or oath. Cf. Hr. 48, 9, a. 
 
 Mark 8 : 12 ; a.p.r]v Xiyw, el BoOri<TiTai, rrj yet/m Tavrrj a-qpjuov, verily I 
 say unto you, there shall no sign be given unto this generation. See 
 also Heb. 3 : 11 ; 4 : 3, 5. On Heb. 6 : 14 see Th. «, in. 11. 
 
 273. (/) The verb of the protasis or apodosis may be 
 omitted. 
 
 Eoni. 4 : 14 ; et yap ot Ik vouov KX-qpovofwi, KCKivioTox tj irio-Tts kox 
 Karqpyrjrai r] iirayyeXia, for if they which are of the law are heirs, 
 
MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. Ill 
 
 faith is made void, and the promise is made of none effect. See also 
 Rom. 8 : 17 ; 11:16; 1 Cor. 7 : 5, 8 ; 12 : 19 ; 1 Pet. 3 : 14. In 2 Cor. 
 11 : 16 Kav stands for koL iav hi^rja-Oe. 
 
 274. (g) Ei fLYj without a dependent verb occurs very fre- 
 quently in the sense of except. It may be followed by any 
 form of expression which could have stood as subject or as 
 limitation of the principal predicate. The origin of this usage 
 was of course in a conditional clause the verb of which was 
 omitted because it was identical with the verb of the apodosis. 
 Both in classical and New Testament Greek the ellipsis is un- 
 conscious, and the limitation is not strictly conditional, but ex- 
 ceptive. Like the English except it states not a condition on 
 fulfilment of which the apodosis is true or its action takes 
 place, but a limitation of the principal statement. It is, how- 
 ever, never in the New Testament purely adversative. Cf. 
 Ltft. on Gal. 1 : 7, 19. 
 
 275. {h) El §€ fiL-^ and d hi juijye are used elliptically in the 
 sense of otherwise, i.e. if so, or if not, to introduce an alterna- 
 tive statement or command. Having become fixed phrases, 
 they are used even when the preceding sentence is negative ; 
 also when the nature of the condition would naturally call for 
 iav rather than d. Matt. 9 : 17 ; Luke 10 : 6 ; 13 : 9 ; Eev. 2 : 5. 
 G'.MT. 478 ; B. p. 393. 
 
 276. {i) An omitted apodosis is sometimes virtually con- 
 tained in the protasis, and the latter expresses a possibility 
 which is an object of hope or desire, and hence has nearly the 
 force of a final clause. In some instances it approaches the 
 force of an indirect question. C?.MT. 486-493. In classical 
 Greek such protases are introduced by « or Idv. In the New 
 Testament they occur with d only, and take the Subjunctive, 
 Optative, or Future Indicative. 
 
112 THE MOODS. 
 
 Phil. 3 : 12 ; SuaKio Sk ci kcu, KaToXaySo), but I press on, if so be that 1 
 may apprehend. 
 
 Acts 27 : 12 ; 61 irXeioves i&tvTO /Sovkijv dvaxO^ai iKeWev, ei irtos 
 SvvaivTO KaTavTTjtrai/Tcs £is ^OLViKa Trapa^etjUaaat, the more part 
 advised to put to sea from thence, if by any means they could reach 
 Phcenix. See also Mark 11 : 13 ; Acts 8 : 22 ; 17 : 27 ; Rom. 1 : 10 ; 
 11:14; Phil. 3:11. 
 
 277. (j) After expressions of wonder, etc., a clause intro- 
 duced by d has nearly the force of a clause introduced by on. 
 Mark 16 : 44 ; Acts 26 : 8 ; cf . 1 John 3 : 13. 
 
 MOODS II CONCESSIVE SENTENCES. 
 
 278. A concessive clause is a protasis that states a sup- 
 position the fulfilment of which is thought of or represented 
 as unfavorable to the fulfilment of th,e apodosis. 
 
 The force of a concessive sentence is thus very different 
 from that of a conditional sentence. The latter represents 
 the fulfilment of the apodosis as conditioned on the fulfilment 
 of the protasis ; the former represents the apodosis as fulfilled 
 in spite of the fulfilment of the protasis. Yet there are cases 
 in which by the weakening of the characteristic force of each 
 construction, or by the complexity of the elements expressed 
 by the protasis, the two usages approach so near to each other 
 as to make distinction between them difB.cult. 
 
 In Gal. 1 : 8, e.g., the fulfilment of the element of the 
 protasis expressed in Trap' 6 cvrj-yy^XLa-dfuOa is favorable to the 
 fulfilment of the apodosis dvdBtita ta-rw, and the clause is so 
 far forth conditional. But the element expressed in ■^/ueis ^ 
 ayyeXos i^ ovpavov, which is emphasized by the km, is unfavor- 
 able to the fulfilment of the apodosis, and the clause is so far 
 forth concessive. It might be resolved into two clauses, thus. 
 
MOODS IN CONCESSIVE SENTENCES. 113 
 
 If any one shall preach unto you any gospel other than that we 
 preached unto you [let him be anathema'] ; yea, though we or an 
 angel from heaven so preach, let him be anathema. 
 
 279. A concessive clause is commonly introduced by d {idv) 
 (cai or Koi d (idv). But a clause introduced by ei or idv alone 
 may also be in thought concessive, though the concessive 
 element is not emphasized in the form. Matt. 26 : 33 (cf. Mark 
 14 : 29) ; Mark 14 : 31 (cf. Matt. 26 : 35). 
 
 280. El (idv) Kai concessive in the New Testament generally 
 introduces a supposition conceived of as actually fulfilled or 
 likely to be fulfilled. See examples under 284, 285. Yet, 
 in concessive as well as in conditional clauses (cf. 282), 
 KOL may belong not to the whole clause but to the word next 
 after it, having an intensive force, and suggesting that the 
 supposition is in some sense or respect an extreme one, e.g., 
 especially improbable or especially unfavorable to the fulfil- 
 ment of the apodosis. So probably Mark 14 : 29. 
 
 281. Kat £t {idv) concessive occurs somewhat rarely in the 
 New Testament. See Matt. 26 : 35 ; John 8 : 16 ; 1 Cor. 8:5; 
 Gal. 1 : 8; 1 Pet. 3 : 1 (but cf. WH.). The force of the Kai is 
 apparently intensive, representing the supposition as actually 
 or from a rhetorical point of view an extreme case, improbable 
 in itself, or specially unfavorable to the fulfilment of the 
 apodosis. 
 
 Rem. Foley, Greek Particles, p. 31, thus distinguishes the force of ci 
 Kai and /cai el, "generally with this difference, that ei xal implies an ad- 
 mitted fact 'even though,' Kai el a somewhat improbable supposition; 
 ' even if.' " See other statements and references in Th. el III. 7 ; and 
 especially J. 861. It should be observed that a concessive supposition 
 may be probable or improbable ; it is not this or that that makes it con- 
 cessive, but the fact that its fulfilment is unfavorable to the fulfilment of 
 the apodosis. 
 
114 THE MOODS. 
 
 282. Carefully to be distinguislied from the cases of /cai et (idv') and el 
 {idv) Ko( concessive are those in wliioli ei (idv) is conditional and /cai means 
 and (Matt. 11 : 14 ; Luke 6 : 32, 33, 34 ; John 8 : 55, etc.), or also (Luke 
 11 : 18; 2 Cor. 11 : 15), or is simply intensive, emphasizing the following 
 vyord and suggesting a supposition in some sense extreme (1 Cor. 4:7; 7 • 
 11) . Such a supposition is not necessarily unfavorable to the fulfilment of 
 the apodosis, and hence may be conditional however estreme. Cf . 280. 
 
 283. Moods and Tenses in Concessive Clauses. In 
 
 their use of moods and tenses concessive clauses follow in 
 general the rules for conditional clauses. The variety of 
 usage is in the New Testament, however, much less in the 
 case of concessive clauses than of conditional clauses. 
 
 284. Concessive clauses of the class corresponding to the 
 first class of conditional sentences are most frequent in the 
 New Testament. The event referred to in the concessive 
 clause is in general not contingent, but conceived of as actual. 
 
 2 Cor. 7:8; otl d koI iXmrqca v/xS.'i iv Trj iiruTTokrj, oi ii,iTaii,iXoixai, 
 for, though I made you sorry with my epistle, I do not regret it. See 
 also Luke 18:4; 2 Cor. 4 : 16 ; 7 : 12 ; 11:6; 12:11; Phil. 2 : 17 ; 
 Col. 2:5; Heb. 6 : 9. 
 
 285. Concessive clauses referring to the future occur in 
 two forms. 
 
 (a) They take d W or d, and a Future Indicative referring 
 to what is regarded as certain or likely to occur. In logical 
 force this construction is closely akin to that discussed 
 under 246. 
 
 Luke 11:8; d koX ov Zuxrti avT<3 dvacrTas Slot to elvai <j>iX.ov avroS, Sia 
 ■ye T^v dvaiBCav avroil iyepSd's Stocrei avT<S o(Tu>v xpjj^^h though he will 
 not rise and give him because he is his friend, yet because of his 
 importunity he will arise and give him as many as he needeth. See 
 also Matt. 26 : 33 ; Mark 14 : 29. 
 
MOODS IN CONCESSIVE SENTENCES. 115 
 
 (6) They take iav km, koI idv, or idv, with the Subjunctive 
 referring to a future possibility, or what is rhetorically con- 
 ceived to be possible. Kat idv introduces an extreme case, 
 usually one which is represented as highly improbable. 
 
 Gal. 6:1; eotv /cat Trpo\r]ft,^Brj dvOpiawo^ tv tiati TrapaTrTtifUiTi, v^ueis ol 
 TTvtvfjuinKol KaTapTi^€T€ Tov ToiovTOv iv irvtvjxaTi wpavTrjTO's, even if 
 a man be overtaken in any trespass, ye which are spiritual, restore such 
 a one in a spirit of meekness. 
 
 Gal. 1:8; dAAa kol iav ijjueTs tj . ayyeXos ii, ovpavov euayyeXi'crijTai 
 [ijUiv] Trap o evijyycXMra/AE^a vfuv, avdOtpa €<7tu), but even if we, or 
 an angel from heaven, preach unto you any gospel other than that 
 which we preached unto you, let him be anathema. See also Luke 
 22 : 67, 68; John 8 : 16 ; 10 : 38 ; Rom. 9 : 27. 
 
 Rem. The apodosls after a concessive protasis referring to the future, 
 sometimes has a Present Indicative, affirming what is true and will still 
 be true though the supposition of the protasis he fulfilled. See John 
 8 : 14 ; 1 Cor. 9 : 16. Cf. 263. 
 
 286. The New Testament furnishes no clear instance of a concessive 
 clause corresponding to the fourth class of conditional clauses. In 1 Pet. 
 3 : 14, el Kal TrdaxoiTe 5ta dLKaioffvvqv, ^Kdptoi, the use of Kai hefore TrdtrxoLTC 
 suggests that the writer has in mind that suffering is apparently opposed 
 to hlessedness. Yet it is probable that he intends to affirm that blessed- 
 ness comes, not in spite of, but through, suffering for righteousness' sake. 
 (On the thought cf. Matt. 5 : 10 f .) Thus the protasis suggests, even 
 intentionally, a concession, but is, strictly speaking, a true causal con- 
 ditional clause. Cf. 282. 
 
 287. The New Testament Instances of concessive clauses correspond- 
 ing to the fifth class of conditional clauses are few, and the concessive 
 force is not strongly marked. See 2 Tim. 2 : 5 (first clause) under 260 ; 
 2 Tim. 2 : 13. 
 
 288. Concessive clauses in English are introduced by 
 though, although, and even if, occasionally by if alone. Even 
 if introduces an improbable supposition or one especially 
 unfavorable to the fulfilment of the apodosis. Though and 
 
116 THE MOODS. 
 
 although with the Indicative usually imply an admitted fact. 
 With the Subjunctive and Potential, with the Present Indica- 
 tive in the sense of a Future, and with a Past tense of the 
 Indicative in conditions contrary to fact, though and although 
 have substantially the same force as even if. Even if thus 
 corresponds in force very nearly to koI d ; though and although 
 
 to £t Kai. 
 
 MOODS IN EELATIVE GLAUSES. 
 
 289. Eelative Clauses are introduced by relative pronouns 
 and by relative adverbs of time, place, and manner. 
 
 They may be divided into two classes : 
 
 I. Definite Eelative Clauses, i.e. clauses which refer to a 
 definite and actual event or fact. The antecedent may be ex- 
 pressed or understood. If not in itself definite, it is made so 
 by the defihiteness of the relative clause. 
 
 II. Indefinite or Conditional Eelative Clauses, i.e. clauses 
 which refer not to a definite and actual event, but to a sup- 
 posed event or instance, and hence imply a condition. The 
 antecedent may be expressed or understood ; if expressed, it is 
 usually some indefinite or generic word. 
 
 290. It should be observed that the distinction between the definite 
 and the indefinite relative clause cannot be drawn simply by reference 
 to the relative pronoun employed, or to the word which stands as the 
 antecedent of the relative. A definite relative clause may be introduced 
 by an indefinite relative pronoun or may have an indefinite pronoun as 
 its antecedent. On the other hand, an indefinite relative clause may 
 have as its antecedent a definite term, e.g., a demonstrative pronoun, and 
 may be introduced by the simple relative. A clause and its antecedent 
 are made definite by the reference of the clause to a definite and actual 
 event ; they are made indefinite by the reference of the clause to a sup- 
 posed event or instance. Thus if one say, He received whatever profit 
 was made, meaning, In a certain transaction, or in certain transactions, 
 profit was made, and he received it, the relative clause is definite, because 
 
MOODS IN RELATIVE CLAUSES. 117 
 
 it refers to an actual event or series of events. But if one use tlie same 
 VTords meaning, If any profit was made, he received it, the relative clause 
 is indefinite, because it implies a condition, referring to an event — the 
 making of profit — which is only supposed. In John 1 : 12, hut as many 
 as received him, to them gave he the right to become children of God, we 
 are doubtless to understand the relative clause as definite, not because 
 of the expressed antecedent, them, but because the clause refers to a 
 certain class who actually received him. In Rom. 8 : 24, on the other 
 hand, who hopeth for that which he seeth f the relative clause apparently 
 does not refer to a definite thing seen and an actual act of seeing, but 
 is equivalent to a conditional clause, if he seeth anything. In Mark 3:11, 
 whensoever they beheld him, they fell down before him, the form of the 
 Greek sentence shows that the meaning is. If at any time they saw him, 
 they were wont to fall down before him. That is, while the class of events 
 is actual, the relative clause presents the successive instances distribu- 
 tively as suppositions. These examples serve to show how slight may 
 be the difference at times between a definite and an indefinite relative 
 clause, and that it must often be a matter of choice for the writer whether 
 he will refer to an event as actual, or present it as a supposition. 
 
 291. Relative clauses denoting purpose, and relative clauses 
 introduced by Iws and other words meaning until, show special 
 peculiarities of usage and require separate discussion. Por 
 purposes of treatment therefore we must recognize four classes 
 of relative clauses. 
 
 I. Definite relative clauses, excluding those which express 
 purpose, and those introduced by words meaning until. 
 
 II. Indefiilite or Conditional relative clauses, excluding 
 those which express purpose, and those introduced by words 
 meaning until. 
 
 III. Relative clauses expressing purpose. 
 
 IV. Relative clauses introduced by words meaning until. 
 
 I. Dbfih-ite Relative Clauses. 
 
 292. Under the head of definite relative clauses are included 
 not only adjective clauses introduced by relative pronouns, os, 
 
118 THE MOODS. 
 
 ocTTts, oTos, oa-o's, but all clauses of time, place, manner, and com- 
 parison, such clauses being introduced by relative words, either 
 pronouns, or adverbs, ore, <us (expressing either time or man- 
 ner), OTTOV, wcrirep, etc. 
 
 293. Moods in Definite Relative Clauses. Definite 
 relative clauses in general (excluding III. and IV. above) 
 show no special uses of mood and tense, but employ the 
 verb as it is used in principal clauses. SA. 909 ; G-. 1427. 
 
 John 6 : 63 ; ra prj/juiTa a iyu) XeXaXrjKa vfuv irveB/ia io'Ti.v Kal ^u)^ 
 
 €(7nv, the words that I have spoken unto you are spirit, and are life. 
 John 12 : 36 ; us to <^(i)s ex^re, ■n-icrTcvcre ch to i^uis, while ye have the 
 
 light, believe on the light. 
 Gal. 4:4; on 8c ^Xdcv to irX'ripoifm. Tm> xp°vov, i^a7ri(TTuXcv 6 Otbs 
 
 Tov vlov aiJTOii, but when the fulness of the time came, God sent forth 
 
 his son. 
 Jas. 2:26; locnrcp to uSifia X'^oh TrvevpaTOi vtKpov icTTiv, ovrtos Koi 
 
 ■fj TTwrns xapXi ipyiav vtKpa, ecrrtv, as the body apart from the spirit 
 
 is dead, even so faith apart from ivorks is dead. 
 Rev. 3 : 11 ; KpartL o ex£'s, hold fast that which thou hast. 
 Eev. 21 : 16 ; koX to faJKOi aii^s oaov to irAaTos, and the length thereof 
 
 is as great as the breadth. Cf. Heb. 10 ; 25. See also Matt. 26 : 19 ; 
 
 Col. 2 : 6. 
 
 294. A definite relative clause may imply a relation of 
 cause, result, or concession, without affecting the mood or tense 
 of the verb. HA. 910; G. 1445. 
 
 Rom. 6:2; oinves aTTt^ai/OjUEv Ty a/juxpTia, wSs in ^r](TOfX,£v iv avTrj, 
 we who died to sin, how shall we any longer live therein ? 
 
 Jas. 4:13,14; aye vvv ol XcyovTcs 'Sirjixcpov rj avpiov Tropeva-op^Oa 
 th TrjvSe Trju iroXiv /cat ttoit^o-o/xcv exct ivtavTov Kal ip,7ropivtr6p£da 
 Kal K€pS^(TOp,ev • OiTtves ovk iiriCTTaade Tijs avpiov woia ■fj ^anj vp,S>v, 
 go to now, ye that say, To-day or to-morrow we will go into this city, 
 and spend a year there and trade and get gain; whereas [i.e. 
 although^ ye know not of what sort your life will be on the morrow. 
 
MOODS IN BBLATIVE CLAUSES. 119 
 
 295. All relative clauses wheth.er adjective or adverbial may 
 be distinguished as either restrictive or explanatory. A re- 
 strictive clause defines its antecedent, indicating what person, 
 thing, place, or manner is signified. An explanatory clause 
 adds a description to what is already known or sufficiently 
 defined. The former identifies, the latter describes. 
 
 Restrictive clauses : John 15 : 20 ; fxyqixovev^T^ tov A.oyov ov eytu uttov 
 
 vfuv, remember the word that I said unto you. 
 Matt. 28:6; Sevn iSete tov tottoi/ ottov ckcito, come, see the place where 
 
 he lay. 
 Mai'k 2 : 20 ; eXsvcrovrai. 8e yjfjiipai orav a-TrapOrj ott avrutv b vii/t(^tos, 
 
 but days will come when the bridegroom shall be taken away from them. 
 Explanatory clauses : Luke 4 : 16 ; Koi ^X0tv eis Na^apa, ov ^v reOpafj.- 
 
 fievoi, and he came to Nazareth, where he had been brought up. 
 Eph. 6 : 17; ttjv pAxaipav roiv irvev/oiaTos, o etrrtv prifxa 6iov, the sword 
 
 of the Spirit, which is the word of God. 
 
 II. Conditional Eelative Sentences. 
 
 296. An indefinite relative clause, since it refers to a sup- 
 posed event or instance, implies a condition, and is therefore 
 called a conditional relative clause. HA. 912 ; G. 1428. 
 
 Mark 10 : 43 ; os av OeXr] /jiiya's yaiicrOai iv v/uv, ea-rai i/j.u>v 8iaKoi/os, 
 whosoever would become great among you, shall be your minister. Cf . 
 Mark 9 : 35 ; et rts Oeka irputrtys etvat lorat TrdvTiov (Lvyaro^ kcu. 
 iravTcov StaKovos. It is evident that the relative clause in the former 
 passage is as really conditional as the conditional clause in the 
 latter. 
 
 297. Since a conditional relative clause implies a supposi- 
 tion, conditional relative sentences may be classified according 
 to the nature of the implied supposition, as other conditional 
 sentences are classified according to the expressed sup- 
 position. 
 
120 THE MOODS. 
 
 298. The implied supposition may be particular or general. 
 When the relative clause refers to a particular supposed event 
 or instance, and the principal clause conditions its assertion on 
 the occurrence of this event, the implied supposition is partic- 
 ular. When the relative clause refers to any occurrence of an 
 act of a certain class, and the principal clause states what is • 
 or was wont to take place in any instance of an act of the 
 class supposed, the implied supposition is general. 
 
 Thus in the sentence, The act which he believes to be wrong he will not 
 do, if reference is had to a particular occasion, or to one made particular 
 in thought, so that the sentence means, If on that occasion, or a certain 
 occasion, he believes an act to he wrong, he will not do it, the implied 
 supposition is particular. But in the sentence, Whatever act he {in any 
 instance'] believes to be wrong, he does not [is not wont to'] do, the implied 
 supposition is general. Cf. 239. 
 
 299. The distinction between the relative clause Implying a particular 
 supposition and the relative clause implying a general supposition is not 
 marked either in Greek or in English hy any uniform difference in the 
 pronouns employed either in the relative clause or in the antecedent 
 clause. The terms particular and general apply not to the relative or its 
 antecedent, but to the implied supposition. Thusif one say, He received 
 whatever profit was made, meaning, If [in a certain transaction] any 
 profit was made, he received it, the relative clause implies a particular 
 condition. But if one use the same words, meaning. If [in any transac- 
 tion] any profit loas made, [it was wont to happen that] he received it, the 
 implied condition is general. So also in John 1 : .33, upon whomsoever 
 thou Shalt see the Spirit descending, and abiding upon him, the same is 
 he that baptizeth with the Holy Spirit, we have not a general principle 
 applying to any one of many cases, but a supposition and an assertion 
 referring to a particular case. But in 1 John 3 : 22, whatsoever we ask, we 
 receive of him, the supposition refers to any instance of asking, and is 
 general. 
 
 Whether the implied supposition is particular or general can usually 
 be most clearly discerned from the nature of the principal clause. If 
 this states what is true in a particular case, or expresses a command with 
 reference to a particular case, the implied supposition is particular. If 
 it states a general principle, or expresses a general injunction which 
 
MOODS IN RELATIVE CLAUSES. 121 
 
 applies in any instance of the event descritied in tlie relative clause, the 
 implied supposition is usually general. Cf. 240. 
 
 300. Of the six classes of conditional relative sentences 
 found in classical Greek, but four occur in the New Testament, 
 and these with considerable deviation from classical usage. 
 They are designated here according to the kind of condition 
 implied in the relative clause. 
 
 301. A. Simple Present or Past Particular Suppo- 
 sition. The relative clause states a particular supposition 
 which refers to the present or past. It has a present or past 
 tense of the Indicative. The principal clause may have 
 any form of the verb. BA. 914, A ; 6?. 1430. 
 
 Rom. 2 : 12 ; ouot yap avo/jLuis ■q/juaprov, avo/jLtoi koI drroXoSi/rai • koI 
 ouoi iv vofXM rjpapTov, 8ta vo/xov KpLd'qa^ovTai, for as many as have 
 sinned without law shall also perish without law : and as many as have 
 sinned under law shall be judged by law. 
 
 Phil. 4:8; to Xoiirov, aSeX^ot', oca iarlv aXr)6^, Sua cre/tva, o<Ta St'icata, 
 ocra dyvd, Sara Trpocri^tX^, ocra fvi^TjfMX., ei Tis aperr) koX et ti^ iwaivo'S, 
 ravra Xoyi^ecrde. See also 2 Cor. 2 : 10. 
 
 Rem. Respecting the use of the negatives ^^ and oi in relative clauses 
 of this class, see 469, 470. 
 
 302. B. Supposition contrary to Fact. The rela- 
 tive clause states a supposition which refers to the present 
 or past implying that it is not, or was not, fulfilled. It 
 has a past tense of the Indicative. The principal clause has 
 a past tense of the Indicative with dv. SA. 915 ; Q-. 1433. 
 
 No instance occurs in the New Testament. 
 
 303. C. Future Supposition with More Probability. 
 
 The relative clause states a supposition which refers to the 
 
122 THE MOODS. 
 
 future, suggesting some probability of its fulfilment. It 
 has the Subjunctive with dv. The principal clause takes the 
 Future Indicative or the Imperative. HA. 916 ; G-. 1434. 
 
 Matt. 5 L 19 ; os 8' av iroi-^crr] Koi StSa^g, outos /ncyas KXy/Bi^a-eTai iv rrj 
 /SatrtXeta twv ovpaviSv, but whosoever shall do and teach them, he shall 
 be called great in the kingdom of heaven. 
 
 Mark 13 : 11 ; koX orav ayuicriv v/J-S.'S TrapaSiSovTes, jH'^ irpoix^pLixvaT^ tL 
 XaK-qmyre, aXX o iav dioOrj v/uv ev iKuvrj rrj wpa tovto XaXiirc, ov 
 yap icTTC ifteis ol XaXowTcs aXXa to Trvevfjux. to ay lov, and when 
 they lead you to judgment, and deliver you up, be not anxious before- 
 hand what ye shall speak : but whatsoever shall be given you in that 
 hour, that speak ye : for it is not ye that speak, but the Holy Ghost. 
 See also Luke 13 : 25 ; Eev. 11 : 7 ; instances are very frequent in 
 the New Testament. 
 
 304. In the New Testament Hv not infrequently stands in a condi- 
 tional relative clause instead of the simple dv. Matt. 7 : 12 ; Mark 3 : 28 ; 
 Luke 9 : 57 ; Acts 2 : 21, et al. See WH. ii. App. p. 173. 
 
 305. The Subjunctive with av in a relative clause is in the 
 New Testament usually retained in indirect discourse, or in a . 
 sentence having the effect of indirect discourse, even after a 
 past tense. Matt. 14 : 7; Eev. 12 : 4. Cf. 251. On Acts 26 : 16 
 see 333, 344, Eem. 1. 
 
 306. In addition to the relative clause having the Subjunc- 
 tive with av (303), which is the regular form both in classical 
 and New Testament Greek, the following forms of the relative 
 clause also require mention as occurring in the New Testa- 
 ment to express a future supposition with more probability : 
 
 307. (a) The Subjunctive without av. This is very unusual 
 in classical Greek in relative clauses referring to the future. 
 In the New Testament also it is rare. Jas. 2 : 10 probably 
 belongs here ; Matt. 10 : 33 also, if (with Treg. and WH. text) 
 we read otrTts Se apvrjcrryrai p.t . . . apvT^(Top,ai. 
 
MOODS IN EELATIVB CLAUSES. 123 
 
 308. (6). The Future IndicatiTe witli or without av. 
 
 Matt. 5 : 41 ; octtk (T£ ayyapevcrsi, fuXum ev, viraye /x£t avrdv Svo, who- 
 soever shall compel thee to go one mile, go with him two. See also 
 Matt. 10 : 32 (cf . v. 33) ; 18 : 4 (cf. v. 5) ; 28 : 12 ; Mark 8 : 35 ; 
 Luke 12 : 8, 10 ; 17 : 31 ; Acts 7:7; Kev. 4:9. Cf . WH. ii. App. 
 p. 172. 
 
 309. (c) The Present Indicative with or without av. 
 
 Mark 11 : 25 ; orav (TTiJKere ■TrpoaevxoiJjsvoi, a.<l>UTe, whensoever ye stand 
 praying, forgive. See also Matt. 5 : 39 ; Luke 12 : 34 ; John 12 : 26 ; 
 14:3. 
 
 310. There is no distinction in form either in Greek or in English 
 between a relative clause implying a particular supposition, and a relative 
 clause implying a general supposition, when the supposition refers to the 
 future. The difference in thought is the same as that which distinguishes 
 particular and general suppositions referring to the present or past. Cf. 
 298, 299. In Matt. 26 : 48, whomsoever I shall kiss, that is he, the sup- 
 position is particular, referring to a specific occasion and event. So also 
 in 1 Cor. 16 : 3. But in Luke 9 : 4, into whatsoever house ye enter, there 
 abide, and thence depart, the supposition is general, referring to any one 
 .of a class of acts. A large part of the conditional relative clauses referring 
 to the future found in the New Testament are apparently general. See, 
 e.g., Matt. 5 : 19 ; 10 : 14 ; 16 : 25 ; Mark 11 : 23 ; Luke 8 : 18, etc. Yet 
 in many cases it is possible to suppose that a particular imagined instance 
 was before the mind of the writer as an illustration of the general class 
 of cases. 
 
 311. D. Future Supposition with Less Probability. 
 
 The relative clause states a supposition which refers to the 
 future, suggesting less probability of its fulfilment than is 
 implied by the Subjunctive with dv. It has the Optative 
 without av. The principal clause has the Optative with 
 dv. HA. 917 ; (?. 1436. 
 
 No instance occurs in the New Testament. 
 
 312. E. Present General Supposition. The relative 
 clause refers to any occurrence of a class of acts in the 
 
124 THE MOODS. 
 
 general present, and the principal clause states what is 
 wont to take place in any instance of the act referred to 
 in the relative clause. The relative clause has the Sub- 
 junctive with av^ the principal clause the Present In- 
 dicative. HA. 914, B. (1) ; a. 1431, 1. 
 
 1 Cor. 11:26; ocraKis yap iav IcrOi-qre. rov apTov tovtov koI to TTorripiov 
 'TTivTjTe, Tov 6a.va.T0v Tov Kvpiov KarayyeWiTe, a^pi. ov tKBri, for as 
 
 often as ye eat this bread, and drink the cup, ye proclaim the Lord's 
 death, till he come. See also Matt. 15:2; Mark 10 : 11 ; Rev. 9 : 5. 
 
 Kem. Concerning the use of idv for S.v, see 304. 
 
 313. The Present Indicative not infrequently occurs in con- 
 ditional relative clauses which apparently imply a present 
 general supposition. G?.MT. 634. Yet in most such passages 
 in the New Testament, it is possible that a particular imagined 
 instance in the present or future is before the mind as an 
 illustration of the general class of cases. Cf. 301, 309. It is 
 scarcely possible to decide in each case whether the supposi- 
 tion is particular or general. The difference of meaning is in 
 any case slight. 
 
 Luke 14 : 27 ; oo^tk au ySacrra^ei tov <7Tavpbv eavTov Koi tpx^Tai omo'ui 
 fwv, ov SvvaTai elvai p,ov paByfrri'i, whosoever doth not bear his own 
 cross and come after me, cannot be my disciple. See also Matt. 10 : 38 ; 
 13 : 12 (cf . Luke 8 : 18) ; Luke 7 : 47 ; John 3:8; Rom. 6 : 16 ; 9 : 18; 
 1 Cor. 15 : 36, 37 ; Heb. 12 : 6. 
 
 314. Concerning the similarity of the third and fifth classes of condi- 
 tional relative clauses, of. 262. The statements there made respecting 
 ordinary conditional sentences are applicable also to conditional relative 
 sentences. See Mark 3 : 28, 29 ; Luke 9 : 24, 48 ; 1 John 3 : 22. 
 
 315. F. Past General Supposition. The relative clause 
 refers to any occurrence of a certain act or class of acts, 
 and the principal clause states what was wont to take 
 
MOODS IN RELATIVE CLAUSES. 125 
 
 place in any instance of the act referred to in the relative 
 clause. In classical Greek, the relative clause has the Op- 
 tative without av, the principal clause the Imperfect Indic- 
 ative. HA. 914, B. (2) ; Q. 1431, 2. 
 
 In the New Testament, the Optative does not occur 
 in such clauses, the Imperfect or Aorist Indicative with 
 dv being used instead. Cf. 26. 
 
 Mark 3 : 11 ; kol to Trvevfux/ra to. aKaOapra, orav avrbv iOedpouv, irpo- 
 (TfinirTov avTia Kal tKpa^ov, and the unclean spirits, whensoever they 
 heheld him, were wont to fall down before him and cry out. See also 
 Mark 6:56; 11:19; Acts 2:45; 4:35; 1 Cor. 12:2; cf. Gen. 
 2:19; 1 Sam. 2:13, 14. 
 
 316. In the New Testament, relative clauses conditional in 
 form are sometimes definite in force. 
 
 Mark 2 : 20 ; eXcucrovTai Sc ■^p.ipai orav airapOrj o/tt avrcov 6 wji,<f>txKy 
 hut days will come when the bridegroom shall be taken away from them. 
 See also Luke 5 : 35 ; 13 : 28 ; Rev. 8:1. 
 
 III. Relative Clauses expressing Pukpose. 
 
 317. Relative Clauses of Pure Purpose. Relative 
 clauses expressing purpose take the Future Indicative 
 both in classical and New Testament Greek. HA. 911 ; 
 a. 1442 ; B. p. 229 ; WM. p. 386, f . n. 
 
 Matt. 21 : 41 ; tov ap-irtXiava eicSojcreTat aWots yeuipyoii, oiTiva avo- 
 SuxTovdiv auTco Tovs Kapirovs, he will let out the vineyard unto other 
 husbandmen, which shall render him the fruits. See also Acts 6 : 8. 
 
 318. Complementary relative clauses expressing the purpose 
 which the person or thing referred to serves, take the Sub- 
 junctive both in classical and New Testament Greek. In the 
 New Testament, the Future Indicative also occurs. G.MT. 672. 
 
126 THE MOODS. 
 
 Heb. 8:3; o6ev avayKoiov fX^iv ti koI tovtov o irpoaeviyKri, wherefore 
 it is necessary that this high priest also have somewhat to offer. See also 
 Mark 14 : 14 ; Luke 11:6; 22 : 11. In Luke 7:4a complementary 
 relative clause limiting the adjective aiioi has the Future Indicative. 
 
 319. The clauses referred to in 318 are to be distinguished from true 
 relative clauses of pm-pose in that they do not express the purpose with 
 which the action denoted by the principal clause is done, but constitute a 
 complementary limitation of the principal clause. Cf. the clause with 
 Iva (215-217) and the Infinitive (368) expressing a similar relation. 
 
 The Subjunctive in such clauses is probably in origin a Deliberative 
 Subjunctive. Thus in Mark 14 : 14, ttoC iffrlv tI> KaTdXu/id iwv Sirov rb 
 irdfl-xa lieri, rdv iiadi)T(av /jov (piya, the relative clause Sirov . . . ipdya 
 reproduces in dependent construction the thought of the deliberative 
 question ttoB . . . 0d7<.i. The same explanation doubtless applies, though 
 less obviously, to the Subjunctive in Acts 21 : 16, and to the Future in 
 Luke 7:4. In both instances the thought of a deliberative question is 
 reproduced in the relative clause. Cf. the clauses similar in force, but 
 employing an interrogative pronoun, 346. See Tarbell in CI. Bev. July 
 1891, p. 302 (contra, Earle in CI. Bev. March 1892, pp. 93-95); Hale 
 in T.A.P.A., 1893. 
 
 320. The Optative sometimes occurs after a past tense in these delib- 
 erative relative clauses in classical Greek. There are, however, no New 
 Testament instances of the Optative so used. 
 
 IV. Relative Clauses Inteoduced bt Wokds Meaning 
 Until, While, and Before. 
 
 321. 'Ecus is properly a relative adverb -which marks one 
 action as the temporal limit of another action. It does this 
 in two ways, either (a) so that the beginning or simple occur- 
 rence of the action of the verb introduced by ems is the limit 
 of the action denoted by the principal verb, or (&) so that the 
 continuance of the former is the limit of the latter. In the 
 former case ecos means until, in the latter, while, as long as. 
 
 On the classical use of lios and similar words, see HA. 920- 
 924; G. 1463-1474; G.M.T. 611-661; Gild, in A.J.P. iv. 
 
MOODS IN RELATIVE CLAUSES. 127 
 
 416-418. Ou Icos in Hellenistic Greek see G. W. Gilmore in 
 J.B.L., 1890, pp. 153-160. 
 
 322. Clauses Introduced by em? and obferring to the 
 Future. When the clause introduced by ets? depends on 
 a verb of future time, and refers to a future contingency, it 
 takes the Subjunctive with dv both in classical and New- 
 Testament Greek. 
 
 Mark 6 : 10 ; cKei fih/ere Iws av iieX6rp-£ exei^cv, there abide till ye 
 depart thence. See also Matt. 5 : 18 ; 12 : 20 ; Luke 9 : 27 ; 1 Cor. 4 : 5. 
 
 323. In classical Greek, especially in tragic poetry, the 
 Subjunctive without av sometimes occurs with ews after a 
 verb of present or future time. GMT. 620. In the New 
 Testament this construction is frequent. 
 
 Luke 15:4; xat iropeveTai im to airoXiaXo^ l«)s evprj avTO, and goeth 
 after that which is lost, until he find it. See also Matt. 10 : 23 ; Luke 
 12 : 59 ; 22 : 34. 
 
 324. Clauses Introduced by em? and referring to 
 what was in Past Time a' Future Contingency. When 
 the clause introduced by eeo? depends on a verb of past 
 time and refers to what was at the time of the principal 
 verb conceived of as a future contingency, it takes the 
 Optative without dv in classical Greek. In the New Tes- 
 tament it takes the Subjunctive without dv. 
 
 Matt. 18:30; e/SaXev avrbv ds •^vAax^i' ecus an-oSiS to 6<l>a\6iJi,evov, 
 he cast him into prison till he should pay that which was due. 
 
 325. 'Eojs followed by the Subjunctive is usually best trans- 
 lated by until, the limit of action being the beginning or simple 
 occurrence of the action of the verb introduced by Icos. Some- 
 
128 THE MOODS. 
 
 times, however, it is evidently the end of the action which 
 is the limit, and l<os means while, as long as. Cf. 321. 
 
 Mark 14 : 32 ; KaOiuare <38e lo)s Trpoo-eufoj/xai, sit ye here, while 1 pray. 
 See also Matt. 26 : 36 ; of. Luke 17 : 8. 
 
 326. The Present Indicative occurs a few times in the New 
 Testament after la>s in a clause referring to the future ; John 
 21 : 22, 23 ; 1 Tim. 4 : 13. In Mark 6 : 45 it occurs after a 
 verb of past time. 
 
 327. Clauses Introduced by etu? (until) and referring 
 to a Past Fact. When eta? means until and the clause 
 introduced by it refers to an actual past occurrence, the 
 verb of this clause is in a past tense of the Indicative, as in 
 an ordinary relative clause referring to past time. 
 
 Matt. 2 : 9 ; 6 axTT-qp . . . Trporjyev avTow, ecos i\0(av fcrTaOr} iwavoi ov 
 rjv TO iratSt'ov, the star . . . went before them, till it came and stood 
 over where the young child was. 
 
 328. Clauses Introduced by em? (while) and referring 
 to a Contemporaneous Event. When em? means while 
 and the clause introduced by it refers to an event contem- 
 poraneous with that of the principal verb, it has the con- 
 struction of an ordinary relative clause. Cf. 293. 
 
 John 9:4; tJ/wEs Set ipyd^ecrOai to. epya toC ire/jLij/avToq p,£ ecos r/ficpa 
 icTTiv, we must work the works of him that sent me, while it is day. 
 
 329. When the las clause refers to the future or to what was at the 
 time of the principal verb the future (822-826), it frequently has the 
 force of a conditional relative clause. See Matt. 18 : 30 ; Luke 15 : 4. 
 When it refers to an actual event (327, 328), it is an ordinary temporal 
 clause (293), requiring special mention here only to distinguish these 
 usages from those described above. 
 
 330. In the New Testament las is sometimes followed by oE or Stov. 
 "Ews is then a preposition governing the genitive of the relative pronoun. 
 
MOODS IN EELATIVE CLAUSES. 129 
 
 but the phrase fus oJ or lus Stov is in effect a compound conjunction hav- 
 ing the same force as the simple ?us. The construction following it is 
 also the same, except that &i> never occurs after ?ws oS or Sus Stov. See 
 Matt. 5 : 25; 13 : 33 ; John 9 : 18 ; Acts 23 : 12. 
 
 331. Clauses introduced by a^pi, axpt m, axpt ^s ly/Mtpas, /ic^pt 
 and /nexp's °" liave in general the same construction and force 
 as clauses introduced by eus, Iws ov, and lus otou. 
 
 Mark 13 : 30 ; ov /irj irapiKOrj -^ yei/ea avTi] /^^(pis ov raSra Travra 
 
 y£vr}Tai. 
 Acts 7 : 18 ; rfi^-qoev 6 Xaos koI iTrXr]6w6r] iv AlyinrTia, a\pi ov 
 
 avioTrj PaxriKev^ erepoi ett' AtyvTrrov- See also Rev. 15:8; 20 : 3 ; 
 
 Luke 17 : 27 ; Acts 27 : 33. 
 Kev. 7:3; ijurj dSt/oycrijTe ttjv yijv . . . Sr)(pi o-<^paytcro)juev Toiis SovAovs 
 
 TOV 6idv. 
 
 332. Gal. 3 : 19 [^WH. text'] furnishes one instance of &xp^^ *" 'with a 
 word meaning until after a verb of past time [ WS. margin, Tisch., and 
 Treg. read ilxp" <>"]; of. 324. Rev. 2 : 25 contains the combination 4xpi 
 ov &v with the Future Indicative ; cf. 3.30. Rev. 17 : 17 contains a Future 
 Indicative with 4xP' after a past tense. 
 
 333. Clauses introduced by irpiV and employing a finite 
 mood have in general the same construction as clauses intro- 
 duced by lojs. 
 
 The New Testament, however, contains but two instances of a finite 
 verb after irplv, Luke 2 : 26 ; Acts 25 : 16. In both cases the clause is in 
 indirect discourse, and expresses what was from the point of view of the 
 original statement a future contingency. In Luke 2 : 26 the Subjunctive 
 with S.V is retained from the direct discourse. In Acts 25 : 16 the Optative 
 represents a Subjunctive with or without S,i> of the direct discourse. 
 Cf. 341-344. 
 
 Rem. 1. The employment of a finite mood rather than an Infinitive 
 in these instances is in accordance with classical usage. Cf. 382, and 
 G. 1470. 
 
 Rem. 2. In Acts 25 : 16 17 occurs after vplv, and in Luke 2 : 26 it 
 appears as a strongly attested variant reading. Attic writers used the 
 simple Tplv with the finite moods. Cf. 381. 
 
130 THE MOODS. 
 
 MOODS IN INDIKEOT DISOOUKSE. 
 
 334. Wlieii words once uttered or thought are afterward 
 quoted, the quotation may be either direct or indirect. In a 
 direct quotation the original statement is rapeated without 
 incorporation into the structure of the sentence in the midst of 
 which it now stands. In an indirect quotation the original 
 sentence is incorporated into a new sentence as a subordinate 
 element dependent upon a verb of saying, thinking, or the like, 
 and suffers such modification as this incorporation requires. 
 The following example will illustrate : 
 
 Original sentence (direct discourse), / will come. 
 Direct quotation, He said, " I will come.'' 
 Indirect quotation. He said that he would come. 
 
 Rem. The distinction between direct discourse and indirect is not one 
 of the exactness of the quotation. Direct quotation may be inexact. In- 
 direct quotation may be exact. Suppose, for example, that the original 
 statement was, There are good reasons why I should act thus. If one say, 
 He said, ^^ I have good reasons for acting thus,'^ the quotation is direct 
 but inexact. If one say. He said that there were good reasons why he 
 should act thus, the quotation is exact though indirect. 
 
 335. Direct quotation manifestly requires no special discus- 
 sion, since the original statement is simply transferred to the 
 new sentence without incorporation into its structure. . 
 
 336. Indirect quotation, on the other hand, involving a re- 
 adjustment of the original sentence to a new point of view, 
 calls for a determination of the principles on which this re- 
 adjustment is made. Its problem is most simply stated in 
 the form of the question. What change does the original form 
 of a sentence undergo when incorporated into, a new sentence 
 as an indirect quotation ? All consideration of the principles 
 
MOODS IK INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 131 
 
 of indirect discourse must take as its starting point the origi- 
 nal form of the words quoted. 
 
 For the student of Greek that expresses his own thought in 
 another language, it will also be necessary to compare the 
 idiom of the two languages. See 351 ff. 
 
 337. The term indirect discourse is commonly applied only 
 to indirect assertions and indirect questions. Commands, 
 promises, and hopes indirectly quoted might without impro- 
 priety be included under the term, but are, in general, ex- 
 cluded because of the dif&eulty of drawing the line between 
 them and certain similar usages, in which, however, no direct 
 form can be thought of. Thus the Infinitive after a verb of 
 commanding might be considered the representative in indi- 
 rect discourse of an Imperative in the direct discourse ; some- 
 what less probably the Infinitive after a verb of wishing might 
 be supposed to represent an Optative of the direct ; while for 
 the Infinitive after verbs of striving, which in itself can 
 scarcely be regarded as of different force from those after 
 verbs of commanding and wishing, no direct form can be 
 thought of. 
 
 338. Concerning commands indirectly quoted, see 204. Con- 
 cerning the Infinitive after verbs of promising, see 391. 
 
 339. Indirect assertions in Greek take three forms : 
 
 (o) A clause introduced by on or <us. In the New Testar 
 ment, however, cos is not so used. 
 
 « 
 
 (&) An Infinitive with its subject expressed or understood. 
 See 390. 
 
 (c) A Participle agreeing with the object of a verb of per- 
 ceiving, and the like. See 460. 
 
132 THE MOODS. 
 
 340. Indirect Questions are introduced by d or other inter- 
 rogatiTB word ; the verb is in a finite mood; HA. 930 ; G. 
 1605. 
 
 341. Classical Usage in Indirect Discourse. In indi- 
 rect assertions after on and in indirect questions, classical 
 usage is as follows : 
 
 (a) When the leading verb on which the quotation de- 
 pends denotes present or future time, the mood and tense 
 of the direct discourse are retained in the indirect. 
 
 (6) When the leading verb on which the quotation de- 
 pends denotes past time, the mood and tense of the direct 
 discourse may be retained in the indirect, or the tense may 
 be retained and an Indicative or Subjunctive of the direct 
 discourse may be changed to an Optative. SA. 932 ; G^. 
 1497. 
 
 342. The above rule applies to all indirect quotations in 
 which the quotation is expressed by a finite verb, and includes 
 indirect quotations of simple sentences and both principal and 
 subordinate clauses of complex sentences indirectly quoted. 
 
 The classical grammars enumerate certain constructions in which an 
 Indicative of the original sentence is uniformly retained in the indirect 
 discourse. These cases do not, however, require treatment here, the gen- 
 eral rule being sufficient as a basis for the consideration of New Testament 
 usage. 
 
 343. STew Testament Usage in Indirect Discourse. In 
 
 indirect assertions after 6ti and in indirect questions. New 
 Testament usage is in general the sariie as classical usage. 
 Such peculiarities as exist pertain chiefly to the relative 
 frequency of different usages. See 344-349. 
 
MOODS IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 133 
 
 John 11 : 27 ; iym irciriarcuKa ort, <ru ei o xpK'"''os o vios tov 6eov, 
 I have believed that thou art the Christ, the Son of God. 
 
 Gal. 2 : 14 ; elSov on ovk opdoTroSovo'i.v, I saw that they were not walking 
 uprightly. 
 
 Matt. 20 : 10 ; eX^dvres ot irptoTot ivo/xicrav on ttXuov X'qfJApovTa.i, when 
 the Jirst came, they supposed that they would receive more. 
 
 Mark 9:6; ou yap -gSei tC a.TTOKpt,drj, for he wist not what to ansioer. 
 
 Luke 8:9; iTrrjpwTwv St avrov ol fuxOrjTal avroS rts avrij eiij ■^ Trapa- 
 l3oXiQ, and his disciples asked him what this parable was. 
 
 Luke 24 : 23 ; ^\6av Acyovcrat kol oTrracruiv ayyiXiav eaipaKevaL, ot 
 AeyouCTiv avTov ^yv, they came saying that they had also seen a vision 
 of angels, lohich said that he was alioe. In this example the principal 
 clause of the direct discourse is expressed in the indirect discourse 
 after a verb of past time by an Infinitive, while the subordinate 
 clause retains the tense and mood of the original. 
 
 Acts 5 : 24 ; oirpropovv irept airSiv tl av yivoiTO roxrro, they were per- 
 plexed concerning them whereunto this would grow. But for av in 
 this sentence, it might be thought that the direct form was a 
 deliberative question having the Subjunctive or Future Indicative. 
 But in the absence of evidence that av was ever added to an 
 Optative arising under the law of indirect discourse, it must be 
 supposed that the indirect discourse has preserved the form of 
 the direct unchanged, and that this was therefore a Potential 
 Optative with protasis omitted. See also Luke 6:11; 15:26; 
 Acts 10 : 17. 
 
 344. The Optative occurs in indirect discourse much less 
 frequently in the New Testament than in classical Greek. 
 It is found only in Luke's writings, and there almost exclusive- 
 ly in indirect questions. 
 
 Rem. 1. Acts 25 : 16 contains the only New Testament instance of an 
 Optative in the indirect quotation of a declarative sentence. (But cf. 
 347 and 258.) It here stands in a subordinate clause which in the direct 
 discourse would have had a Subjunctive with or without Sv. If the &v he 
 supposed to have been in the original sentence (cf . Luke 2 : 26) , it has 
 been dropped in accordance with regular usage in such cases. HA. 934; 
 G. 1497, 2. 
 
134 THE MOODS. 
 
 Rem. 2. 2 Tim. 2 : 25 affords a possible instance of an Optative in an 
 indirect question after a verb of present time. Botli text and interpreta- 
 tion are, however, somewhat uncertain. See B. p. 256 ; W3I. pp.' 374, 
 631, foot notes. 
 
 345. In quoting declarative sentences the indirect form is 
 comparatively infrequent in tlie New Testament, the direct 
 form either with or without on being much more frequent. 
 The presence of on before a quotation is in the New Testament 
 therefore not even presumptive evidence that the quotation is 
 indirect. The otl is of course redundant. 
 
 Luke 7 ; 48 ; etirev 8e avrrj 'Ac^eWrat aov al dfjapriai, and he said 
 
 unto her, Thy sins are forgiven. 
 John 9:9; exeivos eXeyev otl 'Eyol ei/it, he said, I am he. 
 
 Rem. The redundant din sometimes occurs even before a direct ques- 
 tion. Mark 4 : 21, et al. 
 
 346. Indirect deliberative questions are sometimes found 
 after ex") ^'^^ other similar verbs which do not properly take a 
 question as object. The interrogative, clause in this case serves 
 the purpose of a relative clause and its antecedent, while retain- 
 ing the form which shows its origin in a deliberative question. 
 
 Mark 6 : 36 ; Zva . . . ayopaiTwnv eauTots t[ ^ayuxrw, that . . . they 
 
 may buy themselves somewhat to eat. 
 Luke 9 : 58 ; 6 8e vloi tov avOpwirov ovk l^tt ttov tyjv K€<j)aX.rjv kXivt), 
 
 but the Son of man hath not where to lay his head. See also Matt. 
 
 8 : 20 ; Mark 8 : 1, 2 ; Luke 12 1 17. 
 
 347. The principles of indirect discourse apply to all sub- 
 ordinate clauses which express indirectly the thoughts of 
 another or of the speaker himself, even when the construc- 
 tion is not strictly that of indirect discourse. HA. 937 ; G. 
 1502. See New Testament examples under 258. 
 
 348. Both in classical and New Testament Greek, the Im- 
 perfect occasionally stands in indirect discourse after a verb of 
 
MOODS IN INDIKEOT DISCOUESE. 135 
 
 past time as the representative of a Present of the direct dis- 
 course, and a Pluperfect as the representative of the Perfect. 
 Thus exceptional Greek usage coincides with regular English 
 usage. HA. 936 ; O. 1489. 
 
 John 2 : 25 ; auros yap fyivuia-Kev n ^v iv tw dvOpdnrw, for he himself 
 knew what was in man. See also Acts 19 : 32. 
 
 349. In classical Greek, oa-m is used in introducing indirect 
 questions. If A. 1011 ; G. 1600. In the New Testament it is 
 not so employed, but there are a few passages in which it is 
 apparently used as an interrogative pronoun in a direct ques- 
 tion. 
 
 It is so taken by Mey., B., WH., et al. in Mark 9 : 11, 28, and by WH. 
 in Mark 2 : 16. See B. pp. 252 f . ; Th. , Sjns, 4 ; also (contra') WM. p. 
 208, f .n. ; WT. p. 167. 
 
 350. The simple relative pronouns and adverbs are some- 
 times used in indirect questions in the New Testament as in 
 classical Greek. RA. 1011, a; G. 1600; J. 877, Obs. 3; B. 
 pp. 250 f . 
 
 Luke 8 : 47 ; 8i' ijv ahiav -^tparo avrmi dtri^yyaXev, she declared for 
 what cause she had touched him. See also Mark 5 : 19, 20 ; Acts 
 14 : 27 ; 15 : 14. 
 
 351. Indirect Discoukse in English anb in Gbbek. 
 Erom what has been said above, it appears that the tense of a 
 verb standing in a clause of indirect discourse in Greek does 
 not express the same relation between the action denoted and 
 the time of speaking as is expressed by a verb of the same 
 tense standing in a principal clause ; or, to speak more exactly, 
 does not describe it from the same point of view. A verb in 
 a principal clause views its action from the point of view of 
 the speaker. A verb in an indirect quotation, on the other 
 hand, views its action from the point of view of another person, 
 viz. the original author of the words quoted. It has also 
 
136 THE MOODS. 
 
 appeared that in certain cases the mood of the Greek verb is 
 changed when it is indirectly quoted. Now it is evident that 
 in order to translate the Greek sentence containing a clause of 
 indirect discourse into English correctly and intelligently, we 
 must ascertain what English usage is in respect to the tenses 
 and moods of the verbs of indirect discourse ; otherwise we 
 have no principle by which to determine what English tense 
 and mood properly represent a given Greek tense and mood 
 in indirect discourse. Furthermore, since Greek usage has 
 been expressed in terms of the relation between the original 
 utterance and the quotation, it will be expedient to state Eng- 
 lish usage in the same way. An example will illustrate at the 
 same time the necessity of formulating the law and of formu- 
 lating it in terms of relation to the direct form. 
 
 (1) He has seen a vision. (2) owTaulav iuipaKeV' 
 
 (3) They said that he had seen a vision. (4) eiTrov on oTTTcuriav euipaKcv. 
 
 The sentences marked (1) and (2) express the same idea 
 and employ corresponding tenses. The sentences marked (3) 
 and (4) represent respectively the indirect quotation of (1) 
 and (2) after a verb of past time, and express therefore the 
 same meaning. They do not, however, employ corresponding 
 tenses, the Greek using a Perfect, the English a Pluperfect. 
 It is evident therefore that the principle of indirect discourse 
 is not the same in English as in Greek, and that we cannot 
 translate (4) into (3) by the same principle of equivalence of 
 tenses which we employ in direct assertions. To translate 
 (4) we must first restore (2) by the Greek law of indirect dis- 
 course, then translate (2) into (1), and finally by the English 
 law of indirect discourse construct (3) from (1) and the trans- 
 lation of the Greek eurov. This process requires the formula- 
 tion of the law of indirect discourse for English as well as for 
 Greek. 
 
MOODS IK INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 
 
 137 
 
 352. English usage in indirect discourse is illustrated in the 
 following examples : 
 
 / see the city. 
 
 He says that he sees the city. 
 
 He will say that he sees the city. 
 
 He said that he saw the city. 
 
 I saw the city. 
 
 He says that he saw the city. 
 
 He will say that he saw the city. 
 
 He said that he had seen the city. 
 
 I shall see the city. 
 
 He says that he shall see the city. 
 
 He will say that he shall see the city. 
 
 He said that he should see the city. 
 
 I may see the city. 
 
 He says that he may see the city. 
 
 He will say that he may see the city. 
 
 He said that he might see the city. 
 
 Direct form 
 
 Indirect, after present tense 
 " " future " 
 
 " " past " 
 
 Direct form ....... 
 
 Indirect, after present tense 
 " future " 
 
 Direct form 
 
 Indirect, after present tense 
 
 " " future 
 
 " " past " 
 
 Direct form 
 
 Indirect, after present tense 
 
 " " future 
 
 " " past 
 
 From these examples we may deduce the following rule for 
 indirect discourse in English, adopting a form of statement 
 similar to that employed in the statement of the rule for 
 indirect discourse in Greek : 
 
 (a) After verbs of present or future time, the mood and 
 tense of the direct discourse are retained in the indirect 
 discourse. 
 
 (6) After verbs of past time, the mood of the direct dis- 
 course is retained, but the tense is changed to that tense 
 which is past relatively to the time of the direct discourse. 
 
 Thus, see becomes saw; saw becomes had seen; shall see becomes 
 should see (the change of mood here is only apparent) ; 7nay see 
 becomes might see, etc. 
 
 353. Comparing this with the Greek rule, we may deduce 
 the following principles for the translation into English of 
 clauses of indirect discourse in Greek : 
 
138 THE MOODS. 
 
 (a) When the quotation is introduced by a verb of present 
 or future time, translate the verbs of the indirect discourse 
 by the same forms which would be used in ordinary direct 
 discourse. 
 
 (&) When the quotation is introduced by a verb of past 
 time, if there are Optatives which represent Indicatives or 
 Subjunctives of the direct discourse, first restore in thought 
 these Indicatives or Subjunctives, then translate each Greek 
 verb by that English verb which is relatively past to that 
 which would correctly translate the same verb standing in 
 direct discourse. 
 
 354. The statement of English usage in indirect discourse 
 is presented in the form adopted above for the sake of brevity 
 and convenience of application. It is, however, rather a for- 
 mula than a statement which represents the process of thought. 
 In order to apprehend clearly the difference between English 
 and Greek usage it must be recognized that certain English 
 tenses have, not like the Greek tenses a two-fold function, but 
 a three-fold. They mark (1) the temporal relation of the point 
 of view from which the action is described to the time of 
 speaking ; (2) the temporal relation of the action described to 
 this point of view ; (3) the conception of the action as re- 
 spects its progress. Thus in the sentence, I had been read'- 
 ing, (1) the point of view, from which the act of reading is 
 viewed is past, (2) the action itself is previous to that point of 
 view, and (3) it is viewed as in progress. He will not go is a 
 Future from a present point of view presenting the action as a 
 simple event. In the sentence, When he came, I was reading, 
 I was reading would be more accurately described as a Present 
 progressive from a past point of view, than as a Past progres- 
 sive from a present point of view. In other instances the same 
 form might be a Past from a present point of view. These 
 
MOODS IN INDIKECT DISOOTJBSE. 139 
 
 triple-function tenses have perhaps their chief use in English 
 in indirect discourse, but are used also in direct discourse. 
 Many of them are derived by the process of composition, out 
 of which so many English tenses have arisen, from verb-forms 
 which originally had only the two-fold function, but their 
 existence in modern English is none the less clearly estab- 
 lished. Professor W. G. Hale^ in A.J.P.'yoI. viii. pp. 66 fe., 
 has set forth the similar three-fold function of the Latin tenses 
 in the Indicative Mood. But it should be noticed that the 
 English has developed this three-fold function more clearly 
 even than the Latin. For example, the antecedence of an 
 action to a past point of view is in Latin only implied in the 
 assertion of its completeness at that past point of time. But 
 in English this antecedence may be affirmed without affirming 
 the completeness of the act. 
 
 Bearing in mind this three-fold function of certain English 
 tenses, the difference between Greek and English usage in in- 
 direct discourse may be stated comprehensively as follows : 
 
 The Greek, while adopting in indirect discourse the point of 
 view of the person quoting as respects the person of verbs and 
 pronouns, and while sometimes after a verb of past time mark- 
 ing the dependent character of the statement by the use of the 
 Optative in place of an Indicative or Subjunctive of the origi- 
 nal statement, yet as respects tense, regularly carries over into 
 the indirect discourse the point of view of the original state- 
 ment, treating it as if it were still present. What was present 
 to the original speaker is still treated from his point of view, 
 as present ; what was past, as past ; what was future, as future. 
 
 In English, on the other hand, in quoting a past utterance, 
 
 1 Professor Hale's article furnished the suggestion for the view of the 
 English tenses presented here. 
 
140 THE MOODS. 
 
 the fact that it is past is not only indicated by the past tense 
 of the verb which introduces the quotation, but still further 
 by the employment of a tense in the quotation which marks the 
 point of view from which the act is looked at as past. Thus 
 in Greek a prediction expressed originally by a Future tense, 
 when afterward quoted after a verb of past time, is still ex- 
 pressed by a Future, the act being viewed as future from the 
 assumed point of view, and this point of view being treated as 
 present or its character as past being ignored. But in English 
 such a prediction is expressed by a Past-future, i.e. by the 
 English tense which describes an action as future from a past 
 point of view. Thus in quoting oipofuu, I shall see, in indirect 
 discourse, one says in Greek, threv on oifitrai ; but in English, he 
 said that he should see. Similarly, a statement made originally 
 by the Perfect tense, when quoted after a verb of past time, 
 is still expressed by a Perfect tense in Greek, but in English 
 by a Pluperfect. Thus ■^fji.d.pTrjKa, I have sinned; eiTrev otl 
 ■^fidprriKiv, he said that he had sinned. 
 
 When we pass to quotations after verbs of present time, the 
 usages of the two languages naturally coincide, since the differ- 
 ence between the point of view of the original utterance and 
 the quotation, which in English gave rise to a change of tense 
 not however made in Greek, disappears. The point of view of 
 the original statement is in both languages retained and 
 treated as present, because it is present. Thus iXe.v(rofx,ai, I shall 
 come, requires only a change of person in quotation after a verb 
 of present time, Xe'ya Sn eAercrcTat, he says that he shall come. 
 
 It might naturally be anticipated that in quotations after 
 verbs of future time, where again the time of the original 
 statement differs from that of the quotation, there would arise 
 a difference of usage between English and Greek. Such how- 
 ever is not the case. What the Greek does after a verb of 
 
MOODS IN INDIRECT DISCOUESE. 141 
 
 past time, the English as well as the Greek does after a verb 
 of future time, viz. treats the point of view of the original 
 utterance as present. Thus let us suppose the case of one 
 predicting what a person just now departing will say when he 
 returns. He has not yet seen anything, but it is imagined that 
 when he returns he will say, I have seen all things. The asser- 
 tion of this by he will say, takes the form he will say that he 
 has seen all things; just as in Greek one quoting iwpaKa iravTa 
 after epeZ says ipd on impaKcv Travra. Thus the person quoting 
 does not describe the event from his own point of view — this 
 would require he will see, nor does he mark the fact that the 
 point of view of the utterance is different from his own — this 
 would require he will have seen; but treats the point of view 
 of the person whose expected language he quotes in advance, 
 as if it were present. Thus while the Greek is consistent in 
 simply adopting the conceived point of view of the future 
 statement, the English departs from the principle which it fol- 
 lows after past tenses, and follows here the same method as 
 the Greek. 
 
 355. These facts enable us to see that it would he inoorrect to say 
 that the tense of the direct discourse is in Greek determined from the 
 point of view of the original speaker, in English from the point of view of 
 the person who makes the quotation. • The correct statement is that in 
 both languages the act is looked at from the point of view of the original 
 speaker, but that the two languages differ somewhat in their method of 
 indicating the relation of this point of view to the time of the quotation. 
 This diflerence, however, pertains only to quotations whose point of view 
 is past. Its precise nature has already been stated (354). When the 
 point of view is present or future the usage of the two languages is 
 identical. 
 
 356. The comparison of English and Greek usage may 
 be reduced to articulated statement as follows : English usage 
 is like Greek usage in three respects, and different in two 
 respects. 
 
142 THE MOODS. 
 
 I. It is like Greek in that, 
 
 (a) It adapts the person of the pronouns and verbs of the 
 original utterance to the point of view of the quoter. 
 
 (6) It looks at the act described in the quotation from the 
 point of view of the original statement. 
 
 (c) After a verb of present or future time this point of view 
 of the original utterance is treated in the quotation as present, 
 as after verbs of present time it is in fact. 
 
 II. It differs from Greek in that, 
 
 (a) While it looks at the act from the point of view of the 
 original statement, if that point of view is past it designates 
 it as past, using a tense which describes the action from a past 
 point of view. A Past of the original utterance becomes in 
 the quotation a Past-past; a Future becomes a Past-future, 
 etc. This the Greek does not do, having in general no tense 
 which has this double temporal power. 
 
 (&) It never changes the mood of the verb of the original 
 statement in quotation. Apparent changes of mood, such as 
 will to would, shall to should, are changes of tense. 
 
 OONSTEUOTIOF AFTER Kal Iy^vcto. 
 
 357. Clause or Infinitive as the Subject of iyivero. 
 By a Hebraism Kal eyevero and iyivero 8i, Septuagint ren- 
 derings of ■'HI'I, are used in the New Testament (Matt., 
 Mark, Luke, Acts) to introduce a clause or an Infinitive 
 which is logically the subject of the iyevero. The iyivero 
 is usually followed by a phrase or clause of time ; the event 
 to be narrated is then expressed by icai with an Indicative, 
 or by an Indicative without kul, or by an Infinitive. It 
 thus results that the construction takes three forms : 
 
THE INFINITIVE. 143 
 
 358. (a) Kat eyiv^To, or iylvero Si, and the phrase of time are 
 followed by Kai with an Indicative. 
 
 Luke 5:1; iyevero 8c iv tc3 tov o)(X.ov iiriKelaOou avrS koI aKovav 
 Tov A.oyov Toru 6eov Koi avTos ■^v eo-Tcos irapa ttjv XLjMrqv Ttwrjiia,- 
 pcT, now it came to pass, while the multitude pressed upon him and 
 heard the word of God, that he was standing by the lake of Gennesaret. 
 
 359. (6) Kat iyivero, or cyei/cTo Se, and the phrase of time are 
 followed by an Indicative without xat. 
 
 Mark 1:9; Kai eyc'vero ej/ EKcivais rais jy/itpats rj\6e.v 'Ir/croBs ajro 
 Na^apcT T^s raA.t\atas, and it came to pass in those days, that Jesus 
 came from Nazareth of Galilee. 
 
 360. (c) Kat iyivero, or eyei/cTo 8c, and the phrase of time are 
 followed by an Infinitive, the narrative being continued either 
 by an Infinitive or an Indicative. 
 
 Acts 9 : 32 ; eyevero 8e Xlcrpov Stepxojuevov 8ta TrdvTtav KareXOelv, and 
 it came to pass, as Peter went throughout all parts, he came down. 
 See also Mark 2 : 23 ; Luke 6 : 12. B. pp. 976-278. 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 361. That the Infinitive in Greek had its origin as respects 
 both form and function in a verbal noun, and chiefly at least in 
 the dative case of such a noun, is now regarded as an assured 
 result of comparative grammar. At the time of the earliest 
 Greek literature, however, the other cases of this verbal noun 
 had passed out of use, and the dative function of the form that 
 remained had become so far obscured that, while it still re- 
 tained the functions appropriate to the dative, it was also used 
 as an accusative and as a nominative. Beginning with Pindar 
 it appears with the article, at first as a subject-nominative. 
 Later it developed also the other cases, accusative, genitive, 
 and dative. By this process its distinctively dative force was 
 obscured while the scope of its use was enlarged. In Post- 
 
144 THE MOODS. 
 
 Aristotelian Greek, notably in the Septuagint and the New 
 Testament, another step was taken. The Infinitive with the 
 article in the genitive began to assume some such prominence 
 as at a much earlier time the dative had acquired, and as 
 before, the sense of its case being in some degree lost, this 
 genitive Infinitive came to be used as a nominative or accusa- 
 tive. We mark therefore four stages of development. First, 
 that for which we must go back of the historic period of the 
 Greek language itself, when the Infinitive was distinctly a 
 dative case. Second, that which is found in Homer : the Infin- 
 itive begins to be used as subject or object, though the strictly 
 dative functions still have a certain prominence, and the arti- 
 cle is not yet used. Third, that of which the beginnings are 
 seen in Pindar and which is more fully developed in classical 
 authors of a later time : the Infinitive without the article, 
 sometimes with dative functions, sometimes with the force of 
 other cases, is used side by side with the articular Infinitive 
 in the nominative, genitive, dative, and accusative singular. 
 Fourth, that which appears in the Septuagint and the New 
 Testament : all the usages found in the third stage still con- 
 tinuing, the Infinitive with the article in the genitive begins 
 to lose the sense of its genitive function and to be employed 
 as a nominative or accusative. 
 
 Prom the earliest historic period of the Greek language the 
 Infinitive partakes of the characteristics both of the verb and 
 the noun. As a verb it has a subject more or less definite, and 
 expressed or implied, and takes the adverbial and objective 
 limitations appropriate to a verb. As a noun it fills the office 
 in the sentence appropriate to its case. Many of these case- 
 functions are identical with those which belong to other sub- 
 stantives ; some are peculiar to the Infinitive. 
 
 Eem. Concerning the history of the Inflnitiye, see GMT. 742, 788 ; 
 Gild, in T.A.P.A. 1878, and in A.J.P. III. pp. 193 ff. ; IV. pp. 241 ff., 
 
THE INFINITIVE. 145 
 
 pp. 418 ff. ; VIII. p. 329 ; Birklein, Entwiekelungsgeschichte des sub- 
 stantivierten Inflnitivs, in Schanz, Beitrage zur historischen Syntax der 
 grieohischen Sprache, Heft 7. 
 
 362. In the Greek of the classical and later periods, the functions of 
 the Infinitive as an element of the sentence are very various. They may 
 he classified logically as follows : 
 
 I. As A Pkincipal Verb (364, 365). 
 
 II. As A Substantive Element. 
 
 (1) As subject (384, 885, 390, 393, 404). 
 
 (2) As object in indirect discourse (390). 
 
 (3) As object after verbs of exhorting, striving, promising, 
 
 hoping, etc. (387-389, 391, 394, 404). 
 
 (4) As object after verbs that take a genitive (401-403). 
 m. As AN Adjective Element. 
 
 (1) As appositive (386, 395). 
 
 (2) Expressing other adnominal limitations (378, 379, 400). 
 
 IV. As AN Adverbial Element, denoting, 
 
 (1) Purpose (.366, 367, 370 (d), 371 (d), 372, 397).. 
 
 (2) Indirect object (.368). 
 
 (3) Eesult (369-371, 398). 
 
 (4) Measure or degree (after adjectives and adverbs) (376, 399). 
 
 (5) Manner, moans, cause, or respect (375, 377, 396). 
 
 (6) A modal modification of an assertion (383). 
 
 The articular Infinitive governed by a preposition (406-417) expresses 
 various adverbial relations, the precise nature of which is determined by 
 the meaning of the preposition employed. Similarly Trplv or irplv fi vyith 
 the Infinitive (380-382) constitutes an adverbial phrase of time, the 
 temporal idea lying in irplv rather than in the Infinitive, 
 
 363. To arrange the treatment of the Infinitive on the basis of such a 
 logical classification as that given above (362) would, however, disregard 
 the historical order of development and to some extent obscure the point 
 of view from which the Greek language looked at the Infinitive. It seems 
 better, therefore, to begin with those uses of the Infinitive which are most 
 evidently connected with the original dative function, and proceed to 
 those in which the dative force is vanishing or lost. This is the general 
 plan pursued in the following sections, though it is by no means affirmed 
 that in details the precise order of historical development has been 
 followed. 
 
146 THE MOODS. 
 
 THE INFINITIVE WITHOUT THE AETIOLE. 
 
 364. The Imperative Infinitive. The Infinitive with- 
 out the article is occasionally used to express a command 
 or exhortation. This is- the only use of the Infinitive as a 
 principal verb. It is of ancient origin, being especially 
 frequent in Homer. EA. 957 ; G-. 1536. 
 
 The New Testament furnishes but one certain instance 
 
 of this usage. 
 
 Phil. 3:16; ■rrXrjV els o icjiOdcra/xcv, tw avTiS {rroixw, only whereunto 
 we have attained, by the same rule walk. 
 
 365. Kom. 12 : 15 affords another probable instance of the imperative 
 use of the Infinitive. Btittmann supposes an ellipsis of Xiya, and Winer 
 a change of construction by which the writer returns from the independ- 
 ent Imperatives used in v. 14 to the construction of an Infinitive dependent 
 on \4yu employed in v. 3. This explanation of change of construction 
 probably applies in Mark 6 : 9 (cf. th^ even more abrupt change in 
 Mark 5 : 23) ; but in Kom. ch. 12 the remoteness of the verb \4ya (in v. 
 3) from the Infinitive (in v. 15) makes the dependence of the latter upon 
 the former improbable. B. pp. 271 f . ; WM. pp. 397 f. ; WT. 316. 
 
 366. The Infinitive of Purpose. The Infinitive is used 
 to express the purpose of the action or state denoted by 
 the principal verb. HA. 951 ; Cr. 1532. 
 
 Matt. 5:17; firj vofilcFyjTe. on ■^XOov KaTaXvtrat tov vo/jlov yj tovs irpo- 
 (^jjTas • ovK ■rjX.Oov KaraKvcraL dAAa 7r\r)pSi{rai, think not that I came 
 to destroy the law or the prophets : I came not to destroy, but to fulfil. 
 
 Luke 18 : 10 ; avOpoinoi Svo avi^rjo-av ets to Upbv irpoo'ev^aa'Oai, two 
 men went up into the temple to pray. 
 
 Acts 10 : 33 ; vvv ovv ttoiitk rip-iis ivwTriov tov Otov ira.p(.(Tfx,fv aKoxKrax 
 TrdvTa TO. TrpocrTeray/ici/a (Toi iiro tov KVpiav, now therefore toe are 
 all here present in the sight of God, to hear all things that have been 
 commanded thee of the Lord. 
 
 367. The Infinitive expressing purpose is sometimes intro- 
 duced by <3(7-T£ or m. See 370 (d), 371 (d), 372. 
 
THE INFINITIVE WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. 147 
 
 368. The Infinitive as an Indirect Object. Closely- 
 akin to the Infinitive of Purpose is the Infinitive of the indi- 
 rect object. The former is a supplementary addition to a 
 statement in itself complete, and expresses the purpose had in 
 view in the doing of the action or the maintenance of the state. 
 The Infinitive of the indirect object on the other hand is a 
 complementary limitation of a verb, expressing the direct ten- 
 dency of the action denoted by the principal verb, or other 
 similar dative relation. Some of the instances of this usage 
 are scarcely to be distinguished from the Infinitive of Purpose, 
 while in others the distinction is clearly marked. 
 
 Luke 10 : 40 ; Kvpte, ov /teXci troi on •^ d8eX<^^ /juyv iJ.6vrjV /xe KareXciTrev 
 SiaKovuv, Lord, dost thou not care that my sister has left me to serve alone? 
 
 Acts 17 : 21 ; 'A6rp/aioL 8e ttoivtes koi ot eTrtSij/ioIvres iivoi eis ovSkv 
 erepov rjVKaipavv r] Xeyetv n rj aKoveiv ti Kaivorcpov, now all the 
 Athenians and the strangers sojourning there spent their time in nothing 
 else than either to tell or to hear some neiv thing. See also Mark 4 : 23 ; 
 6:31; 10:40; Luke7:40; 12:4; Acts4:14; 7:42; 23:17,18,19; 
 25 : 26 ; Tit. 2 : 8. 
 
 369. The Infinitive of Result. The Infinitive may be 
 used to denote the result of the action expressed by the 
 principal verb. When so used it is usually introduced by 
 fgo-T6. HA. 953 ; G. 1449. 
 
 Mark 4 : 37 ; »cai rot KvpaTa CTrc'/SoAXev £ts to ttXoIov, wctte 5787? y£/it- 
 ^e<T$ai TO TrXoiov, and the waves beat into the boat, insomuch that the 
 boat was now filling. 
 
 1 Thess. 1:8; iv TraVTi totto) ^7 ma-rn vfiSiv 17 Trpos tov 6cov i^eXi^- 
 kvOev, <S(TTe fiLT] xpiinv Ix"" iJ/U'Ss XaXetv ri, in every place your 
 faith to God-ward is gone forth, so that we need not to speak anything. 
 
 370. Under the general head of expressions of result it is 
 necessary to distinguish three different conceptions : 
 
 (a) Actual result, conceived of and affirmed as actual; in this 
 case classical Greek uses wore with the Indicative. See 236. 
 
148 THE MOODS. 
 
 (6) Tendency or conceived result which it is implied is an 
 actual result. In this case the result is thought of as that 
 which the action of the principal verb is adapted or sufB.cient 
 to produce, and it is the context or the nature of the case only 
 which shows that this result is actually produced. In this 
 case classical Greek uses wo-re with the Infinitive. 
 
 (c) Tendency or conceived result thought of and affirmed 
 simply as such. In this case the result is one which the 
 action of the principal verb is adapted or sufficient to 
 produce, though the actual production is either left in doubt, 
 or is indicated by the context not to have taken place. Clas- 
 sical Greek employs uxm with the Infinitive (in Homer the 
 Infinitive without ma-ri). 
 
 To these three may be added as a closely related conception 
 which the Greek also expressed by luore with the Infinitive : 
 
 (d) Purpose, i.e. intended result. 
 
 The constructions by which these several shades of meaning 
 are expressed are substantially the same in the New Testament 
 as in classical Greek, except that the construction appropriate 
 to the second meaning has apparently encroached upon the 
 realm of the first meaning, and the line of distinction between 
 them has become correspondingly indistinct. "fio-Te with the 
 Indicative occurs very rarely except with the meaning there- 
 fore, introducing a principal clause ; and this fact, together 
 with the large number of instances in which uxrT^ with the 
 Infinitive is used of a result evidently actual, makes it probable 
 that the use of uctte with the Infinitive is no longer restricted, 
 as in classical Greek, to instances in which the result is thought 
 of as theoretical, but is used also of result in fact and in 
 thought actual. Cf. O.WI. 582-584. There remain, however, 
 instances entirely similar to those found in classical Greek, in 
 which a result shown by the context to be actual is apparently 
 
THE INFINITIVE WITHOUT THE ABTICLE. 149 
 
 presented simply as one which the event previously expressed 
 tends to produce. Between these two classes it is evidently 
 impossible to draw a sharp line of distinction. Cases of the 
 third class are expressed in the New Testament by the Infini- 
 tive with or without loo-re. Cf. also 218 and 398. 
 
 371. The following examples illustrate New Testament 
 usage : 
 
 (a) Actual result conceived and aflSrmed as such. 
 
 Indicative after warre. 
 
 John 3:16; ovtid'S yap ■^ydjTnjO'ev 6 Bsbi rbv koct/jlov wcrre tov vlbv 
 Tov (wvoycvrj eSoiKCv, for God so loved the world thai he gave his only 
 begotten Son. 
 
 Infinitive after wtrre. 
 
 Mark 9 : 26 ; lyivero uxrii vcKpcK wcrre Toiis TroAAoris Aeyeiv on aTri- 
 6a.viv, he became as one dead ; insomuch that the more part said that 
 he was dead. 
 
 (b) Tendency, by implication realized in actual result. In- 
 finitive, usually after aa-re. 
 
 Luke 12 : 1 ; iv oTs iTrurvva^OeLcrSiv Tdv /xvpidBoiv tov oxXov, (oore 
 KaTairaTeiv oAAijAous, in the meantime, tohen the many thousands of the 
 multitude were gathered together, so as to tread one upon another. 
 
 Rev. 5:5; iSoi iviKrjcrev 6 Xea>v 6 ex r^s <l>v\rj's 'lowSa, 17 pi^a AavetS, 
 dvoT^at TO PifiXiov, behold the lion that is of the tribe of Judah, the 
 Root of David, hath overcome, to open. the book. See also Acts 1 : 25; 
 2 Cor. 1 : 8 ; 2 Thess. 2 : 4. 
 
 (c) Tendency or conceived result thought of as such. In- 
 finitive, usually after uxttc. 
 
 1 Cor. 13 : 2 ; Kav txo Tra<Tav rr)V irio'Tiv (acm opjj p.i6uTTa.ve.i.v, and if 
 
 I have all faith, so as to remove mountains. 
 Matt. 10 : 1 ; eSaiKCv avroii e^oucriav Trvevixdruyv axaOdpTtov wcrre e/c- 
 
 j3aXX.av avTa, he gave them authority over unclean spirits to cast them 
 
 out. Here probably belongs also Kom. 1 : 10. See also 2 Cor. 2:7; 
 
 Rev. 16 : 9. 
 
150 THE MOODS. 
 
 Rem. The Infinitive in Heb. 6 : 10, oii ykp ASikos 6 6ebs fTiKaBia-Bat, 
 must also be accounted an Infinitive o£ conceived result. The origin of 
 this idiom may be an impersonal construction (cf. G'.MT. 762), but it 
 has departed in meaning as vrell as in form from its original. The mean- 
 ing of this sentence is not. It would not be unjust for God to forget, but, 
 God is not unjust so as to forget. 
 
 (d) Purpose, i.e. intended result. 
 
 Luke 4 : 29 ; koI rjyayov avTov eu)S d<^pi5os tov opov; wcTTe Kara- 
 Kprj/JLVicrai. avTov, and they led him unto the hrow of the hill thai 
 they might throvfhim down headlong. See also Luke 20 : 20. 
 
 Kem. In Matt. 27 : 1, acre with the Infinitive stands in definitive appo- 
 sition with <Tvii.povKi.ov, defining the content of the plan, rather than ex- 
 pressing the purpose of making it. 
 
 372. The Infinitive is used with us in Luke 9 : 52 according to the 
 reading adopted by WH. (most editors read wo-re) and in Acts 20 : 24 
 according to the generally adopted reading ( WH. read a Subjunctive) . 
 In both cases the phrase denotes purpose. No instance of ws with the 
 Infinitive denoting result occurs in the New Testament. See Th. ws, III., 
 and references cited there, and cf. G. 1456. In 2 Cor. 10 : 9 us &v is used 
 with the Infinitive. This usage also occurs rarely in classical and later 
 Greek. See Alf. ad loe. and Gr. p. 230. The phrase is elliptical, the In- 
 finitive most probably expressing purpose and us fix modifying it in the 
 sense of quasi. WM. p. 390 ; WT. p. 310. 
 
 373. In the New Testament the Infinitive is not used either with uare 
 or ^0' t} or i(t>' ifTe in the sense on condition that. HA. 953, b ; G. 
 1453, 1460. 
 
 374. The classical usage of an Infinitive (of conceived result) with ^, 
 or ri uVre, or ^ at, after a comparative, does not occur in the New Testa- 
 ment. The Infinitive after fi in the New Testament is used as the correla- 
 tive of some preceding word or phrase, and usually as a nominative. See 
 Luke 18 : 25 ; Acts 20 : 35. On Acts 17 : 21 cf. 368. 
 
 375. Somewhat akin in force to the Infinitive of (conceived) 
 result, but probably of Hebraistic origin, is the Infinitive used 
 to define more closely the content of the action denoted by a 
 previous verb or noun. Cf. Hr. 29, 3, e. 
 
THE INFINITIVE WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. 151 
 
 Acts 15: 10 ; vvv ovv ti irupd^cn tov Otov, tmBelvai ^vyov ctti tov 
 Tpa;^Xov Toil' ix.a6riT5>v, now therefore why tempt ye God, that ye 
 should put (i.e. by putting, or in that ye put) a yoke upon the neck 
 of the disciples f Cf. Ps. 7S : 18 (Hebrew). 
 
 Heb. 5:5; outojs kol 6 )(puTTOi ovx iavrbv eSo^acrcv yevrjB^vai apxi-^pia, 
 so Christ also glorified not himself to be made a high priest. See also 
 Luke 1 : 54, 72 ; cf. 1 Sam. 12 : 23, avih/ai. ; 22 : 13 ; Ps. Sol. 2 : 28, 
 39, 40. See Ryle and James, Ps. Sol. p. Ixxxiii. 
 
 376. The Infinitive limiting Adjectives and Adverbs. 
 
 The Infinitive is used with adjectives and adverbs of abil- 
 ity, fitness, readiness, etc., to denote that which one is or is 
 not able, fit, or ready to do. HA. 952 ; G. 1526. 
 
 Mark 1:7; ov ovk dpi iKavoi Kui/'as XCcrat tov Ipavra. tSv VTroSr/naToiv 
 avTov, the latchet of whose shoes I am not tuorthy to stoop doicn and 
 unloose. 
 
 2 Tim. 2:2; omves iKavoi ecoi/Tot koj, iripovs StSa^at, who shall be able 
 to teach others also. 
 
 Rev. 4 : 11 ; aftos £t, o Kvpioi koL 6 Ow ■^piiiv, Xxi/Seiv ttjv So^av koI 
 Trjv Tiprpi KoX TTjV Bvvapiv, worthy art thou, our Lord and our God, to 
 receive the glory and the honor and the power. See also Luke 14 : 31 ; 
 2 Cor. 12 : 14. 
 
 377. The Infinitive may be used after any adjective to limit 
 its application to. a particular action. HA. 952 ; G. 1528. 
 
 Heb. 5 : 11 ; irepl ov iroAiis ■^piv 6 Xoyos kol Suo-ep/i^vevTos \iyeiv, 
 of whom we have many things to say, and hard of interpretation — a 
 felicitous free translation. More literally it would read, concerning 
 whom our discourse is much, and hard of interpretation to state, i.e. 
 hard to state intelligibly. 
 
 378. The Infinitive limiting ]S^ouns. The Infinitive is 
 used with abstract nouns of ability, authority, need, hope, 
 etc., to denote that which one has, or has not, ability, 
 authority, need, etc., to do. Here may also be included 
 
152 THE MOODS. 
 
 the Infinitive after dSpa, which implies a necessity. HA. 
 952 ; G. 1521. 
 
 Matt. 3 : 14 ; eyoj xpsiav exo) vtto (tov PairncrOrjvcu, I have need to be 
 
 baptized of thee. 
 John 1 : 12 ; ?8o)K£i/ airois iiovcriav TiKva Bern yevicrOat,, to them gave 
 
 he the right to become children of God. 
 Rom. 13 : 11 ; xat tovto eiSotes tov Kaipov, on (opa ijSi; v/iSs ii vin/ov 
 
 iy€p6rjvai, and this, knowing the season, that now it is high time for you 
 
 to awake out of sleep. See also 2 Cor. 10 : 15 ; Rev. 9 : 10. 
 
 379. The Infinitive is also occasionally used after con- 
 crete nouns cognate with verbs which take an object In- 
 finitive. 
 
 Gal. 5:8; o<^eiA.€Tr;s iurlv oXov tov vo/xov Trot^crat, he is a debtor to 
 do the ivhole law. 
 
 380. The Infinitive is used after irplv or Trplv f). HA. 
 955 ; a. 1469-1474. 
 
 Mark 14 : 30 ; vplv -q 8ts aXexTopa <j)on'^(Tai TpC% p-e. airaprqayi, before 
 
 the cock crow twice, thou shall deny me thrice. 
 John 4 : 49 ; Kvpn, KaraP-qdi. Trplv anodavciv to iratStov jnov, Sir, come 
 
 down ere my child die. 
 
 381. The use of ^ after Trplv, which occurs twice in the Iliad, fre- 
 quently in Herodotus, and rarely in Attic writers, is well attested in three 
 of the thirteen instances jn the New Testament in which vplv is used 
 with the Infinitive, and occurs as. a variant in other passages. G. 1474. 
 
 382. As respects the mood which follows irph or irplv ri, New Testa^ 
 ment usage is the same as that of Post- Homeric Greek in general, in that 
 the Infinitive is generally (in the New Testament invariahly) used when 
 the leading clause Is affirmative ; the Subjunctive and Optative occur only 
 after a negative leading clause. The Indicative after irph which some- 
 times occurs in classical Greek, chiefly after a negative leading clause, is 
 not found in the New Testament. HA. 924, a ; Q. 1470. 
 
THE INFINITIVE WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. 153 
 
 383. The Infinitive used absolutely in a parenthetic clause 
 occurs but once in the New Testament. HA. 956; G. 1634 
 Heb. 7:9; cus cttos ehrtiv, so to speak. 
 
 384. The Infinitive as Subject. The Infinitive may 
 be used as the subject of a finite verb. SA. 949, 959 ; 
 a. 1517. 
 
 Matt. 3 : 15 ; ovria yap Trpiwov l(TTiv rjiuv irXi/jpSxTai 7ra<Tav St/catocrui/jjv, 
 
 for thus it becometh us to fulfil all righteousness. 
 Luke 18 : 25 ; evKOTroyrepov yap ecrTti/ Kd,iJi.r]X.ov Sia rptj/juiTOi jScAovr/s 
 • £i(7£X6etv, for it is easier for a camel to enter in through a needle's eye. 
 See also Mark 3:4; Luke 16 : 17 ; 20 : 22 ; Gal. 4 : 18. 
 
 385. The Infinitive with subject accusative sometimes 
 stands as the subject of an impersonal verb (Soxei, etc.). Fre- 
 quently, however, the personal construction is employed, that 
 which is properly the subject of the Infinitive being put in the 
 nominative as the subject of the principal verb. But the logi- 
 cal relation is the same in either case. HA. 944. 
 
 In the New Testament the personal construction is regularly 
 employed with Soxei. 
 
 Acts 17 : 18 ; ^evoxv Sot/iovtW SoK£t KarayyeXevi clvai, he seemeth to be 
 a setter forth of strange gods. See also Gal. 2:9; Jas. 1 : 26, etc. 
 
 Rem. Concerning the Infinitive as subject of ^^keto, see 357, 360. 
 
 386. The Infinitive as Appositlve. The Infinitive may 
 stand in apposition with a noun or pronoun. SA. 950: 
 
 a. 1517. 
 
 Jas. 1 : 27 ; 6p-q(TK(.ia KaOapa Kal d/utavros . . . avTTj i<TTiv, iiri- 
 aKiiTTecrOai. op^avovs Kal xfjpai; iv rrj dXiij/ei, avrlav, pure religion 
 and undefiled . . . is this, to visit orphans and widows in their afflic- 
 tion. See also Acts 15 : 28 ; 1 Thess. 4:3. 
 
 387. The Infinitive as Object. The Infinitive may be 
 used as the object of a verb. The verbs which are thus 
 
154 THE MOODS. 
 
 limited by an Infinitive are in part such as take a noun or 
 pronoun in the accusative as object, in part such as take a 
 noun or pronoun in the genitive as object, in part verbs 
 which cannot take a noun or pronoun as object but require 
 an Infinitive to complete their meaning. HA. 948; Q-. 
 1518, 1519. 
 
 Matt. 19 : 14 ; afjiere ra TraiSia Kal /xij KUiXvcre avTo. iKOelv Trpos /«.£, 
 
 suffer the little children, and forbid them not, to come unto me. 
 Mark 12 : 12 ; kol i^-qrovv avrbv KpaTrj<TM, and they sought to lay hold 
 
 on him. 
 Luke 16 : 3 ; a-Kd-KTUv ovk icr^uco, iiraiTclv aia-xyvofmi, I have not strength 
 
 to dig ; to beg 1 am ashamed. 
 Heb. 7 : 25 ; oBev koX (Tia^cw eis to TravreXes SiVaTat, wherefore also he 
 
 is able to save to the uttermost. See also Matt. 1 : 19 ; John 5 : 18 ; 
 
 Rom. 14 : 2 ; Gal. 3 : 2, etfreq. 
 
 388. The Infinitive xaipwi' in salutations is to be regarded 
 as the object of an unexpressed verb of bidding. 
 
 Acts 23 : 26 ; KXauStos Avitmxs tco KpaTicmo ■^■ye/xdvi <E>i;XiKt f^alpuv, 
 Claudius Lysias unto the most excellent governor Felix, greeting. 
 
 Jas. 1:1; 'laKtu/Sos • . ■ rais SuiScKa (f>vXais raw iv Trj SiadTTOpd 
 Xaipciv, James . . . to the twelve tribes which are of the Dispersion, 
 greeting. 
 
 389. The verbal idea governing the Infinitive is sometimes implied 
 rather than expressed. The Infinitive reKeiv in Eev. 12 : 2 is doubtless an 
 object Infinitive governed by the idea of desire implied in the preceding 
 participles. The Infinitive feia-aa-eai in Acts 5 : 3 may be regarded as an 
 object Infinitive governed by the idea of persuading implied in ^jrX^pwo-ei' 
 riif KapSlav, or as an Infinitive of conceived result. Cf. 370 (c). 
 
 390. The Infinitive in Indirect Discourse. The Infini- 
 tive is frequently used in the indirect quotation of asser- 
 tions. It is usually the object of a verb of saying or of 
 thinking, or the subject of such a verb in the passive 
 voice. HA. 946 ; a. 1522. 
 
THE INFINITIVE WITH THE AKTICLB. 155 
 
 Mark 12 : 18 ; oiTtves Xiyov<nv dvooratni/ fir) etvat, which say that there is 
 
 no resurrection. 
 John 21 : 25 ; ov8 aurov ol/wu tov KOfffwv \uipri(T€iv to. •ypa<^d/iEi'a 
 
 Pip\[a, 1 suppose that even the world itself will not contain the books 
 
 that will be written. 
 Heb. 11:5; vp6 yap rrji /xeTadecrtiOi fjLefuipTvprjTM ivapta-TrjKevai Tif 
 
 OeiS, for before his translation he had witness borne to him that he 
 
 had been well-pleasing unto God. See also Luke 2 : 26 ; 22 : 34 ; 
 
 24 : 46 (?) ; John 12 : 29 ; Acts 16 : 27 ; Rom. 15:8; 2 Tim. 2 : 18 ; 
 
 1 John 2 : 9. 
 
 Rem. 1. Respecting the force of the tenses of the Infinitive in indirect 
 discourse, see 110-114. 
 
 Eem. 2. Respecting the use of negatives with the Infinitive in indirect 
 discourse, see 480-482. 
 
 391. The Infinitive occurs frequently as object after verbs 
 of hoping, promising, swearing, and commanding, with a force 
 closely akin to that of the Infinitive in indirect discourse. 
 Such instances are not, however, usually included under that 
 head. Cf. 337, and G.MT. 684. 
 
 THE INFINITIVE WITH THE AETIOLE. 
 
 392. The prefixing of the article to the Infinitive tends to 
 the obscuring of its original dative force, while it emphasizes 
 its new substantive character as a noun which can be used in 
 any case. Some of the uses of the Infinitive with the article 
 differ from those without the article only by the greater em- 
 phasis on the substantive character of the form. This is the 
 case with its use as subject and object. Others express nearly 
 the same relations which were expressed by the Infinitive 
 without the article, but with a different thought of the case- 
 relation involved. Thus the use of the Infinitive without the 
 article after adjectives of fitness, worthiness, etc., doubtless 
 
156 THE MOODS. 
 
 sprang originally from the thought of the Infinitive as a dative. 
 The Infinitive with the article after such adjectives is thought 
 of as a genitive, as is evident from the use of the article tov. 
 The difference in meaning is, however, very slight. Compare 
 the English worthy to receive and worthy of receiving. Still 
 other uses of the Infinitive with the article are wholly new, 
 being developed only after the Infinitive had begun to be used 
 with the article. To this class belongs the use of the Infini- 
 tive after prepositions. 
 
 Rem. The Infinitive with the article being by means of that article 
 practically a declinable noun, the various uses are grouped in the follow- 
 ing sections according to cases. 
 
 393. The Infinitive with to as Subject. The Infinitive 
 with the article to is used as the subject of a finite verb. 
 £".4.959; G^. 1542. 
 
 Matt. 15:20; to Si aviwTOii \e.p(nv <l>ayiiv ov koivoZ tov avOpanrov, 
 hut to eat with unwashen hands defileth not the man. See also Matt. 
 20:23; Mark9:10; 12:33; Eom. 14:21. 
 
 394. The Infinitive with TO as Object. The • Infinitive 
 with the article to is used as the object of a transitive 
 verb. This usage is far less common than the object 
 Infinitive without the article. HA. 959 ; Gr. 1543. 
 
 Acts 25 : 11 ; ov TrapaiTov/xai to airoOaveiv, I refuse not to die. See 
 also 2 Cor. 8:11; Phil. 2 : 6. 
 
 395. The Infinitive with the Article, in Apposition. 
 
 The Infinitive with the article may stand in apposition with 
 a preceding noun or pronoun. 
 
 Rom. 4:13; ov yap Sia vofjiov 17 eirayycXia tiS 'A/Spaa/u. ^ t<3 a-rrep- 
 pxm avTov, to KXijpovofwv avTov tTvai Koa/jiov, for not through the 
 law was the promise to Abraham or to his seed, that he should he heir 
 of the world. 
 
THE INFINITIVE WITH THE ARTICLE. 157 
 
 2 Gov. 2:1; t/cptva yap i/iavTiS tovto, to /mi irdXiv iv kmrg Trpos v/iai 
 iXOeiv, for I determined this for myself, that I would not come again to 
 you with sorrow. See also Rom. 14 : 13. 
 
 396. The Infinitive with t&5. The Infinitive with the 
 article tc3 is used in classical Greek to express cause, man- 
 ner, means. In the New Testament it is used to express 
 cause. Its only other use is after the preposition iv. ■ HA. 
 959 ; a. 1547. 
 
 2 Cor. 2 : 13 ; ria fjoj aipeiv jixe TtVov tov aBc\cf>6v jnov, because I found 
 not Titus my brother. 
 
 397. The Infinitive of Purpose with tov. The Infini- 
 tive with the article tov is used to express the purpose of 
 the action or state denoted by the principal verb. ITA. 
 960; (3^.1548. 
 
 Matt. 2 : 13 ; jueAAa yap 'HprnSiys ^rfTiiv to TraiStW ToC aTroXeWi avTO, 
 for Herod will seek the young child to destroy him. See also Matt. 
 24 : 45 ; Luke 2 : 24, 27 ; Acts 26 : 18 ; Phil. 3 : 10. 
 
 Rem. That the Infinitive with toC expresses purpose with substan- 
 tially the same force as the simple Infinitive appears from the joining of 
 the two together by ko/. 
 
 Luke 2 : 22, 24 ; av^yayov wStov ets 'lepotroXv/xa Trapatrr^crat r(S Kvpim, 
 . . . Koi TOV Sovvai 6v(Tiav, they brought him up to Jerusalem, to pre- 
 sent him to the Lord, and to offer a sacrifice. Cf . also Luke 1 : 76, 
 77; 1:79. 
 
 398. The Infinitive of Result with tov. The Infinitive 
 with the article tou is occasionally used in the New Tes- 
 tament to express conceived result. Cf. 218 and 369-371. 
 
 Matt. 21 : 32 ; u/xets St iSoWes ov'Se ixfTip-eXriOyfc vartpov toC iruj-Ttv- 
 ■ o-at avTw, and ye, when ye saw it, did not even repent afterward, 
 so as to believe him. See also Acts 7 : 19 ; Rom. 7:3; probably also 
 Acts 18 : 10 ; cf . Gen. 3 : 22 ; 19 : 21 ; 34 : 17, 22 ; Isa. 5 : 14. 
 
158 THE MOODS. 
 
 Rem. Meyer takes tlae Infinitive phrase toO liij ehai in Eom. 7 : 3 as 
 expressing a divine purpose, and adds that toO vfith the Iniinitlve never 
 expresses result, not even in Acts 7 : 19. But this is grammatical purism 
 not justified by the evidence. The uniformly telic force of toC with the 
 Infinitive can be maintained only by evasive definition or forced inter- 
 pretation. 
 
 399. The Infinitive with rov after Adjectives. The 
 
 Infinitive with the article tov is used with such adjectives 
 as may be limited by a simple Infinitive. HA. 959 ; Gr. 
 1547. Cf. 376. 
 
 Acts 23 : 15 ; tToijxoi irr/jnv tov aveXelv avrov, we are ready to slay him. 
 See also Luke 24 : 25. 
 
 400. The Infinitive with tov after IN^ouns. The Infini- 
 tive with the article tov is used to limit nouns. The rela- 
 tions thus expressed are very various and are not always 
 easy to define exactly. Instances occur not only, as in 
 classical Greek, of the objective genitive, but also of the 
 genitive of characteristic, the genitive of connection, and 
 the appositional genitive. SA. 959 ; Cr. 1547. 
 
 Heb. 5 : 12; 7rdX.1v XP^"'-^ 'X^'''^ '''"'" StSacrxetv i/iSs, ye have need again 
 
 that some one teach you. 
 Luke 2 : 21 ; Kai ore €irX.i^(T6rj(Tav ■^fiepai oktio rm TrcpiTtjuiv avTov, 
 
 and when eight days were fulfilled for circumcising him. 
 Rom. 11:8; eStoxei/ avTois o Otoi irvevpa Karavufeajs, 6<\>QaXiwvi tov 
 
 firj pXiirav Kax wra rov ju,^ aKovav, God gave them a spirit of stupor, 
 
 eyes that see not, and ears that hear not. See also Luke 1 : 57, 74 ; 
 
 2:6; 10 : 19 ; 21 : 22 ; 22 : 6 ; Acts 14 : 9 ; 20 : 3 ; Eom. 1 : 24 ; 
 
 lCor.9:10; 2 Cor. 8 : 11 ; lPet.4:17; cf. Gen. 16:3; lSam.2:24. 
 
 401. The Infinitive with toi) after Verbs that take the 
 Genitive. The Infinitive with tov is used as the object of 
 verbs which take a noun in the genitive as object, especially 
 of verbs of hindering, etc. ffA. 959, 963 ; (?. 1547, 1549. 
 
THE INFINITIVE WITH THE AKTICLE. 159 
 
 Luke 1:9; e\a\e tov OviJiiaxrcu, it was his lot (prop, he obtained by lot) 
 to burn incense. 
 
 2 Cor. 1:8; iSctts i^airopriOrjvai ■^/j.S.g koX tov ^yv, insomuch that we de- 
 spaired even of life. 
 
 Rom. 15 : 22 ; 8t6 koI ci/eKoirTO/tiji' to. iroXAa tov iXOtlv Trpds i/iSs, 
 wherefore also I was hindered these many times from coming to you. 
 Cf . Gen. 34 : 19 ; Ps. Sol. 2 : 28, 29. 
 
 402. In classical Greek, verbs of hindering are followed by 
 three constructions, (a) Infinitive without the article, (6) In- 
 finitive with TOV, (c) Infinitive with to. Mi; may be used or 
 omitted with the Infinitive without difference of meaning. 
 HA. 963; G. 1549, 1551; G.MT. 791 (exx.). In the New 
 Testament, all these constructions occur except that with to fi^. 
 See Matt. 19 : 14 ; Eom. 16 : 22 ; 1 Cor. 14 : 39 ; Gal. 5:7; 
 Acts 10 : 47. 
 
 403. The Infinitive with toC |Ui} after verbs of hindering is closely akin 
 to the Infinitive of Result. Cf. Luke 24 : 16 ; Acts 14 : 18. 
 
 Rem. Meyer's interpretation of toC /*•); iTiyvdmi airiv in Luke 24 : 16 
 as expressing a divine purpose (the English translation does not correctly 
 represent the meaning of the German original), is not required by New 
 Testament usage. The Greek most naturally means, Their eyes were 
 held from knowing him. Cf. 398, Rem. 
 
 404. The Infinitive with tov as Suhject or Ohject. 
 
 The Infinitive with tov is used even as the subject of a 
 finite verb or as the object of transitive verbs which regu- 
 larly take a direct object. This is a wide departure from 
 classical usage, and indicates that the sense of the genitive 
 character of the article tov before the Infinitive was partly 
 lost in later Greek. J5.p.270; Fil!f:pp.411f.; Fy.pp.327f. 
 
 Acts 27 : 1 ; eKpiOr] tov airoirXuv ij/ixas «s ttjv 'ItoXuiv, it was determined 
 that we should sail for Italy. See also Luke 4 ; 10 ; 5:7; Acts 3 : 12 ; 
 10:25; 15:20; 21:12; 23:20; 1 Sam. 12:23; Eccl. 4 : 13, 17 ; 
 1 Mace. 3 : 15. 
 
160 THE MOODS. 
 
 405. The origin of this use of the Infinitive with toD is perhaps in such 
 usages as appear in Luke 17:1; 1 Cor. 16 : 4 ; and still more in such as 
 that in Luke 4 : 10. In Luke 17 : 1 the genitive is apparently suggested 
 by the idea of hindering or avoiding in the adjective ivSi/SeKTov ; in 
 1 Cor. 16 : 4 it is the adjective Aiiov which gives occasion to the genitive ; 
 but in both cases the Infinitive seems to be logically the subject of the 
 copulative verb, the adjective being the predicate. Whether this con- 
 struction represents the thought in the mind of the writer, or whether 
 the expression is rather to be regarded as an impersonal one, the Infini- 
 tive being dependent on the predicate adjective, cannot with confidence 
 be decided. Such usages as Luke 4 : 10 and 5 : 7 doubtless owe their 
 origin to the same mental process by which a clause introduced by tm 
 came to stand as the object of a verb of exhorting. Ps. Sol. 2 : 28 com- 
 pared with Luke 12 : 45 is also suggestive. It is doubtless the idea of 
 hindering in xpovi^a that gives rise to the genitive in the former passage ; 
 in the latter the Infinitive is a direct object. 
 
 406. The Infinitive with the Article governed by 
 Prepositions. The Infinitive with the article to, tov, tS 
 is governed by prepositions. ITA. 959 ; 6r. 1546. 
 
 The prepositions so' used in the New Testament are : 
 with the accusative, Sid, eh, fierd, tt/oos ; with the genitive, 
 dvTt, Std, evsKev, ew?, tt/so ; with the dative, iv. 
 
 Mark 4:6; xat hia. ro /M] ex^iv pC^av i^r/pdvOrj, and because it had no 
 
 root, it withered away. 
 1 Thess. 3:5; eireiMlia £ts to yvu>vaL ttjv tticttlv v/juitv, I sent that I might 
 
 know your faith. 
 Mark 14 : 28 ; dAAa /terot to iyepOrjvai /xe vpod^u) i/ias eis rrjv TaXi- 
 
 Xouav, howheit, after I am raised up, 1 will go before you into Galilee. 
 Matt. 6:1; irpocTe;(£Te [Sc] Ttpi hiKoxofTvvyjv vpJStv p.T] iroteiv i/xiTpouOcv 
 
 Tuiv avOpanriav irpos to dcaOijvai avTols, take heed that ye do not your 
 
 righteousness before men, to be seen of them. 
 Gal. 3 : 23 ; irpo tov 8e iX6w> Tijv wtdTiv vtto vofwv i<j>povpovfjie6a, but 
 
 before faith came, we were kept in ward under the law. 
 Luke 24 : 51 ; koi iyevcTO iv tcS cvXoyetv avTov avrovi SUcrTri air 
 
 avTuiv, and it came to pass, while he blessed them, he parted from them. 
 
 407. These prepositions vary greatly in frequency in the 
 New Testament. Ek occurs with the Infinitive about sixty 
 
THE INFINITIVE WITH THE ARTICLE. 161 
 
 times ; iv nearly fifty ; 8id. twenty-four ; /xtTa fifteen ; Trpds 
 twelve ; TTpo nine ; each of tlie others once. Concerning other 
 prepositions used with the Infinitive by classical writers, see 
 G.MT. 800-802. 
 
 408. Aid governing the Infinitive with t6 denotes cause, and is nearly- 
 equivalent to Sti or Si.6ti with the Indicative, differing in that the Infini- 
 tive gives in Itself no indication of the time of the action. 
 
 Jas. 4:2, 3; ovk txere 8ia to ju.^ atTCicrSai iju.as' atreiTc koi ov Xa/x- 
 ySai/ere, Sion KaKus alTtlcrOi, ye have not, because ye ask not. Ye 
 ask, and receive not, because ye ask amiss. 
 
 In Mark 5 : 4 Sid with the Infinitive expresses the evidence rather than 
 the cause strictly so called. 
 
 409. Eij governing the Infinitive with t6 most commonly expresses 
 purpose. It is employed with special frequency by Paul, but occurs also 
 in Heb., 1 Pet., and Jas. 
 
 Eom. 8 : 29 ; on ovs irpoiyvut, koX Trpoiapurev cnj;»jaop<^ous t^s etKwos 
 To5 vicfu avTciu, eis to etvai avTov irpiarofroKov iv iroAAots doeXi^ois, 
 /o7- whom he foreknew, he also foreordained to be conformed to the 
 image of his Son, that he might be tlie frsi-bom among many brethren. 
 See also Rom. 1:11; 3:26; 7:4; Eph. 1:12; Phil. 1:10; Heb. 
 2 : 17 ; Jas. 1:18; 1 Pet. 3 : 7. 
 
 410. Els with the Infinitive is also used, like the simple Infinitive, to 
 represent an indirect object. Cf. 368. 
 
 1 Cor. 11 : 22 ; p,^ yap oikuis ovk ex^TC eis to itrOCciv koI mvuv, what 1 
 have ye not houses to eat and to drink in f See also Matt. 20 : 19 ; 
 26:2. 
 
 411. Eis with the Infinitive also expresses tendency, measure of effect, 
 or result, conceived or actual. 
 
 Heb. 11:3; tio-tci voovpev KaTrjpTia-OaL tous aiGvas prjpaTi Otov, eis 
 TO fUj «K (fiaivop-evoiv to j8A.e7ro/xevov yeyovevai, by faith we under- 
 stand that the worlds have been framed by the word of God, so that 
 what is seen hath not been made out of things which do appear. See 
 also Rom. 12 : 3 ; 2 Cor. 8:6; Gal. 3 : 17 ; 1 Thess. 2 : 16. 
 
162 THE MOODS. 
 
 El's t6 iaSlav in 1 Cor. 8 : 10 either expresses measure of efieot or is the 
 indirect object of oi/coSo/HTjff^ffeTOt. Eis t6 elvai airois d.vawo'KoyfiTovs in 
 Kom. 1 : 20 might appropriately be interpreted as expressing purpose but 
 for the causal clause which follows. This clause could be joined to an 
 expression of purpose only by supposing an ellipsis of some such expres- 
 sion as Ktti ovTus elffh, and seems therefore to require that ch rb ehai be 
 interpreted as expressing result. 
 
 Rem. Meyer's dictum (see on Eom. 1 : 20) that els with the articular 
 Infinitive is always telic, is, like his similar dictum respecting row with 
 the Infinitive, a case of grammatical purism, not justified by the evidence. 
 
 412. Eis with the Infinitive is also used, like iva with the Subjunctive, 
 or the simple Infinitive, as the direct object of verbs of exhorting, etc. 
 1 Thess. 2 : 12 ; 3 : 10 ; 2 Thess. 2 : 2. 
 
 413. EZs with the Infinitive is still further used, like the simple Infini- 
 tive, to limit an adjective, as in Jas. 1 : 19, or a noun, as in Fhil. 1 : 23. 
 
 414. np6s governing the Infinitive with t6 usually expresses purpose ; 
 it is occasionally used with the sense, with reference to. 
 
 Matt. 6:1; Trpoa^xert [Se] T'fjv SiKauxjvvrjV v/muiv fio] troLelv tii^irpoaOv/ 
 tZv a.v6pu)Tr(i>v irpbi to deaOrjvai a-uVots, but take heed that ye do not 
 your righteousness before men, to be seen of them. 
 
 Matt. 26 : 12 ; ySoXoScra yap avrrj to /xvpov tovto etti tctu (rtop/XTOi //.ov 
 irpos to ivTa^idxrai /xe. iTroi-quev, for in that she poured this ointment 
 upon my body, she did it to prepare me for burial. See also Matt. 
 5 : 28 ; 13 : 30 ; 2 Cor. 3 : 13 ; Eph. 6 : 11, etc. (purpose) ; Luke 18 : 1 
 (reference). 
 
 415. 'E;- governing the Infinitive with rip is most commonly temporal, 
 but occasionally expresses other relations, such as manner, means, or 
 content. This construction is especially frequent in Luke and Acts. 
 
 Luke 8:5; /cat cv T<p uinipav avTov o pjev cTretrev irapa Trjv oSw, and 
 
 as he sowed, some fell by the way side. 
 Acts 3 : 26 ; v/uv irpuyrov dvao'T'^crai 6 flcos tov iraiSa avTov a/TricrTuX.ev 
 
 avTov evXoyovvTa v/jws iv tiS a.wot7Tpi<j>e.iv Ikoxttov airo tS>v irovr]- 
 
 piS>v [yiJLwv], unto you first God, having raised up his Servant, sent him 
 
 to bless you, in turning away every one of you from your iniquities. 
 
 See also Luke 1:8; Acts 9:3; 11:15; Ps. Sol. 1 : 1 (temporal) ; 
 
 Luke 12 : 15; Acts 4 : 30; Heb. 2:8; 3 : 12, 15; Ps. Sol. 1:3; Gen. 
 
 19 : 16 ; 34 : 15. 
 
THE PARTICIPLE. 163 
 
 416. The force of the other prepositions used with the Infinitive 
 scarcely needs special definition, the meaning of each being in general 
 the same as that of the same preposition governing nouns. Respecting 
 the force of the tenses after prepositions, see 104-109. 
 
 417. Concerning the Infinitive without the article governed by prepo- 
 sitions, see &MT. 803, and cf. Gen. 10 : 19. The Infinitive yivea-eai. in 
 Acts 4 : 30, which is by R.V. taken as the object of S6s is more probably 
 governed by the preposition iv. It is however not strictly without the 
 article, the rep which precedes iKTelveiv belonging in effect also to ylv€<reai.. 
 
 THE PAETICIPLE. 
 
 418. The Participle is a verbal adjective, sharing in part 
 the characteristics of both the verb and the adjective. As a 
 verb it has both tense functions and functions which may be 
 designated as modal functions, being analogous to those which 
 in the case of verbs in the Indicative, Subjunctive, or Optative 
 belong to the mood. For the proper understanding of a par- 
 ticiple, therefore, it is necessary to consider (a) The grammat- 
 ical agreement, (6) The use of the tense, and (c) The logical 
 force or modal function. The first and second of these have 
 already been treated, grammatical agreement in 116, the uses 
 of the tenses in 118-156. It remains to consider the logical 
 force or modal function of the participle. From the point of 
 view of the interpreter this is usually the matter of most 
 importance. 
 
 419. In respect to logical force, participles may be classified 
 as Adjective, Adverbial, and Substantive. 
 
 Eem. 1. The terminology here employed for the classification of parti- 
 ciples differs somewhat from that commonly employed. It is adopted 
 substantially from the article of Professor Wm. Arnold Stevens, "On 
 the Substantive Use of the Greek Participle" in T.A.P.A. 1872. The 
 Adjective Participle corresponds nearly to the Attributive Participle 
 
164 THE MOODS. 
 
 as treated in (?. and HA., the Adverbial Participle to the Circum- 
 stantial Participle, and the Substantive Participle to the Supplementary 
 Participle. 
 
 Rem. 2. Respecting the use of the negatives ;ni) and oi with partici- 
 ples, see 485. 
 
 THE ADJECTIVE PAETIOIPLE. 
 
 420. The Adjective Participle limits its subject directly 
 and exclusively. It attributes tbe action wbich it denotes 
 to the subject as a quality or characteristic, or assigns the 
 subject to the class marked by that action. SA. 965 ; &. 
 1559. 
 
 Acts 10 : 1, 2 ; avr]p Si tis iv Kat(rapta ovoiuxn Kopv^Xtos, €Karovrap- 
 X»7S €K o-TTEtpTys TTJi Kakov/jiivrj's 'iTaXiKjj?, eio-e/S^s kou, ^oySou/tcvos 
 Tov $€ov (Tvv iravTi TtS oik<o Avtov, TroiGi/ eAoj/iotrwas TroXAas t<S 
 XafS Kol Seo/z.ei'os rmj Oecyu Sia TravTos, now there was a certain man 
 in Ccesarea, Cornelius hy name, a centurion of a hand called the 
 Italian hand, a devout man and one that feared God with all his house, 
 who gave much alms to the people ■ and prayed to God alway. The 
 four participles in this sentence are all Adjective Participles, de- 
 scribing their subject. This is especially clear in the case of <f>ol3ov- 
 jixcvos, which is joined by koI to the adjective eva-efi'^. For other 
 similar examples see Col. 1 : 21 ; Jas. 2 : 15 ; see also examples 
 under the following sections. 
 
 421. The Adjective Participle may be used attributively or 
 predicatively. When used attributively it may be either re- 
 strictive or explanatory. 
 
 422. The Restrictive Attributive Participle. An at- 
 tributive Adjective Participle may be used to define or 
 identify its subject, pointing out what person or thing is 
 meant. It is then equivalent to a restrictive relative clause. 
 Cf. 295. 
 
THE ADJECTIVE PAETICIPLE. 165 
 
 John 6 : 50 ; oiJtos iirnv 6 apros o ex tov ovpavov KwraPaivuiv, this is 
 the bread which Cometh down out of heaven. 
 
 Jude 17 ; /xvi^crdrjTe tu>v p-qiiATitiv tSiv Trpouprifia/oiv inro twv airotT- 
 ToXtov TOV KvpLOV yjpMv 'Ir;(7oC XptcTToC, remember the words which 
 have been spoken before by the apostles of our Lord Jesus Christ. 
 
 423. The subject of the Eestrictive Attributive Participle is 
 often omitted. The participle is then an Adjective Participle 
 used substantively. Such a participle usually has the article, 
 but not invariably. HA. 966 ; G. 1560. 
 
 Matt. 10 : 37 ; 6 tjuXlav Traripa rj firjTepa xnrep ipx ovk eoriv /jlov afios, 
 
 he that loveth father or mother more than me is not worthy of me. 
 Acts 5 : 14 ; TrpouenOcvro iritTTeuovres t<S KVpCto irKridi] avSplav re koX 
 
 ywaiKoii/, belieoers were added to the Lord, multitudes both of men and 
 
 women. 
 Acts 10 : 35 ; dXA. ei/ ■ffavrt iOva 6 <^oPovixtvoi airov koI epya^o/*cvos 
 
 Slkollooiovi^v Sektos avTiS io-TLV, but in every nation he that feareth 
 
 him, and worketh righteousness, is acceptable to him. 
 Kev. 1:3; jua/capios o avaytvaxTKOiv kol oi aKolvovreis tows Aoyous t^s 
 
 ■trpotjiTfCuvi Kal T-qpovvre; to. ev avrg y(.ypafLp,iv(x, blessed is he that 
 
 readeth, and they that hear the words of the prophecy, and keep the 
 
 things which are written therein. 
 
 424. A noun without the article, or an indefinite pronoun, is 
 sometimes limited by a participle with the article. The article 
 in this case does not make the noun strictly definite. The 
 person or thing referred to is placed within the class charac- 
 terized by the action denoted by the participle, and the atten- 
 tion is directed to some one or to certain ones of that class, 
 who are not, however, more specifically identified. Kearly the 
 same meaning is expressed by a participle without the article, 
 or on the other hand by a relative clause limiting an indefinite 
 substantive. For classical examples of this usage see WM. p. 
 136; TFT. pp. 109 f. 
 
 Col. 2:8; pXiirtTi p-rj t« vfws Icrrat o miXayayuiv Sto. t^s <^iA.oo-o- 
 ^ias, take heed lest there shall be any one that maketh spoil of you 
 through his philosophy. See also Acts 5 : 17; 10 :41 ; Gal. 1 : 7. 
 
.166 THE MOODS. 
 
 425. A neuter participle with the article is sometimes 
 equivalent to an abstract noun. It is then limited by a geni- 
 tive like any other abstract noun. HA. 966, b. f G. 1662. 
 
 Phil. 3:8; 8ia to virtpi^ov t^s yvcocreojs ^purrov Itjo-oB toij Kvpicnj 
 pjov, because of the excellency [superiority] of the knowledge of Christ 
 Jesus my Lord. See also the similar use of lieuter adjectives in 
 Rom. 2 : 4 ; 1 Cor. 1 : 25 ; Phil. 4:5; Heb. 6 : 17. WM. pp. 294 f . ; 
 WT. pp. 234 f . 
 
 426. The Explanatory Attributive Participle. An 
 
 attributive Adjective Participle may be used to describe a 
 person or thing already known or identified. It is then 
 equivalent to an explanatory relative clause. Cf. 295. 
 
 2 Tim. 1 : 8, 9 ; Kara 8wa/iuv Oiov, tov (TtHxravTO's ij/iSs Koi KoXe'crai/Tos 
 KXi^cr€L dyia, according to the power of God; who saved us, and called 
 us with a holy calling. 
 
 1 Thess. 1 : 10 ; Irjaovv-rbv pvop-tvov ■^fi.as ex Trjs opy^s t^s ip^ojihrqi, 
 Jesus, which delivereth us from the wrath to come. In this example 
 pvofievw is explanatory, ipypp.ivq's is restrictive. See also Acts 
 20 : 32 ; Heb. 7 : 9. 
 
 427. An Attributive Participle when used to limit a noun 
 which has the article, stands in the so-called attributive posi- 
 tion, i.e. between the article and the noun, or after an article 
 following the noun ; but when the participle is limited by an 
 adverbial phrase, this phrase may stand between the article 
 and the noun, and the participle without the article follow the 
 noun. It thus results that all the following orders are possi- 
 ble : 
 
 (1) article, participle, modifier of the participle, noun ; 
 
 (2) art., mod., part., noun ; 
 
 (3) art., mod., noun, part. ; 
 
 (4) art., part., noun, mod. ; 
 
 (5) art., noun, art., mod., part. ; 
 
THE ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLE. 167 
 
 (6) art., noun, art., part., mod. See Professor Charles Short's 
 essay on The Order of Words in Attic Greek Prose, in Yonge's 
 English-Greek Lexicon, pp. xlix. f. ; K. 464, 8 ; HA. 667, a. 
 
 Acts 13 : 32 ; koI ijjmeis viiai €vayye\i^ofie9a Tfjv irpos Toiis Traripa^ 
 iirayye\tav yevo/xevrfv, and we bring you good tidings of the promise 
 made unto the fathers. See also Acts 12 : 10 ; 26 : 4, 6 ; Heb. 2:2; 
 and especially Rom. 2 : 27, where ij eic ^rJirecDs aKpo^vtrTla tov voiwv 
 TeXoCcra should doubtless be rendered, the uncircumcision which 
 by nature fulfils the law (cf . v. 14) . 
 
 428. An Attributive Participle equivalent to a relative 
 clause, may like a relative clause convey a subsidiary idea of 
 cause, purpose, condition, or concession (cf. 294, 296 ff., 317 
 ff.). It then partakes of the nature of both the Adjective 
 Participle and the Adverbial Participle. Cf. 434. 
 
 Rom. 3:5; fir/ aSucos o flcos o eTrt^epuv rijv opyqv, is God unright- 
 eous, who \because Ae] visiteth with wrath f 
 
 Matt. 10 : 39 ; 6 eipaiv tt/v il/v)(rjv avrov aTroXicet avrrfv, koX 6 airoXf.- 
 aas TTjV ij/vx^v avToHi €V€K£v ifLov tvprqarti ain^v, he that fndeth his 
 life shall lose it, and he that loseth his life for my sake shall find it. 
 See also vss. 37, 40, 41 ; cf. vss. 38, 42, and Luke 14 : 26. 
 
 429. The Predicative Adjective Participle. A parti- 
 ciple may be used as the predicate of the verb elfii or other 
 copulative verb. 
 
 Matt. 3 : 15 ; ovtoj yap irplirav Icttiv ffpAV TrkrjpSxTai iraxrav St/caioorwiyv, 
 for thus it is becoming for us to fulfil all righteousness. 
 
 Gal. 1 : 22 ; rjp.r]V Se dyvoov/juevos tc3 irpoo'WTria Tats iKKXr/cruii's rrj^ 
 lovSaias, and I was unknown by face unto the churches of Judea. 
 
 Rev. 1 : 18 ; koX iyevo/jLTjv ve/cpos fcat iSov ^tov dpi cU tows atwas twv 
 aidvdiv, and I became dead, and behold, I am alive for evermore. 
 
 430. The Predicative Participle always stands in the so- 
 called predicative position, i.e. not in attributive position, 
 which is between the article and its noun or after an article 
 following the noun. Cf. 427. 
 
168 THE MOODS. 
 
 431. Under the head of the Predicative Participle belong 
 those Present and Perfect Participles which, with the Present, 
 Imperfect, and Future of the verb, form periphrastic Presents, 
 Imperfects, Perfects, Pluperfects, Futures, and Puture Perfects. 
 Cf . 20, 34, 71, 84, 91, 97 ; G.MT. 45, 830, 831 ; B. pp. 308-313 ; 
 S. pp. 131 K See Eev. 1 : 18 ; Matt. 27 : 33 ; Mark 2 : 18 ; Luke 
 1:21; 13:10; Jas. 5:15; 2Gor. 9:3; Luke2:26; John 13:5; 
 Matt. 18 : 18. 
 
 432. To the Greek mind there was doubtless a distinction 
 of thought between the participle which retained its adjective 
 force and its distinctness from the copula, and that which 
 was so joined with the copula as to be felt as an element 
 of a compound tense-form. This distinction can usually be 
 perceived by us ; yet in the nature of the case there will 
 occur instances which it will be difficult to assign with cer- 
 tainty to one class or the other. Since, moreover, an Adjec- 
 tive Participle used substantively without the article may 
 stand in the predicate, this gives rise to a third possibility. 
 A participle without the article standing in the predicate is 
 therefore capable of three explanations : 
 
 (a) It may be an Attributive Participle used substantively. 
 So probably 
 
 Mark 10 : 22 ; -qv yap €X<»v KTrjixara, ttoXKA, for he was one that had 
 great possessions. See also John 18 : 30. 
 
 (&) It maybe a Predicative Participle retaining its adjec- 
 tive force. So probably the examples under 429, especially 
 Gal. 1 : 22. 
 
 (c) It may form with the copula a periphrastic verb-form. 
 
 Luke 5 ; 17 ; km iyevero iv /j-iql tS)v ■^/lepSiv koi avTos ■^v 8iSa(7K<i)v, 
 and it came to pass on one of those days that he was teaching. 
 
THE ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLE. 169 
 
 433. An Adjective Participle used substantively with the 
 article may of course occur as a predicate with a copula. This, 
 however, is not properly a Predicative Participle. The presence 
 of the article makes its use as a noun easily evident. The 
 participle without the article may be as really substantive 
 (432, a), but is not so easily distinguished as such. 
 
 Livke 7:19; <tv el 6 ipxofievos ; art thou lie that cometh ? See also 
 Luke 16: 15; 22:28. 
 
 THE ADVEEBIAL PAETIOIPLE. 
 
 434. The Adverbial Participle logically modifies some 
 other verb of the sentence in which it stands, being equiva- 
 lent to an adverbial phrase or clause denoting time, condi- 
 tion, concession, cause, purpose, means, manner, or attend- 
 ant circumstance. RA. 969 ; G: 1563. Thus we find : 
 
 435. The Adverbial Participle of Time, equivalent to 
 a temporal clause. 
 
 Luke 24 : 36 ; ravra 8e avruiv XaXovvTiav airos €(TTr] ev /xccoi at>Tc5v, 
 and as they spake these things, he himself stood in the midst of them. 
 
 John 16:8; koi iX6u)V c/cetvos iXey^ti rbv Kocr/mv, and he, when he is 
 come, will convict the world. 
 
 436. The Adverbial Participle of Condition, equiva- 
 lent to a conditional clause. 
 
 Heb. 2:3; ttSs ij/otels ixtjievioficOa TrjXiKavrrj^ d/ieX^a-avres o-arrrjpms, 
 how shall we escape, if we neglect so great salvation ? 
 
 1 Tim. 4:4; oTt ttSv KTtV/ua Oeov koXov, kol ovBkv airo^XriTov /t£Ta 
 evXapuTTMi Xa/jL^avofievov, for every creature of God is good, and 
 nothing is to be rejected, if it be received with thanksgiving. See also 
 1 Cor. 11 : 29 ; Gal. 6 : 9. 
 
170 THE MOODS. 
 
 437. The Adverbial Participle of Concession, equiva- 
 lent to a concessive clause. The concessive force is some- 
 times emphasized by prefixing Kaiirep or KaL je to the 
 participle. 
 
 Acts 13 : 28 ; koI iJLri8eiJ.iav avriav 6a.vaTov evpovTcs yTrjaavTO Xi.aXa.Tov 
 
 avaipcO^vai avTov, and though they found no cause of death in him, 
 
 yet asked they of Pilate that he should be slain. 
 Heb. 5:8; Kaarep &v vids, tfiaOtv d<^' Stv eiraOev ttjv vTraKorjv, though 
 
 he was a Son, yet he learned obedience by the things which he suffered. 
 
 See also Matt. 14 : 9 ; Mark 4:31; Acts 17 : 27. 
 
 438. A concessive participle refers to a fact which is 
 unfavorable to the occurrence of the event denoted by the 
 principal verb. Cf. 278. It should be distinguished from the 
 participle which is merely antithetical. A participle denoting 
 accompanying circumstance, or even condition or cause, may 
 be antithetical. See 1 Cor. 4 : 12, Skoko/lievoi dvep^o/xeSa;' 2 Cor. 
 8:9; Gal. 2:3. 
 
 439. The Adverbial Participle of Cause, equivalent 
 to a causal clause. 
 
 Col. 1 : 3, 4 ; evxapio-Tov/ixcv t<S OetS . . . aKouo-avres tyjv ma-nv vfiMv iv 
 X.pujTiS 'Ifjo-ov, we give thanks to God . . . having heard (because 
 we have heard) of your faith in Christ Jesus. 
 
 1 Tim. 4:8; ij Se tuo-E^Seta irpos iravTa iL^iXiixo^ icrnv, iTrayyekiav 
 iXovcra ^or^s t^s vuv kol t^s iJ.eXXova-rj's, but godliness is profitable 
 for all things, having promise of the life which now is, and of that which 
 is to come. See also Matt. 2:3, 10 ; Acts 9 : 26. 
 
 440. "12s prefixed to a Participle of Cause implies that the 
 action denoted by the participle is supposed, asserted, or pro- 
 fessed by some one, usually the subject of the principal verb, 
 to be the cause of the action of the principal verb. The 
 speaker does not say whether the supposed or alleged cause 
 actually exists. HA. 978; G. 1574. 
 
THE ADVBKBIAL PAETICIPLE. 171 
 
 1 Cor. 4:18; <oi /xr) ipXo/iivov 8e /xov n-pos ijnas i<t>v<nu>6ri<7a,v Tivcs, 
 but some are puffed up, as though I were not coming to you, i.e. be- 
 cause (^as they suppose) I am not coming. See also Acts 23 : 15, 
 20 ; 27 : 30 ; 28 : 19 ; 1 Pet. 4 : 12. 
 
 441. The origin of this idiom is probably in a clause of manner con- 
 sisting of (Js and a finite verb, the latter modified by a Participle of Cause. 
 Thus KoKiias lie o/s KaKoiroi-^aavra, you punish me as having done evil, i.e. 
 you punish me because, as you -allege, I have done evil^ may have its 
 origin in such a sentence as KoXdfeiS /xe ws KoXifeis Tt,va KaKoiroi'^aavTa, you 
 punish me, as you punish one who has (or because he has) done evil. Yet 
 it is not to be supposed that the Greek any more than the English required 
 the supplying of a finite verb after us. Such phrases in clj^ssical Greek 
 or in the New Testament are, as they stand and without the addition of 
 other words, expressions of cause, the use of us indicating that the phrase 
 describes the opinion or assertion of the subject of the sentence rather 
 than of the speaker. 
 
 442. The Adverbial Participle of Purpose, equivalent 
 to a final clause. This is usually, but not invariably, in 
 the Future tense. 
 
 Acts 8 : 27 ; [os] eXrjXvOa irpoo-Kw^trcDV eis 'lepovcraXTJii, who had come 
 
 to Jerusalem to worship. 
 Acts 3 : 26 ; airiarraXev outov evXayavvTa vixaa, he sent Mm to bless you. 
 
 443. The Adverbial Participle of Means. This can- 
 not usually be resolved into a clause. 
 
 Matt. 6 : 27 ; rts 8e ii vfmv jnepi/ivolv SwaToi Trpoa-Oeivai iirl Trjv 
 ijXi/ctav avTov Trrjxw eva, and which of you by being anxious can 
 add one cubit unto his stature ? See also Acts 16 : 16 ; Heb. 2 : 18. 
 
 444. The Adverbial Participle of Manner, describing 
 the manner in which the action denoted by the verb is 
 done. 
 
 Acts 2:13; trepoL Se Siax^^vdi^ovTes tXeyov, but others mocking said. 
 See also Luke 19 : 48. 
 
172 THE MOODS. 
 
 445. The manner of an action is frequently expressed by 
 <os with the participle. 
 
 Mark 1 : 22 ; ijj/ yap SiSdcrKoiv avrovi <is i^ovcriav e)(o>v koI ov\ ois ot 
 ypafifjMTeii, for he taught them as one having authority, and not as the 
 scribes. 
 
 1 Cor. 9 : 26 ; outcos TrvKTCuo) <os ovk aipa, Sepiov, so fight I as not heat- 
 
 ing the air. 
 
 2 Cor. 5 : 20 ; virkp XpioToC avv Trpecr/Scuomev ms tov Oeov TrapaKoXmiv- 
 
 Tos &' -q/iutv, we are ambassadors therefore on behalf of Christ, as 
 though God were intreating by us. 
 
 446. When w's with the participle is used to express manner, the parti- 
 ciple itself may he either an Adjective Participle used substantively or an 
 Adverbial Participle of Manner. The origin of such expressions is doubt- 
 less, in either case, in a clause of manner consisting of us and a finite verb 
 similar to the principal verb, the participle being either the subject of 
 such a verb or an adverbial (or other) limitation of it. Thus SiSda-Ka oSs 
 tX"" i^ov<Tlav is equivalent to Sidda^Kei us e^uv i^ovslav Si.Sd<rKei, he teaches 
 as one having authority teaches, or diSda-Kci us ns diddrxei ^x"'" Hovalav, he 
 teaches as one teaches having authority. Yet in neither case is it to be 
 supposed that the Greek, any more than the English, required the sup- 
 plying of a finite verb after w's. The phrase as it stood was an expres- 
 sion of manner. That the participle, however, was in some cases still 
 felt as a substantive (Adjective Participle used substantively) seems 
 probable from its being used oorrelatively with an adjective or noun and 
 from the occasional use of the participle with the article. See Mark 1 : 22 
 above ; also 1 Cor. 7 : 25 ; 2 Cor. 6 : 9, 10 ; 1 Pet. 2 : 16 ; and of. Mark 
 6 : 34 ; Luke 22 : 26, 27. That this is not always the case, but that the 
 participle itself is sometimes adverbial is evident from such cases as 2 Cor. 
 5 : 20 (see above, 445). 
 
 447. The participle expressing manner or means often 
 denotes the same action as that of the principal verb, describ- 
 ing it from a different point of view. In this case the participle 
 is as respects its tense a (Present or Aorist) Participle of 
 Identical Action (cf. 120, 139), while as respects its modal 
 function it is a participle of manner or means. 
 
THE ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLE. 173 
 
 Acts 5 : 30 ; o 6eos tZv Trarepoiv rffjilav rjyapev 'ItjcoJc, ov i/ncts 
 hic^apiaaaOe. Kp£/*a(ravT£s etti ^vAou, Me God of our fathers raised 
 up Jesus, whom ye slew by hanging him on a tree. See also Acts 
 9 : 22 1 10 : 33 ; 1 Tim. 5 : 21. 
 
 448. In quotations from the Old Testament a participle is 
 sometimes placed before a personal form of the same verb. 
 The idiom arises from an imitation of the Hebrew construction 
 with the Infinitive Absolute. The force of the participle is 
 in general intensive. Hr. 28, 3, a ; B. pp. 313 f. ; WM. pp. 
 445 f . ; WT. pp. 354 f . 
 
 Heb. 6 : 14 ; evkoyStv euAoy^cro) ere xat ttXtjOvvidv ttAijAwS ere, blessing 
 I will bless thee, and multiplying I will multiply thee. 
 
 449. The Adverbial Participle of Atteudant Circum- 
 stance. 
 
 Mark 16 : 20 ; e/cetvot 8e efeX^ovTcs tKi^pv^av iravraxov, tov Kvpiov 
 crvvepycnivTos Kal tov \6yov fie^aiorvvTO's, and they went forth and 
 preached everytohere, the Lord working with them and confirming the 
 word. 
 
 Luke 4:15; koX clvto's eSt'SacTKCv iv Taw (Tvvayuryais ovtSiv, Bo^a^o- 
 juevos iiro irdvTwv, and he taught in their synagogues, being glorified 
 of all. 
 
 Acts 15 : 22 ; totc eSofc rots aTroo'ToAois /cat to1<: Trp£(r;8vr£pois . . . 
 eKXe^afJLtvovi avSpas i^ avTu>v TTi/jitj/ai ets Avtl6^€Ux.v, then it seemed 
 good to the apostles and the elders . . . to choose men out of their com- 
 pany and send them to Antioch. 
 
 Acts 18 : 18 ; o 8e naSXos . . . efcTrXei £is T-qv 'Svpiav, koI avv avTiS 
 Upia-KiXXa Kal 'AKvXas, KUpd/xevoi iv K£vXpEats rrjv Ke<l>aX.i^v, and 
 Paul . . . sailed thence for Syria, and with him Priscilla and A guila ; 
 having shorn his head in Cenchreas. 
 
 2 Tim. 4 : 11 ; MapKov ofi/aXa^wv ay£ /x£Ta creavTov, take Mark and 
 bring him with thee. See also Luke 5:7; 11:7. 
 
 450. The term "attendant" as used above does not define the tem- 
 poral relation of the participle to the verb, but the logical relation. The 
 action of a Participle of Attendant Circumstance may precede the action 
 
174 THE MOODS. 
 
 of the principal verb, accompany it, or even follow it. But as respects 
 logical relation, it is presented merely as an accompaniment of the action 
 of the verb. It does not, e.g., define the time or the cause, or the means 
 of the action of the principal verb, but simply prefixes or adds an asso- 
 ciated fact or conception. It is thus often equivalent to a coordinate verb 
 with Kal. Though grammatically not an independent element of the 
 sentence, the participle in such cases becomes in thought assertive, 
 hortatory, optative, imperative, etc., according to the function of the 
 principal verb. 
 
 The position of the Participle of Attendant Circumstance with refer- 
 ence to the verb is not determined by any fixed rules, but by the order 
 of the writer's thought, this being in turn governed of course to a certain 
 extent by the order of the events. If the action of the participle is ante- 
 cedent to that of the verb, the participle most commonly precedes the verb, 
 but not invariably. Such a participle is usually in the Aorist tense (134), 
 but occasionally in the Present (127). If the action of the participle is 
 simultaneous with that of the verb, it may either precede or follow the 
 verb, more frequently the latter. It is of course in the Present tense 
 (119). If the action of the participle is subsequent to that of the princi- 
 pal verb, it almost invariably follows the verb, the tense of the participle 
 being determined by the conception of the action as respects its progress. 
 The instances of this last-named class are not frequent in the New Testa- 
 ment and are perhaps due to Aramaic influence. Cf. 119, Eem. ; 146. 
 
 451. The various relations of time, cause, manner, etc., being 
 not expressed, but implied by the participle, cases arise in 
 which it is impossible to assign the participle unquestionably 
 to any one of the above heads. Indeed, more than one of these 
 relations may be implied by the same participle. 
 
 452. The Genitive Absolute. An Adverbial Participle 
 may stand in agreement "with a noun or pronoun in the geni- 
 tive without grammatical dependence upon any other part of 
 the sentence, the two constituting a genitive absolute phrase 
 and expressing any of the adverbial relations enumerated in 
 435-449. HA. 970, 971 ; G. 1568. 
 
 Rom. 9:1; aXri$€Uiv \iyu) iv XpicrTco, ou ij/ivSoiuu, (Tvviw,pTvpov(Tr)% 
 /xoi T^s crwetSiytrttos /w.ov iv irvev/juxn ayiio, I say the truth in Christ, 
 I lie not, my conscience bearing witness with me in the Holy Ghost. 
 See also John 8 : .30 ; Acts 12 : 18 ; 18 : 20. 
 
THE SUBSTANTIVE PARTICIPLE. 175 
 
 453. The noun or pronoun of the genitive absolute phrase regularly 
 refers to a person or thing not otherwise mentioned in the sentence. 
 Occasionally, however, this principle is violated, and the genitive phrase 
 may even refer to the subject of the sentence. This irregularity is some- 
 what more frequent in the New Testament than in classical Greek. HA. 
 972, d. ; GMT. 850. See Matt. 1 : 18 ; Acts 22 : 17, and other examples in 
 B. pp. 315 f . 
 
 454. A participle in the genitive absolute occasionally stands alone 
 without an accompanying noun or. pronoun, when the person or thing 
 referred to is easily perceived from the context. HA. 972, a. ; G. 1568 ; 
 G.MT. 848. See Luke 12 : 36 ; Eom. 9 : 11. 
 
 455. The Adverbial Participle always stands in the so-called 
 predicative position, i.e. not in attributive position, which is 
 between the article and its noun or after an article following 
 the noun. Cf. 427. 
 
 THE SUBSTANTIVE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 456. The Substantive Participle is employed as itself 
 the name of an action. It thus performs a function, which 
 is more commonly discharged by the Infinitive. HA. 980- 
 984; (7.1578-1593. 
 
 457. The Substantive Participle as Subject. The 
 
 Substantive Participle may be used as an integral part of 
 the subject of a verb, the action which it denotes being 
 itself an essential part of that of which the predicate is 
 affirmed. 
 
 Matt. 6 : 16 ; ottws <f>a.v!!>(nv tois avOpdiyiroK vrjcrTevovTCi, that they may 
 
 be seen of men to fast. (Not only they, but their fasting, is to be seen.) 
 Acts 5 : 42 ; ovk iiravovro SiSao-KOvres kcu evayyeXtJo/i.ci'Ot Tov -xpKTTov 
 
 'lrj<Tovv, they ceased not teaching and preaching Jesus as the Christ. 
 
 See also Matt. 1:18, exoucra; Mark 6:2, ytvo/iti/ai ; Luke 5:4, 
 
 XaAuv. 
 
176 THE MOODS. 
 
 458. The Substantive Participle as Object. The Sub- 
 stantive Participle may be used as an integral part of the 
 object of a transitive verb. This occurs especially after 
 verbs of perception, the action denoted by the participle 
 being itself that which one perceives. 
 
 Luke 8 : 46 ; iya> yap iyvtov 8vvafx.iv i^eXrfXvOvtav aw e/iov, for I per- 
 ceived power to have gone out of me. 
 
 John 7 : 32 ; rJKOva-av ot ^apuraloi tov ox^ov yoyyv^ovTOi, the Pharisees 
 heard the multitude murmuring. 
 
 459. With verbs of finishing, ceasing, etc., the Substantive 
 Participle agrees grammatically with the subject of the verb. 
 Since, ho-wever, certain of these verbs are transitive, the 
 action denoted by the participle must in these cases be re- 
 garded as logically the object of the verb. 
 
 Matt. 11 : 1 ; ore eTeXccev 6 'Iijcrovs StaTao-troii/ tois SmSexa /juidrjTaK 
 avTov, when Jesus had finished commanding his twelve disciples. Cf. 
 Matt. 13 : 53 ; see also Luke 7 : 45. 
 
 460. The Substantive Pakticiple in Indirect Discourse. 
 A Substantive Participle forming a part of the object of a verb 
 is ■sometimes equivalent to a clause of indirect discourse. 
 
 1 John 4:2; irSv wviv/ia o o/ioXoytt IrjiroSv Xpto-Toi' cV (rapKi tXij- 
 XvOoTa €K TOV fleoB i<TTiv, every spirit which confesseth that Jesus 
 Christ has come in the flesh is of . God. See also Luke 4 : 23 ; 
 Acts 7 : 12 ; 8 : 23 ; 3 John 4. 
 
 461. The Substantive Participle as a Iiimiting G-en- 
 itive. The Substantive Participle may be used as an 
 integral part of a genitive limiting phrase. 
 
 John 4 ; 39 ; iroWot trntTTevcrav eis auTov tw Sa/iapetTuiv 8ta tov Xoyov 
 T^s yvvaxKoi papTvpovcnq'Si many of the Samaritans believed on him 
 because of the word of the woman testifying, i.e. of the woman's testi- 
 mony. See also Heb. 8:9; and cf. Jos. Ant. 10. 4. 2, where a Sub- 
 stantive Participle occurs after a preposition. 
 
THE SUBSTANTIVE PARTICIPLE. 177 
 
 462. The Substantive Participle, like the Adverbial Parti- 
 ciple, always stands in the so-called predicative position. Cf. 
 455, and 427. 
 
 463. The Substantive Participle must be carefully distin- 
 guished from the Adjective Participle used substantively. 
 The latter designates the doer of an action, the former the 
 action itself. "In the one it is the adjective force of the word 
 which is substantivized, in the other, the verbal force." See 
 Stevens, u.s., 419, Earn. 1. 
 
THE USE OF NEGATIVES WITH VERBS. 
 
 464. In the use of the simple negatives oi and /ii; and 
 their compounds, oiSt, ouSet's, ovre, ovKeri, jlhjSc, ii.-qhf.vi, f"?T£, 
 fjiTjKeTi, etc., as also of the double negatives oi /A17 and /n^ oi. 
 New Testament Greek conforms in the main to classical 
 usage, yet exhibits several important variations. The fol- 
 lowing sections exhibit the essential features of New Testar 
 ment usage in comparison with that of classical writers; 
 rarer and more delicate classical usages which have no 
 analogies in New Testament usage are not mentioned ; state- 
 ments which are not restricted to classical or New Testament 
 usage are to be understood as referring to both. What is 
 said respecting the simple negatives oi and /x^ applies in 
 general also to their respective compounds when standing 
 alone. 
 
 NEGATIVES WITH THE INDIOATIVE. 
 
 465. The Indicative in an independent declaratory sentence 
 regularly takes oi as its negative. HA. 1020 ; G. 1608. 
 
 John 1 : 11 ; cis to. iSia rjXOev, koI 01 iStot avrbv ov vapeXa/SoVf he 
 came unto his own, and they that were his own received him not: 
 
 Eem. On the use of negatives in later Greek, see Cfild., Encroach- 
 ments of /Hi} on oi in later Greek, in A.J. P. I. pp. 45 ff. ' 
 
 178 
 
NEGATIVES WITH THE INDICATIVE. 179 
 
 466. Ill classical Greek, the Future Indicative used to ex- 
 press a prohibition sometimes has oi, sometimes firj. HA. 
 844; GMT. 69, 70. 
 
 In the New Testament a Prohibitory Future takes ou. 
 
 Matt. 6:5; kou, oTav ■7rpo(T£vxri(T0e, ovk itnadi (as ol vwOKpiTat, and 
 when ye pray, ye shall not be as the hypocrites. 
 
 467. In questions that can be answered affirmatively or 
 negatively, oi is used with the Indicative to imply that an 
 affirmative answer is expected; /aij to imply that a negative 
 answer is expected. HA. 1015 ; G. 1603. 
 
 Matt. 13 : 55 ; ou^ ovTOi ecmv 6 Tov t€ktovo'; vioi, is not this the car- 
 penter's son f 
 
 John 7:51; firj 6 vojuos -^/judv KpCva tov avOpumov iav p,r] dKowrrj 
 irpcoTov Trap' avTov, doth our law judge a man, except it first hear from 
 himself f 
 
 468. In Eom. ICf : 18, 19; 1 Cor. 9 : 4, 5 ; 11 : 22, p.yj oi is 
 used in rhetorical questions equivalent to affirmative state- 
 ments. Each negative has, however, its own proper force, 
 ov making the verb negative, and /x,^ implying that a negative 
 answer is expected to the question thus made negative. 
 
 469. In classical Greek, the Indicative in conditional and 
 conditional relative clauses is regularly negatived by firj. But 
 ov sometimes occurs in conditions of the first class. In this 
 case ov negatives the verb of the clause or other single element 
 rather than the supposition as such. HA. 1021 ; G. 1610, 1383. 
 
 In the New Testament, conditional clauses of the second 
 class (248) are regularly negatived by fjirj. In other conditional 
 clauses and in conditional relative clauses, the Indicative 
 usually takes ov as its negative, occasionally p.-^. In con- 
 cessive clauses the Indicative takes oi. 
 
180 THE USE OF NEGATIVES "WITH VBKBS. 
 
 John 9 : 33 ; £t /n^ rjv ovto^ Trapa 6cov, ovk r/Swaro irotav ov8ev, if this 
 man were not from God, he could do nothing. See also Matt. 24 : 22. 
 
 Kom. 8:9; d 8i Tis irvevfw. Xpicrrov ovk €X^h outos ovk tanv avTov, 
 but if any man hath not the Spirit of Christ, he is none of his. See 
 also Luke 14 : 26. 
 
 Matt. 10 : 38 ; koI os ov Xa/xPava tov o'ravpbv avrov Kal aKoXovOei 
 owLdui jjLOv, OVK i(TTiv jU.ov ofios, and he that does not take his cross 
 and follow after me, is not worthy of me. See also Luke 9 : 50 ; 
 14 : 33 ; of. 2 Pet. 1 : 9 ; 1 John 4 : 3. 
 
 Luke 18 : 4, 5 ; cl koI tov 6tbv ov <j>o/3(rviJ.ai ovBe. S.v6piimov ivrpeiroixai, 
 8ta ye to irape'j^eiv ynot kottov tyjv XW"" Ta.vTrjv eKSiKj;o-to avTi^v, 
 though I fear not God nor regard man, yet because this widow 
 troubleth me, I will avenge her. 
 
 2 Cor. 13 : 5 ; ^ ovk IviyivuMTKert kavTov<; on 'Ii;crovs Xptcrros iv 
 ifuv ; et p.'qn oBokl/jloC i<TT€, or know ye not as to your own selves that 
 Jesus Christ is in you? unless indeed ye are reprobate. See also 
 1 Tim. 6:3; Tit. 1 : 6. 
 
 Kem. In Matt. 26 : 24 ; Mark 14 : 21, oi occurs in the protasis of a 
 conditional sentence of the second class. 
 
 470. It is possihle that oi in conditional and conditional relative 
 sentences in the New Testament is usually to he explained as negativing 
 the predicate directly (cf. G. 1383. 2 ; Th. el, III. 11.), M on the other 
 hand as negativing the supposition as such. Yet the evidence does not 
 clearly establish this distinction ; to press it in every case is certainly 
 an over-refinement. Cf., e.g., 1 John 4: 3, wav iri/eC/to o /lij o/JuiXoyei Thv 
 *\7iaovv iK TOV deov oirK ^ffTiv, and 1 John 4 : 6, OS oifK ^(Ttlv ^k tov 6eov oiK 
 dfcoiiei Tifiwu. See also 1 Tim. 6 : 3 and Tit. 1 : 6, where /j.^ is used after el, yet 
 quite evidently belongs to the verb rather than to the supposition as such. 
 
 471. El p.rj in tlie sense of except is used as a fixed phrase, 
 without reference to the mood -which would follow it if the 
 ellipsis were supplied. Cf. 274. 
 
 Matt. 17 ; 8 ; orvSlva etSov ci p-rj avrbv 'IrjO'Ovv p,6vov, they saw no one 
 
 save Jesus only. 
 Mark 9:9; SiecrTetAaTO auVots 'va //.rj^Evl a eiSov SnjyqcrmvTai, el p.r] 
 
 oTav o v(os TOV AvOpiawov Ik v€Kpu>v ava(TTy, he charged them that 
 
 they should tell no man what things they had seen, save when the Son 
 
 of man should have arisen from the dead. 
 
SUBJUNCTIVE, OPTATIVE, AND IMPEKATIVE. 181 
 
 472. In clauses introduced by furj as a conjunction, the 
 Indicative takes ov as its negative. After other final particles 
 its negative is ju^. HA. 1021, 1033 ; Q. 1610. 
 
 Rev. 9:4; koI ippeOrj avrats tva fir] a^LK-^a-ovcnv tov \6pTov t^s y^s, 
 and it was said unto them that they should not hurt the grass of the 
 earth. The continuatiou of this sentence by ovSi . . . ovSc is a 
 syntactical irregularity. Col. 2 : 8 illustrates the rule. 
 
 473. In indirect discourse the negative of the direct form 
 is retained. HA. 1022 ; G. 1608. 
 
 Matt. 16 : 11 ; .ttcus ov voetre on ov irepl aproiv erirov v/uv, how is it 
 that ye do not perceive that I spake not to you concerning bread f 
 
 Eem. In 1 John 2 : 22 a clause of indirect discourse depending on a 
 verb meaning to deny contains a redundant oi. Cf. 482, and B. p. 355. 
 
 474. In causal clauses, and in simple relative clauses not 
 expressing purpose or condition, the Indicative is regularly- 
 negatived by oi. HA. 1021 ; G. 1608. 
 
 John 8 : 20 ; Koi owSets eTriWev avrov, on ouira ikriXijOa ij wpa avrov, 
 and no man took him ; because his hour was not yet come. 
 
 Mark 2 ; 24 ; I'St ti iroioCcrtv Tots (rdfi^ao'iv o ovk tieanv, behold, why 
 do they on the sabbath day that which is not lawful ? 
 
 Rem. 1. In John 3 : 18 a causal clause has an Indicative with /iij. This 
 is quite exceptional in the New Testament, but similar instances occur in 
 later Greek. B. p. 349, Gild. u.s. p. 53. 
 
 Eem. 2. Tit. 1 : 11, diBiffKovTes a /ii) Set is an exception to the general 
 rule for relative clauses, unless indeed the relative clause is to be taken 
 as conditional. Cf. 469. 
 
 NEGATIVES WITH THE SUBJUIfOTIVE, OPTATIVE, AND 
 IMPEEATIVE. 
 
 475. The nega,tiv3 of the Subjunctive both in principal and 
 in subordinate clauses is fi-q, except in clauses introduced by 
 
182 THE USE OP NEGATIVES WITH VERBS. 
 
 the conjunction /uf, lest. In these the negative is ov. Con- 
 cerning ov ixri with the Subjunctive see 487, 488. HA. 1019, 
 1033 ; G. 1610. 
 
 1 John 3 : 18 ; jjiij ayairSiixtv Xoyw, let «s not love in word. 
 
 Heb. 4:7; /joj crKX.7]pvvr]T€ rots KapStas v/xlov, harden not your hearts. 
 
 2 Cor. 12 : 20 ; <^o;8oC/u,at yap ixrj jrws iXOi^v ou^ oiovs fitXo) eup<o 
 
 Vjiias, yb)' / fear, lest by any means, when I come, I should find you 
 not such as I would. See also Acts 20 : 16; Rom. 10 : 15; 1 Cor. 
 2:5. 
 
 Rem. 1. In Matt. 25 : 9 a Subjunctive after the conjunction ^i} is 
 negatived by oi (^WH. margin), or, according to other mss., followed by 
 WH. (text) by the strong negative oi /ti). 
 
 Rem. 2. In Rom. 5 : 9 oi) liSvov limits a verb understood which is 
 probably to be taken as a Subjunctive. Cf. 479, 481. 
 
 476. In classical Greek, oi is used with the Potential 
 Optative ; fi-q with the Optative of Wishing. In the New 
 Testament, no instance of a negatived Potential Optative* 
 occurs. With the Optative of Wishing /jltj is used as in 
 classical Greek. HA. 1020 ; G. 1608. 
 
 Gal. 6 : 14 ; i/xol Se p-r) yivoiro Kavxaffdax, tut far he it from me to glory. 
 See also Mark 11 : 14 ; Rom. 3 : 4, 6, 31, etc. 
 
 477. In classical Greek, the Optative in subordinate clauses 
 takes jxri as its negative except in indirect discourse and after 
 ^^', lest. HA. 1021, 1022 ; G. 1610. 
 
 In the New Testament, no instance of a negatived Optative 
 in a subordinate clause occurs. 
 
 478. The negative of the Imperative is /i^. HA. 1019; 
 G. 1610. 
 
 This rule holds in the New Testament with very rare 
 exceptions. 
 
 Luke 12 : 11 ; foj iJ.e.piiJ.vrj(TriTi ttSs {tj tC] avoXoyija-rja-de, be not anxious 
 how or what ye shall answer. See also under 165. 
 
INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE.' 183 
 
 479. Of the apparent exceptions to the rule stated above (478), some 
 are to he explained as parenthetic non-imperative phrases in the midst of 
 imperative sentences. So, clearly, in 1 Cor. 5:10, [I meant} not Itliat 
 you should have no company] at all, with the fornicators of this xiiorld, etc. 
 So also 2 Tim. 2 : 14, that they strive not about words, [a thing which is} 
 profitable for nothing. The use of o6x rather than /xi) in 1 Pet. 3 : 3 seems 
 to indicate that the foUovfing words, 6 . . . Kdff/Ms, are excluded from the 
 injunction rather than included in a prohibition. In 1 Pet. 2 : 18 oi /limv 
 occurs, perhaps as a fixed phrase, after a participle with Imperative of the 
 verb ehaL understood. On the other hand, it is noticeable that elsewhere 
 limitations of the Imperative when negatived regularly take juij. Thus /ii] 
 liivov occurs in John 13 : 9 ; Phil. 2:12; Jas. 1 : 22. Cf. 481. 
 
 NEGATIVES WITH THE INFINITIVE AND PAETICIPLE. 
 
 480. In classical Greek, the Infinitive usually takes ov as 
 its negative in indirect discourse ; elsev^here /u.^. HA. 1023, 
 1024; G. 1611; but see also Oild. u.s. (465, Kern.) pp. 48 ff. 
 on the use of /*?; with the Infinitive in indirect discourse. 
 
 In the New Testament, the Infinitive regularly takes /aij 
 as its negative in all constructions. 
 
 Matt. 22 : 23 ; k€yovT€<; /i^ dvai avda-Tacriv, saying that there is no 
 
 resurrection. 
 Luke 11 : 42 ; ravra Si cSei iroi^crat KaKtiva /ir] irapelvat, but these ought 
 
 ye to have done, and not to leave the other undone. 
 
 481. When a limitation of an Infinitive or of its subject 
 is to be negatived rather than the Infinitive itself, the negative 
 ov is sometimes used instead of ix-q. See Eom. 7 : 6 ; 1 Cor. 
 1 : 17 ; Heb. 7 : 11 ; 13 : 9. This principle applies especially 
 in the case of the adverb it.6vov. In the New Testament at 
 least, ov fiovov rather than iJi.rj /xwoi/ occurs regularly with the 
 Infinitive, and this both when the phrase as a whole belongs 
 to the Infinitive itself, and when it applies rather to some 
 limitation of the Infinitive. See John 11 : 62 ; Acts 21 : 13 ; 
 26 : 29 ; 27 : 10 ; Eom. 4 : 12, 16 ; 13 : 5 ; 2 Cor. 8 : 10 ; Phil. 
 
184 THK USE OF NEGATIVES WITH VEKBS. 
 
 1 : 29 ; 1 Thess. 2 : 8. M^ iJi,6vov is found with the Infinitive 
 only in Gal. 4 : 18. It is perhaps as a fixed phrase, unaffected 
 by the Infinitive, that «« ovOev limits XoyLo-Orjvat, in Acts 19 : 27. 
 
 482. A compound of oi may occur with an Infinitive depend- 
 ent on a principal verb limited by oi, in accordance with the 
 principle of 488. 
 
 John 5 : 30 ; ov Svvafjuai iyia woiciv aTr' ijiavTov ovSev, / can of myself 
 do nothing. See also Mark 7 : 12 ; Luke 20 : 40 ; John 3 : 27, etc. 
 Probably Acts 26.: 26 should be translated, / am not persuaded (i.e. 
 / cannot believe) that any of these things was hidden from him. B. p. 
 350. 
 
 483. The Infinitive after verbs of hindering, denying, etc., 
 may take /ai; without change of meaning. Such a negative 
 cannot be translated into English. HA. ip29 ; G. 1615. 
 
 Acts 14 : 18 ; kcu ravra A.e'yovT£S fioKis KaTeirava-av Toiis ox^-ovs Tov 
 /joj dvuv avTOK, and with these sayings scarce restrained they the 
 multitudes from doing sacrifice unto them. See also under 402. 
 
 484. In classical G-reek, an Infinitive which would regularly 
 take /Aiy, usually takes ii.rj oi when it depends on a verb which 
 is itself negatived by oi. HA. 1034; G. 1616. 
 
 In the New Testament, the simple negative fjirj is retained 
 in such a case. 
 
 Acts 4 : 20 ; ov ^vvd/xeOa yap ij/ieis a eiSa/iei/ Kal ^Kovcra/Jiev /j,r] XaAetv, 
 
 for we cannot but speak the things which we saw and heard. 
 
 485. In classical Greek, the participle takes /ai; if it is 
 equivalent to a conditional, or conditional relative clause; 
 otherwise it takes ou. HA. 1025; G. 1612; Gild. u.s. (465, 
 Rem.) pp. 55 ff. 
 
 In the New Testament, participles in all relations usually 
 take /*?; as the negative, but occasionally take oi. The latter 
 
SUCCESSIVE AND DOUBLE NEGATIVES. 185 
 
 is found not only -when the reference is to a matter of fact, 
 but even when the participle is conditional in force. 
 
 Acts 13 : 28 ; koI fj,rjSeij,tav alriav Oavdrov eipWTcs rJT-qaavTo Jl(.iXa.rov 
 dvaipcd^vai avTov, and though they found no cause of death in him, 
 yet asked they of Pilate that he should be slain. 
 
 Luke 12 : 33 ; wotj^craTe iavroli PaXXdvna firi ■jraXaiov/jLtva, make for 
 yourself purses which wax not old. 
 
 John 5 : 23 ; o /M) Tt/iGv tov vlbv ov Tijm tov Trarepa, he that honoreth 
 not the Son honoreth, not the Father. 
 
 Matt. 22 : 11 1 eiScc iKci avOpunrov ovk ivScSvfievov evSvfux ydfwv, he 
 saw there a man which had not on a wedding-garment. 
 
 Acts 17 : 6 ; fxij eipovTK 8c auVovis t<Tvpov 'Jda-ova kcu rtvas dScXi^ous em 
 Tovs iroXirdpXo-s, and not finding them they dragged Jason and certain 
 brethren before the rulers of the city. See also Matt. 22 : 29 ; Luke 
 6 : 42 ; 9 : 33 ; John 10 : 12 ; Acts 7:5; 13 : 28 ; 26 : 22 ; Gal. 4 : 8. 
 
 SUOOESSIVE AND DOUBLE NEGATIVES. 
 
 486. When two simple negatives not constituting a double 
 negative, or a compound negative followed by a simple nega- 
 tive, occur in the same clause, each has its own independent 
 force. The same is also true of course when the negatives 
 occur in successive clauses. HA. 1031; Q. 1618. 
 
 1 Cor. 12 :15 ; ov irapa. toIto ovk icTTW Ik tov crw/uaTos, it is not 
 therefore not of the body. See also 1 John 3 : 10 ; 5 : 12. 
 
 Matt. 10 : 26 ; ouSev ydp lariv KeKaXvp,iJ,ivov 6 ovk airoKoXvcjiOi^a'iTai, 
 for there is nothing covered, that shall not be revealedi See also 
 1 John 2 : 21. 
 
 Rem. Concerning /*■); oi in questions, see 468. 
 
 487. The double negative ov p.ri is used with the Subjunc- 
 tive, and more rarely with the Future Indicative, in emphatic 
 negative assertions referring to the future. Cf. 172, 66. HA. 
 1032 ; G. 1360, 1361. 
 
186 THE USE OP NEGATIVES "WITH VEEBS. 
 
 Mark 13 : 2 : ov /j-tj a.<i>t6rj coSe XiBoi eti \l$ov os ov fxr) KwraXvOyj , 
 there shall not he left here one stone upon another, which shall not be 
 thrown down. 
 
 Kev. 2 : 11 ; o wkw ov fiiq aBiKrjdrj Ik tov Oava/rov rot) ScvTepcni, he 
 that overcometh shall not be hurt of the second death. 
 
 Kev. 7 : 16 ; ov Treivdaovcriv en ovSi Suj/rj(Tov<nv en, ouSe ju,^ ttecttj iir 
 auToiis 6 qXt,oi, they shall hunger no more, neither thirst any more, 
 neither shall the sun strike upon them at all. On Matt. 25 : 9 see 
 475, Rem. 1. 
 
 488. Ov ii,ri is occasionally used with the Subjunctive or 
 Future Indicative expressing a prohibition. Cf. 167, 67, 
 Eem. 2. 
 
 489. When a negative is followed by one or more similar 
 compound negatives or by the double negative ov /jtrj the effect 
 is a strengthened negation. HA. 1030 ; Q. 1619. 
 
 Luke 23 : 53 ; oiJ ovk rjv ouSeis ovirw KCi/jievos, where never man had yet 
 
 lain. 
 Heb. 13 : 5 ; ov furj ere avSt ovh' ov ixri ere iyKaTakiTro}, I will in no wise 
 
 fail thee, neither will I in any wise forsake thee. 
 Rom. 18t 8 ; jitT/Sen ixajSiv 6<f)€t\iTe, owe no man anything. 
 
INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 
 
 {The Numbers refer to Sections.'] 
 
 Adjective Participle, 420-433, see 
 under Participle. 
 
 Adjectives of ability, fitness, readi- 
 ness, etc., followed by clause with 
 tva, 216 ; followed by Infinitive, 
 376 ; followed by eis with the ar- 
 ticular Infinitive, 413. 
 
 Adverbial Participle, 434-455, see 
 under Participle. 
 
 Adverbs, limited by Infinitive, 376. 
 
 Aoristic Present, 13 ; Aoristic Fut- 
 ure, 59, 62 ; Aoristic Perfect, 80. 
 
 Aorist : constant characteristic, 35 ; 
 ■ Indefinite, Inceptive, Resultative, 
 35, 37. 
 
 Indicative : Historical, 38 ; mo- 
 mentary, comprehensive, collec- 
 tive, 39, 40, 54 ; Inceptive, 41 ; 
 Eesultative, 42, 87 ; Gnomic, 43 ; 
 Epistolary, 44 ; Dramatic, 45 ; for 
 English Perfect, 46, 52, 54 ; with 
 force of Greek Perfect, 47; for 
 English Pluperfect, 48, 52-54 ; in 
 indirect discourse, 49 ; used pro- 
 leptically, 50 ; in condition con- 
 trary to fact, 248 ; in apodosis of 
 such condition, 248, 249 ; with &v 
 in past general supposition, 26, 
 315 ; expressing an unattained 
 wish, 27 ; English equivalents, 52, 
 53 ; distinction between Aorist 
 and Imperfect, 56, 67 ; between 
 Aorist and Perfect, 86, 87. 
 
 Dependent Moods, 98 ; Sub- 
 junctive in prohibitions, 162-164, 
 
 166, 167 ; Optative in indirect dis- 
 course, 110, 111 ; Imperative in 
 commands and prohibitions, 163, 
 184 ; Infinitive after prepositions, 
 104-109 ; Infinitive after verbs 
 signifying to hope, etc., 113 ; In- 
 finitive in indirect discourse, 110, 
 114. 
 
 Participle: properly expresses 
 not time but action conceived of 
 as a simple event, 132, 133 ; used 
 of antecedent action, 134-138 ; of 
 identical action, 189-141 ; of sub- 
 sequent action, 142-145 ; as inte- 
 gral part of the object of a verb 
 pf perception, 146 ; with Xavedvu, 
 147 ; leaving time-relation unde- 
 fined, 148 ; denoting action in 
 general simultaneous with that 
 of principal verb, 149 ; with the 
 article, equivalent to relative 
 clause with verb in Indicative or 
 Subjunctive, 135, 144, 150, 151. 
 Apodosis : defined, 238 ; force and 
 form of, after simple present and 
 past particular suppositions, 242, 
 243 ; after supposition contrary to 
 fact, 248, 249 ; after future sup- 
 position more probable, 250, 263 ; 
 after (implied) future supposition 
 with less probability, 259 ; after 
 present general supposition, 260, 
 263 ; after past general supposi- 
 tion, 265 ; may have two protases, 
 268 ; may be omitted, 271 ; its 
 
 187 
 
188 
 
 INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 
 
 verb may be omitted, 273 ; im- 
 plied in the protasis, 276 ; after 
 concessive protasis, 278. 
 
 Article with the participle, position 
 of, 427. 
 
 Attendant circumstance expressed 
 by participle, 449, 119, 145. 
 
 Attributive Participle, 421-428, see 
 under Participle ; cf. 419, Rem. 1. 
 
 Causal clauses, 228-232 ; other 
 methods of expressing causal re- 
 lations, 233 ; negatives in/ 474. 
 
 Circumstantial Participle, see 419, 
 Rem. 1. 
 
 Commands: expressed by Future 
 Indicative, 67 ; by Subjunctive, 
 162-164, 166, 167 ; by Imperative, 
 180 ; by Infinitive, 364 ; negatived 
 by /xi), 478 ; apparently negatived 
 by oi, 479; negatived by oi fii/j, 
 488 ; indirectly quoted, 204. 
 
 Complete and completed, sense of 
 as grammatical terms, 85. 
 
 Conative tenses : Present Indicative, 
 11 ; Imperfect Indicative, 23 ; 
 Present Participle, 129. 
 
 Concessive clauses, 278-288 : general 
 definition, 278 ; particles intro- 
 ducing, 279-282 ; use of moods 
 and tenses, 283 ; various classes, 
 284-287 ; English translation, 288 
 participle equivalent to, 437. 
 
 Conditional sentences, 238-277 
 definition, 238 ; express particular 
 or general supposition, 239, 240 
 classification, 241 ; six classes, 
 242-265 ; peculiarities of, 266-277 
 negatives in conditional clauses, 
 469, 475. See also Conditional 
 Relative sentences, under Relative 
 clauses. 
 Consecutive clauses, 234-236 ; see 
 
 also Result. 
 Definite Relative clauses, see under 
 Relative clauses. 
 
 Deliberative Future, 70. 
 Deliberative Subjunctive, 168 ; in 
 
 relative clauses, 319. 
 Dependent moods, enumerated, 3 ; 
 term not strictly applicable, 3, 
 Rem. 
 Direct Quotations, 334, 335 ; intro- 
 duced by Sti, 345 ; frequent in 
 Nevr Testament, 345. 
 Dramatic Aorist, 45. 
 English Equivalents of Greek Aorist 
 
 Indicative, 52, 53. 
 English tenses, three-fold function, 
 
 '354. 
 Epistolary Aorjst, 44. 
 Exhortations, expressed by the Sub- 
 junctive, 160-162 ; by the Impera- 
 tive, 180. 
 Exegetical grammar, scope and re- 
 lation to historical grammar, 2. 
 Explanatory relative clauses, 295. 
 Final clauses (pure), 197-199. For 
 relative clauses of purpose, see 
 Relative clauses. 
 Final Particles, 190 ; clauses intro- 
 duced by, 188 ; general usage of 
 such clauses, 189 ; usage of several 
 particles in detail, 191-195. 
 Form and function distinguished, 1. 
 Future : 
 
 Indicative : Predictive, 58-66 ; 
 Aoristic, 59 ; Progressive, 60 ; 
 value and significance of these 
 distinctions, 61-64 ; assertive and 
 promissory force, 65 ; with oi jkt), 
 66 ; Imperative Future, 67 ; in 
 third person, 68 ; Gnomic, 69 ; 
 Deliberative, 70 ; periphrastic 
 forms, 71, 72 ; in final clauses and 
 clauses introduced by final par- 
 ticles, 198, 199, 205, 211, 215, 
 218, 224, Rem. 2 ; in conditional 
 clauses, 246, 254, 255 ; with el by 
 Hebraism -with the force of an 
 oath, 272 ; with el expressing an 
 
INDEX OP SUBJECTS. 
 
 189 
 
 object of desire, 276 ; in con- 
 cessive clauses referring to the 
 future, 285 (o) ; in conditional 
 relative clauses, 308 ; in rela- 
 tive clauses of pui-pose, 317 ; in 
 complementary relative clauses, 
 318; in relative clauses intro- 
 duced by 4xP'> 332 ; negatives 
 with Future Indicative, 465, 466. 
 Dependent moods, 99 ; peri- 
 phrastic form made from /iiWeiv, 
 100. 
 
 Participle : represents action 
 relatively future, 152 ; of later 
 origin than other participles, 152, 
 Rem. ; periphrastic form made 
 from fjL^Wuv and Infinitive, 153. 
 
 Future Perfect Indicative, in New 
 Testament only in periphrastic 
 form, 98, 94. 
 
 General and particular suppositions : 
 expressed, 239, 240 ; implied in 
 relative clause, 298, 299. 
 
 General Present : Indicative, 12 
 Participle, 123-126. 
 
 Genitive absolute, 452-454. 
 
 Gnomic tenses : Present, 12 ; Aorist, 
 43 ; Future, 69 ; Perfect, 79. 
 
 Grammar, relation of, to interpreta- 
 tion, 2. 
 
 Hebraisms in the New Testament: 
 El with Future Indicative with 
 force of an emphatic assertion, 
 272 ; clause or Infinitive as sub- 
 ject of iyivero, 357 ; Infinitive 
 defining content of action of a 
 previous verb or noun, 375 ; in- 
 tensive participle, 448. 
 
 Historical grammar, relation to 
 exegetical grammar, 2. 
 
 Historical Present, 14 ; Historical 
 Aorist, 38 ; Historical Perfect, 
 78. 
 
 Hortatory Subjunctive, 160, 16J ; 
 introduced by oio-tc, 237. 
 
 Imperative : in commands and ex- 
 hortations, 180 ; in entreaties and 
 petitions, 181 ; expressing con- 
 sent or hypothesis, 182, 183 ; force 
 of tenses, 184, 163, 165; intro- 
 duced by uffre, 237 ; negative of, 
 478, 479. 
 
 Imperative Future, 67. 
 
 Imperfect Indicative : Progressive, 
 21, 22 ; Conative, 23 ; of repeated 
 action, 24; expressing an unat- 
 tained wish, 27 ; translated by 
 English Perfect, 28 ; translated by 
 English Pluperfect, 29; Imper- 
 fect of verbs of obligation, etc., 
 30-32 ; of verbs of wishing, 33 ; 
 in condition contrary to fact, 248 ; 
 in apodosis of such condition, 248, 
 249 ; with &i> in conditional rela- 
 tive clauses, past general suppo- 
 sition, 315 ; in indirect discourse 
 for Present Indicative, 348 ; peri- 
 phrastic form, 34 ; distinction 
 between Imperfect and Aorist, 56, 
 57. 
 
 Inceptive Aorist, 35, 37 ; Indicative, 
 41 ; dependent moods, 98 ; parti- 
 ciple, 137. 
 
 Indefinite Aorist, 35, 98. 
 
 Indicative : 
 
 In principal clauses: in un- 
 qualified assertions, etc. , 157 ; in 
 qualified assertions, 158, 159. 
 
 In subordinate clauses : in final 
 clauses and clauses introduced by 
 final particles, 198, 199, 205, 211, 
 215, 224, Rem. 2, 227 ; in clauses 
 of cause, 229, 230 ; in clauses of 
 result, 235, 236 ; in conditional 
 clauses, 242, 248, 254-256, 261 ; in 
 concessive clauses, 284, 285 (a) ; 
 in definite relative clauses, 293, 
 294 ; in conditional relative 
 clauses, 301, 308, 309, 313 ; with 
 &v, 315 ; in relative clauses of pur- 
 
190 
 
 INDEX OF SXTBJECTS. 
 
 pose, 317-319 ; in relative clauses 
 introduced by Iws, etc., 326-332 ; 
 as logical subject of iyivero, 357- 
 360. 
 
 Negatives with Indicative, 465- 
 474. 
 
 Indirect Discourse, 334-356 ; defini- 
 tion, 334, 337 ; various metliods 
 of expressing, 339, 340; classical 
 usage, 341, 342, 347-350; New 
 Testament usage, 343-350 ; Eng- 
 lish usage compared with Greek, 
 351-356 ; Infinitive in, 390 ; par- 
 ticiple in, 460 ; conditional clauses 
 in,258; conditional relative clauses 
 in, 305 ; negatives in, 473. 
 
 Indirect object, expressed by clause 
 introduced by Ua, 217 ; by In- 
 finitive, 368 ; by articular Infini- 
 tive after cis, 410. 
 
 Indirect Questions, how introduced 
 in Greek, 340 ; after exu, etc. , 
 346 ; introduced by Ham, 349 ; 
 by simple relatives, 350. 
 
 Infinitive : origin and stages of de- 
 velopment, 361 ; classification of 
 uses, 362, 363 ; negatives used 
 with it, 480-484. 
 
 Constructions without the arti- 
 cle : with imperative force, 364, 
 365 ; expressing purpose, 366, 
 367 ; as indirect object, 368 ; ex- 
 pressing result, 369-372 ; defining 
 content of action of a previous 
 verb or noun, 375 ; limiting ad- 
 jectives and adverbs, 376, 377 ; 
 limiting nouns, 378, 379 ; after 
 irplv or irplv ri, 380-382 ; used ab- 
 solutely, 383; as subject, 384, 
 385, 390, 357, 360 ; as appositive, 
 386 ; as object, 387-391, 202, 210 ; 
 in indirect discourse, 390 ; force of 
 the tenses in indirect discourse, 
 110,112-114; without article after 
 prepositions, 174. 
 
 Constructions with the article : 
 general effect of prefixing the 
 article, 392 ; as subject, 393 ; as 
 object, 394 ; in apposition, 395 
 with Tif expressing cause, 396 
 with ToO expressing purpose, 397 
 with Tov expressing result, 398 
 with TOV after adjectives, 399 
 with TOV after nouns, 400 ; with 
 ToO after verbs that take the geni- 
 tive, 401-403 ; with toO as subject 
 or object, 404, 405 ; governed by 
 prepositions, 406 ; various prepo- 
 sitions used with it and their 
 force, 407-416 ; force of tense, 
 104-109. 
 
 Intensive Perfect : Indicative, 77 ; 
 dependent moods, 102. 
 
 Interpretation, relation of, to gram- 
 mar, 2. 
 
 Latin tenses, two-fold function, 354. 
 
 Moods : enumeration of, 3 ; in prin- 
 cipal clauses, 157-184 ; finite 
 moods in subordinate clauses, see 
 Indicative, Subjunctive, etc., or 
 Contents, §§ 185-360. 
 
 Negatives, 464-489 : classical and 
 New Testament use in general, 
 464 ; with the Indicative, 465- 
 474 ; with the Subjunctive, 475 ; 
 .with the Optative ; 476, 477 ; with 
 the Imperative, 478, 479 ; with 
 the Infinitive, 480-484; with 
 participles, 485 ; successive and 
 double negatives, 486-489, 468 ; 
 compound negatives, 464, 486, 
 489. 
 
 Object clauses : classification, 186 ; 
 after verbs of exhorting, 200-204 ; 
 after verbs of striving, etc., 205- 
 210 ; after verbs of fear and 
 clanger, 224-227 ; in indirect dis- 
 course, 334, 339-350. 
 
 Optative, infrequent in New Testa- 
 ment, 174. 
 
INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 
 
 191 
 
 In principal clauses : of wishing, 
 175-177 ; Potential, 178, 179. 
 
 In subordinate clauses : in ob- 
 ject clauses after verb of exhort- 
 ing, 200, Rem.; in conditional 
 clauses, future supposition more 
 probable, in indirect discourse, 
 258 ; in conditional clauses, future 
 supposition less probable, 259 ; 
 with el expressing an object of 
 desire, 276. 
 
 Negatives with Optative, 476, 
 477. 
 Participle : general nature, 115, 418 ; 
 grammatical agreement, 116. 
 
 Tenses : general significance, 
 118 ; use of each tense in detail, 
 see Present, Aorist, Future, Per- 
 fect, or Contents, §§ 119-156. 
 
 Classification respecting logical 
 force, 419. 
 
 Adjective Participle: defined, 
 420; restrictive attributive parti- 
 ciple, 422 ; with subject omitted, 
 423, 433 ; with the article after 
 noun without the article, 424 ; 
 neuter participle for abstract 
 noun, 425 ; explanatory attribu- 
 tive participle, 426 ; attributive 
 participle conveying subsidiary 
 idea of cause, etc., 428 ; predicate 
 adjective participle, 429 ; its posi- 
 tion, 430 ; forming periphrastic 
 verbs, 431 ; possible explanations 
 of participle in the predicate, 432. 
 
 Adverbial Participle : defined, 
 434 ; temporal, 435 ; conditional, 
 436 ; concessive, 437, 438 ; causal, 
 439 ; causal with w's, 440, 441 ; of 
 purpose, 442 ; of means, 443 ; 
 of manner, 444 ; manner ex- 
 pressed by ols with participle, 445, 
 446 ; participle of manner or 
 means denoting same action as 
 that of the verb, 447 ; Hebraistic 
 
 use of the participle with intensive 
 force, 448 ; participle of attendant 
 circumstance, 449,450; more than 
 one relation expressed by one 
 participle, 451 ; genitive absolute, 
 452-454 ; position of adverbial 
 participle, 455. 
 
 Substantive Participle : defined, 
 456 ; as subject, 457 ; as object, 
 458-460 ; in indirect discourse, 
 460 ; as a limiting genitive, 461 ; 
 its position, 462 ; distinction from 
 adjective participle used substan- 
 tively, 463. 
 
 Negatives with participle, 485. 
 Particular and general conditions: 
 expressed, 239, 240 ; implied in 
 relative clause, 298, 299. 
 Perfect : 
 
 Indicative: of completed action, 
 74, 76, 85 ; of existing state, 75, 
 76 ; Intensive, 77 ; Historical, 78; 
 Gnomic, 79 ; Aoristic, 80, 88 ; in 
 indirect discourse, 81 ; of a past 
 event thought of as separated 
 from the moment of speaking 
 (incapable of adequate English 
 translation), 82 ; used prolepti- 
 cally, 50 ; periphrastic form, 84 ; 
 distinction between Perfect and 
 Aorist, 86, 87. 
 
 Dependent moods : denoting 
 completed action, or existing re- 
 sult, 101 ; Intensive, 102 ; peri- 
 phrastic form, 103 ; Infinitive 
 after prepositions, 104, 105, 107, 
 108 ; Optative not found in New 
 Testament, 111 ; Infinitive in in- 
 direct discourse, 110, 112. 
 
 Participle : of completed action 
 or existing state, 154 ; periphrastic 
 form, 155 ; for a Pluperfect, 156. 
 Periphrastic forms : in general, 20, 
 431 ; Present Indicative, 20 ; Im- 
 perfect, 34; Future Indicative, 71, 
 
192 
 
 INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 
 
 72 ; Perfect Indicative, 84 ; Plu- 
 perfect, 91 ; Future Perfect, 94 ; 
 Present Infinitive and Imperative, 
 97 ; Perfect Subjunctive and Im- 
 perative, 103 ; Future Participle, 
 153 ; Perfect Participle, 155. 
 
 Pluperfect Indicative : of completed 
 action, 89 ; of existing state, 90, 
 92 ; periphrastic form, 91 ; in in- 
 direct discourse for Perfect, 348. 
 
 Potential Optative: force of, 178, 
 179 ; negatives vrith, 476. 
 
 Predicative Participle, 429-432, see 
 under Participle. 
 
 Predictive Future, 58. 
 
 Present : 
 
 Indicative : most constant char- 
 acteristic of, 9 ; Progressive, 8, 
 10, 11 ; Conative, 11 ; General or 
 Gnomic, 12 ; Aoristic, 13 ; His- 
 torical, 14 ; used for Future, 15 ; 
 iJKU), Trdpei/u, etc., 10 ; of past 
 action still in progress, 17 ; in in- 
 direct discourse, 19 ; periphrastic 
 forms, 20 ; in pure final clauses, 
 198 ; in an appositive clause, 213, 
 Eem. ; in conditional clauses, pres- 
 ent particular supposition, 242, 
 future supposition, 256, present 
 general supposition, 261 ; in con- 
 cessive clauses, 284 ; in condi- 
 tional relative clauses, present 
 particular supposition, 301, future 
 supposition, 309, present general 
 supposition, 313 ; after fws and 
 referring to the future, 326 ; after 
 tws and referring to the present, 
 328. 
 
 Dependent moods, 96 ; peri- 
 phrastic form, 97 ; Infinitive after 
 prepositions, 104, 106-109 ; Opta- 
 tive and Infinitive in indirect dis- 
 course, 110-112. 
 
 Participle : of simultaneous 
 action, 119 ; of identical action. 
 
 120-122; General, 12-3-126; for 
 the Imperfect, 127 ; Conative, 129 ; 
 for the Future, 130 ; of action 
 still in progress, 131. 
 
 Primary and Secondary tenses, 4. 
 
 Progressive tenses : 
 
 Indicative : Present, 8-11 ; Im- 
 perfect, 21-23 ; Future, 60. 
 Dependent moods : Present, 96. 
 Participle : Present, 119-122, 
 127-131. 
 
 Prohibitions, expressed by Aorist 
 Subjunctive or Present (rarely 
 Aorist) Imperative, 163 ; by Aorist 
 Subjunctive, 162-164, 166, 167; 
 by Present Imperative, 165, 184. 
 
 Prohibitory Future Indicative, 67, 
 Rem. 2. 
 
 Prohibitory Subjunctive, 162-164, 
 166, 167 ; used only in Aorist, 
 163 ; force of tense, 164. 
 
 Promissory Future, 65. 
 
 Protasis : defined, 238 ; force and 
 form of, in simple present and 
 past particular supposition, 242- 
 247 ; in supposition contrary to 
 fact, 248 ; in future supposition 
 more probable, 250-258, 263; in fu- 
 ture supposition less probable, 259 ; 
 in present general supposition, 
 260-262, 264 ; in past general sup- 
 position, 265 ; joined to an 
 apodosis of a different form, 267 ; 
 two protases with one apodosis, 
 268 ; substitutes for, 269 ; omitted, 
 270 ; equivalent to an oath, 272 ; 
 its verb omitted, 273 ; containing 
 an apodosis, 276 ; after expressions 
 of wonder has the force of 6ti 
 clause, 277; concessive protases, 
 278 ; participle equivalent to pro- 
 tasis, 436, 437. 
 
 Purpose, expressed by clause intro- 
 duced by iva, 197-199 ; by rela- 
 tive clause, 317 ; by Infinitive 
 
INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 
 
 193 
 
 without the article, 366 ; by In- 
 finitive with (Jfo-re, 370((i), 371((i) ; 
 by Infinitive with <Js, 372 ; by In- 
 finitive with ToC, 397 ; by articular 
 Infinitive after els, 409 ; after vpis, 
 414. 
 
 Questions : various classes of, 169 ; 
 negatives with, 467, 468. See 
 also Indirect Questions. 
 
 Relative clauses : classification, 289- 
 291 ; distinction between definite 
 and indefinite relative clauses, 
 289, 290. 
 
 Definite Relative clauses : in- 
 troduced by relative pronouns and 
 adverbs, 292 ; use of moods and 
 tenses, 293 ; may imply relation 
 of cause, result, or concession, 
 294 ; classified as restrictive and 
 explanatory, 295 ; conditional in 
 form, 316. 
 
 Conditional Relative sentences : 
 defined, 289, 290, 296 ; imply par- 
 ticular or general supposition, 298, 
 299 ; six classes, 300-315 ; clauses 
 conditional in form but definite 
 in thought, 316 ; introduced by 
 '?«s, 329. 
 
 Relative clauses expressing pur- 
 pose, 317-319. 
 
 Relative clauses introduced by 
 words meaning until, etc., 321- 
 333; introduced by Sus, and re- 
 ferring to the future, 322, 323, 
 325, 326 ; referring to what was in 
 past time a future contingency, 
 324, 326 ; referring to a past fact, 
 327 ; referring to a contemporane- 
 ous event, 328 ; introduced by fws 
 ov or Im Stov, 330 ; introduced by 
 S,xpt, S-xpi- oS, etc., 331, 332 ; intro- 
 duced by vph, 333. 
 
 Negatives in relative clauses, 
 469, 470, 474. 
 Restrictive Relative clauses, 295. 
 
 Result : several conceptions of, 370 ; 
 methods of expressing, 371 ; actual 
 result expressed by <S<rre with In- 
 finitive or Indicative, 235, 236, 
 369, 370 (a) (6), 371 (a) (6); by 
 articular Infinitive with els, 411 ; 
 conceived result expressed by 
 clause introduced by tva, 218, 219, 
 cf . 222 ; by Infinitive usually with 
 a<rre, 369, 370 (c), 371 (c) ; by 
 Infinitive with toC, 398 ; by artic- 
 ular Infinitive with els, 411 ; in- 
 tended result (purpose), 370 (d), 
 371 (d!). 
 
 Resultative Aorist, 35, 37, 42, 87. 
 
 Shall and will in translating the 
 Greek Future, 65. 
 
 Subjunctive : 
 
 In principal clauses : Hortatory, 
 160, 161 ; with 40fs or Sevpo pre- 
 fixed, 161 ; Prohibitory, 162-164, 
 166, 167; Deliberative, 168-171; 
 with 8i\ei,s etc. prefixed, 171 ; in 
 negative assertions referring to 
 the future, 172, 173. 
 
 In subordinate clauses : in pure 
 final clauses, 197 ; in object 
 clauses after verbs of exhorting, 
 etc., 200; after BiXu, 203; in 
 clauses after verbs of striving, 
 etc., 205-207, 209; in subject, 
 predicate, and appositive clauses 
 introduced by tva, 211-214 ; in 
 complementary and epexegetic 
 clauses introduced by iva, 215- 
 217 ; in clauses of conceived re- 
 sult introduced by tva, 218-220; 
 in object clauses after verbs of 
 fear and clanger (expressed), 224 ; 
 (implied), 225; after iiv in c6n- 
 ditional clauses, future supposi- 
 tion, 250 ; after el in conditional 
 clauses, future supposition, 252, 
 253 ; with el, expressing an object 
 of desire, 276 ; changed to Opta- 
 
194 
 
 INDEX OP SUBJECTS. 
 
 tive in indirect discourse, 258 ; 
 after Hv in conditional clauses, 
 present general supposition, 260 ; 
 in concessive clauses referring to 
 the future, 285 (6) ; in conditional 
 relative clauses, future supposi- 
 tion (with &v or Hv), 303, 304; 
 (without iv), 307 ; retained in 
 indirect discourse, 305; in condi- 
 tional relative clauses, present gen- 
 eral supposition (with S,v), 312 ; 
 in complementary relative clauses, 
 318, 319 ; after las [ilv], 322-325 ; 
 after Im oC or las 6Vou, 330 ; after 
 4x/)i, M^XP'i etc., 331 ; after irplv, 
 333. 
 Negatives with Subiunctive, 475. 
 
 Subordinate clauses classified, 186, 
 187. 
 
 Suppositions : distinction between 
 particular and general, 239, 240, 
 257 ; implied in relative clause, 
 289, 290, 296, 297 ; particular and 
 general, 298, 299 ; expressed by 
 an Imperative, 182, 183 ; ex- 
 pressed by a participle, 428, 436. 
 
 Substantive Participle, 456-463, see 
 under Participle. 
 
 Supplementary Participle, see 419, 
 Rem. 1. 
 
 Tenses: enumeration of, 4 ; primary 
 and secondary, 4 ; two-fold func- 
 tion of, 5 ; chief function, 5, Rem. ; 
 interchange of, apparent, not real, 
 15, Rem. 
 
 In Indicative Mood: general 
 significance, 6 ; two-fold function, 
 5 ; denote time relative to that of 
 speaking, 7 ; apparent exceptions, 
 7 ; use of each tense in detail, 
 8-94 (see Present, Imperfect, 
 Aorist, etc.). 
 
 In Dependent Moods: general 
 significance, 95 ; use of each tense 
 in detail, 96-114 ; tenses of the 
 Infinitive after prepositions, 104- 
 109 ; of the Infinitive in indirect 
 discourse, 110-114. 
 
 Of the Participle : general sig- 
 nificance, 118 ; use of each tense 
 in detail (see Present, Aorist, 
 Future, Perfect). 
 
 Will and shall in translating the 
 Greek Future, 65. 
 
 Wishes: expressed by Optative, 175- 
 1'77 ; by the Future Indicative, 27, . 
 Rem. 2 ; unattainable, expressed 
 by the Imperfect or Aorist In- 
 dicative, 27. 
 
INDEX OF GREEK WORDS. 
 
 [The Numbers refer to Sections.] 
 'Axoiw, Present with force of Per- "A0es and Htpere prefixed to Horta- 
 
 feet, 16. 
 •Ap: 
 
 Witli Indicative: with Imper- 
 fect and Aorist to denote a cus- 
 tomary past action, 26 ; in past 
 general supposition,315; inapodo- 
 sis of condition contrary to fact, 
 248 ; omitted in such apodosis, 31, 
 249; cases in which it is not to be 
 regarded as having been omitted, 
 30 (cf. 32, 33) ; with Future In- 
 dicative in future supposition, 
 308 ; with Present Indicative in 
 future supposition, 309. 
 
 With Subjunctive : in condi- 
 tional relative clauses, implying 
 future supposition, 303 ; implying 
 present general supposition, 312 ; 
 relative clauses introduced by 
 Iws, 322 ; after &xph 332 ; after 
 Sxojs in final clauses, 195 ; for Hv 
 in conditional clauses, 250. 
 
 With Potential Optative, 178, 
 179. 
 
 With Infinitive, 372. 
 
 In definite relative clauses con- 
 ditional in form, 316 ; retained 
 in indirect discourse with Sub- 
 junctive retained unchanged, 305 ; 
 omitted when Subjunctive is 
 changed to Optative, 344, Rem. 1. 
 'AvtI with ToO and the Infinitive, 
 
 406, 407. 
 'ATT^Savoi' with force of Perfect, 47. 
 
 tory Subjunctive, 161. 
 
 "Axpi, 331, 332. 
 
 Boi)Xe<rSe prefixed to Deliberative 
 Subjunctive, 171. 
 
 T4yova, Aoristic Perfect in Matthew 
 (Mark ?) only, 88. 
 
 Aevpo or devre prefixed to Hortatory 
 Subjunctive, 161. 
 
 Aid with t6 and the Infinitive, 108, 
 406-408. 
 
 Ai6ti as a causal particle, 228. 
 
 AoKet with Infinitive as subject, 385. 
 
 'Edv: 
 Conditional: with Present Indic- 
 ative in present particular sup- 
 position, 247 ; with Future In- 
 dicative in future supposition, 
 254 ; with Subjunctive in future 
 supposition, 250 ; in present gen- 
 eral supposition, 260 ; in condi- 
 tional relative clauses for S.v, 304, 
 312, Rem. 
 Concessive, 279-281, 285 (6). 
 
 'Eiv Kal, concessive, 279, 280, 285 (&), 
 287 ; conditional, 282. 
 
 'E(3owM/ii)j' without S,v, 33. 
 
 'Ey^KTo Si, construction after, 357- 
 360. 
 
 'Eyvuv with force of Perfect, 47. 
 
 "ESei with Infinitive denoting pres- 
 ent obligation, 32. 
 
 e;: 
 
 Conditional : ■ with present or 
 past tense of the Indicative, in 
 
 195 
 
196 
 
 INDEX OF GREEK "WOEDS. 
 
 simple present or past particular 
 supposition, 242, 243 ; with Pres- 
 ent Indicative in future supposi- 
 tion, 256; with Present Indicative 
 in present general supposition, 
 261 ; with a past tense of the 
 Indicative in condition contrary 
 to fact, 248 ; with Future Indica- 
 tive in supposition referring to 
 present intention, etc., 246 ; with 
 Future Indicative in future sup- 
 position, 254, 255 ; with Future 
 Indicative with the force of an 
 oath, 272 ; with the Subjunctive 
 in future supposition, 252, 253 ; 
 with the Optative in indirect dis- 
 course for Hv with Subjunctive 
 or el with the Indicative of the 
 direct discourse, 258 ; with the 
 Optative in future supposition 
 less probable, 259 ; with Sub- 
 junctive, Optative, or Future In- 
 dicative expressing an object of 
 desire, 276 ; after expressions 
 of wonder with nearly the force 
 of Stc, 277. 
 
 Concessive, 279-281 ; with a 
 present or past tense of the In- 
 dicative, 284 ; with Future Indic- 
 ative, 285. 
 
 Interrogative, in indirect ques- 
 tions, 340. 
 
 Ei S4 and ei di ii.fye used elliptically, 
 275. 
 
 Ei Kal concessive, 279, 280, 281, Eem., 
 288 ; conditional, 282, 286. 
 
 Ei iiii without dependent verb, mean- 
 ing except, 274, 471. 
 
 WBe in unattainable wishes, 27, 
 Rem. 1. 
 
 W\T](pa as Aoristic Perfect, 88. 
 
 Ei/i( used in the formation of peri- 
 phrastic verb-forms, 20, 34, 71, 
 84, 91, 97, 103, 155, 431. 
 
 Ef/)i)Ka as Aoristic Perfect, 88. 
 
 Wi with t4 and the Infinitive, 107, 
 406, 407, 409-413. 
 
 'E/teWoK with the Infinitive, 73. 
 
 'Ey with Tif and the Infinitive, 109, 
 406, 407, 415. 
 
 ''Evemv with toO and the Infinitive, 
 406, 407. 
 
 'Ef^ffTT)!' with force of Perfect, 47. 
 
 'Eirei, ^ttciStJ, iiretS'^irep as causal 
 particles, 228. 
 
 "Eo'x'jKa as Aoristic Perfect, 88. 
 E0' ((5 as a causal particle, 228. 
 
 "Exw, followed by indirect delibera- 
 tive questions, 346 ; by relative 
 clause of similar force, 318. 
 
 "EdpaKa as Aoristic Perfect, 88. 
 
 "E«s : force as a relative adverb, 321 ; 
 introducing a clause referring to 
 the future, 322, 323, 326, 329 ; in- 
 troducing a clause referring to 
 what was in past time a future con- 
 tingency, 324, 326, 329 ; how trans- 
 lated when followed by the Sub- 
 junctive, 325 ; introducing a clause 
 referring to a past fact, 327 ; in- 
 troducing a clause referring to a 
 contemporaneous event, 328 ; fol- 
 lowed by o5 or Stov ; with toS 
 and the Infinitive, 406, 407. 
 
 "H, Infinitive after, 374 ; after irplv, 
 333, Kern. 2, 381. 
 
 'HffeXoy without &P, 33. 
 
 "H/cQ), force of Present tense, 16. 
 
 Rix^f-V without Sv, 33. 
 
 e^Xci! and ffiXere prefixed to De- 
 liberative Subjunctive, 171. 
 
 'iva : New Testament usage, 191, 221, 
 223 ; in pure final clauses, 197- 
 199 ; in object clauses after verbs 
 of exhorting, etc., 200-203 ; in ob- 
 ject clauses after verbs of striving, 
 etc., 205, 206 ; in subject, predi- 
 cate, and appositive clauses, 211- 
 214 ; in complementary and 
 epexegetic clauses, 215-217 ; in 
 
INDEX OF GREEK "WOEDS. 
 
 197 
 
 clauses of conceived result, 218, 
 219 ; not used to express actual 
 result, 222 ; post-classical usage 
 in general, 223. 
 
 Kal ye with concessive participle, 
 437. 
 
 Koi Hv, concessive, 279, 281, 285 
 (6); conditional, 282. 
 
 Koi h/ivero, construction after, 357- 
 360. 
 
 Koi el concessive, 279, 281, 288; 
 conditional, 282. 
 
 'Ka.lirep yriih. concessive participle, 
 437. 
 
 K^Kpayev, functionally a Present, 78. 
 
 AavSdvu, participle with, 147. 
 
 MAXu, fiiWeiv, etc., with Infinitive, 
 72, 73, 100, 153. 
 
 Mertt with t6 and the Infinitive, 105, 
 406, 407. 
 
 M^X/", 331. 
 
 M^ as a negative, and its compounds : 
 classical and New Testament use 
 in general, 464. 
 
 "With the Indicative : in ques- 
 tions expecting a negative answer, 
 467, 468 ; in conditional and con- 
 ditional relative clauses, 469 ; in 
 causal and relative clauses, 474, 
 Rem. 1, 2. 
 
 With the Subjunctive, 475, 162, 
 163. 
 
 With the Optative of Wishing, 
 476. 
 With the Imperative, 478, 163. 
 With the Infinitive, 480; re- 
 dundant after verbs of hindering, 
 denying, etc., 402, 483, 484. 
 With participles, 485. 
 
 M?J as a final particle : New Testa- 
 ment uses, 193 ; in pure final 
 clauses, 199 ; in object clauses 
 after verbs of striving, 206, 209 ; 
 in object clauses after verbs of 
 fear and danger, 224-227. 
 
 Mt) yivoiTo, 177. 
 
 M^ oi, in questions, 468 ; after verbs 
 of hindering, etc., 484. 
 
 "Oo-Tis as an interrogative, 349. 
 
 "Ottws, New Testament usage, 192, 
 196 ; in pure final clauses, 197, 
 199 ; in object clauses after verbs 
 of exhorting, 200-202 ; in object 
 clauses after verbs of striving, etc., 
 205, 207. 
 
 "Oti as a causal particle, 228. 
 
 "Oti introducing indirect quotation, 
 339 (a), 343 ; redundant before a 
 direct quotation, 345. 
 
 Oi and its compounds : classical and 
 New Testament usage in general, 
 464. 
 
 With the Indicative: in inde- 
 pendent declaratory sentences, 
 465 ; with Imperative Future, 466 ; 
 in questions expecting an affirma- 
 tive answer, 467 ; in conditional, 
 conditional relative, and con- 
 cessive clauses, 469, 470 ; after ;onJ 
 as a conjunction, 472 ; in indirect 
 discourse, 473; in causal and 
 simple relative clauses, 474. 
 
 With the Subjunctive after /n^ 
 as a conjunction, 475. 
 
 With limitations of the Im- 
 perative, 479. 
 
 With limitations of the Infini- 
 tive, 481 ; compounds of oi with 
 an Infinitive depending on a verb 
 limited by oi, 482. 
 With participles, 485. 
 
 Oi ii.-fi, emphatic negative : vrith Pre- 
 dictive Future, 66, 487 ; with the 
 Imperative Future, 67, Rem. 2, 
 488; with the Prohibitory Sub- 
 junctive, 167, 488 ; with the Sub- 
 junctive in negative assertions, 
 172, 173, 487 ; after another nega- 
 tive, 489. 
 
198 
 
 INDEX OF GREEK WORDS. 
 
 'O0cXo» in expression of wishes, 27, 
 
 Rem. 1, 2. 
 ndpei/u, force of Present tense, 16. 
 ne7r((7TeuKo as Intensive Perfect, 77. 
 JIsTTolriKa as Aoristic Perfect, 88. 
 n^TToiSo as Intensive Perfect, 77. 
 n^irpaKev as Aoristio Perfect, 88. 
 Jlplv with a finite mood, 333 ; with 
 
 the Infinitive, 380-382. 
 IIp6 with ToO and the Infinitive, lOQ, 
 
 406, 407. 
 IIpAs with TO and the Infinitive, 107, 
 
 406, 407, 414. 
 Sufi/iETOi, force of tense, 125. 
 T6, ToS, TV, Infinitive with, 392-417. 
 
 '1vdpx<a used in the formation of 
 periphrastic verb-forms, 20. 
 
 'fis : New Testament usage as a final 
 particle, 194 ; with the Infinitive 
 denoting purpose, 372 ; with a 
 causal participle, 440, 441 ; with 
 the participle expressing manner, 
 445, 446. 
 
 "fiffxe : denoting result with Indica- 
 tive and Infinitive, 234, 235 ; with 
 Indicative, 236, 370 (a), 371 (o) ; 
 introducing principal verb, any 
 mood, 237 ; with Infinitive denot- 
 ing result, 369-371 ; with the In- 
 finitive denoting purpose, 367. 
 
INDEX OF PASSAGES REFERRED TO. 
 
 [The numbers refer to sections. Passages referred to in Remarks are cited 
 by the number of the section to which the Semark is appended.] 
 
 I. New Testament Passages. 
 
 
 
 
 
 SECTION 
 
 Matt. 
 
 1 : 18 453, 457 
 
 Matt. 
 
 1 : 19 - . . 
 
 
 
 . . 387 
 
 Matt. 
 
 1 : 22 . . 
 
 
 
 222, 223 
 
 Matt. 
 
 1:23 . . 
 
 
 
 . . 20 
 
 Matt. 
 
 2:2 . . 
 
 
 
 . . 157 
 
 Matt. 
 
 2:3 . . 
 
 
 
 . . 439 
 
 Matt. 
 
 2:9 . 
 
 
 
 . . 327 
 
 Matt. 
 
 2:10 . . 
 
 
 
 . . 439 
 
 Matt. 
 
 2:13 
 
 
 
 72, 397 
 
 Matt. 
 
 2 : 15 . . 
 
 
 
 . . 222 
 
 Matt. 
 
 2 : 20 . . 
 
 
 
 . . 127 
 
 Matt. 
 
 3:14 . . 
 
 
 
 28, 378 
 
 Matt. 
 
 3:15 . . 
 
 
 
 384, 429 
 
 Matt. 
 
 3:17 . 
 
 
 
 . . 55 
 
 Matt. 
 
 4:2 . . 
 
 
 
 . . 134 
 
 Matt. 
 
 4:3 . . 
 
 
 
 200, 242 
 
 Matt. 
 
 4:4 . . 
 
 
 
 . . 68 
 
 Matt. 
 
 4:14 . . 
 
 
 
 . . 222 
 
 Matt. 
 
 5:6 . 
 
 
 
 . . 124 
 
 Matt. 
 
 5:10 . . 
 
 
 
 . . 286 
 
 Matt. 
 
 5:17 
 
 
 
 98, 306 
 
 Matt. 
 
 5 : 18 . . 
 
 
 
 172, 322 
 
 Matt. 
 
 5:19 . . 
 
 
 
 303, 310 
 
 Matt. 
 
 5:20 
 
 
 
 . . 250 
 
 Matt. 
 
 5:21 . . 
 
 
 
 46, 52, 54 
 
 Matt. 
 
 5:23 . . 
 
 
 
 . . 96 
 
 Matt. 
 
 5:25 . . 
 
 
 
 97, 330 
 
 Matt. 
 
 5:28 . . 
 
 
 
 . . 414. 
 
 Matt. 
 
 5 : 29, 80 . 
 
 
 
 214, 256 
 
 Matt. 
 
 5 : 39 
 
 
 
 . . 309 
 
 SECTION 
 
 Matt. 5:41 308 
 
 Matt. 5:42 180 
 
 Matt. 6:1 ... 107, 406, 414 
 Matt. 6:5 . . 231, 282, 466 
 
 Matt. 6 : 11 98 
 
 Matt. 6 : 13 162 
 
 Matt. 6 : 16 231, 457 
 
 Matt. 6 : 25 171 
 
 Matt. 6 : 27 443 
 
 Matt. 6 : 30 243 
 
 Matt. 6 : 31 169 
 
 Matt. 6 : 34 162 
 
 Matt. 7:1 197 
 
 Matt. 7:4 161 
 
 Matt. 7:6 199 
 
 Matt. 7 : 10 269 
 
 Matt. 7 : 12 171, 304 
 
 Matt. 7 : 13 124 
 
 Matt. 7 : 17 12 
 
 Matt. 8:3 39 
 
 Matt. 8:8 216 
 
 Matt. 8 : 17 222 
 
 Matt. 8:20 346 
 
 Matt. 8 : 31 182, 256 
 
 Matt. 8 : 32 182 
 
 Matt. 9 : 17 275 
 
 Matt. 9 : 20 131 
 
 Matt. 9 : 21 250, 257 
 
 Matt. 9:25 , . . 53 
 
 Matt. 9 ; 80 209 
 
 199 
 
200 
 
 INDEX OF PASSAGES EEFEKEED TO. 
 
 
 
 
 
 SECTIOK 
 
 
 
 
 
 SECTION 
 
 Matt. 
 
 10:1 371 
 
 Matt. 15:20 393 
 
 Matt. 
 
 10:4 . 
 
 
 
 . . 144 
 
 Matt. 16 : 1 . 
 
 
 
 . 121 
 
 Matt. 
 
 10:J4 . 
 
 
 
 . . 310 
 
 Matt. 16: 11 
 
 
 
 . 473 
 
 Matt. 
 
 10:23 . 
 
 
 
 . 323 
 
 Matt. 16 : 13 . 
 
 
 
 . . 169 
 
 Matt. 
 
 10:25 . 
 
 
 
 . . 214 
 
 Matt. 16 : 19 ■ . 
 
 
 
 . . 94 
 
 Matt. 
 
 10:26 . 
 
 
 
 . 486 
 
 Matt. 16:20 . 
 
 
 
 200, 204 
 
 Matt. 
 
 10:32 . 
 
 
 
 . . 308 
 
 Matt. 16:22 . 
 
 
 
 66 
 
 Matt. 
 
 10:33 . 
 
 
 
 . 307, 308 
 
 Matt. 16:25 . 
 
 
 
 . . 310 
 
 Matt. 
 
 10:37 . 
 
 
 
 . . 423, 428 
 
 Matt. 16 : 26 . 
 
 
 
 
 66 
 
 Matt. 
 
 10:38 . 
 
 
 i 
 
 13, 428, 469 
 
 Matt. 16:27 . 
 
 
 
 
 72 
 
 Matt. 
 
 10:39 . 
 
 
 
 ,. . 428 
 
 Matt. 16:35 . 
 
 
 
 
 66 
 
 Matt. 
 
 10 : 40, 41 
 
 
 
 . . 428 
 
 Matt. 17 : 5 . 
 
 
 
 
 55 
 
 Matt. 
 
 10:42 . 
 
 
 
 . 65, 428 
 
 Matt. 17 : 8 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 471 
 
 Matt. 
 
 11:1 . 
 
 
 
 . . 459 
 
 Matt. 18:4,5. 
 
 
 
 
 . 308 
 
 Matt. 
 
 11:4 . 
 
 
 
 . . 151 
 
 Matt. 18:6 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 214 
 
 Matt. 
 
 11 : 14 . 
 
 
 
 . : 282 
 
 Matt. 18 : 8, 9 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 256 
 
 Matt. 
 
 11:21 . 
 
 
 
 . . 144 
 
 Matt. 18 : 10 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 209 
 
 Matt. 
 
 11 : 25 . 
 
 
 
 . . 222 
 
 Matt. 18 : 18 . 
 
 
 
 
 94, 431 
 
 Matt. 
 
 11:28 . 
 
 
 
 . . 65 
 
 Matt. 18:21 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 169 
 
 Matt. 
 
 11:29 . 
 
 
 
 . . 65 
 
 Matt. 18 : 30 . 
 
 
 
 
 324, 329 
 
 Matt. 
 
 12:3 . 
 
 
 
 . . 109 
 
 Matt. 18 : 33 . 
 
 
 
 
 30 
 
 Matt. 
 
 12 : 14 . 
 
 
 
 207 
 
 Matt. 19:4 . 
 
 
 
 
 52 
 
 Matt! 
 
 12 : 17 . 
 
 
 
 . . 222 
 
 Matt. 19 : 10 . 
 
 
 
 
 243, 264 
 
 Matt. 
 
 12:18 . 
 
 
 
 . . 55 
 
 Matt. 19 : 14 . 
 
 
 
 
 387, 402 
 
 Matt. 
 
 12:20 . 
 
 
 
 . . 322 
 
 Matt. 19 : 21 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 269 
 
 Matt. 
 
 12:31 . 
 
 
 
 . . 65 
 
 Matt. 19:27 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 139 
 
 Matt. 
 
 13 : 5, 6 . 
 
 
 
 . . 108 
 
 Matt. 20 : 10 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 343 
 
 Matt. 
 
 13 : 12 . 
 
 
 
 313 
 
 Matt. 20 : 19 
 
 
 
 
 . 410 
 
 Matt. 
 
 13:14 . 
 
 
 
 . . 167 
 
 Matt. 20:22 . 
 
 
 
 
 72, 393 
 
 Matt. 
 
 13:15 
 
 
 
 . . 199 
 
 Matt. 20 : 26, 27 
 
 
 
 
 . 68 
 
 Matt. 
 
 13 : 17 . 
 
 
 
 . _ . 151 
 
 Matt. 21:4 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 222 
 
 Matt. 
 
 13:. 30 . 
 
 
 
 . . 414 
 
 Matt. 21 : 19 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 167 
 
 Matt. 
 
 13:33 . 
 
 
 
 ■ . . 330 
 
 Matt. 21 : 32 . 
 
 
 
 
 218, 398 
 
 Matt. 
 
 13:35 . 
 
 
 
 . . 222 
 
 Matt. 21 : 34 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 109 
 
 Matt. 
 
 13:46 . 
 
 
 
 . 78, 88 
 
 Matt. 21 ; 38 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 161 
 
 Matt. 
 
 13:63 . 
 
 
 
 . . 459 
 
 Matt. 21 : 41 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 317 
 
 Matt. 
 
 13:55 . 
 
 
 
 . . 467 
 
 Matt. 22 : 11 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 485 
 
 Matt. 
 
 14:3 . 
 
 
 
 . . 48 
 
 Matt. 22 : 14 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 218 
 
 Matt. 
 
 14:4 . 
 
 
 
 . . 29 
 
 Matt. 22 : 15 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 207 
 
 Matt. 
 
 14:7 . 
 
 
 
 . . 305 
 
 Matt. 22:23 . 
 
 
 
 
 112, 480 
 
 Matt. 
 
 14:9 . 
 
 
 
 . . 437 
 
 Matt. 22 : 28 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 39 
 
 Matt. 
 
 14:13 . 
 
 
 
 . . 218 
 
 Matt. 22 : 29 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 485 
 
 Matt. 
 
 14:36 . 
 
 
 
 . . 200 
 
 Matt. 23 : 2 
 
 
 
 
 55 
 
 Matt. 
 
 15:2 . 
 
 
 
 . . 312 
 
 Matt. 23 : 12 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 308 
 
 Matt. 
 
 15:6 . 
 
 
 
 . 67, 68 
 
 Matt. 23 : 13 . 
 
 
 
 
 129 
 
INDEX OF PASSAGES EEFEREED TO. 
 
 201 
 
 
 
 
 
 SKOTION 
 
 
 
 Matt. 23 : 20 124, 150 
 
 Matt. 
 
 28:15 
 
 Matt. 23:23 . 
 
 
 
 
 . . 80 
 
 Matt. 
 
 28:18 
 
 Matt. 23:33 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 170 
 
 
 
 Matt. 24 : 4 . 
 
 
 
 
 206, 209 
 
 Mark 
 
 1:7 
 
 Matt. 24:6 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 209 
 
 Mark 
 
 1:9 
 
 Matt. 24: 12 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 108 
 
 Mark 
 
 1:11 
 
 Matt. 24 : 13 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 150 
 
 Mark 
 
 1:17 
 
 Matt. 24:20 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 200 
 
 Mark 
 
 1:22 
 
 Matt. 24:22 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 469 
 
 Mark 
 
 1:24 
 
 Matt. 24:23 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 165 
 
 Mark 
 
 1:31 
 
 Matt. 24:45 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 397 
 
 Mark 
 
 1:40 
 
 Matt. 25 : 6 
 
 
 
 
 80 
 
 Mark 
 
 2:5 
 
 Matt. 25 ; 8 . 
 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 Mark 
 
 2:16 
 
 Matt. 25 : 9 . 
 
 
 2 
 
 25 
 
 475, 487 
 
 Mark 
 
 2:18 
 
 Matt. 25 : 16 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 150 
 
 Mark 
 
 2:20 
 
 Matt. 25:27 . 
 
 
 
 
 30 
 
 Mark 
 
 2:23 
 
 Matt. 26:2 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 410 
 
 Mark 
 
 2:24 
 
 Matt. 26:4 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 210 
 
 Mark 
 
 2:28 
 
 Matt. 26 : 15 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 269 
 
 Mark 
 
 3:4 
 
 Matt. 26 : 17 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 171 
 
 Mark 
 
 8:6 
 
 Matt. 26 : 18 . 
 
 
 
 
 15 
 
 Mark 
 
 8:7 
 
 Matt. 26 : 19 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 293 
 
 Mark 
 
 8:11 
 
 Matt. 26:24 . 
 
 
 
 
 249, 469 
 
 Mark 
 
 3:21 
 
 Matt. 26 : 32 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 105 
 
 Mark 
 
 3:24 
 
 Matt. 26 : 33 . 
 
 
 
 
 279, 285 
 
 Mark 
 
 3:25 
 
 Matt. 26:35 . 
 
 
 
 66 
 
 279, 281 
 
 Mark 
 
 8:28 
 
 Matt. 26:86 . 
 
 
 
 
 . .325 
 
 Mark 
 
 3:29 
 
 Matt. 26:43 . 
 
 
 
 
 91 
 
 Mark 
 
 4:6 
 
 Matt. 26:48 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 810 
 
 Mark 
 
 4:7 
 
 Matt. 26 : 52 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 124 
 
 Mark 
 
 4:21 
 
 Matt. 26 : 54 
 
 
 
 
 . 169 
 
 Mark 
 
 4:23 
 
 Matt. 26:56 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 222 
 
 Mark 
 
 4:31 
 
 Matt. 27 : 1 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 371 
 
 Mark 
 
 4:37 
 
 Matt. 27:4 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 139 
 
 Mark 
 
 4:39 
 
 Matt. 27 : 8 . 
 
 
 
 
 18,52 
 
 Mark 
 
 5:4 
 
 Matt. 27:17 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 171 
 
 Mark 
 
 5:15 
 
 Matt. 27 : 20 . 
 
 
 
 
 42 
 
 Mark 
 
 5:16 
 
 Matt. 27 : 21 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 171 
 
 Mark 
 
 5:18 
 
 Matt. 27 : 31 . 
 
 
 
 
 48, 109 
 
 Mark 
 
 5:19, 
 
 Matt. 27 : 33 
 
 
 
 
 20, 431 
 
 Mark 
 
 5:24 
 
 Matt. 27 : 41 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 120 
 
 Mark 
 
 5:25 
 
 Matt. 27:43 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 75 
 
 Mark 
 
 5:33 
 
 Matt. 27 : 49 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 161 
 
 Mark 
 
 5:35 
 
 Matt. 27 : 63 . . 
 
 
 
 
 . 15 
 
 Mark 
 
 5:86 
 
 Matt. 28 : 6 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 295 
 
 Mark 
 
 5:41 
 
 SBOTION 
 
 18, 52 
 
 ... .15 
 
 376 
 
 359 
 
 55 
 
 . . 269 
 
 445, 446 
 
 .' 224 
 
 134, 138 
 
 263 
 
 13 
 
 .349 
 
 .... 34, 431 
 
 296, 816 
 
 360' 
 
 474 
 
 237 
 
 884 
 
 207 
 
 57 
 
 290, 815 
 
 47 
 
 260, 262 
 
 262 
 
 304, 314 
 
 314 
 
 406 
 
 157 
 
 345 
 
 368 
 
 437 
 
 ... .869 
 
 101 
 
 . . , 108, 408 
 
 156 
 
 123 
 
 156, 200 
 
 20 350 
 
 57 
 
 131 
 
 137 
 
 47 
 
 138 
 
 20 
 
202 
 
 INDEX OF PASSAGES KEFEKKED TO. 
 
 SECTION 
 
 Mark 6:2 ... . 457 
 
 Mark 6:9 365 
 
 Mark 6 : 10 322 
 
 Mark 6:25 171 
 
 Mark 6 : 31 ..'... 368 
 
 Mark 6 : 34 446 
 
 Mark 6:36 346 
 
 Mark 6:45 326 
 
 Mark 6:50 165 
 
 Mark 6:56 315 
 
 Mark 7 : 12 482 
 
 Mark 8 : 1, 2 346 
 
 Mark 8 : 12 272 
 
 Mark 8 : 14 48, 53 
 
 Mark 8:29 141 
 
 Mark 8:35 308 
 
 Mark 9:6 343 
 
 Mark 9:9 204, 471 
 
 Mark 9 : 10 393 
 
 Mark 9 : 11 349 
 
 Mark 9 : 12 . ... 212 
 
 Mark 9:22 181 
 
 Mark 9:26 371 
 
 Mark 9:28 349 
 
 Mark 9:31 15 
 
 Mark 9:35 296 
 
 Mark 10 : 11 312 
 
 Mark 10:22 432 
 
 Mark 10 : 32 34 
 
 Mark 10 : 36 .... 171 
 
 Mark 10:40 368 
 
 Mark 10:43 296 
 
 Mark 10:51 171 
 
 Mark 11 : 13 276 
 
 Mark 11 : 14 .... 176, 476 
 
 Mark 11 : 16 210 
 
 Mark 11 : 18 207 
 
 Mark 11 : 19 315 
 
 Mark 11 : 23 310 
 
 Mark 11 : 24 269 
 
 Mark 11 : 25 309 
 
 Mark 11 : 27 14 
 
 Mark 11 : 28 216, 220 
 
 Mark 11:31 65 
 
 Mark 12 ; 7 161 
 
 Mark 
 
 12: 
 
 Mark 
 
 12: 
 
 Mark 
 
 12 
 
 Mark 
 
 12 
 
 Mark 
 
 12 
 
 Mark 
 
 13 
 
 Mark 
 
 13 
 
 Mark 
 
 13 
 
 Mark 
 
 13 
 
 Mark 
 
 13 
 
 Mark 
 
 13 
 
 Mark 
 
 13 
 
 Mark 
 
 13 
 
 Mark 
 
 14 
 
 Mark 
 
 14 
 
 Mark 
 
 14 
 
 Mark 
 
 14 
 
 Mark 
 
 14 
 
 Mark 
 
 14 
 
 Mark 
 
 14 
 
 Mark 
 
 14 
 
 Mark 
 
 14 
 
 Mark 
 
 14 
 
 Mark 
 
 15 
 
 Mark 
 
 15 
 
 Mark 
 
 15 
 
 Mark 
 
 16 
 
 Mark 
 
 16 
 
 Luke 
 
 1. 
 
 Luke 
 
 1: 
 
 Luke 
 
 1 
 
 Luke 
 
 1 
 
 Luke 
 
 1 
 
 Luke 
 
 1 
 
 Luke 
 
 1: 
 
 Luke 
 
 1. 
 
 Luke 
 
 1: 
 
 Luke 
 
 1: 
 
 Luke 
 
 1: 
 
 Luke 
 
 1: 
 
 Luke 
 
 1: 
 
 Luke 
 
 1: 
 
 Luke 
 
 1: 
 
 Luke 
 
 1: 
 
 SECTION 
 
 12 387 
 
 18 390 
 
 33 96, 393 
 
 41 21, 56 
 
 44 56 
 
 2 487 
 
 5 209 
 
 11 803 
 
 18 200 
 
 21 165 
 
 22 107 
 
 30 172, 331 
 
 34 . ■ 204 
 
 2 199 
 
 12 171 
 
 14 318, 319 
 
 21 469 
 
 28 406 
 
 29 . . . 279, 280, 285 
 
 30 380 
 
 31 66, 279 
 
 32 325 
 
 41 52 
 
 9 122, 171 
 
 36 161 
 
 44 277 
 
 3 169 
 
 20 119, 449 
 
 1 229 
 
 8 415 
 
 9 401 
 
 10 34 
 
 21 431 
 
 22 34 
 
 29 Ill 
 
 33 59 
 
 38 176 
 
 43 213 
 
 54 375 
 
 57 400 
 
 59 23 
 
 62 Ill, 179 
 
 66 21 
 
 72 375 
 
INDEX OF PASSAGES BEFEREED TO. 
 
 203 
 
 SBCTtON 
 
 Luke 1 : 74 400 
 
 Luke 1 : 76, 77, 79 . . . . 397 
 
 Luke 2:6 400 
 
 Luke 2 : 18 57 
 
 Luke 2 : 21 106, 400 
 
 Luke 2 : 22, 24 397 
 
 Luke 2-26 [ ^^' ^1^' 3^^' 
 
 Luke 2.26. . . 1 3^^^ ^^^ ^^^ 
 
 Luke 2 : 27 109, 897 
 
 Luke 2 : 35 195 
 
 Luke 2 ; 44 37 
 
 Luke 2 : 49 28 
 
 Luke 2 : 51 22 
 
 Luke 3:9.. ... 15 
 
 Luke 3 : 10 168 
 
 Luke 3: 15 Ill 
 
 Luke 3 : 16 122 
 
 Luke 3 : 21 109 
 
 Luke 3 : 22 55 
 
 Luke 4 : 10 404, 405 
 
 Luke 4 : 15 449 
 
 Luke 4 : 16 295 
 
 Luke 4 : 22 57 
 
 Luke 4 : 23 146, 460 
 
 Luke 4 : 29 371 
 
 Luke 4 : 41 90 
 
 Luke 5:1. 358 
 
 Luke 6:4 457 
 
 Luke 5:7. . . . 404, 405, 449 
 
 Luke 5 : 10 71 
 
 Luke 5 : 16 34 
 
 Luke 5 : 17 432 
 
 Luke 5:26 62 
 
 Luke 5 : 35 316 
 
 Luke 6:11. . . . Ill, 179,343 
 
 Luke 6 : 12 360 
 
 Luke 6 : 31 171 
 
 Luke 6 : 32, 33, 34 . . . . 282 
 
 Luke 6 : 37 183 
 
 Luke 6 : 42 161, 485 
 
 Luke 7:2 73 
 
 Luke 7:4 318, 319 
 
 Luke 7:6 216, 220 
 
 Luke 7 : 19 433 
 
 Luke 7 : 35 43 
 
 
 
 SECTION 
 
 Luke 7 
 
 39 . 
 
 . ... 73, 241 
 
 Luke 7 
 
 40 . 
 
 368 
 
 Luke 7 
 
 45 . 
 
 459 
 
 Luke 7 
 
 47 . 
 
 313 
 
 Luke 7 
 
 48 . 
 
 345 
 
 Luke 8 
 
 2 . 
 
 89 
 
 Luke 8 
 
 5 . 
 
 . . . .415 
 
 Luke 8 
 
 9 
 
 343 
 
 Luke 8 
 
 10 . 
 
 366 
 
 Luke 8 
 
 18 . 
 
 .... 310, 313 
 
 Luke 8 
 
 27 . 
 
 .... 29, 48 
 
 Luke 8 
 
 43 . 
 
 131 
 
 Luke 8 
 
 46 . 
 
 .... 154, 458 
 
 Luke 8 
 
 47 . 
 
 350 
 
 Luke 8 
 
 49 . 
 
 .... 14, 47 
 
 Luke 9 
 
 4 . 
 
 310 
 
 Luke 9 
 
 13 . 
 
 .... 252, 253 
 
 Luke 9 
 
 18 . 
 
 97 
 
 Luke 9 
 
 24 . 
 
 314 
 
 Luke 9 
 
 25 . 
 
 . . 141 
 
 Luke 9 
 
 27 . 
 
 .... 172, 322 
 
 Luke - 9 
 
 33 . 
 
 485 
 
 Luke 9 
 
 34 . 
 
 109 
 
 Luke 9 
 
 36 . 
 
 . 41, 78, 88, 109 
 
 Luke 9 
 
 44 . 
 
 . . 72 
 
 Luke 9 
 
 45 . 
 
 222 
 
 Luke 9 
 
 46 . 
 
 179 
 
 Luke 9 
 
 48 . 
 
 . . . .314 
 
 Luke 9 
 
 50 . 
 
 469 
 
 Luke 9 
 
 62 . 
 
 372 
 
 Luke 9 
 
 54 . 
 
 .... 98, 171 
 
 Luke 9 
 
 57 . 
 
 304 
 
 Luke 9 
 
 58 . 
 
 346 
 
 Luke 10 
 
 2 
 
 200 
 
 Luke 10 
 
 6 . 
 
 275 
 
 Luke 10 
 
 18 . 
 
 146 
 
 Luke 10 
 
 19 . 
 
 400 
 
 Luke 10 
 
 40 . 
 
 368 
 
 Luke 11 
 
 1 
 
 97 
 
 Luke 11 
 
 3 . 
 
 98 
 
 Luke 11 
 
 5 . 
 
 . . . .168,169 
 
 Luke 11 
 
 6 . 
 
 318 
 
 Luke 11 
 
 7 . 
 
 449 
 
 Luke 11 
 
 8 . 
 
 285 
 
 Luke 11 
 
 18 . 
 
 .... 112, 282 
 
204 
 
 INDEX OP PASSAGES REFEEKED TO. 
 
 SECTION 
 
 Luke 11 : 32 231, 232 
 
 Luke 11 : 35 209 
 
 Luke 11 : 37 109 
 
 Luke 11 : 42 480 
 
 Luke 12 : 1 371 
 
 Luke 12 : 4 368 
 
 Luke 12:5 105 
 
 Luke 12 : 8 308 
 
 Luke 12 : 8-10 150 
 
 Luke 12 : 10 308 
 
 Luke 12 : 11 478 
 
 Luke 12 : 16 415 
 
 Luke 12 : 17 346 
 
 Luke 12:32 55 
 
 Luke 12 : 33 485 
 
 Luke 12:34 309 
 
 Luke 12 : 35 103 
 
 Luke 12 : 36 454 
 
 Luke 12 : 45 405 
 
 Luke 12 : 52 94 
 
 Luke 12 : 59 323 
 
 Luke 13 : 7 17 
 
 Luke 13:9 271,276 
 
 Luke 13 : 10 431 
 
 Luke 13 : 16 30 
 
 Luke 13 : 23 126 
 
 Luke 13:26 303 
 
 Luke 13 : 28 316 
 
 Luke 14 : 1 109 
 
 Luke 14 : 10 199 
 
 Luke 14 : 26 . 266, 261, 428, 469 
 
 Luke 14:27 313 
 
 Luke 14 : 31 376 
 
 Luke 14 : 33 469 
 
 Luke 14 : 34 169 
 
 Luke 16 : 4 323, 329 
 
 Luke 15 : 16 23 
 
 Luke 16:24 92 
 
 Luke 15 : 26 179, 343 
 
 Luke 16 : 29 17 
 
 Luke 15 : 32 41, 54 
 
 Luke 16 : 3 387 
 
 Luke 16:4 45 
 
 Luke 16 : 11 . . . 169, 242, 472 
 
 Luke 16 : 16 433 
 
 SECTION 
 
 Luke 16 : 17 384 
 
 Luke 16 : 18 124 
 
 Luke 16 : 31 . . . . 59 
 
 Luke 17 : 1 405 
 
 Luke 17 : 2 214 
 
 Luke 17 : 4 98 
 
 Luke 17 : 5 181 
 
 Luke 17 : 8 325 
 
 Luke 17:27 331 
 
 Luke 17 : 31 308 
 
 Luke 18 : 1 107, 414 
 
 Luke 18 : 4 284, 469 
 
 Luke 18 : 6 469 
 
 Luke 18 : 7 172 
 
 Luke 18 : 10 366 
 
 Luke 18 : 25 374, 384 
 
 Luke 18 : 36 179 
 
 Luke 18 : 41 171 
 
 Luke 19:9 46 
 
 Luke 19:15 109 
 
 Luke 19: 17 97 
 
 Luke 19 : 40 93, 254 
 
 Luke 19 : 42 271 
 
 Luke 19:47 34 
 
 Luke 19 : 48 444 
 
 Luke 20: 6 84 
 
 Luke 20 : 10 198, 199 
 
 Luke 20 : 16 176 
 
 Luke 20 : 20 371 
 
 Luke 20 : 22 384 
 
 Luke 20 : 40 482 
 
 Luke 20 : 41 112 
 
 Luke 21 : 1 138 
 
 Luke 21 : 8 209 
 
 Luke 21 : 22 400 
 
 Luke 21 : 24 71 
 
 Luke 22 : 6 ...... 400 
 
 Luke 22 : 9 171 
 
 Luke 22 : 11 318 
 
 Luke 22 : 15 106 
 
 Luke 22 : 26, 27 446 
 
 Luke 22 : 28 433 
 
 Luke 22 : 34 . , . 112, 323, 390 
 
 Luke 22 : 40 200 
 
 Luke 22 : 46 200 
 
INDEX OF PASSAGES EEFEKEED TO. 
 
 205 
 
 SECTION 
 
 Luke 22 : 49 70, 169 
 
 Luke 22 : 61 65 
 
 Luke 22: 65 121 
 
 Luke 22: 67, 68 285 
 
 Luke 23 : 15 84 
 
 Luke 23 : 19 20 
 
 Luke 23 : 31 169 
 
 Luke 23: 35 245 
 
 Luke 23: 37 245 
 
 Luke 23: 53 489 
 
 Luke 24: 16 403 
 
 Luke 24: 23 343 
 
 Luke 24: 25 399 
 
 Luke 24: 26 30 
 
 Luke 24 : 30 109 
 
 Luke 24: 32 22 
 
 Luke 24: 36 435 
 
 Luke 24 : 46 . . . 75, 114, 390 
 
 Luke 24 : 51 406 
 
 John 1:1 157 
 
 John 1 : 11 38, 465 
 
 John 1 : 12 290, 378 
 
 John 1 : 15 78 
 
 John 1 : 18 88 
 
 John 1 : 26 122, 250 
 
 John 1 : 27 216 
 
 John 1 : 33 299 
 
 John 1 : 38 157 
 
 John 1 : 48 106 
 
 John 2:4 16 
 
 John 2 : 16 151 
 
 John 2 : 17 84 
 
 John 2 : 19 182, 183 
 
 John 2: 25 216, 348 
 
 John 3:8 313 
 
 John 3 : 12 244 
 
 John 3 : 16 236, 371 
 
 John 3 : 18 474 
 
 John 3:27 482 
 
 John 4:4 30 
 
 John 4:34 213 
 
 John 4:39 461 
 
 John 4:47 16 
 
 John 4:49 380 
 
 
 SECTION 
 
 John 4 : 52 . . 
 
 .41 
 
 John 5:5 . . 
 
 . . . . 131 
 
 John 5:6 
 
 . . . . 17 
 
 John 5:7 . . 
 
 . . . . 217 
 
 John 5 : 13 . . 
 
 . . 134, 135 
 
 John 5 : 14 . . 
 
 ... 165 
 
 John 5 : 18 . . 
 
 . . . . 387 
 
 John 5 : 23 . . 
 
 .... 485 
 
 John 5 : 30 . . 
 
 .482 
 
 John 5:36 . . 
 
 . . 86 
 
 John 5:37 . . 
 
 . '. . . 88 
 
 John 5 : 38 . . 
 
 .... 86 
 
 John 6:6 
 
 . . . 120, 121 
 
 John 6:25 . . 
 
 .... 82 
 
 John 6 : 29 . . 
 
 .... 213 
 
 John 6 : 39, 40 . 
 
 . . . . 213 
 
 John 6:50 . . 
 
 .... 422 
 
 John 6:63 . . 
 
 .... 293 
 
 John 6 : 64 . . 
 
 . . . . 153 
 
 John 6:68 . . 
 
 ... 70, 169 
 
 John 6:69 . . 
 
 . . . . 77 
 
 John 6 : 71 . . 
 
 .... 73 
 
 John 7:3 . . 
 
 .... 199 
 
 John 7:23 . . 
 
 .... 244 
 
 John 7 : 26 . . 
 
 . . . . 47 
 
 John 7 : 32 . . 
 
 . . . . 458 
 
 John 7 : 39 . . 
 
 .... 73 
 
 John 7:45 . . 
 
 . . . . 169 
 
 John 7 : 51 . . 
 
 . . . 260, 467 
 
 John 8 : 14 . . 
 
 .285 
 
 John 8 : 16 . . 
 
 . . . 281, 285 
 
 John 8:20 . . 
 
 . . . . 474 
 
 John 8:30 . . 
 
 . . . . 452 
 
 John 8 : 31 . . 
 
 . . . . 263 
 
 John 8 : 33 . . 
 
 . . . . 88 
 
 John 8:51 . . 
 
 . . . . 261 
 
 John 8:52 . . 
 
 . . . . 47 
 
 John 8:55 . . 
 
 . . . . 282 
 
 John 8:56 . . 
 
 . . . . 217 
 
 John 9:2 . . 
 
 . . . 218, 219 
 
 John 9:4 
 
 ... 98, 328 
 
 John 9:9 
 
 . . . . 345 
 
 John 9 : 18 . . 
 
 . . 330 
 
 John 9:22 . . 
 
 ... 89, 217 
 
 John 9:33 . . 
 
 . 31, 249, 460 
 
206 
 
 INDEX OF PASSAGES KEFEKEED TO. 
 
 
 
 
 
 8BCT10N 
 
 John 10 : 12 
 
 .... 485 
 
 John 10 : 32 . 
 
 
 
 11 
 
 John 10 : 38 
 
 
 
 
 . 285 
 
 John 11 : 2 
 
 
 
 
 142, 144 
 
 John 11 ; 9 
 
 
 
 
 240, 260 
 
 John 11 : 21 
 
 
 
 
 . 248 
 
 John 11 : 27 
 
 
 
 
 
 343 
 
 John 11 : 36 
 
 
 
 
 
 21 
 
 John 11 : 37 
 
 
 
 
 
 206 
 
 John U: 44 
 
 
 
 
 
 156 
 
 John 11 : 50 
 
 
 
 
 
 214 
 
 John 11 : 52 
 
 
 
 
 
 481 
 
 John 11 : 53 
 
 
 
 
 
 210 
 
 John 12 : 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 142 
 
 John 12 : 4 
 
 
 
 
 
 153 
 
 John 12 : 10 
 
 
 
 
 
 205 
 
 John 12 : 17 
 
 
 
 
 48, 127 
 
 John 12 : 18 
 
 
 
 
 53 
 
 John 12 : 23 
 
 
 
 
 . . 216 
 
 John 12 : 24 
 
 
 
 
 . . 260 
 
 John 12 : 26 . 
 
 
 
 250 
 
 , 261, 309 
 
 John 12 ; 29 
 
 
 
 
 112, 390 
 
 John 12 : 32 
 
 
 
 
 ■- §2 
 
 John 12 : 36 
 
 
 
 
 . 293 
 
 Johti 13 : 5 
 
 
 
 
 . 431 
 
 John 13 : 8 
 
 
 
 
 . 158 
 
 John 13 : 9 
 
 
 
 
 . 479 
 
 John 13 : 11 
 
 
 
 
 . 126 
 
 John 13 : 12 
 
 
 
 
 48 
 
 John 13 : 17 
 
 
 
 
 . 268 
 
 John 13 : 23 
 
 
 
 
 . 34 
 
 John 14 : 3 
 
 
 
 
 . 309 
 
 John 14 : 16 
 
 
 
 
 . 250 
 
 John 14 : 19 
 
 
 
 
 . 229 
 
 John 14 : 26 
 
 
 
 
 59 
 
 John 14 : 28 
 
 
 
 
 . 248 
 
 John 15 : 6 
 
 
 
 
 43 
 
 John 15 : 8 
 
 
 
 
 50, 213 
 
 John 15 : 9 
 
 
 
 
 98 
 
 John 15 : 12, 13 
 
 
 
 
 . 213 
 
 John 15 : 20 
 
 
 
 
 242, 295 
 
 John 15 : 22 
 
 
 
 
 . 249 
 
 John 16 : 2 
 
 
 
 124 
 
 148, 216 
 
 John 16 : 3 
 
 
 
 
 . 232 
 
 John 16 : 7 
 
 
 
 
 e 
 
 5,214 
 
 SECTION 
 
 John 16 : 8 435 
 
 John 16 : 13 65 
 
 John 16 : 23 257 
 
 John 16 : 24 52, 103 
 
 John 16 : 32 216 
 
 John 17 : 2 199, 220 
 
 John 17 : 3 213 
 
 John 17 : 5 ... .55, 106 
 
 John 17 : 11 181 
 
 John 17 ; 19 103 
 
 John 17 : 24 55 
 
 John 18 : 16 90 
 
 John 18 : 18 90 
 
 John 18 : 23 245 
 
 John 18 : 24 48 
 
 John 18: 28 14 
 
 John 18 : 30 241, 432 
 
 John 18 : 39 213 
 
 John 19 : 6 109 
 
 John 19 : 11 249 
 
 John 19 : 12 263 
 
 John 19 : 30 48, 109 
 
 John 20 : 29 232 
 
 John 21 : 19 120 
 
 John 21 : 22, 23 326 
 
 John 21 : 25 112, 390 
 
 Acts 1:3 105, 122 
 
 Acts 1 : 10 90 
 
 Acts 1 : 16 30, 144 
 
 Acts 1 : 25 371 
 
 Acts 2 : 13 ..... 84, 444 
 
 Acts 2:21 303 
 
 Acts 2 : 45 315 
 
 Acts 2:47 125 
 
 Acts 3:2 24 
 
 Acts 3 : 12 404 
 
 Acts 3 : 18 114 
 
 Acts 3 : 19 195 
 
 Acts 3 : 26 415, 442 
 
 Acts 4 : 14 368 
 
 Acts 4 : 20 484 
 
 Acts 4 : 27 92 
 
 Acts 4 : 30 415, 417 
 
 Acts 4 : 31 92 
 
INDEX OF PASSAGES REFEKEED TO. 
 
 207 
 
 SECTION 
 
 Acts 4 : 32 112 
 
 Acts 4 : 34 127 
 
 Acts 4 : 35 315 
 
 Acts 4 : 37 127 
 
 Acts 5:3 389 
 
 Acts 5:5 39 
 
 Acts 5 : 14 423 
 
 Acts 5 : 17 424 
 
 Acts 5 : 24 .' 179, 343 
 
 Acts 5 : 26 224 
 
 Acts 5 : 28 74 
 
 Acts 5:30 447 
 
 Acts 5:35 72 
 
 Acts 5 : 38 230 
 
 Acts 5 : 39 225, 242 
 
 Acts 5 : 42 457 
 
 Acts 6:3 317 
 
 Acts 6 : 11 86 
 
 Acts 7:6 485 
 
 Acts 7:7 308 
 
 Acts 7 : 12 460 
 
 Acts 7 : 18 331 
 
 Acts 7 : 19 398 
 
 Acts 7 : 26 23, 141 
 
 Acts 7 : 34 161 
 
 Acts 7 : 35 82 
 
 Acts 7 : 36 37, 42 
 
 Acts 7 : 42 368 
 
 Acts 7 : 44 89 
 
 Acts 7 : 52 52 
 
 Acts 7 : 60 41 
 
 Acts 8:11 108 
 
 Acts 8 : 20 176, 452 
 
 Acts 8 : 22 276 
 
 Acts 8 : 23 460 
 
 Acts 8 : 27 442 
 
 Acts 8 : 31 . . 178, 179, 254, 267 
 
 Acts 9:3 415 
 
 Acts 9 : 12 146 
 
 Acts 9 : 21 89 
 
 Acts 9 : 22 . . .89, 120, 121, 447 
 
 Acts 9 : 23 210 
 
 Acts 9 : 26 439 
 
 Acts 9 : 32 360 
 
 Acts 9 : 33 131 
 
 BEOTIOK 
 
 Acts 9:34 13 
 
 Acts 9:39 29 
 
 Acts 10 : 1, 2 420 
 
 Acts 10 : 3 146 
 
 Acts 10 : 7 127 
 
 Acts 10 : 17 . . . 154, 179, 343 
 
 Acts 10 : 22 123 
 
 Acts 10 : 23 138 
 
 Acts 10 : 25 404 
 
 Acts 10 : 33 ... 139, 366, 447 
 
 Acts 10 : 35 151, 423 
 
 Acts 10:41 424 
 
 Acts 10 : 44 119 
 
 Acts 10 : 47 402 
 
 Acts 11 : 3 146 
 
 Acts 11:15 109,415 
 
 Acts 11 : 17 98 
 
 Acts 12 : 10 427 
 
 Acts 12 : 18 452 
 
 Acts 12 : 20 108 
 
 Acts 13 : 16 ...... 138 
 
 Acts 13 : 27 137 
 
 Acts 13 : 28 437, 485 
 
 Acts 13 : 32 427 
 
 Acts 13 : 33 141 
 
 Acts 13 : 40 206, 209 
 
 Acts 14 : 9 400 
 
 Acts 14 : 18 403, 483 
 
 Acts 14 : 19 . . . 112, 134, 138 
 
 Acts 14:27 350 
 
 Acts 15 : 10 217, 375 
 
 Acts 15 : 12 41 
 
 Acts 15 : 13 37, 98 
 
 Acts 15 : 14 350 
 
 Acts 15 : 17 195 
 
 Acts 15 : 20 404 
 
 Acts 15 : 21 17 
 
 Acts 15 : 22 449 
 
 Acts 15 : 24 . . 86, 121, 122, 229 
 
 Acts 15:26 343 
 
 Acts 15 : 28 386 
 
 Acts 15 : 29 121, 122 
 
 Acts 16 : 16 443 
 
 Acts 16 : 18 13 
 
 Acts 16 : 23 145 
 
208 
 
 INDBX OF PASSAGES EEFEEEED TO. 
 
 SECTION 
 
 Acts 16 : 27 ..... 37, 390 
 
 Acts 17 : 3 30 
 
 Acts 17 : 6 16, 485 
 
 Acts 17:11 ..... .' Ill 
 
 Acts 17 : 13 119 
 
 Acts 17 = 18 . {l«M78,n9, 
 
 Acts 17 : 21 368, 374 
 
 Acts 17 : 27 ... 258, 276, 437 
 
 Acts 18 : 2 108 
 
 Acts 18 : 9 98, 164 
 
 Acts 18 : 10 398 
 
 Acts 18 : 14 153, 248 
 
 Acts 18 : 18 449 
 
 Acts 18 : 20 452 
 
 Acts 18 : 23 119 
 
 Acts 19 : 9 119 
 
 Acts 19 : 27 100, 481 
 
 Acts 19 ; 32 89, 348 
 
 Acts 20 : 3 153, 400 
 
 Acts 20 : 7 153 
 
 Acts 20: 16 258,475 
 
 Acts 20 : 24 194 
 
 Acts 20 : 32 426 
 
 Acts 20 : 35 374 
 
 Acts 20 : 38 72 
 
 Acts 21 : 1 138 
 
 Acts 21 : 3 130 
 
 Acts 21 : 12 404 
 
 Acts 21 : 13 481 
 
 Acts 21 : 16 319 
 
 Acts 21 : 24 199 
 
 Acts 22 : 4 122 
 
 Acts 22 : 17 453 
 
 Acts 22 : 22 32 
 
 Acts 22 : 24 145 
 
 Acts 23 : 1 137 
 
 Acts 23 : 9 271 
 
 Acts 23 : 10 224 
 
 Acts 23 : 12 330 
 
 Acts 23 : 13 146 
 
 Acts 23 : 15 ... 200, 399, 440 
 Acts 23 : 17, 18, 19 . . . . 368 
 Acts 23 : 20 .... 404, 440 
 Acts 23 : 26 388 
 
 
 SBCTION 
 
 Acts 23 : 30 . 
 
 ; . . 44, 99, 112 
 
 Acts 23 : 35 . 
 
 145 
 
 Acts 24 : 10 . 
 
 131 
 
 Acts 24 : 11 . 
 
 152 
 
 Acts 24 : 19 . 
 
 . ... 30, 258 
 
 Acts 24 : 23 . 
 
 145 
 
 Acts 25 : 10 . 
 
 84 
 
 Acts 25 : 11 . 
 
 394 
 
 Acts 25 : 13 . 
 
 . . . . 142, 145 
 
 Acts 25 ; 16 . 
 
 . . Ill, 333, 344 
 
 Acts 25 : 22 . 
 
 33 
 
 Acts 25 : 25 . 
 
 101 
 
 Acts 25 : 26 . 
 
 368 
 
 Acts 26 : 1 
 
 13 
 
 Acts 26 : 4 
 
 427 
 
 Acts 26 : 5 
 
 263 
 
 Acts 26 : 6 
 
 . . ; . . 427 
 
 Acts 26 : 8 
 
 277 
 
 Acts 26 : 11 . 
 
 . . . . . 23 
 
 Acts 26 : 13 . 
 
 146 
 
 Acts 26 : 18 . 
 
 397 
 
 Acts 26 : 22 . 
 
 485 
 
 Acts 26 : 26 . 
 
 . ... 84, 482 
 
 Acts 26 : 29 . 
 
 . . . . 179, 481 
 
 Acts 26 : 32 . 
 
 . ... 30, 101 
 
 Acts 27 : 1 . 
 
 404 
 
 Acts 27 : 3 
 
 139 
 
 Acts 27 : 9 
 
 108 
 
 Acts 27 : 10 . 
 
 . . . . 100, 481 
 
 Acts 27 : 12 . 
 
 . . . . 258, 276 
 
 Acts 27 : 13 . 
 
 . . 134, 137, 138 
 
 Acts 27 : 21 . 
 
 30 
 
 Acts 27 : 29 . 
 
 224 
 
 Acts 27 : 30 . 
 
 440 
 
 Acts 27 : 33 . 
 
 331 
 
 Acts 27 : 39 . 
 
 258 
 
 Acts 27 : 43 . 
 
 42 
 
 Acts 28 : 6 
 
 100 
 
 Acts 28 : 19 . 
 
 440 
 
 Acts 28 : 23 . 
 
 129 
 
 Acts 28 : 26 . 
 
 167 
 
 Acts 28 :-27 . 
 
 . . . . 197, 199 
 
 Acts 28 : 30 . 
 
 39 
 
 Rom. 1 : 10 . 
 
 . . . . 276, 371 
 
INDEX OF PASSAGES EEFfiKEED TO. 
 
 209 
 
 
 
 
 
 SECTION 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 SUCTION 
 
 Rom. 1:11, 197,409 
 
 Rom. 9; 17 197 
 
 Rom. 1 : 20 
 
 
 
 
 . . 411 
 
 Rom. 9 .: 18 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 313 
 
 Rom. 1 : 24 
 
 
 
 
 . . 400 
 
 Rom. 9; 27 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 285 
 
 Rom. 2:4. 
 
 
 
 
 . 11, 425 
 
 Rom. 10 : 14 
 
 
 
 
 
 169, 170 
 
 Rom. 2 : 12 
 
 
 
 
 . 54, 301 
 
 Rom. 10 : 15 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 475 
 
 Rom. 2:27 
 
 
 
 
 . . 427 
 
 Rom. 10 : 18, 1 
 
 ) 
 
 
 
 
 . 468 
 
 Rom. 3:4. 
 
 
 f 176, 177, 195, 
 I 199, 476 
 
 Eom. 11 : 1 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 176 
 
 
 Rom-. 11 : 6 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 243 
 
 Rom. 3:5. 
 
 
 .... 428 
 
 Rom. 11 : 8 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 400 
 
 Rom. 3:6. 
 
 
 
 
 . 176, 476 
 
 Rom. 11 : 11 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 176 
 
 Rom. 3 ! 23 
 
 
 
 
 54 
 
 Rom. 11: 14 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 276 
 
 Rom. 3 : 26 
 
 
 
 
 . . 409 
 
 Rom. 11 : 16 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 273 
 
 Rom. 3 : 31 
 
 
 
 
 . 176, 476 
 
 Rom. 12 : 2 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 107 
 
 Rom. 4:2. 
 
 
 
 
 242, 245 
 
 Rom. 12 : 3 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 411 
 
 Rom. 4 : 12 
 
 
 
 
 . . 481 
 
 Rom. 12 : 15 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 365 
 
 Rom. 4 ; 13 
 
 
 
 
 . . 395 
 
 Rom. 13 : 5 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 481 
 
 Rom. 4:14 
 
 
 
 
 . 243, 273 
 
 Eom. 13 : 8 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 489 
 
 Rom. 4 : 16 
 
 
 
 
 . . 481 
 
 Rom. 13,: 11 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 378 
 
 Rom. .4 : 19 
 
 
 
 
 . . 145 
 
 Rom. 14:2 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 387 
 
 Rom. 4 : 21 
 
 
 
 
 . . . 145 
 
 Roin. 14 : 9 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 41 
 
 Rom. 5:1. 
 
 
 
 
 . 134, 136 
 
 Rom. 14 : 13 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 395 
 
 Rom. 5:5. 
 
 
 
 
 . . 74 
 
 Eom. 14 : 21 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 393 
 
 Rom. 5:7. 
 
 
 
 
 . . 69 
 
 Eom. 15 : 5 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 . . 176 
 
 Rom. 5:9 . 
 
 
 
 
 . . 475 
 
 Bom. 15 : 8 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 390 
 
 Rom. 5 : 10 
 
 
 
 
 . . 244 
 
 Rom. 15 : 13 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 176 
 
 Rom. 5 : 12 
 
 
 
 
 . 54,229 
 
 Rom. 15 : 14 
 
 
 
 
 . 154 
 
 iBom. 6:2. 
 
 
 
 
 60, 176, 294 
 
 Rom. 15 : 22 
 
 
 
 
 28, 401, 402 
 
 Rom. 6 : 15 
 
 
 
 
 . . 176 
 
 Rom. 16 : 7 . 
 
 
 
 
 . . . 82 
 
 Rom. 6 : 16 
 
 
 
 
 . . 313 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Rom. 7:3. 
 
 
 
 
 69, 262, 398 
 
 1 Cor. 1 : 4 
 
 
 
 
 . 134, 135 
 
 Rom. 7:4. 
 
 
 
 
 . . 409 
 
 1 Cor. 1 : 10 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 200 
 
 Rom. 7:6. 
 
 
 
 
 . . 481 
 
 1 Cor. 1 : 17 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 481 
 
 Rom. 7:7. 
 
 
 
 
 . . 176 
 
 1 Cor. 1 : 18 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 126 
 
 Rom. 7 : 13 
 
 
 
 
 . . 176 
 
 1 Cor. 1:21 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 231 
 
 Rom. 8:9. 
 
 
 
 
 . . 469 
 
 1 Cor. 1 : 22 
 
 
 
 
 
 231, 232 
 
 Rom. 8 : 10 
 
 
 
 
 . . 242 
 
 1 Cor. 1 : 26 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 425 
 
 Rom. 8 : 13 
 
 
 
 
 . . 72 
 
 1 Cor. 2:7. 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 156 
 
 Rom. 8 : 17 
 
 
 
 
 . 243, 273 
 
 1 Cor. 2 : 10 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 156 
 
 Rom. 8:24 
 
 
 
 
 . . 290 
 
 1 Cor. 2 : 15 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 475 
 
 Rom. 8 : 25 
 
 
 
 
 . . 261 
 
 1 Cor.. 3 : 12 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 240 
 
 Rom. 8:29 
 
 
 
 
 . . 409 
 
 1 Cor. 3 : 17 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 240 
 
 Rom. 9:1. 
 
 
 
 
 . . 452 
 
 1 Cor. 4:2. 
 
 
 
 
 
 210, 212 
 
 Rom. 9:3. 
 
 
 
 
 . . 33 
 
 1 Cor. 4:3. 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 214 
 
 Rom. 9 : 11. 
 
 
 
 
 . . 454 
 
 1 Cor. 4:5. 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 322 
 
 Eom. .9 : U , 
 
 
 
 
 . . 176 
 
 1 Cor. 4:6. 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 198 
 
210 
 
 INDEX OF PASSAGES KEPBREED TO. 
 
 
 
 
 
 SBOT:OIf 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 SECTION 
 
 1 Cor. 4:7 282 
 
 1 Cor. 15 : 4 86 
 
 1 Cor. 4 : 8 . . 
 
 
 
 
 27, 54 
 
 1 Cor. 15 : 18 . 
 
 
 
 . 139 
 
 1 Cor. 4 : 12 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 438 
 
 1 Cor. 15 : 29 . 
 
 
 
 230, 232 
 
 1 Cor. 4 : 18 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 440 
 
 1 Cor. 15 : 36 . 
 
 
 
 . 313 
 
 1 Cor. 4 : 19 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 250 
 
 1 Cor. 15 : 37 . 
 
 
 152 
 
 259, 313 
 
 1 Cor. 4 : 21 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 171 
 
 1 Cor. 15 : 51, 52 
 
 
 
 59 
 
 1 Cor. 5': 8 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 237 
 
 1 Cor. 16 : 3 . 
 
 
 
 . 310 
 
 1 Cor. 5 : 10 . 
 
 
 
 31 
 
 249, 479 
 
 1 Cor. 16 : 4 . 
 
 
 
 . 405 
 
 1 Cor. 5 ; 11 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 44 
 
 1 Cor. 16 : 10 . 
 
 
 
 205, 209 
 
 1 Cor. 6 : 15 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 176 
 
 1 Cor. 16 : 11 . 
 
 
 
 . 166 
 
 1 Cor. 7:5 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 273 
 
 
 
 
 
 ICor. 7:8 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 273 
 
 2 Cor. 1:8 . 
 
 
 
 371, 401 
 
 1 Cor. 7 : 11 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 282 
 
 2 Cor. '1:9 . 
 
 
 
 
 80, 103 
 
 1 Cor. 7 : 25 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 446 
 
 2 Cor. 1 : 10 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 77 
 
 1 Cor. 7 : 28 . 
 
 
 
 
 50 
 
 2 Cor. 1 : 17 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 218 
 
 1 Cor. 7 : 36 . 
 
 
 
 
 112, 182 
 
 2 Cor. 2:1 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 395 
 
 1 Cor. 7 : 39 . 
 
 
 
 
 79, 260 
 
 2 Cor. 2:3 . 
 
 
 
 
 30 
 
 1 Cor. 7 : 40 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 260 
 
 2 Cor. 2:5 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 240 
 
 ICor. 8:5 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 281 
 
 2 Cor. 2:7 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 371 
 
 1 Cor. 8:9 . 
 
 
 
 
 206, 209 
 
 2 Cor. 2:10 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 301 
 
 1 Cor. 8 : 10 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 411 
 
 2 Cor. 2:18 . 
 
 
 
 
 80, 396 
 
 1 Cor. 9:1 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 169 
 
 2 Cor. 2:15 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 125 
 
 1 Cor. 9 : 4, 6 
 
 
 
 
 . 468 
 
 2 Cor. 2 : 17 . 
 
 
 
 
 20 
 
 1 Cor. 9 : 10 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 400 
 
 2 Cor. 3 : 13 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 414 
 
 ICor. 9:11 . 
 
 
 
 
 246, 268 
 
 2 Cor. 4:3 . 
 
 
 
 
 84 
 
 1 Cor. 9 : 16 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 285 
 
 2 Cor. 4:16 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 284 
 
 1 Cor. 9 : 18 . 
 
 
 
 
 . . 213 
 
 2 Cor. 5 : 13 . 
 
 
 
 
 47 
 
 1 Cor. 9 : 26 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 445 
 
 2 Cor. 5 : 20 . 
 
 
 
 
 445, 446 
 
 1 Cor. 10 : 12 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 206 
 
 2 Cor. 6 : 9, 10 
 
 
 
 
 . 446 
 
 1 Cor. 10 : 27, 28 
 
 
 
 
 . 256 
 
 2 Cor. 7:5 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 80 
 
 1 Cor. 11 : 2 . 
 
 
 
 
 75 
 
 2 Cor. 7:8 . 
 
 
 
 
 85, 284 
 
 1 Cor. 11 : 18 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 16 
 
 2 Cor. 7:12 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 284 
 
 1 Cor. 11 : 21 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 109 
 
 2 Cor. 8:6 . 
 
 
 
 
 200, 411 
 
 1 Cor. 11 : 22 . 
 
 
 
 
 410, 468 
 
 2 Cor. 8:9 . 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 7, 41, 438 
 
 1 Cor. 11 : 25 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 105 
 
 2 Cor. 8 : 10 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 481 
 
 1 Cor. 11 : 26 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 312 
 
 2 Cor. 8 : 11 . 
 
 
 
 
 394, 400 
 
 1 Cor. 11 : 29 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 436 
 
 2 Cor. 9:3 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 431 
 
 1 Cor. 12 : 2 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 315 
 
 2 Cor. 9:7 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 12 
 
 1 Cor. 12 : 15 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 486 
 
 2 Cor. 9:12 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 20 
 
 1 Cor. 12 : 19 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 273 
 
 2 Cor. 10 : 9 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 372 
 
 1 Cor. 13 : 2 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 371 
 
 2 Cor. 10 : 15 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 378 
 
 1 Cor. 14 : 5 . 
 
 
 1 
 
 71 
 
 252, 253 
 
 2 Cor. 11 : 1 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 27 
 
 1 Cor. 14 : 10 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 259 
 
 2 Cor. 11:3 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 224 
 
 1 Cor. 14 : 12 . 
 
 
 
 
 210, 229 
 
 2 Cor. 11 : 6 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 284 
 
 1 Cor. 14 : 39 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 402 
 
 2 Cor. 11 : 15 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 282 
 
INDEX OP PASSAGES EBPEEEED TO. 
 
 211 
 
 SUCTION 
 
 2 Cor. 11 : 16 273 
 
 2 Cor. 11 : 25 ... 39, 80, 88 
 
 2 Cor. 12 : 9 88 
 
 2 Cor. 12:11 284 
 
 2 Cor. 12 : 14 376 
 
 2 Cor. 12 : 17 .... 78, 88 
 2 Cor. 12 : 20 .... 224, 475 
 
 2 Cor. 12 : 21 224 
 
 2 Cor. 13 : 5 469 
 
 Gal. 1:6 8, 10, 424 
 
 Gal. 1 : 7 274 
 
 Gal. 1:8. . . . 278, 281, 285 
 
 Gal. 1 : 10 248 
 
 Gal. 1 : 11 13 
 
 Gal. 1 : 19 274 
 
 Gal. 1 : 22 429, 432 
 
 Gal. 1 : 23 34, 127 
 
 Gal. 2:2 227 
 
 Gal. 2:3 438 
 
 Gal. 2 : 4 199 
 
 Gal. 2 : 9 217, 385 
 
 Gal. 2 : 13 236 
 
 Gal. 2:14 343 
 
 Gal. 2 : 17 ... 176, 177, 242 
 
 Gal. 2 : 21 243 
 
 Gal. 3:2 387 
 
 Gal. 3 : 17 411 
 
 Gal. 3 : 19 332 
 
 Gal. 3 : 21 176 
 
 Gal. 3 : 23 120, 406 
 
 Gal. 4 : 4 293 
 
 Gal. 4:8 85, 485 
 
 Gal. 4 : 11 224, 227 
 
 Gal. 4 : 15 249 
 
 Gal. 4 : 17 198 
 
 Gal. 4 : 18 384, 481 
 
 Gal. 4 : 20 33 
 
 Gal. 5:2 250 
 
 Gal. 5 : 3 . . . . 124, 125, 379 
 
 Gal. 5 : 4 11 
 
 Gal. 5 ; 7 402 
 
 Gal. 5 : 11 245 
 
 Gal. 5 : 12 27 
 
 Gal. 5:15 209 
 
 Gal. 5:17 
 Gal. 5 : 18 
 Gal. 6:1. 
 Gal. 6:6. 
 Gal. 6:9. 
 Gal. 6:13 
 Gal. 6 : 14 
 
 Eph. 1:9. 
 Eph. 1 : 12 
 Eph. 1 : 16 
 Eph. 1 : 17 
 Eph. 2:4 . 
 Eph. 3 : 14 
 Eph. 4 : 18 
 Eph. 5:4. 
 Eph. 6 : 11 
 Eph. 6 : 17 
 Eph. 6 : 22 
 
 Phil. 1:6. 
 PhU. 1 : 10 
 Phil. 1 : 18 
 Phil. 1 : 23 
 Phil. 1 : 29 
 Phil. 2:2. 
 Phil. 2:6. 
 Phil. 2:7. 
 Phil. 2 : 12 
 Phil. 2 : 17 
 Phil. 2 : 28 
 Phil. 3:1. 
 Phil. 3:8. 
 PhU. 3 : 10 
 Phil. 3 : 11, 12 
 Phil. 3 : 16 
 Phil. 4:5. 
 Phil. 4:8. 
 Phil. 4 ; 11 
 
 Col. 1 : 3, 4 
 
 Col. 1:8. 
 
 Col. 1 : 21 
 
 Col. 2:5. 
 
 Col. 2:6. 
 
 SECTION 
 
 . 222 
 . 242 
 206, 285 
 . 123 
 . 486 
 . 124 
 176, 177, 476 
 
 139 
 409 
 203 
 200 
 
 39 
 203 
 155 
 
 32 
 414 
 295 
 
 44 
 
 60 
 . 409 
 
 60 
 
 107, 413 
 
 . 481 
 
 . 217 
 
 . 394 
 
 . 145 
 
 . 479 
 
 . 284 
 
 44 
 
 96 
 
 . 425 
 
 . 397 
 
 253, 276 
 
 . 364 
 
 . 425 
 
 . 301 
 
 46, 55 
 
 134, 136, 439 
 ... 144 
 . . 155, 420 
 ... 284 
 ... 293 
 
212 
 
 INDEX OF PASSAGES KEFEEEBD TO. 
 
 Col. 2:8 . 
 
 . . 206 
 
 424, 472 
 
 Col. 3 : 18 . 
 
 32 
 
 Col. 4:8 . 
 
 
 44 
 
 Col. 4:12 . 
 
 
 . 203 
 
 Col. 4:16 . 
 
 
 
 . 205 
 
 Col. 4: 17 . 
 
 
 
 205, 209 
 
 1 Thess. 1 : 8 
 
 
 
 . 369 
 
 1 Thess. 1 : 10 
 
 
 
 . 426 
 
 1 Thess. 2 : 8 
 
 
 
 . 481 
 
 1 Thess. 2 : 12 
 
 
 
 . 412 
 
 1 Thess. 2 : 16 
 
 
 
 . 411 
 
 1 Thess. 3 : 5 
 
 
 
 227, 406 
 
 1 Thess. 3 : 8 
 
 
 
 . 247 
 
 1 Thess. 3 : 10 
 
 
 
 . 412 
 
 1 Thess. 3 : 11, 
 
 12 . 
 
 
 . 176 
 
 1 Thess. 4 : 3 
 
 
 
 386 
 
 1 Thess. 4 : 18 
 
 
 
 . 237 
 
 1 Thess. 5 : 4 
 
 
 
 218, 219 
 
 1 Thess. 5 : 10 
 
 
 
 252, 253 
 
 1 Thess. 5 : 15 
 
 
 
 206, 209 
 
 1 Thess. 5 : 19 
 
 
 
 . 180 
 
 1 Thess. 5 : 23 
 
 
 
 . 176 
 
 2 Thess. 2:2 
 
 
 . 412 
 
 2Thess.2:3 . . . 
 
 
 . 166 
 
 2 Thess. 2 : 4 
 
 
 
 . 371 
 
 2 Thess, 2 : 17 
 
 
 
 . 176 
 
 2 Thess. 3 : 6 
 
 
 
 . 176 
 
 2 Thess. 3 : 11 
 
 
 
 16 
 
 2 Thess. 3 : 16 
 
 
 
 175, 176 
 
 1 Tim. 4 : 4 
 
 
 
 . 436 
 
 1 Tim. 4 : 8 
 
 
 
 . 439 
 
 1 Tim. 4 : 13 
 
 
 
 . 326 
 
 1 Tim. 5 : 21 
 
 
 
 . 447 
 
 1 Tim. 6 : 3 
 
 
 
 469, 470 
 
 1 Tim. 6 : 17 
 
 
 
 . . 102 
 
 2 Tim. 1 : 8, 9 
 
 
 
 . . 426 
 
 2 Tim. 1 : 16 
 
 
 
 . . 176 
 
 2 Tim. 1 : 18 
 
 
 
 . . 176 
 
 2 Tim. 2 : 2 
 
 
 
 . . 376 
 
 2 Tim. 2 : 5 
 
 
 
 . 260, 287 
 
 2 Tim. 2 : 12 
 
 • ■ • ^ 
 
 i54 
 
 , 255, 256 
 
 
 
 
 SECTION 
 
 2 Tim. 2 
 
 13 . . . 
 
 . . 287 
 
 2 Tim. 2 
 
 14 . . . 
 
 
 . 479 
 
 2 Tim. 2 
 
 18 . . . 
 
 
 112, 390 
 
 2 Tim. 2 
 
 26 . . . 
 
 
 225, 344 
 
 2 Tim. 3 
 
 15 . . . 
 
 
 .. 17 
 
 2 Tim. 4 
 
 7 . . . 
 
 
 74,85 
 
 2 Tim. 4 
 
 10 . . . 
 
 
 . 137 
 
 2 Tim. 4 
 
 11 . . . 134 
 
 138, 449 
 
 Tit. 1:6 469, 470 
 
 Tit. 1 : 11 474 
 
 Tit.2:8 368 
 
 Philem. 4 203 
 
 Philem. 11 44 
 
 Philem. 13, 14 33 
 
 Philem. 20 176 
 
 Heb. 2:2 427 
 
 Heb. 2:3 436 
 
 Heb. 2:8 415 
 
 Heb. 2:10 149 
 
 Heb. 2 : 13 94 
 
 Heb. 2 : 17 409 
 
 Heb. 2:18 443 
 
 Heb. 3:8 162 
 
 Heb. 3 : 11 272 
 
 Heb. 3 : 12 . . 109, 206, 209, 415 
 
 Heb. 3 : 15 415 
 
 Heb. 3 : 18 112 
 
 Heb. 4:1 224 
 
 Heb. 4:2 84 
 
 Heb. 4:3 272 
 
 Heb. 4:5 272 
 
 Heb. 4:7 475 
 
 Heb. 4:8 248 
 
 Heb. 5:1 124, 125 
 
 Heb. 5:4 125 
 
 Heb. 5:5 375 
 
 Heb. 5:8 437 
 
 Heb. 5 : 11 377 
 
 Heb. 5 : 12 400 
 
 Heb. 6:9 . 284 
 
 Heb. 6 : 10 218, 371 
 
 Heb. 6 : 14 272, 448 
 
INDEX OF PASSAGES EEFERBBD TO. 
 
 213 
 
 
 
 
 
 SECTION 
 
 
 
 
 SECTION 
 
 Heb. 6:17 425 
 
 Jas. 4:2 108, 408 
 
 Heb. 7:6 . . 
 
 
 
 
 . . 82 
 
 Jas. 4:3 . . 
 
 
 
 . . . 408 
 
 Heb. 7:9. . 
 
 
 
 82 
 
 , 383, 426 
 
 Jas. 4 : 13, 14 . 
 
 
 
 . . 294 
 
 Heb. 7:11 . 
 
 
 
 
 . . 481 
 
 Jas. 6 : 15 . . 
 
 
 
 . . 431 
 
 Heb. 7:13 . 
 
 
 
 
 . . 88 
 
 
 
 
 
 Heb. 7:25 . 
 
 
 
 
 . . 387 
 
 IPet. 1:2 . 
 
 
 
 . 175, 176 
 
 Heb. 7:27 . 
 
 
 
 
 . . 139 
 
 1 Pet. 1 : 24 . 
 
 
 
 . . 43 
 
 Heb. 8:3 . . 
 
 
 
 
 . . 318 
 
 1 Pet. 2 : 16 . 
 
 
 
 . . . 446 
 
 Heb. 8:6 . . 
 
 
 
 
 . . 82 
 
 1 Pet. 2 : 18 . 
 
 
 
 . . . 479 
 
 Heb. 8:9 . . 
 
 
 
 
 . . 461 
 
 IPet. 3:1 . 
 
 
 
 . . 199, 281 
 
 Heb. 9 : 12 . 
 
 
 
 
 . . 145 
 
 1 Pet. 3:3 . 
 
 
 
 . . . 479 
 
 Heb. 9 : 18 . 
 
 
 
 
 . . 88 
 
 1 Pet. 3:7 . 
 
 
 
 . . . 409 
 
 Heb. 9:26 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 31, 249 
 
 IPet. 3:14 . 
 
 25S 
 
 J, 2 
 
 73, 280, 286 
 
 Heb. 10 : 2 . . 
 
 
 
 
 . 230, 232 
 
 1 Pet. 3 : 17 . 
 
 
 
 . . . 259 
 
 Heb. 10 : 9 . . 
 
 
 
 
 . . 88 
 
 IPet. 3:18 
 
 
 
 . . 145 
 
 Heb. 10 : 15 . 
 
 
 
 
 . .. 106 
 
 1 Pet. 4 : 12 . 
 
 
 
 . . 440 
 
 Heb. 10 : 25 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 108, 293 
 
 IPet. 4:17 . 
 
 
 
 . . 400 
 
 Heb. 10 : 36 . 
 
 
 
 
 . . 219 
 
 
 
 
 
 Heb. 11 : 3 . . 
 
 
 
 
 . 107, 411 
 
 2 Pet. 1:2 . 
 
 
 
 . . 176 
 
 Heb. 11 : 5 . . 
 
 
 
 
 . . 390 
 
 2 Pet. 1:9 . 
 
 
 
 ; . 469 
 
 Heb. 11 : 15 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 248 
 
 2 Pet. 1 : 17 . 
 
 
 
 . . 65 
 
 Heb. 11 : 28 . 
 
 
 
 
 80,88 
 
 2 Pet. 1:18 . 
 
 
 
 . . 146 
 
 Heb. 12 : 1 . . 
 
 
 
 
 . . 160 
 
 
 
 
 
 Heb. 12 : 6 . . 
 
 
 
 
 . . 313 
 
 1 John 1:1 . 
 
 
 
 . . 86 
 
 Heb. 12 : 25 . 
 
 
 
 
 . . 209 
 
 1 John 1:9 . 
 
 
 
 . .218,263 
 
 Heb. 13 : 2 . . 
 
 
 
 
 . . 147 
 
 1 John 1:10 . 
 
 
 
 . . 88 
 
 Heb. 13 : 5 . . 
 
 
 
 
 172, 489 
 
 1 John 2:6 . 
 
 
 
 . . 79 
 
 Heb. 13 : 9 . . 
 
 
 
 
 . 481 
 
 1 John 2:7 . 
 
 
 
 . . 28 
 
 Heb. 13 : 21 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 176 
 
 1 John 2:9 . 
 1 John 2:21 . 
 
 
 
 . 112, 390 
 . . 486 
 
 Jas. 1:1 . . 
 
 
 
 
 . 388 
 
 1 John 2 : 22 . 
 
 
 
 . 473 
 
 Jas. 1:4 . . 
 
 
 
 
 . 219 
 
 1 John 2 : 27 . 
 
 
 
 . 216, 220 
 
 Jas. 1 : 5 . . 
 
 
 
 
 . 269 
 
 1 John 3:1 . 
 
 
 
 . . 213 
 
 Jas. 1 : 11 . . 
 
 
 
 
 43 
 
 1 John 3: 10 . 
 
 
 
 . . 486 
 
 Jas. 1 : 18 . . 
 
 
 
 
 . 409 
 
 1 John 3 ; 13 
 
 
 
 . . 277 
 
 Jas. 1 : 19 . . 
 
 
 
 
 . 413 
 
 ■1 John 3: 18 . 
 
 
 
 . . 475 
 
 Jas. 1 : 22 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 479 
 
 1 John 3: 22 . 
 
 
 
 . 299, 314 
 
 Jas. 1 : 24 . . 
 
 
 
 
 t3, 78, 79 
 
 1 John 4:2 . 
 
 
 
 . . 460 
 
 Jas. 1 : 26 . 
 
 
 
 
 261, 385 
 
 . 1 John 4:3 . 
 
 
 
 . 469, 470 
 
 Jas. 1 : 27 . . . 
 
 
 
 
 . 386 
 
 1 John 4:6 . 
 
 
 
 . . 470 
 
 Jas. 2:8 ... 
 
 
 
 
 . 67 
 
 1 John 4:7 . 
 
 
 
 . . 160 
 
 Jas. 2 : 10 . . . 
 
 
 
 
 50, 307 
 
 1 John 4 : 9, 10 
 
 
 
 . . 86 
 
 Jas. 2:15 . . . 
 
 
 
 
 250, 420 
 
 1 John 5 : 12 , 
 
 
 
 . . 486 
 
 Jas. 2:16 
 
 
 
 
 . 250 
 
 1 John 5 : 15 . . 
 
 
 
 . . 247 
 
 Jas. 2:26 
 
 
 
 
 . 293 
 
 1 John 5 : 20 . 
 
 
 
 . . 198 
 
214 
 
 INDEX OF PASSAGES EEFEREED TO. 
 
 SECTION 
 
 2 John 6 213 
 
 2 John 8 206, 209 
 
 2 John 10 256 
 
 3 John 4 213, 460 
 
 3 John 6 141 
 
 Jude 17 422 
 
 Rev. 1:3 423 
 
 Rev. 1 : 18 429, 431 
 
 Rev. 2:5 275 
 
 Rev. 2 : 11 487 
 
 Rev. 2 : 25 332 
 
 Rev. 3:2 28 
 
 Rev. 3:3 88 
 
 Rev. 3:9 205 
 
 Rev. 3 : 11 293 
 
 Rev. 3 : 15 27 
 
 Rev. 3 : 16 232 
 
 Rev. 4:9 308 
 
 Rev. 4 : 11 376 
 
 Rev. .5:5 371 
 
 Rev. 5:7 88 
 
 Rev. 7:3 164, 331 
 
 Rev. 7 : 14 80 
 
 Rev. 7 : 16 487 
 
 
 
 
 
 SECTION 
 
 Rev. 8:1 316 
 
 Rev. 8:5 . 
 
 
 
 
 80 
 
 Rev. 9:4. 
 
 
 
 
 212, 472 
 
 Rev. 9:5. 
 
 
 
 
 212, 312 
 
 Rev. 9:6 . 
 
 
 
 
 60 
 
 Rev. 9:10 
 
 
 
 
 . 378 
 
 Rev. 9 : 20 
 
 
 
 
 . 218 
 
 Rev. 11 : 7 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 303 
 
 Rev. 11 : 17 
 
 
 
 
 54 
 
 Rev. 12 : 2 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 389 
 
 Rev. 12 : 4 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 306 
 
 Rev. 13 : 12 
 
 
 
 
 205, 210 
 
 Rev. 13 : 13 
 
 
 
 
 210, 222 
 
 Rev. 13 : 16 
 
 
 
 
 . '205 
 
 Rev. 14 : 13 
 
 
 
 
 124, 218 
 
 Rev. 15 : 4 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 172 
 
 Rev. 16 : 8 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 331 
 
 Rev. 16 : 9 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 371 
 
 Rev. 17 : 12 
 
 
 
 
 52 
 
 Rev. 17 : 17 
 
 
 
 
 332 
 
 Rev. 19 : 3 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 80 
 
 Rev. 19 : 13 
 
 
 
 
 75 
 
 Rev. 20 : 3 . 
 
 
 
 
 . 331 
 
 Rev. 20 : 16 
 
 
 
 
 . 242 
 
 Rev. 21 : 16 
 
 
 
 
 . 293 
 
 Rev. 21 : 23 
 
 
 
 . 216 
 
 Rev. 22 : 14 
 
 
 
 
 . 218 
 
 II. Old Testament. 
 
 Gen. 2:19 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 315 
 
 Gen. 43 : 5 . . . . 
 
 ... 139 
 
 Gen. 3:1. 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 167 
 
 Gen. 43 : 6 . . . . 
 
 ... 122 
 
 Gen. 3:22 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 398 
 
 Gen. 43 : 11 ... 
 
 ... 227 
 
 Gen. 4:14 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 256 
 
 Gen. 44 : 15 . . . 
 
 ... 69 
 
 Gen. 4:15 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 148 
 
 Gen. 44 : 26 . . . 
 
 . 256 
 
 Gen. 10 : 19 
 Gen. 16 : 3 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 417 
 . 400 
 
 Deut. 8:3. . . . 
 
 ... 68 
 
 Gen. 19 : 16 
 Gen. 19 : 21 
 
 
 
 
 
 109, 416 
 . 398 
 
 Judg. 11 : 9 . . . . 
 
 . . . 252 
 
 Gen. 20 : 7 . 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 . 256 
 
 1 Sam. 2 : 13, 14 . 
 
 . . . 315 
 
 Gen. 34 : 15 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 415 
 
 1 Sam. 2 : 24 . . . 
 
 ... 400 
 
 Gen. 34 : 17 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 398 
 
 1 Sam. 12 : 19 . . . 
 
 . . . 141 
 
 Gen. 34 : 19 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 401 
 
 1 Sam. 12 : 23 . . . 
 
 . . 376, 404 
 
 Gen. 34 : 22 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 398 
 
 1 Sam. 22 : 13 . . . 
 
 . . . 376 
 
INDEX OF PASSAGES EEFEEEED TO. 
 
 215 
 
 SECTION 
 
 Ps. 78 : 18, Heb. (lxx. 77 : 18) 376 
 Ps. 101 : 15, LXX. (J9e6.102 : 16) , 55 
 
 Eccl. 4 : 13, 17 
 
 Isa. 6 : 14 . 
 Isa. 6:9 . 
 Isa. 42 : 1 . 
 
 404 
 
 398 
 
 167 
 
 65 
 
 Jer. 2 : 19 . 
 
 Dan. 2 : 26, 27 
 
 Dan. 3 : 13 . 
 
 Dan. 3 : 24 . 
 
 Dan. 3 : 26, 27 
 
 Mai. 2:17 . 
 
 8SGTI0N 
 
 55 
 
 145 
 145 
 145 
 146 
 
 55 
 
 III. Apocrypha, Pseudepigrapha, Etc. 
 
 1 Esdr. 4 : 
 
 1 MacG. 
 1 Mace. 
 1 Mace. 
 1 Mace. 12 : 22 
 
 3,27 
 
 15 . 
 ;13 . 
 I 10 . 
 
 Ps. Sol. 1:1 . 
 Ps. Sol. 1:3. 
 Ps. Sol. 2 : 28 . 
 
 . . 52 
 
 . . 404 
 
 . . 47 
 
 . . 177 
 
 . . 122 
 
 , . 415 
 
 , . 415 
 , 375, 401, 406 
 
 Ps. Sol. 2 : 29 . . 
 Ps. Sol. 2 : 39, 40 . 
 
 Ev. Pet. 23 . . . 
 Ev. Pet. 31 . . . 
 
 Mart. Polye. 8 : 2, 3 
 Mart. Polye. 10 : 1 . 
 
 Jos. Ant. 10. 4. 2 . . 
 
 . 401 
 . 375 
 
 20, 88 
 88 
 
 37 f.n. 
 . 217 
 
 . 461